�

�
0
(1)(.)
z�
z Of:E
0 t=;(l)
-
<(<(
(J(I)
- 2
�
r:
Zw
::)0
�<(
z :i�
LLJ
-
.,. m
...J
a:: <(
..Jz
0 <(�
z(l)
0�
-
m
0::
\..,; v
j '**"
"'· .-- -·
 \
(

ICS
ORIENTATION

Prepared by

Engineering Branch
( Plans a Opera tions Division
US Ar my Regional Communications Group
Viet Nom
APO 9 6243

I st Edition: September, 1967

• 2nd Edition: April, 1968
3rd Edition: September, 1970

{
•
 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

( HQ, USASTRATCOM REGIONAL COMMUNICATIONS GROUP

APO SAN FRANCISCO 96243
(VIETNAM)

IN IIIIE,.LY ftEF.R TO

SCCPV -IW-PO-EB

SUBJECT: Integrated Communications System ( ICS ) Orientation Na::mal

( Third Edition )

..
All Concerned

1. The Integrated Conununications System (ICS) Orientation Hanual is

designed to introduce you to the operation of the IG3, its history,
and the highly sophisticated equ ipment used for communications within
the Republic of Vietnrum.

2. This updated edition of the ICS manual provides the most accurate
and current information available.

Colonel, SigC
Commanding

(
III
 Note From The Editor Of The Third Edition

f
This edition of the Integrated Corrrnunications System Orientation
Manual reflects changes in operations, procedures and organization
that have occurred in the ICS since the second edition was published
in April 1968. It also incorporates many corrections and additions
to the text rr�terial of the previous edition.

The editor expresses his appreciation to J.'l.t.J H. H .• Akagi, Chief,

ICS Operations Branch and 1LT Ross J. Stark, Chief, Engineering
Branch, who provided valuable suggestions for the updating of the
material as well as proof-read large portions of the manuscript ..
Important contributions to the revision of text material were also
made by Specialist Five Robert DePaola and Specialist Five Sheldon
Daitch of the Regional Communications Group Training Branch.

Numerous consultations with Dean A. Hathis, B. B. "i.ico and D. B.

Shannon of Page Co�nunications Engineers were highly beneficial in
r esolving various questions pertaining to engineering changes or
modifications of res equipment.

,;1{�· ft��-
September 1970 }till.. NIKOLAI TSGHUH.SIN
( GS-12, DAC

�-
v
 TABlE OF CONI'ENTS

(
I. COMMUNICATiONS IN VJETNAM
A. Introduction
1. \vha. t is ICS I-1
2. General Background I-1
3. Southeast Asia Hainlim Communications I-1
B. History of Initial Vietnam Communications I-2
1. nBACKPORCH11 and ttWEI'WASH" I-2
2. AN/}-IRC-98 System I-2
3. LRC-3 Sys tern_ I-3
4. Status in 1965 196'6 - I-3
5. Operating Agencies I-3
6. SF�w'BS I-4
c. Development of Present Communication S ystem in SEA
1. 439 L Cable I-4
2. Area I ICS I-4
a. Phase I, ICS I-4
b. Phase II, ICS I-5
c. Phase III, ICS I-5
D. Satellite Conmunications I-6
E. Sllmllll r y I-6

II. CONTROL AND OPERATING AGBNCIES

A. Major Organizations of Interest Il-l
1. 1st Signal Brigade (USASTRATCOH) Il-l
( 2. US Anny Regional Communications Group (Viet-
nam) Il-l
3. 2nd Signal Group Il-l
4. 12th Signal Group Il-l
5. 21st Signal Group II-2
6. 29th Signal Group II-2
7. l60th Signal Group II-2
8. 1964th Communications Group (.n.ir Force) II-2
9. Defense Qommunications Agenc y-Southeast Asia
Hainland (DCA-sAM) II- 2
B. Staff Agencies and Other Control Elements II-2
1. HACV J-6 II-2
2. USARV Assistant Chief of Staff for Com-
munications-Electronics ll-3
3. ACOC-Anny Conunulll.cations Ope ration l-enter II-J
4. Brigade Operations Directorate II-3
5. Communications Systems Engineering and
Hanagement Agency (cmtA) II-3
6. Southeast Asia Telephone Management Agency
(SEA-THA) II-3
7. DCA-SAH Detachments 11-4
C. Contractors
1. Page Co:mmunica tions Engineer$ Inc. II-4

(
VII
 2. Kentron of Hawaii, Limited
D. Control of the ICS
E. Area Communications Commander �l
(1st Signal Brigade Reg 10-10) II-5
F. Contractor Relations

III. CIRCUIT l�QUEST PH.OCEDUl\ES

A. Conununi cations �stems III-1
B. Hequest Procedures III-I
c. Teleconununications Service Request Fonmt III-2
D. Processing of DCS C ircuit Requests III-2

IV. Equipmmt - General

A. Hadio IV-1
1. Tropospheric Scatter IV-1
2. Diversity IV-3
3. Tropo Site Configuration IV-5
4. LOS Site Configuration IV-7
s. Antennas IV-8
lB. Voice Frequenc y Multiplex Terminal IV-25
1. Frequency Division Multiplexing IV-25
2. Pilots IV-26
3. Carrier Signals IV-26
4. Alarm Pilots IV-27
s. Thru-Grouping IV-27
c. Order Wires
1.
2.
General
ICS Application
)
D. Voice Frequency Carrier Telegraph Systems
(VFCT) IV-41
1. General IV-41
2. Operating Power Levels IV-42
E. Patch Panels IV-45
F. Distribution Frames IV-49
G. Complete Terminal IV-51

v. Technical Control

A. Genera l V-1
B. Technical Control Functions V-1
1. Supervision of Transmission Quality V-1
2. Substit uti ng Equipmmt V-2
3. Coordinating Haintenance V-2
4. Accomplishing On-Gall Patches V-2
s. Telegraph and A u�o Channel Trouble
Isol ation V-2
6. Circuit R outing V-3
7. Circuit Activations V-3

:.
·,\:;�

Vtll
 c. Concept of Technic al Control
••H-soo•• V-3
D. Outline S>f Trouble Shooting and Control
( Restoration Responsibilities of a· Controller V-7
VI. Circuit Conditioning
A. \Vhat is it? VI-1
n. Why? VI-1
c. Conditioning Equipment VI-2
1. Attenuators VI-2
2. Amplifier VI-2
3. Single Frequency Signalling Unit VI-2
4. Hingdown Converter VI-2
s. 4-wire Terminating Set-Hybrid VI-2
6. 4-way, 4-wire Bridge VI-3
7. E&M Signal-Lead Extension Units (DXl and
DX2) VI-3
a. Isolation Relays VI-3
9. Hegenerative Repeaters VI-4
10. Delay Equalizers VI -4
u. Pulse-Link Repeaters VI-4
12. T hru-Group Filters VI-4
13. Echo Suppressors VI-6
14. Limiters VI-S
D. Types of Circuits VI-S
1. Conunon Characteristics VI-S
2. Standard Circuit VI-6
3. res signalling VI-6
4. The nmM" Signalling Sys tern VI-6
s. 2 Wire Ringdown Circuit VI-8
( 6. Operator Direct Dial Circuit VI-8
7. �� Lead Extension VI-8
8. Multipoint Voice Circuits8 VI-9
9. Signalling Frequency Interface VI-9
10. 4�ire Subscriber VI-9

VII. ICS EQUIPMI<'lfl'

A. Introduction VII-1
B. Radio Equipment VII-S
1. nEL 2600 VII-S
a. Exciter VII-S
b. Power Amplifier VII-6
c. Receiver VII-8
d. Improper Operation of Combiners VII-10
e. Complete Terminal VII-12
2. AN/FRC-109 VII-21
3. AN,hmc-ss VII-25
a. Radio Freq uency Equipment
•

VII-25
b. Multiplex Equipment Vll-26
c. Antenna Equi � nt
�ff:�g
d. Control and ncillary Equipment

\
IX
 e • Equipment Ala nns VII-27
f. Power Equipnent Vll-27
4. Hadio Set AN/}1RC 98 (AN/FRC-39)
5. 11\C-3
VII-29
VII-31
�l
c. Voice Frequency Hultiplex Equipm:mt VII-32
1. AN/FCC-17 VII-32
a. General VII-32
b. Specification s VII-32
c. Hodulation Plans Vll-33
d. Equipment Config uration VII-34
e. Failure Alarm �stem VII-35
f. Test Facilities
2. AN/FCC-18 VII-43
3. ICS System Synchronization VII-48
D. Teletype H u l tiplex Equipm ent VII-51
1. A N/FCC-19, -25 Telegraph Terminals VII-.51
2. Telegraph Terminal AN/FGC-60 (V)
E. ICS Conditioning Equipment VII-58
1. Voice Frequency Amplifier VII -58
2. VF Attenuators VII-59
3. Single Frequency Signalling Units Vll -60
4. 20 Hz Ringdown Converters VII-61
s. 4-\/ire Terminating tJnit VII-61
6. Isolation l�lay Assembly VII-62
7. 4-�vay, 4-Wire Bridge VII-62
a. Limiters VII-62
F. Patch Panel s VII-70
1. Group Patch Panel VII-70
2. Audio Patch Panel VII-70 )
a. VF Patch Bay \TII -70
b. Circuit Patch Day VII-70
c. Primary Patch Uay VII-71
3. DC Patch Panels VII-71
G. Combined Distribution Frame VII-88
H. Order Wire .:)ystem s VII-88
1. Local Order W ire VII-88
2. Circuit Restoration Order Wires VII-89
3. Express Voice Order Wires VII-89
4, Express Digital Order \vires VII-90
s. Routing of Order Wires VII-90
I. Remote Alarm System VII-93
1. Major Alann VII -94
2. Minor Alann VII-9 4
3. Path Alann VII-94
4. Sl.DIIM ry Information VII-94
s. Detail Infonm. tion VII-94
6. Automatic Perfornance an d Quality
Monitori ng VII-94
7. Alann Receiving Sites VII-96

..:.
·'s,.. l

X
 J. Test Equipment VIr-101
K. res Power Systems VII-102
(
1. DC Equipment VII-102
2. AC Equipment VI 1•102
3. Split-Bus Operation VII-102

VIU.. TAC TICAL EQUIPt-R::NT

A. AN/GRC-50, Radio Set VIII-2
B. AN/TRC-24, Radio Set VIII-3
C. AN/TRG-29, Radio Set VIII-3
D. AN /T CC -3, Telephone Carrier Terminal VIII-4
E. AN/TCC-7, Telephone Carrier Terminal VIII-4
.. F. AN/TCC-13, Multiplexer Set VIII-n
G. AN/TCC-4, AN/TCC-20 Telegraph Terminal V�II -7
1. General Information VIII-7
2. Technical Characteristics VIII-7
3. Equipment Arrangements VI II-8
H. TH-5/TG, Telegraph Terminal VIII-9
I • TA-182, Converter, Telegraph-Telephone VIII-9
J. TA-182, ( res Modified) VI II-10
K. AN/MSQ-73, Communication Technical Control
Center VIII-10
L. SB-611/MRC, Communication Patching Panel VI II-12
M. S B-675/MSC, Communication Patching Panel VIII-12
N. AN/TRC-66 Radio Set VIII-13
Oo AN/TRC-66A Radio Set VIII-13

( Po AN/TRC-90, Radio Terminal Set

1. General
VIII-13
VIII-13
2. Technical Characteristics VIII-14
Q. AN/TRC-90A, Radio Terminal Set VIII-15
1. General VIII-15
2o Technical Characteristics VIII-16
R. AN/TRC-90B, Radio Terminal Set VIII-16
S. AN/TRC-97/97A VIII-17
lo General VIII-17
2. System Characteristics VIII-17
3. Multj.plexers VIII-18
T. AN/TRC-129, Radio Terminal Set VIII-2.!L
1. Functional Description VIII-2a_
--- ·-·· �-·--

2. Technical Characteristics VIII-20

3. Multiplexing System VIII-21
U. AN/TRC-132, Radio Terminal Set VI II-21
v. Summary of Interface Characteristics AN/TRC-90,
,
-90A, -90A, -90B ' -129 ' -132
' VIII-22
W. Pulse Code Modulation Equipment VIII-24
1. PCM Theory VIII-24
2. Purpose and Use of PCM Equipment VIII-24
3. Technical Characteristics of PCM Equipment VIII-2fi

{
XI
 IX. INTERFACE PROBLEHS
A. Levels Interface with Transportab le EQuipment IX-2
B. Incompatibl e Signalling Frequencies and Levels
Freque n cie s
IX-4
IX-4
*l
1.
2. Levels n:-4
c. The Problem of ''Too Ha.ny Grounds'• IX-7
D. Fixed Plant - - Tactical VFCT Interface IX-10
E. Idle Line Termin ation IX-13
F. ICS Interface to AN/TCC-13 TX-1...,
G. A Typical Sign all ing Interface Problem TX-1q

x. DC CIRCUITS A!.m PATCH P A.NEIS

A. ICS Voice Frequency Carrier Tele�aph (VFCT)
Terminals X-1
B. Types of Circuits V:-1
c. ICS DC 'Patch Panels X -2
D. ICS Through-Station Connection X-3
E. Isol ation Relays X-3
F. ICS Multipoint Circuit X-4
G. Multiple Drops X-5

XI. CIRCUIT ACT ION XI-1

XII. SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDtm..ES, REPORTS, A.ND F..ECORDS.

A. Cont rol Procedur es XII-1
1., DCA Procedures XII-1
2. Regional Communications Group Procedures XII-2
B. Reports XIT-3
1. DCA Reports XII-'3 " )
2. Regional Communication Group Reports XII-4
c. Records XII-5
1. DCA Records XII-5
2. Regional Communications Group Records XII-5

XIII.SECURE VOICE SYSTEMS

A. History XIII-1
B. Theory of Secure Voice·Transmission XITT-1
c. Secure Voice Systems in Vietnam XIII-2

XIV. DATA. SYSTEMS IN VIEl'NAM

A. Automatic Il[""'gttal N etwork ( AlJTODIN) XIV-2

x.v. 439L CABlE SYSTEM XV-1

..
XVI . SATELLITE C(}1MUNICATIONS XVI-1

XVII. ICS QUALITY AS.cmRANCE A.ND OPERATIOfiTAL EVALUATION

A. General �TIT-1
B. Refer ences XV!I-1

;�)
XII

l
 c. Procedures �JII - 1
1. Checklist XVII-�
( XVIII . NISCELLANEOUS TOPICS
A. T elephone Signalling �JIII-1
1. General �JIII-1
2. Attention netting Signals 'l0TIJI-1
3. Selecting Signals XiJIII-5
4. Supervisory Signals :x':TIII-7
5. Develoument of Long Distance Sipnallin� :'\ITIII-S
6. Present Day Long Dis tance �ignalling XtJIII-10
B. Signalling Over 'I'eleuhone Trunks XVJII-16
Signalling Funct ions �TIJJ-16
Ringdo>m Trunks A>TJ:II-16
•
Address Signalling x:rr:rr-16
Loop Signalling xvru -1'7
E&H Signalling XVIII-1P
AC Signalling XVTIT-19
Signalling �rer Garrier Channels rTTII-19
c. DB and other Logarithmic Units XIT'!II-21
Powers of Ten XVTTI-21
Logarithms XVTJI-21
Decibels X\TJII-21
dBm XVIII-21
Level Point XVIII-?2
dBmO XVIII-22
D. T elegraph Transmission Over VF Hultiplex
Systems XVIJI-23
( Amplitude Uodulation XVIII-23
Frequency Modulation XVJII-23
Bandwidth XiJJJI-24
Telegraph Loops XVIJT-21�
Neutral Loops Xirt:ri-24
Balanced Loops XVIII-24
Polar Loops X'TIIJ-25
Break Feature XVIII-26
Hub Operation XVIII-26
Channel Loading XVIII-26
E. Loading XVIII-2�
1. Limiting XVIII- �
2. Intermodulation Distortion XVIII- 2�
3. Speech Loading X:VIII-29
4. Telegraph and Data Loading XiTIII-29

XIX. REFJilmNCE MATERIAL

A. Symbols Used on SEA�f.BS Trunk Diagrams XIX-2
B. DCA Designation Codes XIX-3
c. DCA 3--Letter Geographical Designation
Codes XIX-10

(
XIII
 D. DCA User Terminal and Enroute Facility
Codes XI!-1.3 ''
E. ICS Nt11rerical Site Designations XIX-19 l
F. Comparison of V'reT Channel Frequencies XIX-20
G. Glossary XIX-21

XX. INDEX XX-1

'!.

. )•
,�I

nv
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATICJNS

(
FIGUHE CHAPTEH I

1 LRC-3 System to Thailand

2 439-L Cable
3 Phase 1 ICS
4 Phase 2 ICS
5 Phase 3 ICS
6 Thru Phase 3 ICS 439-L
7 Status as of April 1968
8 ICS VFCT Systems
•
9 S atellite Communications
10 Different Communications Systems in Op erations in Vietnam
11 CUrrent Status of ICS
CHAI'TER II

1 Major Headquarters
2 1st Signal Brigade
3 Regional Communications Group ( Vietna m )
4 Corps Tactical Zones
5 l964th Communications Group
6 Defense COJml.unica tions Agency-Southeast Asia Hain land

CHAPTER IV

( A-1
A-2
Communication Hodes
What is T ropo
A-3 His tory of T ropo
A-4 Use of Combiners
A-5 Types of Combiners
"-
A-6 Variable Gain ombiners
A-7 Equal �&in/Optimal Switching Gombiner
A-8 Diversi� Reception
A-9 Typical Tropo Station Configuration ( Quad-Diversity )
A-10 Use of Antenna Diplexer
A-ll Typical Filter System for a Tropospheric .Scatter Circ.uit
A-12 RF Preselector
A-13 Typical Receiver - Transmitter Tropospheric
Scatter Terminal with Dual-Diversity Reception
A-14 Basic LOS �licrowave Hadio Terminal

(
XV
A-115 Frequency-Diversity Line-or-sight System
A-16 Tropo Scatter Antennas
A-17 Sixty Foot Parabolic Antenna System )
'''

A-18 Thirty Foot Parabolic Antenna System

A-19 Twenty-Eight Foot Parabolic Antenn• System
A-20 Air-Inflatable Antenna System
B-1 Discrete Tone Modulation
B-2 Continuous Band Modulation
B-3 Channel Tra{lslation and Assembly of 12 channels to
form Basic Group 60-108 kHz
B-4 Channel Translation EquiJment Block Diagram Showing the
Assembly of Twelve Audio Channel into a Basic Group of
60-108 kHz
B-5 Frequency Allocation Showing a Basic Group, th e Group
Carrier and the Frequency Spectrum Occupied by a Basic
..
Supergroup
B-6 Group Translating Equipment-Block Diagram Showing the
Assembly of Five Basic Groups in the Range 60-108 kHz
into a Basic Supergroup of 312-552 kHz
B-7 Frequency Allocation Showing the Modulation Scheme and
Frequency Spectrum for a 16 Supergroup Subsystem
B-8 Modulation Plan
B-9 Frequency Division Multiplex Terminal
B-10 Simple Communications System
B-11 Example Communications System
B-12 Use of Thru Group Filter
B-13 Through-Group Equipnent
C-1 Supervisory Channel
E-1 Elements of Frequency-5hift Carrier Telephone System )
E-2 Typical DC and Audio Jack Connections
F-1 Basic Equipment Sequence
F-2 Basic Patch Panels
F-3 VF-Jack Assembly
F-4 Patch Panel Sequence
G-1 Section of Floor-Type Distributing Frame
H-1 Complete Terminal

CHAPTER V

1 Technical Control Functional Flow Diagram

CHAPTER VI

1 Adjustable Attenuators
2 Simplified SF Unit
3 Signal Converters - E&M to DC and E&M to 20 cps,
Typical Arrangement
4 Hybrid
5 Four Wire Terminating Set
6 Improper Multipointing

,
,,

XVI
 7 "Solder-Drop Bridge" used in Multipoint Circuit
8 4�ay1 4�ire Bridge, Functional Diagram
( 9 E&M Signal-Lead �ension Circuits, Typical Arrangements
10 DC Isolation Relay
11 Pulse-Link Repeater, Typical A rrangement
12 Basic E&M Signalling
13 20 Hz Ringdown Signalling
14 Dial-To-Dial Trunk Signalling W1 Lead Operation
15 E&M Lead Extension Unit DX-11 DX-2
16 Multipoint Voice Circuit
17 Signalling Frequency Interface
18 Four�ire Subscriber

.. CHAPTER VII

A-1 Typical Electronic Equipment Building

A-2 Typical Technical Control Room
A-3 Typical Radio Multiplex Room
B-1 2600 Series Exciter, Simplified Block Diagram
B-2 Block Diagram of Typical Exciter
B-3 2600 Series Exciters
B-4 2600 Series Receivers, Simplified Block Diagram
B-5 Typical Quadruple Diversity Receiver
B-6 FM Feedback Threshold Extension
B-7 Connection of Combiners and Baseband Amplifiers
B-8 REL 2600 Radio Quad Diversity
B-9 1.,5 Watt Microwave (5925 to 12,000 me) Diversity Radio

( B-10
Set AN/FRC-109 (V)
Typical Message Diversity Repeater Block Diagram
B-11 Radio Set AN/MRC-85 Basic System Block Diagram
B-12 Radio Set AN/.MRC-98 Facility Siting Plan
C-1 AN/FCC-17 Family of Multiplexer Sets (600 Channel System),
Detailed Block Diagram
C-2 Frequency Allocations and Modulation Plan for the
AN/FCC-17 Family of Multiplexers
C-3 AN/FCC-17 (1201 180, 240 Channels)
C-4 AN/FCC-17, Special Configurations
C-5 AN/FCC-17, Multiplexer Set, Rack Elevations
C-6 Failure Alarm System, Over All Block Diagram
C-7 600 Channel, Solid State, VF Multiplex (FDM),
Set AN/FGC-18, 120 Channel Configuration with Signalling
C-8 Multiplexer AN/FCC-18 (V) (600 Channel Configuration),
Block Diagram
C-9 AN/FCC-18 (V), Frequency Allocation and Modulation Plan
.. C-10 ICS System Synchronization, 96kHz Pilot Routing Plan
C-11 96 kHz Pilot Appearances

r,
D-1 16 Channel, Full Duplex Telegraph Terminal AN/FCC-1 9
D-2 Equipnent Layout of Telegraph Teminal AN/FCC-19 and A FCC-25
D-3 SiBplified Block Diagram Send and Receive Channels, AN FCC-19,
-25.
E-1 VF Attenuator

(,
XVII
11-2
E-3
Application or Collins SF Unit
4�ire Terminating Unit
,c,
E-4 "I CS STANDARD" 4-Wire Tenn Set
E-5 Lenkurt 4�ire Tenninating Set, Strapping
E-6 4 Way - 4 Wire Bridge Schematic 14DB Net Loss
E -7 Isolation or Varistor
F-1 Location or Group Patch Bay
F-2 Group Patch Bay, Jack Assemblies
F-3 Typical VF Circuit Showing Location or VF, Circuit,
and Primary Jacks
F-4 4-Wire VF Patch Bay
F-5 VF Jack Module Assembly
F-6 VF Jack Wiring Schematic
F-7 4-Wire VF Patch Jack Arrangement ..
F-S Layout of VF Jacks (Two Circuits)
F-9 Circuit Patch Bay
F-10 Circuit Jack Module Assemb�
F-ll Circuit Jack Wiring Schematic
F-12 Circuit Patch Bay Jack Arrangement
F-13 Layout of Circuit Jacks (One Circuit)
F-14 2-Wire Primary Voice Frequency Patch Bay
F-15 Primary Jack Module Assembly
F-16 Primary Jack Wiring Schematic
F-17 DC Patch Bay
F-18 Switch, Laap, and Jack Module Assemb�
F-19 DC Jacks for One Circuit (Send and Receive)
H-1 Routing of Major Technical Control Express Order Wire
H-2
I-1
Area Express Order Wire Systems
Fault Indicators
)
I-2 1072 Terminal Facilities Bay
I-3 Performance Monitors
K-1 Split-Bus Operation

CHAPTER VIII

1 Modulation Plan, AN/TCC-7

2 AN/MSQ-73, Technical Control Van, Floor Plan
3 DC Operation, Block Diagram
4 DC Patching and Cross-connect Arrangements
5 Functional Diagram SB-6ll/MRC
6 Functional Diagram SB-675/MSC
7 AN/TRC-90 Shelter, Left Wall Installation
B AN/TRC-90 Shelter, Right Wall Installation
9 AN/TRC-90 Modulation Plan
10 The PCM Process ..
CHAPTER IX

A-1 Transportable Termination

B-1 Power Level at Input to SF Unit; Standard Receive Level
or +7 dbm..

J.
"

XVIII
 B-2 Power Level at Input to SF Unit; Modified Receive Level
of 0 dtmo
( B-3 Comparison of 2600 and 1600 Hz Signalling Circuits
E-1 Circuit Condition: With Terminal Call Established
E- 2 Circuit Condition: Idle (No Cord at SWBD)
E-3 Trunk Equipped with TA 266/TTC Relay Equipment Circuit
Condition: Idle
E-4 Idle Line Termination Kit Details
F-1 I C S 1-AN/TCC-13 Signalling In terface
G-1 20Hz Bus on Back of Ringdown Converter Hountings

CHAPTER X

1 I CS VFCT Channel Connected (Full-Duplex)

2 Full-Duplex Circuit
3 Half-Duplex Circuit
Multipoint Circuit
'

5 Simplified !CS DC Receive Jacks, (Full-Duplex Connection)

/
0 Simplified ICS DC Send Jacks, (Full-Duplex Connection)
7 Through-station Connection
8 lCS Through-station Connection
9 Basic Isolation Relay
10 Fixed Plant and Tactical VFCT Interface
11 Subscriber Providing Battery
12 Half-Duplex Connection to ICS VFCT Terminal.
13 Low Subscriber Curr ent
14 Solution to Low Subscriber Current
15 Hub Multipoint, Network Configuration
( 16 Hub Station Connections
17 Half-Duplex Multipoint, Network Configur ation
18 Half-Duplex Multipoint Station, Equipment Connection.
19 Half-Duplex Circuit, Multiple Drop, Comm Loop
20 Half-Duplex Circuit, Multiple Drop, Seperate Loops

CHAPTER llii

1 Secure Voice System

CHAPTER IV

1 AUTODIN OVERSEAS-PACIFIC Network

2

CHAPTER XVI

1 Ba Queo Satellite Terminal

2 Nha Trang Satellite Terminal

CHA.PTER XVIII

1 Simplified Telephone Circuit

2 Local Battery Circuit
(
nx
 3 Simplified Cammon B attery Circuit
4 Use of Relays in Camm on Battery Circuit c
5 Conducting Elements of a Switchboard Plug l
6 Battery Instal lation
7A Attention Getting Signalling
7B Attention Getting Signalling
8 Semi-selectivity
9 Full-selectivity
10 Metallic Ringing
ll Dial Circuit
12 Dial Pulse Train •

13 Simplex Circuit
14 Composite Signalling
15 E-M Lead
16 Composit e Signal Circuit
17 Single-Frequency Signalling
18 Standard Conditions
19 I C8 Conditions
20 SF Units Back-To-Back
21 E� Extension Using Repeat Coil
22 E-M Extension Using Hybrid
23 Multi-Frequency Signalling

�J
XI
 I. COlt;HUNIC..\TIONS IN VIETNAM

(
Cownlli>ications in the Republic of Vietnam (RVN) encompasses everything
from the AN/FRC-6 to the REL-2600. It is little wonder that the newly
arrived communicator finds himself sw�nped by a Virtual flood of new terms
and unfamiliar items of equipment. In this chapter we intend to discuss
the detailed development of the transportable and fixed-station p orti on
of Vietnam communications. This discussion will include at least a general
introduction to t he major items of eq1upment found in this portion of the
comrmrnications system. Of prime interest in this general survey of Vietnam
communications will be the res.

A. IN'l'RODUCTION:

1. What is the ICS?

The ICS is the Integrated Cownunications System installed in Sout heast

Asia in support of Free i.oJ rld l·�ili tary Allied Forces. It provides multi­
chann e l voice, teletypewriter and data communications. The res has been
especially designed for optimum performance in this region and has the
necessary flexibility to respond to co��nd and control requirements in
an ever-changing combat environment.

2. General Background:

The ICS was conceived by CINCPAC in the summer of 1964 and submitted
to the JCS in October 1964, the proposal prepared as a DCA system plan in
( December was apProved in principle by the Dep uty Secretary of Defense in
April 1965. It was developed as a Department of the Army Telecom.l'Jlunica tions
Program Objective ( TPO ) in June 1965. The ICS was finally approved by the
Deputy Secretary in A ugust 1965. Contracts were awarded in September t o
Page Communications Engine�ring, Inc. of Washington, D.C. for the Vietnam
p ortion ( Area I) and to Phileo-Ford Corporation of Philadelphia for the
Thailand porti on (Area II ) . The basic ICS is commonly referred t o as Phase
I. In January a n d February two expansions to the ICS were approved by the
Deputy Secretary of Defense. These two expansions are commonly referred to
as Phase II. Further e xpan si on referred to as Phase III was approved in
August 1966.

3. Southeast Asia l�nline Communications:

The ICS constitutes the backbone of U.S. 11ilitary C ommunications in SEA.

Its purpose is to increase the ove rall ca �ci t y and quality of the exist­
ing co:nmnmications systems by extending, upgrading and expanding the tac­
tical and trans p o rtable communications fa c ili t ies.

The ICS makes use of the most advanced techniques and equipment available
such as high quality microwave sy stems that will function in line::.of sight,

(
1-1
diffraction ar troposcatter propagation modes. An expansion capability
provides f or �1ture increases in ch�>el requirements &�d for ek�ensions
into tactical systems. The mainline and spur links of the res t o tal .�l..
''"

approximately 470,000 circDit miles.

The res is composed of a series of vrideband radio links bet1.,reen mainline

stations, with spurs to subscribers at fb:ed locations. T he trunking
c apability can be extended to tactical systems through t he termli1ating
facilities which have been installed at each station.

Diversified s1gnalling ecuipment throughout the system pennits extens5_on

of customer serv�ce regardless of the signalling method used on the sub­
scriber links. Conditioning equipment is available in the system for
interface req�irements. The arrangements for future e}�ansion and cr�ging
requirements incluc�e complete fle.x:ibility in the us e of the varioFs types
of multiplex equipment. Technical control facilities are provided for all
ICS stations. Selected stations have been equipped ,,Jith ma.ster alarm systems
and status dis�·lays to permit control and supervision of the entire nett.rork
in each area.

B. HISTORY OF INITIAL VIE:T,;AN C<l<lfi.UNICATIONS:

1. "BACKPOROH" and "14ET l.fASH11:

The initial long lines system in Vietnam consisted of several vans:mounted,

transportable troposcatter systems installed by the Air Force in 1962,
utilizing A.t.'q'/HRC-85 equipment.

These were turned over to the Army in July 1963, and operated initially )
by the 362D Signal Co. (Trope).

In December of 1964, the Wet Wash undersea cable from the Philippine
Islands was extended into �Tha Trang. At Clark, circuits from th is cable
are routed over the transpacific cable to Hawaii where access to the �S
AUTOVON system is obtained. To provide access to this cable from the
Saigon area, another AN/t-:RC-85 system >.ras installed between Phu Lam and
Nha Trang. This A.t"i/MRC-85 system, which is still operational, has b een
called the �wet Wash Tropo System".

In September 1965, another AN/HRC-85 link was added between Pleiku and
Danang. To improve propagation, the Danang terminal was later moved to
Monkey Mountain and e xtended down to Danang by an AN/TRC-29 transportable
microwave system.

This, then, is what is commonly referred to as the "Backporch" and �.Vet

Wash" systems, the backbone of Vietnam communications until augmented
by the Integrated COmmunications System (ICS) in 1967.

2. AN/MRC-98 System:

In October 1965, two (2) .ANjrmC-98 links were added between Ubon and
11onkey Nountain, and between Cam Ranh Bay and Vung Tau. The AN/XRC-98

;J
1-2
 is similar to the A.N/�RG-85 in equipnent and operation, the major
difference being that it provides on ly 60 channels of ��/FCG-17 multi­

( plex as compared to the 72 c-hannel AN;l.fRC-85.

3. LRC-3 System:

In 1965, a contract was let with Philco-Ford Corporation to establish

an LRC-3 ( 11Land Radio, Gom.munication11 l·1odel 3) microwave system between
Phu Lam and Vung Tau and an LRG-3 troposcatter system between Vung Tau
and Green Hill, Thailand. Both LP..0-3 systems have a 60 channel ca pacity;
however, the link Vung Tau to Green Hill is not being used to maximum
capacity due to poor propagation conditions. The link from Vung Tau to
Green Hill carries only 24 channels. The Phu Lam - Vung Tau link carries
the ftul 60 channels. These links were cut to traffic in November 1965.

Status in 1965 - 1966: (See Figure 1-1)

•

4.

There were many problems associated with long l ines communication as they
existed in 1965-66. Terminal locations were selected for their security
not for the best propagation conditions for the equipment utilized. !s
a result, none of the links met DCA channel standards. Second, there was
a definite vulnerability in the system at the Nha Trang site which was,
and still i s, a major entry and nodal point. Third, requirements greatly
exceeded capacity in that a critical laek of channels existed between the
!ifha. Trang - Pleiku areas and Saigon.

Final ly, existing technical control facilities were not adequate to per­
form their required mission. As a result of these deficiencies the long
lines upgrade in Vietnam was established under two separate, but related,
( contracts which will be discussed later.

5. Operating Agencies:

The original Backporeh system was installed by Page Communications Engin­

eering, Ine., under tn Air Force eon tract. It was al so initially operated
by the Air Force. Similarly the Wet !>lash cable and tropo system were in­
stalled and operated by the Air Force. The operation of these long lines
facilities was later assigned to the Army. The operating unit was the 39th
Signal Battalion, the first Army Battalion assigned to Vietnam. The 39th
was later transferred to USARV. The operational responsibility for the
long lines systems was transferred tram the.39th Signal Battalion to S!RA.TCOM
(Vietnam) on 19 August 1965. Prior to this, STRATCCM had been operating
the high frequency radio and tape relaY facility at Phu Lam . In April 1966,
when the 1st Signal Brigade was formed from STRA.TCOM (Southeast Asia) STRA.T­
COM (Vietnam) became the u.s. � Regional Communications Group (Vietnam).
Regional Communications Group operated both the long lines systems (1N/MRC-Sj1s)
and the STRATCO..J: Facilities at Phu La:m, Nha Trang, a nd Da Nang
•

The expansion of the Backporch system in September, 1965, and the installa­
tion of the ANft{RC-98's in October, 1965, was performed by the Air Force
for STRATCOM.

(
1-3
The Defense Communications Agency began operations in Vietnam at the
same time as STRATCOM, August 1965. At first, the small detachment
of 7 in Saigon was a part of DCA-SEA (Southeast Asia) with headquarters ,,
in the Philippines. Later, DCA-SAH (Southeast Asia Hainla.nd) was formed
to operate here in Vietnam and in Thailand through DCA-SA.."'1, Thai.

6. SEAWBS:

SEA\.JBS stands for the "Southeast Asia vlideband Systems". The SEA\.ffiS
consists of all communications systems in SEA that are part of the Defense
C��ications System. SEAWBS is under the operational and management
dire ction of DO!-SAH.

C. DEVELOFH:El�T OF THE PRESENT CQ.1HUNI:::ATIONS SYST:BM IN SEA: ..

As mentioned previously, there were three major contracts let by the
Army and Air Force to provide improved long lines communications in
SEA. There were the Integrated Communications System (ICS ) , Area I
(Vietnam), awarded to Page Communications Engineering Inc.; ICS Area
II (Tnailand) awarded to Philco-Ford; and project Seed-�ree (4391)
undersea cable, also awarded to Page. The ICS contracts are STRATCCN
projects ��d 4391 was under the Air Force. This discussion will cover
only the 4391 project a�d the Area I ICS effort.

1. 4391 Cable:

(Figure 1-2) The 4391 undersea cable is a 60-channel system connecting .

the major c o��unication points along the coast of Vietnam and Thailand.
The cable terminals, loc at ed near the beach, are operated by the Air Force.
)
·

They are connected to the ICS terminal at each location through a micro-
wave link installed under the ICS contract. The cablehead termina l is
operated by the Army. The only operation performed at the cable terminal
is control and patching of 12- channe l groups. The control of each individual
channel is performed in one of the ICS technical control buildings.

2. Area I ICS: The ICS effort in RVN has been divided into three
phases as follows:

a. Phase I, ICS:

(Figure 1-3) Pha se I of the ICS was intended primarily to relieve the
problem of insufficient circuits up-country by providing links from Saigon,
Pleiku, and �� Trang to a nodal point at Pr11ine in theoenter of this
triangle. The Wet Wash system remained as before; however, the Backporch
.A.N/11RC-85 system from Phu Lam (Saigon) to Nh.a Trang v.ras moved to connect •

Pleiku and Vung Tau, prov iding an alternate entry to Pleiku from the south.
The remainder of the Backporch and other systems remained in the same lo­
cations. The AN/MRC-85's were fully integrated into the IWCS, and some

,)
1-4
 of their terminal equipment was removed from the vans and installed
in the res technical control buildings. The AN/HRC-98's remained in
( place but were not terminated in res buildings. Phase I res also
proVided a link to Phu Bai, replaced the transportable microwave
sys tems (AN/TRC-29) being used in the intercity system in Saigon,
and added a high capacity microwave system from Saigon to Vung Tau.
Phase I, res> was completed with the acceptance of the Pleiku to
Vung Tau AN/MRC-85 system on 25 January 1968.

b. Phase II, res:

The additional links being added to the res during Phase II are shown
in Figure 1-4. In addition, several of the Phase I links were upgraded
to a higher capacity (increased capacity indicated by Phase I links in
•

Figure I-4 Phase II wa s completed on 29 February 1968 with the accept­

ance of the Long Binh to Vung Tau link.

The two AN/HRe-98 systems (Cam Ran h Bay to Vung Tau and Honkey Hountain
to Ubon) scheduled for replacement by fixed plant systems during Phase
II had been deactivated.

c. Phase III, ICS:

(Figure I-5). During Phase III, no major links were established.

The primary changes were the addition of numerous light capacity
systems around major nodal points and in the delta region. There
was a considerable redistribution of equinment presently installed;

( under project HARV 0·1ultiplex Assets Rearrangement Vietnam). The

final capacities of Phase III upgrades to Phase II lli1ks are indica­
ted by the Phase II links in Figure 1-5. The complete IeS-4391 program,
excluding transportable augmentation discussed previously, is shovm
in Figure I-6.

d. The long lines capability as of 1 April 1968 is as follows

(See also Figure 1-7 ):

(1) Phase I ICS is complete.

(2) The 439L cable system is complete.

(3) Phase II res is complete.

(4) Phase III Ies is complete.

•
(5) The AN;1.me-851s in the Backporch system have been fully
integrated into the res.

(6) The Wet \-lash tropo system is still installed fr om Nha

Trang to Phu Lam (Saigon).

(
1-5
 (7) The LRG-3 link to Thailand is still in operation.
� AN;MRC-98 system Vung Tau to Cam Ranh Bay was deactivated and
removed in July 1967 to permit installation of the res system on ,
the same path. The AN;lme-98 system between Monkey Hountain a nd
Ubon has been deactivated. In January 1968 it was decided to place
the Vung Tau and Phu Lam LRC-3 terminals inside the ICS buildings
at those s ites. This was completed in July 1968.

(8) In addition under Phase III TSC-82 recoverable micro­

wave terminals with supporting mux and tech controls were installed
at Dong Tam, Dong Ba Thin, Sa Dec and Di An.
(9) The first Phase III link was accepted 29 December 1967
(Vung Chua Mountain - Phu Cat). The last link was accepted on Dec 11 68 •

(Bac Lieu)
(10) The res al so includes a large number of Voice Fre­
quency Carrier Telegraph (VFCT) systems . In Figure 1-8 are shm,m
the ICS VFCT systems programmed through Phase III. In this program
both Contractor Furnished Eauipment (CFE) and Government Furnished
Equipnent (GFE) are utilized to provide the res VFOT termina ls . GFE
is either AN/FCC-19 or AN/FCC-25 equipment, whereas GF.E is normally
AN/FGC-60 equipment. The VF CT program is presently undergoing a n
active relocation program (TL�).

D. SATELLITE COMl·IDNICATIONS:

In additi on to the out-of-country channels to the Philippines and

Hawaii by the Wet Wash cable, there are also three (3) Satellite
systems presently providing high-quality voice trunks (Figure 1-9).
)
The first system to become operati onal was the AN;l,ISG-M located at
Ba Queo which is near Tan Son Nhut Air Base. This system provided
one (1) voice circuit and one (1) teletype tone pack. The At"fji1SC-44
became operational in June 1966. The yoice circuit t.ra.s used as a
common user trunk from Scdgon t o Hawaii. The system went out of ser­
vice on 31 December 1967.

During the latter part of 1966, two A.N;tsG-46 s..,tellite ground terminals
were deployed in Vietnam on an R&D basis. One was installed at Ba Queo
and the other at Nh� Trang. Each terminal originally provided five voice
channels and both were fully operatiohal on 18 July 1967. The Ba Queo
terminal wa� upgraded to twelve channel operation in December 1967 and
in January 1968 the Nha Trang terminal wa.s also upgraded to twelve channels .
Normal o pe rati on of these terminals is in the five channel mode, hO't?ever,
due to propagation cond iti on . •

In addition to the military systems, there a.re also, at present, six

circuits leased from C01-1SAT. The commercial terminals are in Thailand

,J
1-6
 and Ha'I.·Taii. The circuits are extended to Saigon throu gh the undersea
cable from Sattahip to Vung Tau. These circuits became operation�l i n
( Anril 1967. Further detailed information on satellite communications
is provided in Chapter XVI.

E. Sill•U1A.11.Y:

This has been only a orief discussion of the development of CamDlll11Ca­

tions in Vietnam. With all Phases full y completed, the ICS now pro­
vides the bulk of the long haul channels of the SEAWBS. However, the
importance of the contribution of the transportable systems to the
SEAWBS sho1ud not be overlooked. In circuits alone, the transportables
would probably e qual the res, although in circuit miles this would not
be tr ue.

The term "transportable" is used above to avoid a problem in semantics

that often arises when discussing the various systems found here in
Vietnam. The types of e�uipment referred to, AN/TCC-7, AN/TRC-29,
AN/GRC-50, etc., are usually called "tactical equipment" ho'.·Iever, in
Vietnam that description for a system carries a special co n notation.
Figure 1-10 illustrates the distinction. The basic 11ICS11 consists
of the ICS tech control building ( comnonly called 11EE11 electronic
equipment buildings). Prior to the activation of the ICS EE buildings,
there had been either locally fabricated (com..monly referred to as "old"
technical control 11 ) or mobile tech..nical controls such as the AN/HSQ-73.
These facilities are now connected to the EE buildings by cable. It is
in the old technical control that most of the SEAWBS transportable systems _

�ere terminated. }�y of the DCS transportable systems have been term­
( inated in the ICS EE buildli1gs in order to provide better technical con­
trol facilities. In the future it is envisicned that several more DCS
transportable systems will be term:i.nated in the res technical controls.

The transportable equipment freed by the activation of the res, has been
utilized to establish the Corps Area Comm System (CACS). This i s not
part of the DCS and is under the control of the 1st ,Signal Brigade. This
concent will create more corns
... k�ea technical controls '}hich v.rill not
-
be p�t of the DCS.

The final system found in Vietnam is the "tactical sys tem". This term
has been used to refer to those sy stems installed by the units in direct
support of the tactical head�uarters, i.e, Division Signal Battalions.
•
They are of interest since they often provide the connection to the s u b­
scriber for a circuit routed over the res. These systems are often term­
inated in the area technical controls.

(
1-7
The descriptions of the three tyn e s of systems as given in USA.-qv and
1st Signal Brigade publicati ons are as f ollows:
.
l
,v ,
�\
,,

1. The Tactica1 System is the command system for the divisions

and field forces. Equipment for the tactical system is p rovided by
the signal units organic t o the divisions and field f orces .

2. The C orps Area C ommuni cati ons System is a network of tactical

multi-channel systems interc onnecting base crunps in a geographical
area to provide "Local Area Service11• This system is operated and
managed by the 2 d, 12th, 21st and 16oth Signal Groups of th e 1st Sig­
nal Briga de . It provides supplementary c ommuni cat i on s support to the
tactical units primarily for operat ional ty�e traffic, but includes
administrative and l og i stica l traffic as well. It supplements the
SEAiVBS by providing extension of SEA1JBS c:i.rcui ts into local areas from
..
major SEAWBS nodal p oints .

3. SE'A:tiDS j_g the long haul, wideband co:r:mmnications system pro­

viding high quality co�munications channels throughout Vietnam. It is
o perated i n the main by the Army with scattered Air Force systems. It
consists of the ICS, 439L ca ble, t r&� sp ortabl e troposcatter and �icrowave
sys tems.

F. CURRENT STATUS OF ICS SYSTEMS1

Figure 11 shows current status of ICS as of 1 Sept 70. As a result

of reduced military requirements the stations at Dong Ha, Phu Tai
and Tai Ninh were deactivated. In addition, to impro ve the commun­ )
ications by utilizing REL-2600, the MRG-85 shots between Da Nang-OJi
Nhon and Qui··Nhon-Nha Trang were also deactivated.

..

·�··
···'
1-8
( FIG. I - I
LRC-3 SYSTEM TO THAILAND
NOVEMBER 1965

\
'"'

\
.,
.i
/
i
\.
.,
(
CLA-RK

GREEN HILL

�
•

•
•

.. 0 20 40 60 80 100
STATUTE MILES
.f 0 30 60 90 120 �
I<ILOMETERS

(
l-9
 \
''? f·
"l
\,,. (
FIG. I - 2 ''·-.
439-L CABLE l
JUNE 1967
,
··

.
. ,.,. .

.. )
(.
,
.. ,
'•'"'\
�..
)
>
c..
.,
<.
i
.i
.

,
j
\ \
:,
\
'•

i
I
i
'
·

\
.

')
-·v·.;
i
, ..

r ,
/·
..
.
.
.

\._... _.

r.... . ,..f.
....:
c..
.

. .•

�
'·
.
� . \ .. ,
f
_..-··"",\,. .
�
.

• '·· ··,,.)SAIGON��

�
• •

SATTAHI P
THAILAND
0 20 40 60 80 IQQ STATUTE MILES
.� ..
J
KILOMETERS
0 30 60 90 120 I�

1-i 0
 (

FIG. 1-3
PHASE I
ICS
1967-1968

VTlON

� •

• •

,. 0 20 40 60 90 !99
STATUTE MILES
KILOMEl£RS
60 90 120 150
0 30

(
I - 11
 MYM� 'l
�24()
F1 c. I - 4
PHASE 2
ICS
1967-1968
DNG

NGAI

48

>-

�AB 0
CRB

\J •
NEW EMB EMB
• •

•
,1 0

Q
-=-2p -
"'
40

10
eo
10
eo
120
-L STM\It'E
""i531<li.ONEl1!JIS
MILES

.)
(

I - 12
 FIG. I - 5
( PHASE 3
IC�
1967-1968

NGAI

UBON (WARIN)

\l EMB
•
• •
•
PLM
MACV-1
•
•

,. Q f! 40 1!9 89 :d&,. STATUtt MUS

IQL.Ofllf.TEIIt
0 liO 60 110 li!O 1!10

(
I - 13
 .. .
,,
.

Fig. I -6
DNG
E
THRU PHASE 3 �
ICS 0
439L

""
PHU BAI "'- ........,.

L---------: .
....:! , .,.,, ,J
(439L CABLE TERMINAL) 1
..... ... .
. .. . ... .
... ..... .....
.

?
.....···"

DNG

VUNGCHUA
. MTN

/ HON

24

� NGCHUA
MTN

)
WETWASH

;. BACK P O RCH

\8 0

CRB

VTU

TO
SATTAHIP

j
I - 14
(
FIQ. 1 - 7
STf\TIIS AS OF
1 April 1968

UBON

�
(WAR IN) NGAI

==--

LON

(
K

RANH
BASE

* PNT-VTU ll NK
DEACTIVATED

� ..
•

0 20 40 60 eo 100
STATUTE MILES
KILOMETERS
0 30 60 90 120 1:50

SA TTAH IP

(
I - 15
 Fig. I-8
ICS VFCT SYSTEM )
'

CLARK
KORAT

TO WAH TO HIK

BAOO PLA
CLARK

'�
I-16
 ( '

FIG. I - 9 .
SA TELLI TE COMMUNI CATIONS..
.
\...·, (.
)

·'·-.
l..
,

I
..���
,,
.

..
·

"•"'
..
"--

?
c•
)
\

I
/
_;
\
\
''··
\
,
.
.i
i
i
\..

( ,

"'"' 'fl"' \ \ , ...-........J

1
/
··
r··_.

c:-::�··-· ,-··-..
. , ..�I
"{
i
'·
<. •. HAWA I\
·· "\ \.. ,
......-
't.r·.-.. .t
.)
SAIGON

� .

•
�()
,...,.,..
;(,+.,..

" 0 20 40 60 80 IOQ

.11
STATUTE MILES
KILOMETERS
0 30 60 90 120 150

(
I _1 7
 'l

lEGEND!
C 439L CABLE
I I CS LINK
EE ICE� T ECHNICAL CONTROL
TR "TRANSPORTABLE" SYSTEM
/!4. A,REA SYSTEM
TAC -TACTICAL• SYSTEM

FIGURE I - I 0 D t FFERENT COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

I N 0 PERA T I 0 N I N VIE T NA M. '
· ·il

I • 18
(' FtGURE 1-11
CURRENT STATUS

"--Oft
OF I CS 1
AS OF 1sT SEPT.1970 ,:
� ........

;:;-
..
-

'""�
r ..
CHUA
IITit
•

ROll

z� IITN

( ·;
UCKI'OitCH

�··
\cRt
�·�:AU AI

�VTU

MACVI... ·-- •

(
1-19
,,]iliU_____________________________________________________IIIilllli
 II. CONTROL AND OPEF..ATING AG&�CIES

(
One of the most difficult items for �1e newcomer to grasp is the complex
relationship between the v ario us agencies involved with installing, opera­
ting, managing, and con trolling the IC S . This section will briefly cover
each agency and illustrate the more important r elationships by means of charts.

A. Il.tAJOR ORGA.'t\fiZATIONS OF INTEREST:

Although is does not normally directly affect us here in Regi�nal Communica­

tions Group, it is important to understand the basic relationship between the
major headquarters involved ( Figure II-1). The mos t obvious feature is that
all organizations in Vietnam are under operational control of 1-1ACV a lthough
they may be commanded by another headquarters such as STRATCOH-PAC.

1. 1st Signal Brigade (USASTR.Il..TCOM):

The 1st Signal Brigade ( F igure II-2) is the largest communications organ­
ization in Vietnam. Responsible for planni ng, engineering, installing,
operating and maintainin g the Army porti on of the Defense Communications
System in Viet nam and ��ailand, and the Cofps Area C ommuni cations System.
Operates local communications center s, DCS tape relay cent er s , performs
maintenance on C-E equipment, and has the general mission of perfo rming
communications-electronics function s in suppor t o f US military and other
governm��tal activities in Southeast Asia.

2. US Army Regional C ommunica ti ons Group ( Vietnam ) :

( Subordina te command of 1st Signal B rig ade, operates th e fixed-pl��t po rti on

of the SEAWBS in Vietnam. Operates and maintains all ICS sites in Vietnam
and one minor tape relay at �hu Lam. Responsible for operation and maintenanc e
of the Joint Overseas S�itchbo ard (JOSS) and the AUTOSEVOCG1 system in SEA
(Figure II-3). The Grou p Headquarters is located in the Phu Tho Hoa dis tri ct
of Saigon •

.3. 2nd Signal Group:

Subordinate command of 1st Signal Brigade operating pr imaril y in the

(ARVN) Military Regio n III and IV. pro v idin g the Army Area Communications
System, augmentation to the SE.fWBS, and general communications support
(Figure II-4). Th e Group Headquarters is located at Long Bing, R VN.

4. 12th Signal Group:

Subordinate command of 1st Signal Brigade, operating primarily in the

(ARVN) Military Region I providing the Corps Area communications System,
augmentation to the SEA'IJBS, and general communications support ( Fi gure II-4)
the Group Headquarters is located at Phu Bai , RilN.

(
I 1-1
 5. 21st Sig n al Group:

Subordinate command of 1st Signg_l Brigade, operating primarily in the l

( ARVN) Military Region II providing the Army Area Communications System,
augmentation to the SEAWBS, �nd general communications support (Figure II-4).
The Group Headqnarters is located at :Nna Trang, RVN'.

6. 29th Sign�l Group:

Subordinate command of the 1st Signal Brigade. Provides com:nunications

support to Hilitary Assistance Co:m:na.."ld, Thailand, including operation of ,..
the Thailand portion of the ICS (Area 2). Under the operational control
of HACTHA I; however, technical control remains with 1st Signal Brigade.
The Group Headquarters is located in Bangkok, TbAiland.

7. 160th Signal Group:

s�bordinate command of the 1st S ignal Brigade, operating primarily in the

Capital ¥dlitary District (Saigon - Long Binh Area) and providing the Corps
Area Communications System there. Responsible for operating and maintaining
communication facilities at VaCV and USARV Headquarter s, other than the ICS.
The Group Seadquarters is located at Long Binh, RVN.

8. 1964th Communications Group (Air Force):

Subordinate command of the 7th Air Force a nd is the largest Air Force
commu nications unit in Vietnam . Its Headquarters is located at Tan Son
Nhut AFB . (Fig ure II-5).
)
Responsible for telecommUnications and air traffic control services for
the Air Force and other gover�uental activities in Vietnam. Operates and
maintains Air Force dial central office 1 s (DCO 1 s), tan dem switch, and
associated outside cable plant and the 439L submarine cable system. A1so
provides a nd mainl ains the secure equipment for Air Force AU TOSEVOCOM sub­
scribers. Composed of ten (10) comsunications sqUadrons which provide the
above services in their respective area of responsibility.

9. Defense Communications Agency-Southeast Asia Mainland (DCA-SAM):

An agency of the Department of Defense. Responsive to the requirements

of CON:US MACV/CCl>iUS V.t!CTHAI, and tasked as the single system manager having
operational an d management direction of the SEAWBS. Makes circuit channel
assj�nments and engineers circuits for the ICS. Operates five (5) DCA-8�4
detachment s at major communications nodal points throughout Vietnam. The
l.fa.ster Complex is located at Tan Son Nhut AFB (Figure II-6).

B. S TAFF AGENCIES AND OTHER CONTROL ELF£1ENTS:

1. HACV J-6:

,)
I t -2
 �esponsible for staff supervision of all C-E activities in Vietnam. Re­
sponsible for validating requests for circuits on the SEAWBS and direc ting
(" the effort of DCA based on requirements from the field (Figure II-1).

2. US.!L'lV Assistant Chief of Staff for Communications-Electronics:

Fornerly the �S��V Signal Officer. Responsible for staff s upervision or

all C-E activities of units vrithin USARV. Also Commanding General, 1st
Signal Brigade.

3. ACOO-Army Commlh"lications Operation Center:

ACOO is the major infornation gathering a gency of 1st Signal Brigade. It

is located at Long Binh, 1st Signal Jrigade, and monitors reports from DQS
(Defense Co:rm::unications Systen) reporting stations. Also directs t he prep­
aration and raaintenance of circuit control and system control procedures
and practices for use by all elements of the Signal Brigade. Haintains 1st
Signal Brigade records of system/channel fill for the SEA\i3S and CACS (Corps
Area Com,nunice.tions S�'stem).

4. Brigade Operations Directorate:

Provides operatio�1al g1-1idance and staff supervision for the installation,

operation an d maintenance of all G-E systems. Also develops operational
planning for C-E activities which 'dll be initiated �d thin a 90 day time
frame. Exercises staff supervision over the AC:JC and other staff agencies
as directed.

( 5. Comr..rtunications Systems Engineering and Hanagement Agency (CSE·1A):

The ICS Branch, a branch of Special Projects Division of CSEIU, represents

the C ommanding General, 1st Signal Brigade, on all ICS matters in Vietnam
and Thatland. They are responsible for monit.oring and supervising the
execution of the ICS contracts in Southeast Asia. The Test and Evaluatton
DiYision of CSEl-1!. Provides technical a ssistance to test a,."'ld evaluation teams
prior to the goverilmental signing of the Haterial and Receiving :leport, DD
Form 250 (see Para C 2 below).

6. Southeast Asia Telephone !.fanagement Agency (SEA-TEIJ·iA):

Provides overall staff g uidance and supervision for operation and maintenance
of the Sout�1east Asia Telephone System. Coordinates directly with Telephone
Management Officers ('Tim 1 s) at each nu'llbered group headquarters of the 1st
Signal Brigade.

"'
8. DCA-SAH Detachments:

Located at major corrununication nodal points to maintain liaison Hith, and

be responsive to major commander, operating commands and user s 1vith a ssigned

(
I 1-3
geographical areas. These detachments are presently located at Da Nang,
Nha Trang, Pleiku, Long Binh and Can Tho. The detachments act as a focal
points for emergency requirements and assistance to the commands, service
components, operatin g c ommand s, and users in their area (Fi�·e II-6).
)
C. CONTRACTOR S:

1. Page Communications Engineers, Inc. :

Under supervision of i�e Plans and Operations Division. Regional CorrmJunica­

tions Group. Responsible under contract for providing technical support for
the operation and maintenance of that portion of the ICS in Vietr� and Thaila nd
which has been accepted b y the Army and placed under the comr�d of the CO,
USA Regional C�l��cations Group, a nd 29th Signal Group.

2. Kentron of Hawaii, Limited:

Under supervision of the 1964th Communications Group, 7th Air Force, which
operates the 439L cable system. ResPOnsible for the operation and maintenance
of the cable terminating equipment at Nha Trang.

D. CONTROL OF THE ICS:

The overall management of the Defense Communications System (DCS) is the

responsibility of the Defense Communication Agency (DCA ) . RCG controls the
operation of all ICS stations in Vietnam and forwards technical information
and operational directives to the sites. )
1. The specific documents involved in circuit actions (TSO and CLR)
are fully described in RCG LL TCG S&P. Because of the compley�ty of the ICS
same special control procedures have been established.

a. FO!' ICS circuits TS01 s are sent to the Engineering Branch, P8c0
Division, Regional Communications Group, ""ho are responsible for making
conditioning equipment assignments and controlling the activation, changes
and deactivations as prescribed by the TSO.

b. The primary difference between operations in the field in the

ICS and in the remainder of the SEA11BS is the restriction on local engineering
changes to a circuit. Experience has shown that changes on ICS c ircuits are
best made at a central location where they can be fUlly coordinated. (For
this reason no engineering changes will be made in the field by either the
tech control or the DCA-SAM detachment. The changes required will be made

,)
I 1-4
 by DCA-SM� Engineering and/or Engineering Branch. ReG, as appropriate ) .
This policy is defined in RCG LL TOG S&P. Exceptions to this are emer­
( gency expedited circuit actions which are also discussed in RCG LL TOG sed'.
This policy has been fully coordina ted w.i th and agreed to by DCA-SAH.

E. AREA C0:�1HUNICATIONS CQ·JYL4.NDERS (1ST SIGNJIJ.. BRIGADE HEG 10-1Ql:

The provisions of 1st Signal Brigade Reg 10-10; Area Co�nmications

Commanders, are extreBely import��t to the subordinate units of Regional
Communications Group. Most of the O?erating detachments are under the
co��d of units other than RCG, for the specific areas covered in Reg
10-10. Because of it's importance, a complete copy of this regula tion i s
reproduced o n pages II-14 through II-17.

F. CONTH.AeTOR RELATIONS:

The contractor may provide for various aspects of the operation and main­
tenance of the res. Hm.rever, regardless of the provisions of the contract,
the uJtiF�te resPonsibility for communications is a command responsibility.
The execution of government contracts is s upervised by the Contracting
Officer through the Contracting Officer's Representative (COR)
The (CQR �s the point of contact between the u. S. Army and the contractor.
In this capacity, the tOOR �ust oversee the contractor to insure that he
fulfills the provisions of the contract. The {COR) also recommends approval
or disapproval on any proposed modifications that require action by a higher
headquarters. Specific responsibilit ies of the site comraander relating to
contractor person�el include the follm.ring ( for a complete listing see 1st
Sig Bde Reg 105-4; Hilitary/Contractor Relationships and Responsiblities):
(
1. Honitor contractor actions to insure that the contractor is per­
forming the functions required by the contract.

2. Bring to the attention of the contractor site supervisor, in writing,

any apparent discrepancies in contractor performance.

3. Report all items of difference between himself and the contractor

site supervisor through command charu�els.

The site ore is the military's lie.ison idth the contractor on site. As
such, he is to see that the contractor does what the contract calls for and
that the government receives full value. Belm.r are a few useful facts that
the site ore s hould know in his relationship with the contractor:

1. Contractor employees are not members of the military and do not

come under full military authority.

2. The contractor has a supervisor at each site who is responsible

for the contractor employees at the site. The site OIC should deal d irect­
ly with the site su pervisor on all technical and administrative problems.

(
I 1-5
 3. Good relationship s between the military and the contractor will
make opex·ating and maintai ning of the ICS much easier for all concerned.
'l

,4)
11-6
 ""'

�· �. ·�

DCA MA.CV STRATCOM-PAC

X X

X
I

X 1 AF USARV

......
I I
......

L o---,
-1 X
E 0

�
EiliJ
1964 1sT
OCA•8AM I
COMM QP SIG BDE

· - ·- · - · - ·�· - · - - - --· - ·-· - ·-· -,

I I

------- COMMAND OPR 0 ppt

-- -- --CMD LESS OPN CNTitL
STATION STATION
-- 0 OPN COrNTiteL
-X RESPO � S I YE TO MACV
--- · -opft MIM/ D IRECT ION

FIGURE tl-1 MAJOR HEADQUARTERS

 X

MACTHA I
1ST SIG BDE
I
t
I
I
I
I
I I r I
I
I SEA
O PSDIR ACOC CSEMA
I TELMA
I
I
I
I I I I I I I
I 2'8 2NDSIG GP 21 12 160 RCG
l

~ ~ ~ ~
442 SIGBN 36 SIG BN 41 SIG BN 37SIG BN 40SIG BN 361 SIG BN
379 SIG BN 38 818 BN 43SIG BN 63 SIGBN 44818 BN H8SI8BN
325 SIG BN !52 SIG IN 73SIGBN 69SIG BN PLM SIGSPT
302 SIG BN 88 SlG BN 489SIGBN !57 SIG BN AMSF(S)
AMSF(N)
194THMPCO
NHA SIGCO

-----O PERATIONA L CONTROL

1ST S IG BDE

.. -
 - -

,.,.., ·"""""· �

HQ REG
COMM GP(V)
r-- FA IL ITI ES
C
HHC C LO

I I PLANS AND
QA
I l OPNS DIV

LOG PaT
......
ICS MANG
l I
l I I I I I I I
AD" J L PERS J l TRNG II SECURI I MGT I ENGINEERING 1 1 oPNs BR 1 I R a A sEc J
-
,
\D
' 1 I J I I
I9 SIG •e
�SF (Sl f �1H 1 1 NHAcg 1 l AMSF(N) f Ill SlG J
I 569 SI G I I l�r"
PT AG I
l I
I I I I I
fc o.A PLM 1 JCO.B LBNI J co .c CToJ )CO. A NHA 1 teo. a ON� [CO.C QNH J
VUNG TAU LONG BI N H CAN THO N H A TRANG OA N ANG QUI N HON
PH U LAM BIEN HOA SOC TRANG PR LINE MONKEY MTN PLEIKU
WNG TAU AS 01 A N R ACH GIA CAM RANH BAY PHU BAI VUN CHUA
g_
TAN SON NHUT CU CHI LONG XUYEN CAM RANH BAY AB HUE A N n.HE
NEW EMBASSY PHU LOI S A DE C PHAN R ANG CHU LAI P HU CAT
SAIGON TAY NINH BIHH THUY BAN ME THUOT QUANG NGAI QUI NHON ROK
GJA DIN H PHA N THIET VINH LONG NINH HOA OliANG TRI PHU TAl
DONG TAN CA MAU DONG BA THIN TU Y O A A H B
BAC LIEU HON TRE ISLAND

REG CONM GP(V)

 ,
,,

F IQURE 11-4
( ARVN) Military Regions
.. \..
'
.,
f�

-
4

PL�KU ANKHE
•

\
\
)

m\n
'\
�
TAU

m
:-..... ;s::: '
N '
\
•

,
•

.f
- 0�=:2;;0=�4;0;�60�=�80� �;100�
0 30 60 90 120 I�
STATUTE MILES
kiLOMETERS
,,)
II - 10
 - -
-

I"' """"·"'

1964
COlf.ruNICrt'T�
GROfJP
TAN �ON Nm1'I'

I I I I
P'LIGH'l' m.JI"- ,.u.� DJ"R1';r,'T'm A'IT.
FACILITmS C<BIDNICAT!c:tl" ft Of ?1,\�j A!,
PROOR� !XA�'.4�'!

....
....

....
1ft76 C<J!M � 1877 CONM � 1878 ca-m� 1�9 c� � 1 AAO C<J.1M � 1AA1 C('Mof �
- TAN SQf NHUT BIENHOA PLEIKU NHA TRANO- BDTH 'l'HUT CO� '!UN'» BAY

1882 C(Jfr.f SQ 1883 CC»f � H�S4 c�� � 1972 ern.� Sf'

PHAN RANG PmJ CAT TUY HOA DA NA�!O
• . .

Figure I!-5 t964th Conmunieatione Group

 DCA-SAM

I
I
DCA-SAM
THA J

I I
PLANS 01 Y OPNS 01 V
ANALYSIS CKT ENGR
y 300 V400 v 600 DIV
v 500

I
I I
A LLOC ENGR
v 510 v 520
r ' '
J

DET DET OET OET OET

I I I
OA NANG PLE IKU NHA TRANG LONG SINH CAN THO
y 110 v 120 v 130 v 140 v 150

FleUR£ ll-6 OE,ENSE COMMUNIC4Tto•• AGENCY•SOUTHE48T A8t4 MAINLAND, DCA-SAM

.... ..... -- . &

 * CC.l'VR 10-10

( DEPAWrMENT OF THE ARMY

HEADQUARTERS, 1ST SIGNAL BRIGADE \USASTRA'!'COM)
APO San Francisco 96384
'

Regulation 10 Deceml·er 1969

Nmnber 10-10

OHGANIZATION & FUNCTIONS

Commw1ications �ite Corr�nders and
Area Coordinators

� .

� l. PUHPOSE: This regulation se�s forth the concept and procedur e s

for establishement of commooication site commander and area coordi­
• nators and def1.ne s their authority and responsibilities.

2. SCOPE: This regulation is applicable to all corrJnunications

elenmi'tSassigned, attached to, or tmder the operatiolk'l.l control
of the lst Signal Brigade (USASTHATCOH) within Vietnam.

3. DEFL'UTIONS: For the purpose of this regulation the following

definitions apply:
'
a. Coii!I!lunicatl.ons An�a: A spec1.fic area, consisting of two or
I
more conrnunications sites, for \vhich res-ponsibility has been assign.:d
a major s ubordinate organization reporting directly to H-,adquarters, lst
Signal Briga de.

b. Comrr•w1ications Sub Ar;:a: A portj_on of a commnnications area for

wh1.ch res�10nsibility has been as signed to a subordinate commander report­
ing directly to a c ommooicat1.ons area cm mander.

c. Comnunications Site: A single cornr.mnications install ation or

facility operated entirely or 1.11 pc�rt bJ one or more eleueats of the
lst Signal Brigade.

d. Conmnmications Area Coordinator: A signal group c omrnander or

other subordinate conrmndct so appointed on orders bf HQ, lst S ignal
nrigade.

e. Conrrrnmications Sub Area Coordinator: i\. signal group com:rk•nder

or other corm,1ander of a s:u;nal organization so appointed on orders by
a cor,rr;nmications area coordinator.

f. Conunnnications Site Contl�wl.der: The Senior lst Signal Brigade

element conlltander, officer, or ,lon-comri.ssioned officer pernanently
as signed to a<. communications site and eligible to comnand ru1der the
j)orvisions of AR 600-20. Hesponsibili ty is ;tSSUI'llad immediately upon
arrival at the site.

( * This regulation supersedes Cd1VH 10..:10 dated 30 -December 1968

11-13
CCPVR 10-10 10 December 1969

g. Coordination Authority: The authoritj to compel coordi­ "l

nation, but not agreement.

h. Isolated Unit: A 1st Signal Brigade unit whose coiDilllnder

acts as the local t actical commander or is colocated w1.th a 1st
Signal Brigade writ whose comraander is the local tactical coiDilllnd.er.
Each 1st Signal Brigade unit at an isolated site is considered an
is ola ted nnit •

i. Tenan t Unit: 1st Signal Brigade unit on a facility conmanded

or controlled by someone not in the 1st Signal Brigade.

4. CONCEPT: a. Elements of the lst Signal Brigade are stationed

at approxinn te ly 200 site s throughout the Republic of Vietnam. At
. 1
mmy of these sites, units or detaclunents from different signal groups
�
/
and or frQm different battalions or compatrie s of the 1 st Sign a l Brigade
operate separate or integrated co mrnruli cat io ns facilities. This •
regulation establishes communications area and sub coordinators and
site c omrra nde rs to improve coordl.llation between lst., Signal Brigade
e1a.nents.. It also provides f or coord.i.nation between lst Signal Brigade
wrl'CS and other US and a llied military elements in Viet nam.

b. To provide a single command focus within each area, signal

group c omnan ders are assigned ce rtain adr itio nal resp on si b il i ties on
special orders f or all elements of the 1st Si gnal Br1.gade that operate
' t
in their areas. In turn, th ese signal g rou p comnk'lnders assign the
sane addit ional responsibilities to subordinate commanders to ins ure )t
that each e lem mt in each comrauiri.cat:Lons area has a n individual
s pecifi cally responsible for coordinating defense, support and other
common matters. The communic ations site comma nde r , as de f ine d in
paragraph Jf, is resronsible for the physical securl.ty of his site.
T he s ite co:r:nnander is responsible to the area defense zone conlllk'lnder
for defense matters. The maqning reQuirements necessary to implement
the communications site p hysical se cw it y plan will b e equitably
divided amoung all s ite ele nen ts Ea ch element will contribute a
•

proportionate share b ased upon its as s i gn e d st re ngth .

5. DtrrlES, RF;srONSlBILITI� AND AUf!-!OIUTY: a. The Conununications

Area Coordinator ( or a subordinate who exercises his del ega ted aut ltor ity ) .

(1 )
Acts as the poin t of contact for co o rdi na tion between lst
Signal Brigade units and local US Anny CoFaaanders.

(2) Coordin.a tes si gnal planning and operatiens arnoung 1st Signal
B ri.,�ade elenEnts and between them and other US and allied units.

(3)Assists the s i te comnanders in the resolution of loc al problerns

'vllich are be yon d the capability of the site comm:mder to resolve, to
include p�sical secu rit y .

,j
11-14
 CCPVR 10-10 10 December 1969

(
'
to resolve, to include p hysica l security.

{4) Coordinates administr-"tive and lo�ist1.cal natters amoung lst

Signal Brigade elements in is area and betwe en them and other US and
allied un i ts. This responsibility includes engiaeer construction and
real estate .

(5) Advises local US Arnw comnanders on conmn.uucatlons support

.rmtters in accordance with para 6b, USARV H egu lation 105-9.

(6) Has au th ority as shown in the table below over 1st Signal
elements statloned in his area:

t �
UNIT STATUS lSOLAT i:'J, UlHT
Under Cnrl of
r��t.NT
Not under Cmd of Under Cmd of
UNIT
Not under
� FUNCfiCN Conun Area Cmdr Conan Area Crndr Comr. Area Cmd cm d of Comm
A re a Cmdr
t DEFE�SE CEll AUTii C(l\)lill AUI'H L.}lL AUTH COOIU> AUTH
LJ�S vFC('N*
SIGNAL PL1NNINC
OOPlr;HATIONS �.;MD AlJI'll conm ilVl'H Clv"il:l A1Jl'li COOlJ) AUTH

ADl-iiNISTib.T It iN C}ill AUI'H U), 'RD A Iff H C}ill AUI'H COORD AIJl'H
& LOGISTICS
(INCL I::� INEEH

' CONSTRUCTION)

( * Local Tactical Conm:adder has Ol'CON f-or de:fense

b. T he C olili1unications Site Gomn:ander.

'
(1) l repare s, publishes and has responsibility for the implemen­
tation of the site physical security plan as requir ed by USAH.V Regulation
• 190-30. I n addition, he is res� ons ib le for the coordinatlon of site
defense with adjacent US and allied units.

(2) Acts as the initial Join t of contact in coordination planning

for new projects wi thin hi s area of site responsib ility, whibh affect
cornmunicat:Lons or site physica l security.

(3) Asslll'OCls opcl!at ional control of all e lements within the communi­
cations site in the event of emergency. Il.1l'Ilinent or actual attack and
emergency evacuat1.on will be coasidered suffic1.ent justification for the
assUinption of this responsibility. O:r:erational control will be returned
to indi-gidual elements i.mmediately upon t e nrrina tion of the erne rgency cOn­
dition. In the event of such action the Corrr.landl.ng General, lst Signal
Brigade will be notified through chain of conumnd by the most rapid 100ans
available.

(
II- 15
ccPVF 10-10 10 December 1969
%)
6. ADHINlSTRATIVN: a. Headquarters, lst Signal Brigade will publish
special orders to ide,:ttify communications ar eas and communications area
coordinators.

b. SiP.:nal group conminders who are designated as contn!unications

area coordinators will publish special orders to identify c onununications
sub area co ordinators.

7. 1\EF.EHEl'iCES: a. USAHV Regulation 10-4

b. USAHV Hegulati on 105-9

c. USAltV 1\egulation 190-30

r i
d. lst Signal Brigade Hegulation 105-13.
4
SCCf'V-CP t

FOR THE C0�1HANDER:

8FFICIAL: J • N • Mr-:D I N'GT';H

Colonel, GS
Chief of Staff
) '
T. E. HlJLl.E.'liEX
LTC, AGC
Adjutant General

DI�"T RIDlJr ION

•
A Plus
1 each Communications Site

•
,},

1 1-16
 III. C IRCUIT REQUEST PROCEDURES
( See also USARV SSI Item Nr. 82-2)
(

A. COL.hUNICATIONS SYSTEl'1S:

1. The comnmnic:>tions systerr, in Vietnam is d:_viclcd into three

separate and distinct sub -systems. This division is characterized
by the equipm8nt used and by the organizational mission.

2. The first of these sub-systems is composed of the units and

equirment organic to the combat elements in country. ·rhe equipment

f' concerned is generally the 12 channel AN/rRC

newer pulse code modulation equipaent, housed in vans or shelters
24 type equipment or
•

• '!'his equirment is highly mobile, which is a basic requirement to ful­

fill the units mission of signal s upport of its parent unit.

a
3. The second sub-system is the Corps Area Communications �ystem
(CllCS) which is operated and l!Hintained by the numbered sir,nal groups
under 1st Signal Brigade. 1'his system is gener:1.lly composed of AN/TB.C
90 series type radios and AtJ/HSQ 73 transportable Tech. Controls. The
/
mission of the sJrstem is as the name ir:rrlies, to supply semi-permanent
corps area couununications.

' ( ICS )
4. The last sub-system is the Integrated Comrrtunications System
which is OFerated and maintained by the Hec;ional C omr:mnications
( Group under 1st Signal Brig::de. This system is composed entirely of
•
the fixed station equipment using commercial radios CJ.nd standard
commercial Tech. Controls. The mission of this system is to provide
conunercial quality extremely wideband, long haul corrununications
throughout Vietnam •

•
5. There are two areas of responsibility in every corrmunications
system. One is management, and the other is operation and maintenance.
The management, operation and maintenance of the systems or,�anic to
combat units is the responsibility of the division signal officer.
However, all of the IGS and a portion of the GAGS have been designated
as Defense Communications System ( DCS ) assets and the man a,;�ement resron­
sibility lies with the Defense Cor.-ununications Ag::mcy-southe.1.st Asia
Hainland ( DCA-Si'Jcf ) . The remainder of the CACS is managed by 1st Signal
Brig<tde.

(
III-1
B. R.EgUE3T PROG.£DUrlliS:

Requests for circuits vfill be sent throut;h normal c orrmnnd ch".nnels

and will be in the format shown in paragraph C. below.
l
1�oquests 1vill
be met w ith organic capability wh en ev e !' possible (e.g., a requireraent
of a divisional unit will be s a ti sfi e d by t he Division Sie;nal Battalion,
if it h as the capability). If the unit c;_nnot prov id e the cvununications
with it's organic capability, the request for the circuit will be sent
to the apr..ropriate 1st S ignal Brigade unit.

Although there ar e some variations rossible, (emergencies, e t c. )�

the norma l flow for circuit request is from tr.e "user" or 11requester"
to the Signal Battalion providing Area CoHu:,unications Support. If
the ar('1. bat·talion has t.r.-, car;ability to fill the request, it is
forwarded to the Group trat is in surport of the area.
does not hav e the capability to fill the re quest ,
If the ;:;roup
it is forwarde:'.d to .�
1st Signal Brigade. If 1st Signal Brigade ca!l.not fill the request by
routing the circuit on the AACS, the request is forwarded to r;;,cv, 4
through USARV, for a validation on the SEJMBS. All denials for service •
must be forwarded to the USARV commander for final a ction .

C. TELECuHhUNICATivNS SEHVICE REQUEST rulli:AT:

The followine; format is used for a c ircuit re q uest :

a. Address of signal unit

b. Type and gr a de of service

) '
( 1) Voice, teldype, d3.ta, facsimile �

(2) Full- d uplex (FD), Half-duplex ( IID )

(3) Baude r.;.te

4
(4) Specia l re�1uirerr:ents

( a) 3 ignalli n['; or supervision

(b) Type and level cf t elet ype ( e.g. 20 ma polar)

c. l'urpose of circuit

d. Dates required

e. Installation priority

f. Contact personnel-nane J.nd telephone Nr.

g. Terminal lo c atio ns

'
>,,
III-2
 h. Type equipment

( i. 1tecommended restoration priority

D. l:'EOCl!:SSING 0F DCS CIHCUIT H10lESTS:

1. The Defense Corrununic<ltions Syste m in Vietnam is managed by DCA­

SAM. 'l'he utili zation of the system is controlled by COhUSiil,CV in that
circuit requests are validated by hrl.CV J6 prior to engineering and
activ:tion.

2.
'dhen it h as been ascertC:tined th'lt a Telecomr:turri.c � tions Se:!"vice
( TSR) cannot be fulfill ed by eithe r the requestinz units or;<mic
Fi.equest
signal element, or the r orti on of the GAGS mana E� e d by t he 1st Si r;nal

f �
Brigade, the TSR will be for-vmrC:ed to NACV J-6 throughout USAHV w h e r e tl-:e
retlUirement for the circuit vrill be weighted agai"lSt other signal
requirements. If tf:e l'cf'.CV J-6 d ecid es to validR.te the circuit, a
� valid 'ltion number \'fill be assigned and the TSH sent to DCA.-SAH for
allocation of f2cilities •

•
3. DCA-SAN is responsi'de for the allocation of DCS assets.
When a validated TSH is received from L.�\CV J-6, DCA-SAL '"fill deten;tine
routing of t he circuit, and will make all necess�cry engineering
determinations. A Telecomnmnic;ttions Service Order ( l.'SU) will then he
issued to all co ncern ed units. Th e 730 1.-.rill cont ain all necessary
infornntion to iictivate the cir c uit ,
and will serve as the official
justification to activate the circuit.

(
III-3
- - - -
 IV. EQUIPMENT- GENERAL

( In this chapter we will briefly discuss the modes of radio propagatio n

used in the ICS the antennas used to support the radio systems, the basic
modulation schemes, and the multiplex terminals, both voice frequency and
telegraph. More detailed information on the specific items of equipment
is provided on these topics in Chapter VII.

During t he discussion, it will be assumed that the reader has a

background in communications, but that his strength falls in the areas of
transportable and tactical systems. Tbe level of instruction presented
on the ICS will be equal to that of the Basic Signal Officers Course.

f
A. RADIO*:

Two types of radio systems are found in th e ICS the tropospheric

�

� scatter system and the line-of-sight

links of the res
(LOS) system.
employ the tropospheric scatter system.
Most of the long haul
The low power
• LOS systems are used for inter city links in the Saigon area and on ma ny
of the short links (tails) of the ICS where LOS propagation is possible.

A general comparison of the various ground-to-ground modes of com­

munication in the microwave portion of the radio spectrum is given i n
Figure IV-A-1.

1. T ropospheric Scatter:
t
( Historically, reliable multi-channel communications across rough
or impassable terrain had been extremely impracticalo Difficulties in site
•
location, and transportation problems generally prohibited the use of wire
lines or cables. While microwave LOS appeared to offer a partial solution,
the requirement for fairly close spaced stations, ruled out LOS in numerous
applications. Therefore, the need for reliable communications systems
capable of operation over distances beyond the horizon remained u nfilled.

r To solve this problem, engineers looked back at propagation invest­

igations undertaken by Bullington of Bell Telephone Labs, and others,
�
shortly after World War II. The various investigation s had been undertaken
in an effort to explain conditions of abnormally long range transmission
of UHF radio and radar signals. During these investigations it was
determined, that, contrary to earlier theories, such signals were being
propagated far beyond the line-of-sight, and that it was possible to receive
them at distances of hundreds of miles. It was also established that the

* Portions from the REL Training Course. Reproduced with the permission
of Radio Engineering Laboratories, Long Island City, New York.

(
IV - 1
loss of signal strength (path loss) was far less th an would be predicted

, ,,.
by the accepted theories of propagation at that time. It v:as therefore
determined, that the earlier theories of UHF propagation, while capable o f ' '
,
very accurate path loss calculations u p t o approximately 60 miles, produced
serious errors in path calculations for 100 miles or mor e.

Several t heories have been proposed to explain the inaccurate loss

calculations. One of the most popular theories (by Friis, Crawford, and
Hog g of Bell Telephone Labs, and others) assumes that the over-all atmosphere
is made up of various individual layers. It f urther as sumes, that the
layers are of varying t hickness, temperature, and moisture content.
Therefore, each layer differs somewhat from the adjacent layer, and is in
effect, an "invisible cloud". The differences in the layer temperature and
moisture contents results in each layer having a different index of refraction
(amount of bending of the signal as it passes t hrough the layer).
the different indices of refraction cause the establishment of firm boundaries
Furthermore,
� l
�
between each layer. These boundaries become reflecting surfaces, and the
signals reaching these surfaces are reflected from the surface at an angle
equal to the angle at which they hit the surface. This is illustrated as
t
follows:

Layer
Boundary Angle
B

) '
4

Signal Signal

* Angle A • Angle B

,
The reflection and refract ion is thought to occur in the troposphere
(part of the atmosphere from the earth surface up to the stratosphere) 1
in an area defined as the "common volume". The signa 1 reaches the common
volume in accordance with the normal laws of UHF propagation, and after
refracting and reflecting (scattering) in the common volume, a very small
por t ion of the signal returns to the distant receiver, again in accordance
with normal UHF propagation. On a typical path, a loss of over 200 db
(from transmitter to receiver) can be considered norma l. The hei ght of the
common volume varies according to the path length, and will be somewhere
from over 1000 feet up to approximately 50,000 feet (within the troposphere).

<J
IV - 2
 From the above discussion, the derivation of the nomenclature
••tropospheric scatter" for this type of propagation can be seen. In addition,

( the terms ••beyond the horizon propagation",

propagation tropospheric scatter (FPTS)" have been used.
"forward scatter", and "forward
In general,
"tropospheric scatter" has become the accepted normenc lature, and in cormJ.on
usage, has been shortened to "tropo".

In general, the above concepts hold true in the RF range of above

100 mHz to approximately 5000 mHz, and for path lengths of 100 miles t o
approximately 500 miles. While the above theories of tropo are not capable
of rigorous mathematical proof, reliable system designs are possible as a
result of numerous path loss measurements, and extensive emperical data
obtained from numerous measurements on various paths.

, �
While signals transmitted by tropo are relatively stable, they do
exhibit some fading. The fades are generally divided into:

l a. Seasonal variations (summer to winter)

• b. Daily variations (day to night)

c. Rapid variations (scintillation)

Seasonal and daily fading are brought about by changes in the various layers
temperature and moisture contents. There can be an approximately 10 to 15
db difference between a summer day and a winter night, with the best trans­
mission fading occuring during the summer day. Rapid, Qr scintillation,

, fading is fast fades, with a fade rate as high as 20 fades per second. Fast

( fades are brought about by the basic nature of tropo.

from a transmitter to a receiver, portions of the signal are reflected and
As a signal travels

�
refracted differently as they pass through the various layers.
Some portions of the signal arrive at the receiver simultaneously and in pnase,
and therefore tend to add to each ot her. However, some portions of the signal
travel longer or shccter distances, and arrive at the receiver out-of-phase
and tend to cancel each other. Since the tropospheric layers are continuously

r in some motion, fast fades are generally always present.

This has been a brief discussion of the history, development, and

' terminology of tropospheric scatter propagation. Amplifying remarks on
this subject may also be found in Figure IV-A-2 (REL Fact Sheet No. 1)
and Figure IV-A-3 (REL Fact Sheet No. 20).

2. Diversity:

As mentioned in the pr evious paragraph, one of the major problems

of reliable, stable communications is fading. There are a number of ways
that this could be overcome. One is to substantially increase the transmitter
power output . This could produce a receiver signal-to-noise ratio so high
that the effect of fading would not be noticeable. However, this is n o t
always practical, d ue to the high path loss (usually over 200 db) encountered
in tropo propagation, and to the amount of power which would be required to

(
IV ... 3
maintain even a modest fade margin (doubling the transmitter power only
produces a 3 db increase). Another way of overcoming fading would be to
increase ant enna size. This is not always a practical solution, $ince )
doubling the antenna size only increases the antenna gain by approximately
6 db, therefore, it is possible that the mechanical complexity, and the
cost increase, would outweigh the higher gain. Increasing the sensitivity
of the associated receiver will also help to overcome fades, but the
practi cal state-of-the-art is such that the present receivers cannot be
readily improved upon as far as noise figure and sensitivity are concerned.

A solution to improving operation during fades, w hile staying within

the realm of technical complexity and cost, is to go to diversity operation.
Basically diversity operation can be divided into three methods: space

�
diversity, frequency diversity, and polarization diversity.

Space diversity utilizes two antennas placed somewhat greater than

100 wavelengths apart. A signal transmitted to these two antennas,
will not fade simultaneously at both antennas.
generally
Therefore, if a receiver is
'
connected to each antenna, there stands a good chance that there will always t
be at least one receiver with a good signal-to-noise ratio. Frequency
diversity operates under the concept that if two signals are transmitted
on frequencies approximately 5% apart, both signals generally will not fade
simultaneously at a given antenna. Thus, if receivers set to the two
frequencies are connected to the antenna, there usually will be a receiver
with a good signal-to-noise ratio. The third method of diversity operation,
polarization, is the transmission of two signals of different polarities,
one in the vertical plane and one in the horizontal plane. Generally, both ) l
signals will not fade at a given antenna, thus as above, there will usually
always be a receiver with a good signal-to-noise ratio.
�

Generally in a tropo system, all three of the above diversi ty

techniques, or a combination thereof, are used. In addition, a combiner
configuration is used to select the receiver with the best signal-to-noise

,
ratio (Figure IV-A-4). In this way, a receiver with a poor signal-to-noise
ratio, which would tend to degrade the over-all system signal-to-noise ratio,
is effectively disconnected. In operation, the REL combiner when operating
with 2 receivers (dual diversity) can provide an improvement of u p to 3 db
•
in system signal-to-noise ratio. That is, the over-all system signal-to­
noise ratio will be 3 db better than that of the best receiver. When
operating with 4 receivers in quadruple (quad) diversity, a 6 db improvement
can be o btained. There are three types of combiners: variable gain, equal
gain and optional switching. Each of these will be discussed below.

Variable gain combining is a process whereby the outpu t from two

(or more) diversity receivers are each amplified according to their signal­
to-noise ratio (Figure IV-A-Sa). In this manner the signal with the largest
signal-to-noise ratio will be amplified most a�d, therefore, supply a larger
percentage of the output. To accomplish this, a control unit monitors the
noise and signal outputs from the receivers, and continuously provides a
gain control signal to the variable amplifiers. The operation of a variable

,)
IV- 4
 g ain combiner circuit is illustrated in Figure IV-A-6. When the signal-to­
noise ratio is equal in all receivers, the variable amplifiers will be at

( the same gain, and each receiver will contribute equally t o the output.
the other hand, if the signal-to-noise ratio on one of the receivers should
On

decrease, the gain of i ts amplifier will decre ase, and the gain of the other
amplifier(s) will increase, thereby maintaining the same signal level. This
system is very effective in combating fast fading. If the pilot tone from
one receiver disappears entirely, the gain of its amplifier will be reduced
t o zero with increase(s) on the other receiver(s). If the noise in an y
receiver reaches a set level, the noise monitor switch will open, disconnec­
ting the noisy recei ver entirely. If the noise in all receivers reaches
this level at the same time all receivers will be disconnect ed and there
will be no output .

' �
An equal gain combiner (Figure IV-A-Sb) can never have a signal-t o­
noise ratio which is better than that of the variable gain combiner.
is because the noisier circuit is not de-emphasized in the
This
equal gain combiner
� as it i s with the variable gain method •

• The third type of combining, optimal switching, is no t act ually

combining, a1though it is usu ally considered as such. With optimal switching
(Figure IV-A-5c), the best of several signals is used alone. The primary
weakness of this system is that the process of switching often causes diffi­
cult y with data circuits. When the several inputs are at approximately the
same level, there is often, continuous, unnecessary switching associated
with using the better of two, almost identical signals. A combination of
the optimal switching and equal gain techniques is of t en used (Figure IV-A-7).
' In this system, the two signals are combined, unless the signal-to-noise ratio

( in one receiver reaches a certain level, at which time the low signal input
is disconnected
•
•

A condensed discussion of diversity can be fo und in Figure IV-A-8

(REL Fact Sheet No. 2).

3. Tropo Site Configuration:

!
'
To provide two-way communicat ions at a given si te, two basic equip­
ment groupings are required: the transmit group, and the receive gro up.
This is illustrat ed as follows:

Transmit Transmit Signal

Group

Receive Receive Signal

Group

l
IV ... 5
In respect to configuration, a typical tropo station fo llows the same
layout. Reference to Figure IV-A-9 shows two paralleled transmit groups.
.,,.
Transmission by two gro ups is used so as to obtain tne benefits of ,'�,
diversity operation. Since the two transmit groups are similar, except
for the RF operating frequencies, the following discussion will trace
through only one transmit group.

The i ncoming voice frequency (VF) traffic signals are connected

to the multi plex wherein they are applied to the individual channels. Each
channel is 4 kHz wide, and the channels are frequency stacked one above
another (frequency division m ultiplex - FDM). Within a given channel,
the VF signal is used to produce a single sideband signal occupying
approximately 3 kHz of the over-all channel frequency spectrum. If data
information, such as teletype, etc, is to be transmitted, it is generally
pre-processed in a data modem,
audio frequency.
VF c hannel.
wherein it is coverted to a specific
Approximately 16 data signals can be
The output of the multiplex is applied to the
stacked into one
terminal
� �
facility. Since there are two transmit groups, the multiplex correspond­ �
ingly has a dual o utput with bot h outputs identical in content and frequency
range.
4

The terminal facility serves many functions, but at this point, only
the functions related to the transmit group will be covered. The outputs
of the multiplex are connected to the modulation patching panel. Here they
are either terminated or connected to the baseband input of the appropriate
exciter. The connections are made by patch cords, or patch connectors.
Tbe exciter baseband input signal is used to frequency m odulate the
exciter RF operating frequency. The exciter output is a nominal 10 watts ) I
RF, fully frequency modulated, and at the desired RF opera tin g frequency.
Since there are two exciters in the configuration, and the subassemblies
�
of each from the modulation input to a common 70 mHz signal point are
s imilar, it is possible to use one modulator to drive the two exciters.
T his is called "dual modulator operation". In this way, additional reliability
is obtained by redundancy, and it is possible to perform scheduled maintenance
on the subassemblies not in use.

Herein,
The exciter RF output is connected to the
it is amplified straight through to 1 KW or
lKW (lOKW) power amplifier.
to 10 KW, and the
1
�
output connected to the duplexer. The grouping of the. exciter <Ud lKW( lOKW)
power amplifiers is referred to as the transmit group.

The duplexer (or diplexer) is used to permit simultaneous transmission

and reception with one antenna ( see Figures IV-A-10 and IV-A-11). The
duplexer is configured such tha t the lKW( lOKW) RF output of the power ampli f i e r
is connected to the antenna and radiated out. A t the same time, the anten na
is receiving a signal t ransmitted to it from the next site. The duplexer
separates this weak received signal from the lKW(lOKW) transmitted signa l

••••
#
..

IV - 6
 and applies it to the appropriate receiver. At the same time, it prevents the
lKW (lOKW) transmitted signal fro m interefering wi th the associated receiver.

( This essentially completes the transmit group main equipments.

In additi on to the transmission and reception outlined above, the

antenna also receives a second signal transmitted from the next site.
However, since this signal is in a different plane than the two signal s out­
lined above, it is connected directly to the s econd receiver as sociated w ith
the antenna. Due to the difference in polarization the transmitted lKW (lOKW)
RF doesn't in terfere with the receiver RF signal.

The input to the receive group is takea from the antenna in one of
the manners outlined. In general, the receive group consists of an RF pre­
selector, a parametric amplifier, or a tunnel diode amplifier, and the basic

f receiver. The over-all grouping is referred to as tte

The RF preselectar
receive group.

(Figure IV-A-12) is a bandpass filter set t o

l the R F operating frequency o f t he associated receiver. It is used to
attenuate all received and extraneous RF signals, other than the desired
• signal. Following the RF preselector is the parametric amplifier, or the
tun n el diode amplifier. Either is a low-noise amplifier with approximately
20 db of gain. The parametric amplifier noise figure is approximately 2.5
db, and the tunnel diode approximately 4.5 db. The output of the amplifier
is connected to the basic receiver. The basic receiver generally has a noise
figure of approximatel y 8 db. It converts the received RF sig nal to the IF
frequency of 70 mHz. Following th e IF, the FM signal is demodulated, ampli­

r
fied, applied to the combiner, and then further amplified. In diversity
operation, the receiver combiners are interconnected to pro vide an output

( with the optimum signal-to-noise ratio, and under certain con ditions, provide

• a signal-to-noise ratio improvement of 6 db. Under any circumstances, the

output from the receive group is always equal to, or better than, the output
of any one receiver. The receive outputs are then applied to the terminal
facility.

I
At t he terminal facility, the receive outputs are connected to the
modulation patching panel, wherein they can be terminated, or patched to
the multiplex. At the multiplex, the received signal is demultiplexed
and connected to the appropriate VF or data facilities.
,
In addition to the transmit and receive equipments, there are the
common equipments. These generally consist of the terminal facility, the
performance monitor, and the fault. indicator. T hese common equipments are
discussed in detail in C hapter VII. Another group of support equipment , the
heat exchanger, dummy load and the dehydrator, wi11 also be discussed in that
chapter.

The foregoing discussion has been basically for a quad-diversity

s ystem, Figure IV-A-13 is a simplified diagram of a dual-diversity configura­
tion.

4. LOS Site Configuration:

l
IV -7
 LOS site configuration is not radically different from tropo.
The VF multiplex equipment can be (in ICS it is) the same type for LOS
or tropo. Antennas are different and the rad io equipment between VF
mux and antenna is usually different. iCS has four LOS shots that use
)
;

tropo radio equipment TSN-VTU, LBN-VTU, PRG-PRL and HUE-PHS. Of course

they all use much less power than a tropo shot.

Figure IV-A-14 is a highly simplified block diagram of an LOS radio

terminal. As in a tropo terminal, there is a transmit group and a receive
group .

The functions of the major components are:

Input Unit - Filters out unwanted input and amplifies the desired sig -1. ..
Exciter - The basic FM transmi tter wi th about 10 watts output.
.�
Demodulator - Restores signal to original form.
�
Output Unit - Filters and amplifies desired output signal.
•
Figure IV-A-15 depicts a frenuency diversity IJ'\S system.

s. Antennas:

Tropo and LOS systems use basically the same types of antennas,
but the tropo antennas are much larger. A tropo antenna receives a very
low level signal from the distant site compared to an LOS system. Therefore
because antenna gain depends on size (among other things). a tropo antenna
is usually considerably larger than a LOS antenna.
presents a good explanation of tropo antennas (Figure IV-A-16).
REL Fact Sheet No. 14
The type
) I
of antenna system used for a particular tropospheric scatter installation
depends on the frequency, gain requirements, environmental conditions, and t
mobility requirements. The types range from 120-foot antennas fo r fixed
installations to air - inflatable types for mobile terminals.

Figure IV-A-17 is a photograph of a high-gain antenna system used

l
f or tropospheric scatter systems operating in the frequency range of 700-1000
mHz. The reflector is a four-sided steel structure which is shaped into a
parabolic reflector at i ts face by steel plates. The structure is 60 feet
wide and has an over-all height of 65 feet. At 1000 mHz, this 60-foot reflector
�
will provide a gain of approximately 42 db. The feed system, consisting of
wave guide, wave guide horn and supporting tower, is located approximately 30
feet directly in front of the reflector. The wave guide feedhorn is mounted
at the top of the tower and is located at the focal point of the reflector.

Figure IV-A-18 s hows a different type of feed system. In this case,

the feed system extends through a hole in the center of the reflector
instead of being supported in front of the reflector. The energy is directed
out to the feed system and then reflected back to the reflector. The
parabolic reflector is 30 feet in diameter. The focal length is 9 feet.
Gain provided by this system at 1000 mHz is approximately 36 db.

j
IV . 8
 Figure IV-A-19 shows a 28-foot parabolic reflector and feed system.
The wave guide feed system is supported in front of the reflector. The

( weight and wind resistance is reduced considerably by using a grating

surface for the reflector instead of a solid reflector. The openings can
be regarded as short wave guides designed to be far beyond cutoff for the
frequency band over which the antenna is to be used.

An antenna system designed for used with transportable scatter

terminals is shown in Figure IV-A-20. The 15-foot parabolic reflector
on this type of antenna consists of a circular envelope, formed of two
fiberglas fabric sections. The inner surface of the rear fabric section
is coated wit h aluminum to serve as the reflector. The reflector assumes
the shape of a true parabolic form when the envelope is inflated. Focal
length of the reflector is six feet. The inflation equipment consists of

' a motor-driven centrifugal blower,

connections.
relief valve and check valve,
The blower and accessories are mounted on the s�poorting
and hose

l
tower •

,
(
�

I
,

(
IV - 9
 Figure IV-A-1
Communication Modes • FACT SHEET NO. 38
PRINCIPAL GROUND-TO-GROUND COMMUNICATION MODES UTILIZING
MICROWAVE (70 MHz to 20GHz) REGION OF RADIO SPECTRUM; CHARACTER­
'l
I STICALLY WIDE-BAND SERVICE (1 00kHz to 20 MHz).

Useful Range Characteristics Comments

h
t----------1-�
t 0 to 35 miles, 0.1 to 10 watts,
Low-cost, high-performance

,.� �.. depending two to 10-foot

wide-band system; replaces
costly right-of-way mainten
on (h). antennas ance of coaxial or multiple
LINE Of SIGHT
cable or overhead wiring.
(LOS)

en
<II
·�
w
�
/"'0,
Only practical system of
global coverage using three
-l
�
0 active synchronous satellites
� / ' up to 1/2 circum­
'
<11 / '
/
ference of earth 1 to 15 kW, (22,000 miles from earth) or
�
.0 /
<8 ' ,, depending on 30 to 85 -foot a number of orbiting satel­
lites (dependent on distance f
..� '�.
satellite orbit antennas
s
bO
c
·�
� Space Communications
and (e) s:overed and altitude) in con­
junction with multiple earth
w earth stations. •
a)
�
·�
'oO
c
llQ 30 to 70 miles, O.lto 100 watts,

�
0
·� �
••

DIFFRACTION
••
depending on
(h) and Ns)
six to 28-foot
antennas
Diffraction mode is very
specialized form of UHF t
�
14-1
0
( P Jane Surface)
rugged terrain prevents use
used only rarely where )
1------+---i of direct LOS and permits
4
8 longer path with obstacle
·�

1
en
11.1 gain.
·�
s

�
w 30 to 120 miles, 0.1 to 100 watts,
!. depending on six to 28-foot

l1
..c (h), ( Ns) and (G0) antennas
�
••
01 FFRACTION •·

·� Great attention is being given

)
( Knife Edge)
to refining propagational
'tl 1-------+--+--! computation in the diffrac-
$ tion region because of need
c
·� for utilization in tropo path
� predictions.
Qj 30 to 120 miles, 0.1 to 100 watts,

.�.
l:l4 depending on six to 28-foot
(h), (Ns), (G0), antennas
and (A0)
(Rough Surface)

1
Scatter Region Only practical wide -band,

�\\\,
!:t'- \ /
,.';<)�, ;
l'/j'J'
/<::
1 to 100 kW,
70 to 600 miles, 10 to 120-foot
reliable ground-based method
of achieving 70 to 600 mile
� ' \ _.!_ I ;; � depending on antennas, hop where unsuitable inter-
...... .....__./
. A
'v)..... '(<1' ::-..,._......_ ...... many factors refined modula- vening territory prevents

=
,,/
......
TROPO \.-
......
......... ...._....,.
....- �
tion and receiver use of LOS or diffraction
techniques modes .

(h) =height of antenna center

,)
(Ao) =obstacle absorption
(Ns) =refractive index (d) =distance between stations
(Go) =obstacle gain (9) =scatter angle or angle of elevation

IV - 10
 Figure IV-A-2

@
( W HAl �� l�OfO 1 FACT SHEET NO.I

WH AT IS FM T R O P O SPHERIC SCA T TER RADIO W AVE PROP AGATION?

Fo r w a r d Propagation Tropospheric
Scatter is a method of ultra -high fre­
quency FM radio c o m m u n i c a t i o n that
permits reliable m u 1 t i -c h a n n e l tele­
phone, te1etype and data transmission
without l i n e -o f -s i g h t restrictions or
the use of wire or cable systems.
In order to understand "tropo" it
is necessary to k n o w c e r t ai n princi­
ples about the earth's a t m o s p h e r e.
The troposphere is the l o w e s t area of

'. the
ground
miles.
atmosphere
to
It
a
is
height
in this
e xt e n d ing from the
of slightly over six
tropospheric area
powerful transmitters a n d sensitive
'
Ul
Q)

�
receivers. "
"'
t h a t virtually all weather phe nomena Numerous communications n e t w o r ks 0
.....
take place. Just as the a t m o spher e extending for thousands of miles are now <t!
• is made up of various layers such as in operation utilizing "tropo" terminals
"'
0
the t r o p o s p h e r e, s t r a t o s p h e r e and with hops of 300 miles or more. These .g
ionosphere, the troposphere itself is relay hops are accomplished by the use t-l
made up of v ar io us l a y e r s. These of bo th transmitting and receiving equip- 'oC
•
c o n s t a n t l y shifting but sharply defined ment and antennas at each terminal. At .S
layers d i f f e r in temperature and mois­ the initial transmitting point, many sep- �
ture content and, therefore, in refract­ arate telephone conversations and tele- 2!
• ive i n d ex. In addition, the boundaries g r a p h messages are c o m b i n e d into a 'b'o
between layers a c t as reflecting sur­ single r a d i o signal. A "feed horn" on �
faces. a tower beams it out toward the horizon 0
It is because of the p h e n o m e n a of like a huge, precisely aimed searchlight. :;j
( refraction and ref lectio n
t r o p o s p h e r e (the most popular theory
w i t h i n the The minute reflected portion of the signal
�
is picked up by a p a r a b o l i c r.eceiving
• holds) that the s c a t t e r method is pos­ antenna well over the horizon. There it �
sible. Ra d i o e n e r g y, like light and is re-amplified and sent on its way again, c
other forms of p r o p a g a t e d energy, is if necessary, for another leap over the .�
subject to the laws of refraction and horizon toward its destination at the other �
r e f 1 e c t i o n. A radio frequency signal end of the circuit.
·g

I
directed upward from a t r a n s m i t t i n g "T r o p o" has many advantages over
antenna through t h e s t r at i fied air of
lilo..
other methods of long distance commun-
the t r o p o s p h e r e undergoes a complex ications. In addition to being more eco- .�:::
series of partial r e f l e c tio n s and re­ nomical in areas where r.onstruction and .'!::
, fractions. Most of the energy is scat­ maintenance present problems, it is rel- �
tered and diffused, but a minute portion atively free from atmospheric interfer- �
is s c a t t e r e d downward over the hori­ ences which affect other transmission �
zon. This small fraction of radio methods.
energy (o v e r a 200 -mile span about
·;::
In the struggle for the balance of po- o.

one-hundredth-quintillionth of the trans­ wer, RE L' s "tropo" scatter equipment, �

mitted p o w e r) reaching the receiving both stationary and mobile, provides the
site has been m a de usable for com­ free world with a vital means of reliable
munications by the de ve1 op men t o f communications.

t
IV- 11
 Figure IV-A-3
History of Tropo @ FACT SHEET NO. 20

Communication by means of VHF and lower UHF bands. dence which had been gather­ )
tropospheric scatter propaga­ By the end of this period many ed, the availability of high
tion is a method of point to theories were expounded to powered transmitters, sen­
point communication by a com­ account for beyond the horizon sitive receivers, large an­
mon reflection volume in the propagation. The affects on tennas, and diversity receiv­
lower atmosphere known as received signals because of ing techniques, practical tro­
the troposphere. It is a re­ weather were noted, the phe­ po communications systems
latively new method of com­ nomena of rapid fading were became possible.
munication and has only come The natural advantages of
into widespread application this form of communication
in the last decade. In fact , LABRADOR for the military became ob­
it is so new that the mechan­ vious and on the basis of ex­
ism of propagation is still be­ periments and tests the first

�
ing argued by experts. Some operational multichan nel
a) years ago, it was believed tropospheric scatter system
� that practical transmission of was installed. This was in

�
�
high
possible
frequency energy
only to the horizon
was 1954
known
in Canada and became
as the Polevault sys­
4
because of the extreme re­ tern. Since that time equip­
t
...

�
,.J
duction
strength
of received
beyond the horizon .
signal ment developments,
understanding of tropospheric
better

bO This theory was eventually scatter propagation and better

.:: questioned because of certain tl
•.-4 prediction methods have
... long - distance transmissions brought about operational sys­
Q)
! observed during wartime use tems meeting the highest in­
�
•.-4 of radar, postwar highpower ATLANTIC OCEAN ternational standards. In
'bO •
.:: FM and TV broadcasts and addition, tropo can be install­
f:a:l

) I
long-distance amateur com­ NORTHERN TESTS: Paths of ed anywhere in the world and
0
•.-4 munications. the first far northern tropo provide great reliability in

! The development
as a practical means of com­
of tropo propagation
gear in 1953,
tests using REL
which proved
both commercial
tary systems.
and mili­

11-1
0 munication is an interesting the practicability of a plan­ 4
chapter in the history of com­ ned tropo scatter system.

•.-4
g munications:
a) observed and various theories
a)
o.-4 were put forward to account

e for this propagation.

8.
l
With World War II came
a rapid advance in research
£ in microwaves. The intro­
•.-4
duction of radar and UHF
'tl
�
communication sets caused
�
Q)
+J some unexplainable interfer­
.:: ence difficulties and the ob­
•.-4 •
...
g. servation of radio reception

� at great ranges.
After the war more re­
POLEVAULT: REL designed
and produced the FM radio
GUGLIELMO MARCONI search took place. In the equipment for the first major
U.S., the licensing of VHF tropo scatter system.
The earliest recorded ex­ television stations had to be
perimental work was carried suspended when ranges ex­ Marconi's predictions were
out during the period 1928 to ceeded predictions and inter­ proven correct by the practi­
1933 by Marconi. In a report channe 1 i n t e r f e r e n c e took cality of tropospheric scatter
written in 1933, he stated: place. By 1950 sufficient re­ communications systems. The
"Further improvements in the search had been conducted so development of the right equip­
apparatus are likely again to that the first methods of es­ ment twenty years after his
revolutionize radio communi­ timating p e r f o r m a n c e for original work started a new
cations. " In the mid and late multichannel over the hori­ branch of multichannel com -
thirties, many amateur and zon communications were ex­ munications that has become
professional radio engineers
conducted experiments in the
pounded. Based on the combin­
ation of the experimental evi-
a significant factor in the
,)
-
overall communications art.
IV 12
 ( TRANSMITTER RECEIVER
X
BASEBAND
X
COMBINEft , BASEBANO
INPUT UNIT OUTPUT •
RECEIVER
TRANSMITTER y
y

A) FREQUENCY DIVERSITY

RECE i VER

, � X
COMBINER peg-pow�
TRANSMITTER UNIT

� � RECEIVER
y

•
B) SPACE DIVERSITY

t
FIGURE IV-A- 4 UsE OF CoMBINERS

t
•

( OUTPUT
�
t

A) VARIABLE GAIN COMBINING

I
,
•
B) EQUAL GAIN CoMBINING

OUTPUT

C) OPTIMAL SWITCHING COMBINING

Figure IV-A-5 TYPES OF COMBINERS

(
IV - 1.3
 VARIABLE
RECEIVER X
GAIN AMPLIFIER

COMBINED
OUTPUT

VARIABLE
RECEIVER V
GAIN AMPLIFIER

FIGURE I.V-A· 6 VARIABLE GAIN COMBINE&

RECEIVER X

NOISE
PILOT COMBINED
CONTROL CONTROL OUTPUT
UNIT

RECEIVER Y SWITCH

FIGURE IV-A- 7 EQUAL GAIN/ OPTIMAL SWITCHING COMBINER

- ...... _ - _......__
 Figure IV-A-8

( DIVERSITY RECEPTION @FACT SHEET N0.2

EXPLA INING DIVERSITY RECEPTION IN FM TROPOSPHERIC SCATTER SYSTEMS

The development of powerful transmitters, loss is minimized in daytime hours of sum­

high -gain p a r a b o l i c antennas and sensitive mer. Poorest scatter propagation periods are
receivers has made possible reliable com­ at night in winter. Transmission is better
munications through FM tropospheric scatter over water than land, but is no better over
radio wave propagation. By definition alone, frozen water than it is over land.
most of radio signal beamed over-the -horizon Fading phenomena can be somewhat over­
through the troposphere is "scattered" and come by a large increase in the power trans­
diffused. This diffusion of radio energy or mitted by producing a signal-to-noise ratio
scatter loss may be defined as the additional so large that fluctuations are not noticeable
loss between transmitter and receiver when in the communications channel. This high Ol
c o m p a r e d to the loss over free space that power solution is not practical or economical, Q)
·.-'
occurs in line-of-sight transmission. since modest amounts of power provide ade­ r-.
Losses in s c a t t er transmission depend quate and r e l i a b l e service when combined 0
+>

J
primarily on the distance between terminal with diversity reception and high-gain antennas. <ll
hops, s c a t t e r i n g angle and frequency. In In diversity reception a choice of signals r-.
addition, how e v e r, scatter loss itself is is made from information received along dif­
0
.D
statistical in char acter and is subject to ferent transmission systems. This may be
several types of fading. Fading can perhaps accomplished by individual use of space di­ j
� be b e t t e r explained as fluctuations or time
variations in the received signal. These are:
versity, frequency diversity
diversity, or by a combination of any two or
or polarization
�
•.-'
FAST FADING - rapid f a d i n g (momentary all three. Ultimately, each signal received r-.
t variations as high as 20 fades per second) is makes a contribution to the final output sig­ (!)
Q)
the result of turbulent m a s s e s of air that nal by a c o m b i n i n g method which offers a s::
cause reflections variating at random according
to place and time.
signal-to-noise ratio more favorable than that
of the strongest signal alone.
"bb
SLOW FADING - slow fading (daily, weekly REL tropo equipment designed and manu­ �
t or monthly variations) is the result of changes factured for the Ballistic Missile Early Warn­
0
in refractive index of the atmosphere and is ing System employs all three diversity methods .,
superimposed on the fast fading.

�
by u s i n g two transmitters, four receivers,

� SEASONAL FADING - in g e n e r a l, scatter and two antennas at each terminal site.

'H
0
Single Frequency Transmission Space/Single Frequency Transmission
§
.,
II)
•
( �---��---�---� ���_...,.-_...�
...- Ol

1
--
� C\ ---
• �
p.,
(!)

��= g���--�������
..c::

�:""'""'� -�N, +>

..c::
•
� V. ��,
+>
"'�$-' �����,.. ·�

I,
�.:-:

"S
�r-.
Spac<Vi:>olarization/.3ingle Frequency Transmission Spac<Vi:>olarizatiorvDual Frequency Transmission
ft
p::

• Fl�First Frequency: F2�Second Frequency; H�Horizontal Polarization; V�Vertical Polarization

Space Diversity occurs when two an­ Polarization Diversity o c c u r s when Frequency Diversity occurs when two
tennas are p 1 a c e d at more than 100 two transmitters send signals of dif­ transmitters send signals on slightly
wavelengths apart. A signal received ferent polarity - one horizontally and different frequencies. The received
generally will not fade simultaneously one vertically. S i g n a 1 s of different signal at a g i v e n location generally
at both an te nnas . polarity generally will not fade simul­ will not fade simultaneously in the two
taneously at the receiving antenna. receivers.

�
.;.��
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER

PLUS
�ruutnJlf!
( SPACE DIVERSITY POLARIZATION DIVERS I TY FREQUENCY DIVERsiTY

IV- 15
 TRANSMIT GROUP FTRANS I
EXCITER OUPLEXER

RECEIVE GROUP

VOICE
OR
DATA
F REC 4

FTRANS 2

Figure IV-A-9 TYpical Tropo Station Configuration (Quad-Diversity)

•
�C•
.,

- -- -
 (
TRANSMITTER

� ../; --+
•
DIPLEXER ..-
�
-
I
J �

l RmEIVER
'
C.

� Figure IV-A-10 Use of Antenna Diplexer

. (
'

TO ONE RECEIVER
' lN DIVERSITY
SYSTEM

l� TO ONE RECEIVER
IN DIVERSITY
TRANSMIT
OUTPUT
SYSTE:M FILTER

DIPLEXING FILT�
t

t FROM POWER
AMPLIFIER

Figure IV-A-11 Typical Filter System for a Tropospheric Scatter Circuit

{
IV - 17
 Figure IV A 1 2- -

R F PRESELECTORS l
EXPLAINING RADIO FREQUENCY PRESELECTORS @ FACT SHEET NO.5
RF preselectors are bandpass selective RF input circuits of
filters which improve selectivity extremely sensitive high frequency
in radio reception by rejecting receivers. This is especially true
unwanted frequencies at the Radio for FM receivers used in the
Frequency input stage. tropospheric scatter mode of
In non-technical language and operation where the level of sig­
using a very simplified analogy, nals appearing at the RF input
a preselector may be compared may be as low as a few million­ •

to a keyhole in a door between a ths of a volt. Since the received

darkened room and a brightly lit signal must overcome the so­
corridor. The keyhole permits called thermal noise (random

'
only a limited amount of light to REL Modular-Type frequencies) generated in the re­
pass into the darkened room. In ceiver itself in order to produce
RF Preselectors
much the same manner the pre­ high quality intelligence at the 4

selector is a selective device output, it is of paramount

G)
Q)
• which rejects unwanted frequencies
and allows only a desired signal
consist essentially of metal cav­
ities, rods and plates, they are
importance that the RF preselector
have as low an insertion loss at '
to "pass through" at the RF input familiarly referred to as "plumb­ resonance as possible. In other
1! stage. ing" by radio engineers. words, ideally the desired receiv­ �
0

�
In normal radio reception, Although these selective de­ ed signals must not be attenuat­
whether it be AM or FM, signal vices are also often used as band­ ed by the preselector.
0 selection is accomplished at the pass filters in multiplier strings In recent years, REL has in­

j lower
electrical
frequencies
components
by means
such
of
as
for the selection of the desired
harmonic frequency, or at the RF
troduced
in RF
a new modular concept
preselector construction
4
�
1!
coils and condensers.
higher frequencies such as in the
At the terminal of exciters for the sup­
pression of unwanted spurious
which
imation
permits
of the
a closer approx­
theoretical, or t
Q) microwave bands, however, mech­ outputs, their most demanding ideal, performance characteris­
Q) anical devices in the form of co­ application is in their function as tics of such devices than was ever
s::: possible in the past. Both coax­
ori axial or waveguide -type preselect­

l
ora are needed to perform the ial and waveguide preselectors

0
same function.
RF preselectors are actually
have been designed
factured by RE L for operation in
and manu­
) �

�
mechanical devices which are RF tuning ranges covering the •
capable of "selecting" desired fre­ region of 100 me to 10 kmc.
ll:: quencies by virtue of the resonance Preselectors operating in fre­
properties of their physical dim­ quency ranges up to approximately
� ensions. In a coaxial preselector, 3 kmc are all of the coaxial type,

§ for example, the tuning to re­ while those for higher frequencies •
•r-1 sonance (the desired frequency or are of waveguide structure.

l
10
iimited band of frequencies which Ri; L prese1ectors, through
10

�
is permitted to "pass through") is inherent design and preci�ion
accomplished by varying the length manufacturing, now offer the low­
Q) of the inner conductor of each est insertion loss believed fea­

�
P-
cavity section. Since these coaxial sible at the present state of the
..r:: and waveguide -type preselectors art.
�
�
"0
4
Q)
�
1!
�

A Typical REL Five -Cavity Waveguide Preselector

j
IV - 1S
 ( EXCI T ER H
RF POWER DIPL.EXER
BASEBAND
FREQUENCY jAMPLIFIER FILTER r--
r--+ INPUT

_. TRANSMIT
MULTIPLEX
EQUIPMENT ORDER-WIRE INPUT

(
L- ORDER -WIRE
EQUIPMENT
RECEIVER
DATA, VOIC
OR ---- (SERVICE
CHANNEL
FILTER

FACSIMIL E HANDSET)
EQUIPMENT
RF
,..--- RECEIVER
F R E QUENCY

RECEIVE ORDER-WIRE INPUT

J'
MULTIPLEX
EQUIP MENT
L-- �
COMBINED RECEIVI!R
1otll.T
. IPLEX SYSTDol &ASEllAND
RECEIVER FILTER f.-

l
OUTPUT OUTPUT

• Figure IV-A-13

J Typical Receiver-Transmitter Tropospheric Scatter

Terminal With Dual-Diversity Reception

•
( r - ----- --- - .- ---- ,
• I
I
•
1 I

i I 1 I
I
BASEBAND
� I UNIT B EXCI rF}��
R
I
:I -E
HF.•SSAGE

t
I IN- ��� I
SIGtJAL ' F
I
I I
, TRANSHITTER
L--------------�-
I

• ----- - -- ....- - - - - --- -

r-
.

1
I
I
BASEBAND � OUTPUT ASEBAND
DEM
RF F & SEI.. I r.
MESSAGE
UNIT B R \..:.
I Ar·'PLJF'JRR I
SIGNAL
I I
I I
RreEIVER
L- - - ---- - --- _J

( Figure IV-A-14 Basic LOS Microwave Radio Terminal

IV - 19
 ­ -�- ----- -------- .
r-
' I
F1
I E X CITER :
I NO.1 I
I INPUT I
I UNIT I
I - E X C I TER
F2 �
l NO.2 I
I I
L __ .- ____ __ __ - ___ _____ J
Tfi.A e!JM I !!�
� --..... F1
{. --...... F2
r---------- --- ----- - ----� �.:..,-
l I
CONTROL 1---,
·N UNIT i
I
0
I
I I
RF
J
F3 :
! + OEM �
AMPLIFIER
I

! OUTPUT I
I I- COMBINER I
UNIT
I
RF F4 :
I ,I ' D E.M fo.e-- AMPLJFIER I
1

: E--J I
i
RECEIVER
J
L--�---------�----------�

Figure IV-A-15 Frequency-Diversity Line-of��ip,ht System

- �----- .. - ... -- ..... -- -

 Figure IV-A-16

( Tropo Scatter Antennas @ FACT SHEET NO. 14

Antennas -- devices used section is substituted as the

for radiating or r e c e i v i ng reflector ; allowing t h e
radio waves -- act as con­ "feed horn" to be separately
ducting links in electronic located at the focus of the
systems which depend upon aperture of the a n t e n n a.
free space as the propagation This latter configuration is
medium. more efficient since it elimi­
As a basic component in nates aperture blocking and
•
any radio system, the initial the direct reflection of ener­
functiDn of an antenna is to gy back into the feed.
transfer in the form of an In e i t h e r configuration,
electromagnetic wave, radio the principle of operation is

,-
frequency energy generated similar: During transmis -
0)
by the transmitter. To com­ Radio beams, like light sian the reflector concen­ Q)

r..
..-f
plete the conducting link, the beams, can be formed by trates the radiation into a
radiated wave in traveling reflection as well as by re­ parallel beam. For recep­ �0
through space is intercepted fraction. Since radiation di­ tion, incoming radiation is C1l
r..
by the receiving antenna. rectivity and narrow beam­ reflected to the receiving
.8
The efficiency of an an­ width are prerequisites for antenna ("feed horn") at the
j
tenna system depends on how an efficient high-gain tropo focal point.
much of the transmitted en­ antenna system, the rules of Physically, horn-reflector �
•M
ergy can be retrieved by the optics have been followed to combinations can assume a r..
� receiving antenna. This ef­ provide the best possible re­ varie ty of configurations
Q)
ficiency is determined to a sults at the microwave fre­ utilizing optional materials.
�
•M
t great extent by radiation pat­
tern and beamwidth.
quencies.
Antenna designers, u t i l ­
Depending primarily on geo­
graphical location and eli­ i
Broadcast radio has 1ow izing the optical theory of a mate, r e f l e c t o r s (slang: 0
•M
efficiency because it must lens and light source arrange­ dishes or billboards) can be "0
radiate energy more or less ment for narrow beam focus­ made of wire screen or sheet &3
{ e q u a 11 y i n all directions.
Point-to-point radio, by con­
ing, have evolved s i m i 1 a r
antenna - reflector combina­
metal.
self, while
The "feed horn" it­
bas ically an
'H
0
s::
trast, uses directiona 1 tions. In the same manner opening, can assume a var­ 0
·M
� transmitting antennas which that an optical lens must be iety of shapes such as a (I)
(I)
concentrate power into nar - illuminated by a light source, flare-out or funnel. The end
row beams "aimed" toward a radio beam reflector must of the horn is usually capped ·g
r..
� highly directional receiving have a primary radiator. In with an insulating material
antennas. "Gain" is h i g h a microwave radio system transparent to the radio fre­
8.
..c:

,
because as much of the in - this primary illumination is quency involved as a means �
coming signal as possible is most often accomplished by of maintaining internal pres­ �
� collected and unwanted radi­ an electromagnetic horn - - sure within the w a v e g uid e
ation from other directions an "open" end of a waveguide system, and as a means of al
� is rejected. commonly referred to as a protection from the elements.
�
.�
In the case of forward "feed horn. " Since "gain" is a function r..
tropospheric scatter radio Completing the horn-re - of both size and wavelength,
p..
t propagation, point -to- point f 1ector combination at the antenna sizes vary, again
�
communications i s enhanced present s t a t e -o f -th e -a r t, depending upon site eleva­
to permit longer than line­ RE L tropo systems utilize tion, length of "hops" from
of-sight distances by using parabolic reflectors in con­ one tropo terminal to another,
free space between earth junction with "feed horns" to and other power, channel and
and the tropopause as an in - form high-gain parabolic an­ frequency requirements of
termediate reflector. tennas. the particular system.
In transportable applica­
tions, the tropo antenna,
fabricated as a single struc­
ture, consists of a paraboloid
of revolution illuminated by
a center-feed waveguide horn
located at the focus of the
paraboloid.
For f i x e d installations,

( "Pencil- shaped" beam of para­

bolic antenna radiation pattern.
normally
path
involving
lengths,
longer
a .Pa r a b o l i c
Parabolic reflector action with
"feed horn" at the focal point.

IV- 21
 �,,

'

)
�
J�llll I �
WAVEGUIDE
TOWER
�l -.AT! I
•

l
�

I II,_,\\ ···H6fllf.a22 r&a w

•

t
•

Figure IV-A-17 Sixty Foot Parabolic Antenna System

..
�-1

IV - 22
 WAVEGUIDE HORN

•
r
•
TRANSMISSION I !HI II
LINE

� (
•
J 1=f=7/ �_l\ \ /$ ' \.\ /TOWER
BASE

'•
,
a

Figure IV-A-18 Thirty-Foot Parabolic Antenna System

(
IV - 23
 ''
l

p �

F igure IV-A-19 Twenty-Eight Foot

Parabolic Antenna System
4
Figure IV..Aoo20
Air-Inflatable Antenna System
1
4

) �
•
4

�
•

�
t

. ,J
IV - 24
 B• VOICE FREQUENCY MULTIPLEX TERMINAL:

( 1. Frequency Di vision Multiplexing:

The primary type of multiplexing utilized in Army communicat ions

systems is "frequency-division multiplex.. (FIM).

Frequency division multiplex is a system where individual

Voice Frequency channels are translAted up in frequency so
that each channel is occupying a fr equency slot 4KHz h igher
than the preceeding channe l. This allows the tran smission
of many channe ls over one circuit with maximum economy of

, w
spectrum space.
See Figure IV-B-1 for an example of modulation with discrete frequencies.
If the original (m odulating) signals f�m a continuous band ( such as the
components of human speech), Figure IV-B-2 depicts the result. It can be
seen that each frequency component in the original signal created t w o
components in the output. It is only necessary to retain one of these to
transmit all the inf�mation in the original modulating sigaals. This is
do� by removing either the upper or lower sidebands with a filter •

• The term "multiplex.. implies that more t han one aessage will b e
transmitted at the same time over the same means, wire, radio, cable, etc.
r This is done by duplicating the process shown in Figure IV-B-2 using
different carrier frequencies for eaeh message channel to be transmitted.
The normal arrangement of channels is 12 channel "GROUPS... The generati on
of a single GROUP is shown in Figure IV-B-3. Using the reverse of this

� ( translation process at the receiver, it is possible to regain the basic

modulating signal. The process of a ssembling a group, depicted as a s e quential
�
procedure in Figure IV-B-3, actually occurs simultaaeously ia parallel for
, all channels as shown in Figure IV-B-4.

t After the basic GROUP has been formed, tbere is no reason to stop
there. Using GROUPS as the modulating signals with new carrier freque ncies ,

�
•
SUPER-GROUPS are formed
in parallel
(Figure IV-B-5).
(Figure IV-B-6) •
Again, the process takes place

' The 60-cbannel SUPERGROUP is the largest building block normally

used in FDM systems. Figure IV-B-7 illustrates how 16 SUPERGROUP$ can be
• combined to form a 960 channel system. Note that SUPERC1lOUP 2 (SGR 2)
undergoes no modulation and comes through at the basic SUPERGROUP frequencies.
t

Note on Figure IV-B-7 that the lowest frequency found in the

composite signal is 60 kHz. The band below this frequency is used for
various purposes: voice or teletype order wires, transmission of alarm
and monitor signals, or even for an additional 12-channel GROUP.

(
IV - 25
 The complete process of gener P..tinP.' a 1 � 2- chP.. w el SU'gtem �-s summa­
rized in Figure IV-B-g. The eouiment renuired for an 'Pl)M svst em is shown
in Figure IV-B-9. Here it c::tn be s een that one of the ad v aJ, t ag es of such �, ._
. ,,.,

a s ystem is that many s ub assemblies can be used several times. An attractive

feature from the maintenance and spare parts of vie1"•

The modulation plan discuss ed above is not the ulan used bv

Lenkurt in the AN/FCC-17-,
the nrultiplex used in th e 1 CS. 'I'he T.en nrt k
plan (to be di scussed in detail in Chanter iTJJ) is not comn,q_t ihl e with
most other multiplex equiTJI'l1ent 2.t the channel level because it onl:v uses
six different channel carriers instead of the hre l ve as discusser abov e.
The AN/FCC-17is however, comnatible 1.1rith othAr s�rs+.ems at the fi.H()TT'P and
SUPERGROUP levels.

in the
An often \lSed tenn is the ''baseband s i ma l " . The baseband fo u nd
ICS REL 2600 equinment, for example, starts at 12 ktrz am rnay
.�
extend up to 1052 kHz in the case of a 252 channel svstem. '1"he haseb8T1d
is the band of freaueT'lcie s that contains the comnosite messa.l"'e chann el
signal that res ults from the basic freou ency division wult.inlex scheme.
Another tenn commonly u s ed, to express the �<�:me signal is the "RF s :i.gnal. n
This tenn is a slight misnomer, in that 11out-of-ba,nd11 sign,qls, such as so"le
types of order wi res (see Section C), ar e �:�.lso usualJy RF (radio fr e nuenc"'r ' t
signals, but are not in the bas eband .

2. Pilots:
1

There a re two purposes for p ilot tones in VF multi plex equipment:

The first, the system pilot, is used to synchronize all the carrier osci­
) 4
lla tors in the system to the same frequency. The second, alarm pilots,i s
•
used to wa rn of system degr a dation and to assist in locating problems in
the equipment.
�
3. Carrier signals 4
The c hannel, GROUP and StJ'PEPnROTTP freru e-n d es

l
carrier arP deri:�:ren
from a crystal-controlled oscillator. The oscillator is hou s ed ina
temperature controlled oven s o that the freouency is virtually )_nde-ne"f"0 ent
of ambient temnerature variation s . A 96 kHz synchron:i_za+Son pilot is �
combined, 16 DB b elow the normal tranl'llTlission level, with the line frequency
output. The pilot is received at the dis t ant term:j_n�l and is fed to t\ie t
master frequency generator shelf. A phase detector :in t'IIe Ma.ster f r enuen cv
generator shelf compares the nhase of the nilot with a locallv gen e r a_ted
96 kHz signal and nroduce s an error volt,age which is nr onort: onal to the
i

ph ase difference of the two signals. 'l'he erro r voltape then is annlied
to the oscillator which chanP:es freoueT'1c'� in nronortion to this error.
Thus , all channel, GROUP and SUPFRGROTTP carrier freauenciP.s ar e var:i_ed
ac cording to the ori gina l error, and freauenc;r svnchron5.zation � s JTI�in­
tained. If the synchronization nilot is lost for anv reason, the ma�, er
frequency generator s helf locks on t he last received s:ign�l by m eans of
a servomechanism which controls a voltage reference and maintains

J
IV- 26
 the phase detector output at zero.

( In order to regain the transmitted info rmation at the receiver,

i t is essential that the demodulatin g carrier frequency be exactly the
same as that used for modulating. This is insured, as discussed above�
by using the SYSTEM pilot transmitted by the .. master station" to synchronize
the local frequencies of all other stations, which operate as "slaves" •
Referring a gain to Figure IV-B-5, observe that GROUP 1 is in the frequency
range 312-360 kHz after the SUPERGROUP is formed. When demodulating down
the SUPERGROUP at the distant terminal, if a carrier frequency of 419.5 kHz
.. were used (only 0.12% error) GROUP 1 would be placed in the frequency rAnge
59.5 to 107.5 kHz. Then, instead of having channel 12 of GROUP 1 in the
frequency r�nge 60 to 64 kHz, there will be a portion of channel 12 and a
portion of channel 11. If these channels were used for v oice circuits, they

� might stilT be operationa l (but with greatly reduced quality). However,

teletype carrier tone pack were on any of the channels in the entire SUPER­
if a

GROUP, the small error in the carrier frequency would make the tone pack to­
tally unusable since each channel on th e pack is only 170 Hz wide. You can
readily see the value of the "master" - "slave" relationship.

4. Alarm pihts
Another use of pilots is in automatic level regulation. A GROUP
� pilot, either 64 kHz or 104 kHz is combined into and transm itted with
each 12 channel group. Normally the 64 kHz pilot is used. The GROUP
, pilot, 16 DB below the GROUP transmit level (34.5 dbm), provides a level
�
• index throughout the main signal path. Failure to receive this pilot a t
the distant terminal i s an indication o f loss o f a complete 12 channel GROUP.

t ( Two other uses of pilots are in alarm systems and in maintenance.

5. Thru-grouping:

� Consider the layout of a communications system shown in Fi gure

• IV-B-10. An analysis of the system shows the following equipment require­
ments (Figure IV-B�ll).

t Term A 1 Group MODEM

, 3 Channel MODEMS

• Term B 2 Group MODEMS

•
5 Channel MODEMS

Term C 1 Group MODEM

2 Channel MODEMS

Notice, that at Terminal B it is planned to "break down" the entire

s ignal into voice chan nels and then cross-connect the 8 thru-channels.
Y.1hat was the value of demodulating those 8 channels? All that resulted was
that some noise was added to the si gnals because each had to go through 2

(
IV - 27
additional channel MO DEMS. In fact, if this is done too many tines, the
signal becomes so noisy it is unin telligible. This problem is overcome
by what is called, "thru-grouping", which not only improves the signal­ 9}
to-noise ratio but also cuts down on the equipment requirement. Figure
IV-B-12 shows Terminal B when thru-grouping is used. The savings in
equipment a mounts to two channel M ODEMS, however, it was necessary to
add a th ru-group filter.

Even though GROUP #3 \·JEST is connected to GROLTF #2 EAST, there

is no f requency compatibility problem since all GROUPS occupy the band
60-108 kHz. The purpose of the thru-group filter is to eli minate the
noise outside of this band and prevent its t ransmission over the next
link. Since the send and receive Jaths are separate, t wo thru-group

�
filters are required for each connection. Regular channel MODEMS do
not require f ilters; however, some special 12-channel systems do (Figure
IV-B-13).

��en the number of through channels warrant, it is also possible

to use thru-super�roup filters. These are not found in the ICS; however, •
every site has se veral thru-group filter pairs.

�
4
•
t

) 4

�
•

l
�
t
•

,J
IV- 28
 (

ORIGINAL
SIGNALS
I
0
dI
34 6
" FREQUENCY ,KHZ

.. SINGLE FREQUENCY FREQUENCY,KHZ

CARRIER
0 14

� �
SPECTRUM
AFTER MODULATION
I I
at o-
II I II I ..... f:o-(Xt o
" FREQUENCY ,KHZ
O ......... ..... .....- C\J

FIGURE IV-B-1 DISCRETE TONE MoDULATION

•
t
t
t

t ( MODULATING
SIGNALINQ �
•
CARRIER

,
t .,"f..
�
OUTPUT

• L OWER � t /1 HIGHER
SIDEBAND � �� SIDEBAND
, I I I I I I I I I I .. FREQUENCY,KHZ
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
t
t FIGURE IV-B-2 CoNTIN•• US BAND MODULATION

(
IV- 29
0 4 20 40 60 80 100 1210
I I I I I I '

UPPER SIDEBAND
�

AND CARRIER
SUPPRESSED BY
FILTERING

� �

CHANNELS 2-10

•
4
t
•
�
kHz

CHANNEL MUM8E�S ) •
•

�
t

108 �
•

COMIOLIOATED
�
IYMaOL 'OR QROUP
t
( CMAMMELI INVERTED )

CMA.MEL TRANSLATIOM AMD

AaiEMILY 0' 12 CMANNELI TO
FORM BABIC GROUP 60-108 kHz

FIGURE IY·B•3

,)
IV-30
 CHANNEL
TRANSLAT1NG EQUIP MENT

( I�
;... .......I 12 I
'

I
I
•
.!......
, �
;... ...... I II l
I
I
I
+
;... ..

...I I
I
;...� 10
'j'
I
I
I
+
,;..
0 ..
� . I,

I
....... I 9 I
I
I
.,.
J.. ..

•
J."'" ...1 8 l
I I
I
I + •
"'
l
..!. .. I

'j'� _.._I 7 I
I BA SIC
• 12
AUDIO I
I
GROUP
I
+ I 60-108 kHz
• CHANNELS I
I � .A
4kHz
�

• .!,..,.
• each x � • ..I 6 I GRI UP
I

I
I + DISTRIBU" ION FRAME
(G OF)
• ( ;.. ....
I�
;... .I 5 l
• I

I
I
+
, ;.. ....
•
)..
I
..I 4 I
I
I
+
� 1 ....

• x� ...I
3 I
, I I

I
+
,!....,.
�
...I I
2
• ,!..
I

t I
I
+
..!. ....
,!.., .. I
I I
Combined Distr1. bution t CHAI' NEL
Frarte (CDF) CARRIER SUP PLIES

FIGURE IV -8- 4.
CHANNEL TRAN SLATING EQUIPMENT BLOCK DIAGRAM
SHOWING THE ASSEMBLY OF TWELVE AUDIO C HANNELS
INTO A BASIC GROUP OF 60-108 kHz

(
IV- 31
 � BASIC GROUP

60 kHz 108 kHz

"--- �

GROUP CARRIER FREQUENCIES

REPRESENTS A GROUP OF 12 TELEPHONE
(kHz)
CHANNELS WITH VIRTUAL CARRIER FRE­
QUENCIES SPACED AT 4kHz1AND IN WHICH
THE AUDIO FREQUENCIES ARE ERECT IN
THE VARIOUS TELEPHONE CHANNELS

REPRESENTS A GROUP OF 12 TELEPHONE CHANNELS �����

WITH VIRTUAL CARRIER FREQUENCIES SPACED AT 4kHz
AND IN WHICH THE AUDIO FREQUENCIES ARE INVERTED
IN THE VARIOUS TELEPHONE CHANNELS /'1 ./1 t /"1 ./1 ./1 BASIC
SUPERGROUP
REPRESENTS A PILOT FREQUENCY 412 kHz
312 360 408 456 504 552
t FREQUENCY (kHz)

FIGURE IV-8-5.
FREQUENCY ALLOCATION SHOWING A BASIC GROUP, THE GROUP CARRIER S AND THE
FREQUENCY SPECTRUM OCCUPIED BY A BASIC SUPERGROUP

- ... -- -- - ......-. - - ___ .... ... - - -

 GROUP
( TRANSLATING
EQUIPMENT

. '

5
BASIC 9 BASIC
t GROUPS -
SUPERGROUP
so-1oBkH�
312-552kHz

• I
I
� I
•
I
l
I
I
SUPERGROUP
. ( OISTRIBUTION FRAME
t ( S! F)

,
� GROUP CARRIER SUPPLIES
GROUP
•
DISTRIBUTION FRAME
• ( GOF)
r
�
FIGURE IV-8-6 •

• GROUP TRANSLATING EQUIPMENT- BLOCK DIAGRAM

SHOWING THE ASSEMBLY OF FIVE BASIC GROUPS
IN THE RANGE S0-108kHz INTO A BASIC
SUPERGROUP OF 312-552kHz

(
IV - 33
 412+�
'l
BASIC SUPERGROUP

* 1116 1364 1612 1860 2108 2356 2604 2852 3100 3348 3596 3844 4092 4340

'

� ���� �����������
6

300
3

552 804 1052

�

1300 1548 1796 2044 2292 2540 2788 3036 3284 35 32 3780 4028
4
F R EQU ENC Y (kHz) 4
4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 •

S U PE R G R O U P NUMB E R

) 4
4

L EG E N D �
4
� REPRESENTS A 6 0 CHANNEL SUPERGROUP WITH ERECT SIDEBANDS

•
� REPRESENTS A 60 CHANNEL SUPERGROUP WITH INVERTED SIDEBANDS
1
11 PILOT FREQUENCY
•
*
NO MODULATION

FIGURE IV-8-7.
FREQUENCY ALLOCATION SHOWING THE MODULATION SCHEME AND
FREQUENCY SPECTRUM FOR A 16 SUPERGROUP SUBSYSTEM

. ·:·
,I
IV- 34
 �1
40 60 80 100 120 l<HZ
I I
60 64 168)
I I I

��J-
( SB• �USB( E R E CT)
R
VE
I N_ TE D l L
------------------------
----_ ____ _ _ ___ -

6B (72)
SUPPRESSED SIDEBAND
-------

ILl: ,..1
�
108 (112)

�
ffi I / '
_J
}-
a.
i
::' 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96 100 104108 -CHANNEL CARRIERS, KHZ

��
CHANNE:LS .. INVERTEO (LOWER) SlO E ·
BANOS OF CARRIERS AT64,68 ·· ·· · ·
108 KHfCARRIERS ARE SUPPRESSEO.
-CHANNEL NO .
J2!!9876543ZL
60 BASIC GROUP (12 CHAPil lOB A. CHANNEL TRANSL ATION
"NSou,.m
FOR GROUP
""�'} .,
ASSEMBLY <If' 12 CHAN
NELS TO FORM f!ASIC
' ' GROUP, 60· 108 KIU

---------

0 500 600 100KHZ

I I I
(480)

L:::J
4

�I t
l', -- SUPPRESSED

•
SIDEBAND
�� L __ ::-::.:a
312 380 468 (52Bl
____..-.;::---- GROUP TRAN SL ATION
2 - ,....--- - ,! ,,
CARRIER(SUPPRESSEO)
.... __ __,

t
• =3�
I 516
• r, ,
I ,
(576)

_L ___...._,_
(624)
564

� e::J
�
� + r-,,
4
_L_____ ... ___�

st:J 612
.
(672)
....,

...______..'... _
(720)

-:.:.-._�
. ( GROU•
4- GROUP NO.
52

• SlOES.
CHAN/'E, B GROUP TRANSLATION .
312 BASIC SUPERGROUP(60 CHAN) 552
ASSEMBLY OF 5 GROUPS

•
, 552
TO FORM BASIC SUPER
GROUP 312· 552 KHZ

�
C. LINE GROUP F ORMATION
60

f"......_ 108
31 AS SEMBLY OF ONE GROUP
/ TRANSLATION - -- 1
AND TWO SUPERGROUPS
I WITH612KRZ - -

552�
- INTO A 132 CHANNEL
I - - I

---__
CARRIER

--
/ r-
/ 1 -- (12 TO 552i(J;Z) SPECTRUM
-
I 1 - I
•

�
1 / TRJ!NSLATION WITH _ - -
-
-1 I FOR TRAN SMI S S ION
t 1/ 120KHZ CARRIER - - I- O VER INTER SITE
1 _ II
-
t

5i :::=1
-------___,,�����EFmONI-----552
' / MICROWAVE RADIO OR
II
00
-
,/
-
CABLE FACILITIES

t �
/. : :---=: NOTE: 120KHZ a 612KHZ
12 60 300 312 DIRECT INS ERTION CARRIERS, AND UPPER
t INVERTED IN TRANSLATION PROCESS SIDEBANDS(/80-228 a
672- 720)ARE SUPPRESSED

FIGURE lV-8-8.
MODULATION PLAN

{
IV - 35
 12 VF CHAN
0-4 KHZ

12 VF CHAN
0.-4 KHZ

i
SGR
GROUP MODEM
12 VF CHAN z
MODEM
Q-4 KHZ
H
..-::::
�
\.;.)
o-
t
3 SUPERGIItOUP
12 VF CHAN CARRIER FREQUENCY
0-4 KHZ
5 GROUP
t CARRIER
1
FREQUENCIES

12 Vf �H�H
0-4 KHZ

12 CHANNEL
CARRIER FREQ UENCIES

FIGURE IV-8-9 F RE Q U E N C Y DIVISION MUTIPLEX TERMINAL

 .... 'W' � ..... - .... .._, ......._, - .., .......... ,., ,.,. -

""' '� """''

• 8 CHANNEL8 c

'e
c
..,,.
++e-
<a

FIGURE IV-B-10 SIMPLE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

c
--- - ,
• 8
r------------ ,----- -------------------, , ----- -- -

I OD
(l)

%
H A NNE L HA NNEL GJtP HANifEL )>
�!
I I #2 ..---- :z
MODEM · Z
MODEM MODEM MODEM " l'l
�F·EL I"*3"'
•••I 1
I r
r en
�I • I
�(')
I \0
QROU QJtOUP
\0
b,_ouP
I QJtP n
%
C HA NE I2
N L QJtp I DEMifl2 CHANNELl )>
MODE
z
MODEM z
MODEM
l'l
ODE r
� A ODEM
ll(wur) en
ST )
I r
GRP �
GJtP GlltP c.o ...;}
\0 #1
1 I ,-----,
I
CHANNEL # I #3 CHANNEL �l � HAN N E l HA N NE L
MODEM I ....._____, MODEM ]� MODEM M OD M
E
L _________ �-�-�-------�
FIGURE IV-8-1 1 EXAMPLE CoMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
,---------- - ----;;--
- --------- -----�

THitU•QROU,_
QltP 1
'ILTEit
.. It

QltOU ..
HANNEL ,..

MODEM TERM C
MODEM MODEM

18 CHANNELS
r-------.G It P IJ 1

HANNEL
MODEM
MODEM

L---------- --------�---------------�
FaauRE IV-B-12 UoE o, THttu GRouP FILTER
 (
GROUPS
1, 2a 3 TO WIDEBAND
SUPER&ROUP
GROUP DISTRIBUTION FRAIIE SYSTEM NO. t
TO
J!I.!!!! '!' TION FRAIIE
1
--------o ...
o- - --
----·o •
CHAIIEL
4 �-----------� 41
-u
B&U

1 .. �
-------

'
'
----------
, /
., £ � t
• '' GROUP
•

/ �"
'>" TRANSLATING
/ '-, EQUIPMENT
," ', �
/ ' I
I .. o--,---- ----� �
< - �

} , '

� , TO WIDEBAND
----- - - ..c...� SYSTEM NO. 2
• '
- -/
/-
- -------o ...
• '
, /
,
t ', , GROUPS
• 3, 4 a 5
,"
><, ' ,
,
• ( �
12 CHANNEL
,...._ _ TO
j.e ALANCED PAtt i
,
..,... .. - --- ---� ...
� - LINE
,
�- -- �
0' � SUBSYSTEM

,
�
• FIGURE IV-8-13 •

THROUGH-GROUP EQUIPMENT
•
t
I
Typical Use of Through-Group Filters

(
IV- 39
 C1 ORDER WIRES

1. General
''l
In transportable "tactical" eouipment there is normally an "orde:r
wire" or "engineering channel" associated with the VF multiplex teminal
equipment. This is not necessarily the situation in fixed-plant eouip­
ment.

There may be a regular voice channel allocated as an order wire fran

terminal to terminal. This is referred to as an "in-band" order wire.
In addition, there is usually an "out- of-band" channel that can be used for
order wires, alarm circuits, or other el"gineering nurwses. This channel
is called 11out-6f-band" since it is transmitted over a freouency band outside
of the message bandwidth. The "out-of-band" channel, often called the
"supervisory channel", does not Pass through the VF multiplex eauil1l!lent but
is combined with and extracted from the messa�e signal in the radio terminal
equipnent (Figure IV-C-1) •

-- - ------ -,
. ----- -
J I

MESSAGE SIGNAL
INPUT
(FROM !4ULTIP!B FILTER HODULII.TOR AHPLIF'IER I I Jl I
�
UNIT
EQU IPMENT)

4
SUPERVISORY 1 •
'1'RAY1�l'IT'l'ER
CHANNEL L...--- -------- - · •
•

) 4
-- - -
--
- - -- --- - --- - �
.
1 4
I
NESSAGE SIGNAL •
FILTER DFlWDULATOR
(TO MULTIPLEX
EQUIPMENT)
I
•
t
SUPERVIS ORY
CHANNEL I_ RECEIVER GR 0 UP •

F igure IV..C-1 Supervisory Channel "

.}
IV- 40
 2. ICS APPLICATION

( In the ICS "e ut of band" or supervisory order wires are used for mainte-
nance of the multiplex and radio equipment. I n a typical EE buildi ng this equip­
ment is usually separated from the tech control facility. The "in- band order
wires are used to maintain the individual circuits.
A simpler e xplanation is that the "out of band " order wires are used from
RF room , and " in-band order wires are used from tech control to tech control.

D. VOICE FRmUENCY CARRIER TELEGRAPH SYSTEt.fS (VFCT):

1. General

• • A number of telegraph channels may be obtained in a snecific

frequency band (such as that of a 4·_kHz ch annel of a multichannel te1enhone
system) by dividing this band into narrower channel bands. Each c hannel
is separated from the others by filters. The most commo nly used channel
spacing is 170 Hz, which will allow 16 teletype channels for
every 4 KHz
vo ice channel.

In some c ases, a multichannel tele�ranh s;rstem comprises two c hannel

t groups, one using channel frequencies generated directly and the other usin�
t hi�her frequencies provided by moving um�ard the frequencies of a �roun of
• channels similar to the first. '!'his fremtency transformation is accomDlisl1ed
' by a group modulator after the individual channels have been keyed or mod­
• ulated by the telegraph signals. At the distant end, the freauencies of
the high group are restored by a grouD demodulator before th� are impressed
on the ac telegraph channel receiving equipment. This procedure reduces the
. ( number of oscillator frequencies and types of filters reauired. (,.his js
• the technique used in the AN/TCC-4).

, In multichannel telegraph systems a different carrier freouenc:v is

supplied for each channel. This carrier is modulated at the sendin� end by
t operation of the (teletype) sending equipment, Which originates signals at
its c ontacts in de form. At the distant en d, the c arrier simals are de­
•
modulated (restored to direct current) to actuate the (teletyne) receiving
J instrument. Military systems generally use carriers in the voice-frequencv
t range; however, some systems use .freauencies aboYe this band. These systems
J can be operated over any good telephone-tyne circuit, wire or r-'ldio; however,
radio circuits are less suitable because they are freouently sub.iect to short
• bursts of interference and sudden changes :tn attenuartion.

In frequency-shift modulation (Fig ure IV- D·1 ) , tbe carrier is shifted

between two frequencies-one freauency represents m arkin g nulses, and the
other .frequency represents spacing pulses. �hese two freouencies are
equally spaced with respect to the midband or nominal channel .freouenc:v.
Frequency-shift modulation (FSK, frequency-shift keying) systems are the
most commonly used today.

(
IV- 41
 2. Onerating Power l,eyelf'

In an ac telegra:oh s:rstem, a channel :oower level must be uMd

tha t is high en ough to :orevent excessivesttJ"na1 distort, i on from noise or
,,
other interference. However, the power level must n ot be so hi!7h t,hat it
causes ob.iecti onable interfer>ence to other c ommu nications. A number of
channels usin� the same f�cility will overload common e n ui pment, such as
amplifiers and m odulators, if the levels are too hiP:h ('T'H 11-4C:0-2); this
results in interference bebreen channels. Uso, a :oov-rer level that is too
high may nroduce ob;ection�hle cross inductio1'1 :into nari'!J lel cmrnurd cPt,.; on
channels. (See Section D, Ch �_nter XVU:r). The ICS uses 60 rnA neutral keying
for its in-house circuits
3. Channel ta�rout

A. tynical TlC ann audio .iack layout is sho,.m in Fi gure TV- D-Q.
This arrangement faciJ :tt.ates n.!!!.t chin !" ,<�nrl testing of the DC �nd a.ud:io l:i nes.

4
t
•
4
4

) 4
4

�
•
4
•
•
•

. )
IV - 42
 (

MODULATOR
t • (
SHIFTS
FREQUENCY
UP 42.5 CPS
FOR MARK

-:-
AND DOWN
42.5 CPS
FOR S PACE.)
'

•
TELEGRAPH
� TO OTHER ---,
EQUIPME NT
CHANNEL I
CHANNEL SEND --
-{
FILTERS ---,
t __ _J
{--�� I
t
l
t

• (

,
•
TO OTHER
CHANNEL RECEIVE
f--i�E
---,
--...!
• FILTERS
--�
__ _J
I

TM 490-3240
� FIGURE I V � D •1 • Elements of frequency-shift carrier
telegraph system.

(
IV - 43
 MON

LINE EQPT.
TL
VAR. VAR.
TONE
ATTEN. ATTEN.
KEYER
(FINE)
BAT
OR
GNO
�
TO OTHER
KEYERS

.----u---v D
MO"J TO OTHER
D v--o----. RECEIVERS

MON
�

EQPT. LINE
TOI\IE
KEY­
CON­ ING
VERTER
Ui\11 T
RE­
L�==:=:=:::::.:�
CEIVER

NOTES

I. DIVERSITY TERMINAL HAS

SECOND RECEIVING CIRCUIT
IDENTICAL TO THE ABOVE
EXCEPT THE DIVERSITY COMBINER
IS LOCATED BETWEEN THE TWO
RECEIVERS AND KEYING UNIT
F I GURE I V- D ·2 •

TYPICAL DC AND AUDIO JACK CONNECTIONS

-
- -
 E. PATCH PANELS:

( A complete understanding of the various patch panels found in the

station is a key to masterinp; the entire system. "!'he use o f numerous
patch panels is one of the nrimar,r differences between tactic�l and
fixed-plant stations. Although it takes much longer to install a circuit
in a fixed-plant than in a tactical system, the natch oanels in the f:ixed­
plant provide much gre�ter reroute flexibility and test canabilit::v. 'rhe
capabilities and flexibility of fixed-nlant na.tch nanels are much �reater
than t hose of tactical equipment such as the SB-675 or 611.

A simplified diagram of several systems is sho-wn in Fi�ll"e nr"�E -1. As

each system and circuit is endneered and :Installed, it j_s possible to
assign to it specific pieces of eauipment. Ho"li'rever, dnri.nr
J operations it
' . is highly desirable to be able to qlickly monitor or chanP:e the conn�c+.:b�g
signal paths for either testing or rerouting.

The patch panels to be considered are the :

Circuit Patch Panel

Voice Frequency Patch Panel

•
t Group Patch Panel
•
• as shown in Figure IV·E ..2 •

•
Arter the circuit has been �ineered it is "hard-wired" throu.t?:h the

. ( station to connect the various items of eouirntent in the nroner arran.t?:ement

Each set of jacks on the patch panel has IN and OUT terminals and, under
.•

normal conditions, these are connected stra:i.p;ht throup;h. See Fimn-e TV· E-3
which depicts a set of voice freouency (VF) jacks.
, This jack set, for one
complete 4-wire circuit, has several features that are common to most oateh
t panels:

• 1. It is possible to monitor transmission 5.n either direet5on witltout

disturbing the circuit. (A plug inserted in the MON Jack will place the
monitoring or test device in the circuit orooerly; in parallel since this
is an audio circuit ) .

� 2. The input is connected to the output under normal conditions.

t 3. Jacks are provided for rerouting purooses (MOD IN, D!MOD OUT, EQ
OUT, EQ IN). When a jack is inserted into one of these, the no!"'l18.l IN to
OUT path is broken and the new path is through the natch cord.

Nearly all patch panels have these general characteristics, although

the name, quantity, and arrangement of jacks will varv. Detailed descriptions
ot the various patch panels will be given later; however, Fi�re IV·E •4 shows
where all of the various panels, found at ICS Sites, fit into the system.

(
IV- 45
 ·RAO I 0 MULTIPLEX

"l
EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT

SUBSCRIBERS

>1 I ·I I : � � FOR SYSTEM

RCVR DEMUX NR. 1

>-i � XMT t I MUX � t I �

AUOIO FREQUENCY
BASE BAND MESSAGE CHANNELS SUBSCRIBERS

t 1 I ;: t �I � FOR SYSTEM
)--j RCVR I DEMUX NR. 2

�
4
FIGURE JV-E-1 BASIC EQUIPMENT SEQUENCE l
4
GROUP VOICE CIRCUIT •
PATCH FREQUENCY PATCH
PANEL PATCH PANEL PANEL
) 4

�
�
4

4
•

-� -------

MULTIPLEX
RADIO CHANNEL
EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
FIGURE IV-E-2 BASIC PATCH PANELS.

.,}
'J'�T - 46
 .&.no
N I bl HlO NOH
I""' r"' � r:t'
...... � .....
� � �
dtnb3 xmna
......_
1NH� �
....... ...... �
� ""11111 �
......
�
:;
I
>
H
.....
......
-
..... ....
r ...
dtnb3 ..... xnw
1NH3 ......
..... .....
......
-
.....
1-+ � � ...
.&.no ol "' oew NOH
 IIIAOIO EQPT MUX EQPT �--
,
,�----����� ---- �,
----�C�HuAuN�N�E�L�E�Q�P�T-----------,
BB DC
COM- SUPER
Bll � .....- � GROUF .,.__ �litO UP VF ._ CKT JACK f-4--'
XMTR I+-
ic ROUF F' IELO
r- �IN ED
PATCH PATCH IPATCH JACK .JACK
rsw suss
PATC H PATCH
PANEL PANEL BAY lir IE L D I ELO �10 PRI��
IPAN EL PANEL 1+-t-- JACK
� � 1---+- !-+ � Fl ELO
�

BB

RCVR �v
)- ow
t: L...o+- PATC
SUPERVISORY
PA NEL
�
]
FIGURE IV-E-4 PATCH PANEL SE QUENCE

•
 F. DISTRIBUTION FRAMES:

( If it were necessary to run separate lines from one piece of equipment

to another to assemble the circuits in a fixed-plant installation, the office
would very soon become a rat s nest of wires, and orderly trouble shooting
would become impossible. The solution to this problem has been the use of
distribution frames.

Rather than collect the inputs and outputs of each particular type of
equipment at separate terminal points, the inputs and outputs of several
types of equi�ment are brought to a common point-the distribution frame
•
at which the signal may be "distributed" to the various pieces of equipment
as required.

Although it is not an essential feature, most distribution frames have

. '

two sides; one of which is arran�ed in vertical columns, and the other in
horizontal rows (see Figure IV�F·l). The standard procedure is to place
the cables that are terminated on the frame on the vertical side since cable
protectors are designed to be installed there. There are no definite r ules
on where the connections to other pieces of equipment will be placed.
Figure IV· F·l shows two "pin blocks" on the horizontal side. These are
used to terminate station equipment but may be used for cable if the cable
t does not require protection. The inputs and ou tpu ts of each piece of equip­
• ment are brought to the frame on "house cable" which is "permanently"
• terminated on the bottom of a horizontal bloc k or the left side of a vertical
• one. Since the pin terminals go through the block, the top or right side is
a used to make "temporary" connections between pieces of equipment by running
"jumpers". When it is desired to change the configuration of the circuit

, ( or deactivate it,
the house cabling.
the only changes needed are in the shor t jumpers, n ot in

� frames.
In large telephone exchanges it is common to have several distribution
There may be one "centrally located" called the "Intermediate

� Distribution Frame (IDF)". There may also be one at which the outside cables
terminate, the "Main Distribution Frame (MDF)". If the office is not too
• large, there may be only one frame, the "Combined Distribution Frame (CDF)".

The proper operation of a distribution frame requires adherence to some

very simple rules as to the routes to be followed when running jumpers and
the correct procedure for making connection to terminals. These have been
clearly specified in RCG LL TOG S&P Item Nr. 0701. It is strongly recommended
t
that all supervisory personnel become familiar with these standards and
frequently inspect the frame to insure compliance. A large number of tro ubles
eventually traced down to wiring pr oblems are a direct result of not following
these practices.

(
IV - 49
 )

FANNING
STRIP

HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
SIDE SIDE
4
•
•
4

) .

ANGLE �
IRONS
TM 678-403
�
F I QUR E I V- F ·1 • Section of floor-type distributing frame.
4

,j
IV - 50
 G. COMPLETE TW.iTNAL:

( A simplified block diagram of a complete ter:rnin�l is sho"m in Figure

IV• G 1. The diagram is only a guide to the arranE;ement of major items­
detailed layouts applicable to ICS will be covered later •

•
l
I

t (

l
IV - 51
 SGR 8GR 3
II'ATCN PANEL PATCH PANEL 88
PATC H
QROUP SQR2
CHANNE L PANE r-+IB� MIT
::: DEMUX OEMUX OEMOO
""
1� ot.-u:llll!llt
- +Ioiii K=
....
....._
CHANNEL GROUP 8GR1 9QR RCVR
.::: DE U X 1--- r-
M DEMUX DEMOO 1
QIM81 ...
RCVR
lNG _ ..
!-I
f-+. 2
GROUP SGRl ........
CHANNEL
� MUX MUX MOO
RCVR
I--iNETWCIN<
r--+- r-+ 1-4
+ 3

GR O U P SGR2 RCVR
:: CHANNEL 1- 1- ""
--+- MUX MUX MOO 4

1...---

THRU-GRO\JP t+- +- 11Mt T 2 1- OtPLEIER

< OW
FILTER t-- K
(.J1
.----
1\)
SUPERVISORY
f"
CHANNEL -- r+-
- .....
1--P-
{: L--
ow
CABLE TO
CONOITIONING VFCT ""TC H
CARRIER SUBSCRIBERS
E�UIPMENT MNEL
lf ERMINAL8
( 1£RT ICA L8 )
r f t COMBINED
Tt I D I 8TRI 8U TI 0 N
I ,..ANI
( HORI Z 0NTAL S )
� DC
t �
PR I NARY
t �
CIRCUIT VF
t
PATCH PATC H "ATCH PATCH
PANEL PANE L P ANEL PA NEL

FIGURE IV·G·l COMP LETE TERMINAL

 V. TECHNICAL CONTROL

f A. GENERAL:

Technical Control is a term that des cribes both a function and a

physical area. The function is the coordination, operational control,
and supervision of communication f acilities , including the ?erformance
of tests and restoral of service, in consonance with operational require­
ments and procedures. -rhe physical area is the area that contains the
equipment and faci lities that enable the technical control pers onnel to
perform these func tions •
•

The pur�ose of technical co ntrol is to provide the oroad degree of

system f lexibility essential for consistent ef fective utilization of
. ' communication resources. Application of this f unction requires the
capability to selectively utilize various combinations of available
transmission facilities and terminal equipment.

Most terminal equipment has built·in patching jacks. meters, test

points, and alarms that in themselves cons titute a type of technical
control facility. A technical control facility may be any area within a

� station where technical· control functions are implemented •

•
The technical control element to be found in many ICS sites wil l
•
t
not necessarily contain all of the equipment found in other sys tems.
However, the technical control conE igurat ion of th ese s tations shoul d
•
b e essentially the same, whether the site is l ocated at a transmission nodal

t ( point, an AUTOVON switching center,

combination of these.
an AUTODIN switching center, or any

B• TECHNICAL CONTROL FUNCTIONS:

�
Technical Control is responsible for the fu nctions out lined in t he
following paragraphs.

t
1. Supervision of Transmission Quality:

In accordance with an established program, the technical control

is res ponsible f or cir cuit, equipment, and system tests to determine the
operating condition of all circuits and equipment within the station , as
t
well as all circuits passing through the station. Circuits that have
deteriorated to the extent that service to the user is interrupted, and
circuits that consistently fail to meet prescribed standar ds, are removed
from service, and any equipment or components that are measured to be out
of tolerance are reported to the appropriate maintenance section.
Maintenance personnel are notified of any circuits or equipment not in
active use that are found to be below standards during the quality control

(
v - 1
tests. \Vith this approach, all equipment and circuits can be maintained
at a leve 1 of peak performance at all times.
''l
2. Substituting Rquipment:

\Vhen equipment failures occur on operational circuits, it is

necessary for technical control personnel to make equipment substitutions.
Generally, user service can be restored more rapidly by equiprrent substitu­
tion than by attempting immediate repairs on faulty equipment. Equipment
substitution also provides the opportunity for effecting any maintenance,
sc heduled or unscheduled, that might otherwise be impractical d ue to •

operational requirements.

3. Coordinating Maintenance:

Technical control personnel are involved in almost every aspect

of operation at the ICS site. All user circuit requirements are known
to these personnel. The in;:mts and out�uts of most equil)ment appear at
patch bays and testboards in the technical control area. All order-wires
terminate on patch panels in t he technical control area. For these
reasons, the personnel at the technical control are in an ideal position to
•
determine faulty circuits, detect equipment failures, and coordinate the t
accomplishmen t of repairs \vith the appropriate stat ion maintenance
•
sections. This includes guidin6 maintenance personnel to the defective •
equipment, reporting observed trouble symptoms, patching around the affected I
circuits (equipment substitution), assigning priority to the repair work, 4
and coordinating maintenance activities with connected technical control
facilities when circuits must be interrupted.
) .
4. Accomplishing On-Call Pat ches:

A technical control may be required to provide an on-call patch

�
in cases where switching facilities are not otherwise available. For
example, the requirement may be for provision of circuitry for a
TElliCON--a type of on-call patch. The technical control facility tasked
•
to provide the service is responsible for all arrangements incidental
to completing the circuit to the desired station, for coordination as
may be required during the course of the on-call patch or TELECON, and for
coordination in the restoration of the circuitry to its original functions
upo n completion of the call. •

s. Telegraph and Audio Channel Trouble Isolation:

Each technical control is responsible for the receive sid e of all

circuits at t he installation. If it is determined that the circuit is
not operating satisfactorily, the personnel at the technical control
will analyze the c ircuit to determine the trouble. When it is determined
that a circuit is faulty, the technical control at the receive station
will proceed as follows:

,,)
v- 2
 a. Coordinate with the dis tc.nt technical control to stop
traffic and tnake necessary tests to determine the quality of the circuit
( between ttl.� connected technical control facilities. If the circuit
does not meet standards, reston.: service to tL.e user on a spare channe 1
or by pn::emption of a lower priority circuit when a spare channel is not
available.

b., If the channel between the conne cted technical controls

meets quality standards, the [.>ersonnel at each technical control concern e d
yJill analyze the circuit betvJeen the ststions and the connected user t o
.. locate the trouble. ''Jhen circuit o r ec;uipt'1ent repairs have been c o mple te d ,

and \-.:'hen the circuit r,1eets quality standards, normal service will be
restored to the user.

t �
c. ·;lhen a circuit passes through a number of technical control
facilities, for co!lnected circuits.
each is res;;onsible Hov7evcr, the
first technical control serving the compla ining user is res0onsible for
coordination until service is restored to the user (the user is responsible
for notification of technical control tvhen trocJble a·Hears on his receive
sid e ) .

F.. Cir c u it Rerouting

•
l During extended outages, individual circuits are re r o u t e d over other
I facilities in accordance with their restor2tion r>riority. Every circuit is
• assigned a restoration Jriority in accordance with JCS �olicy. To assist
personnel at the technical control in visualizing the !;JOSsible reroute paths

. ( ava ilable, circuit layout cards, block diagrams, and route maps are
avail<.ble at each technical COtitrol facility, showing trunks between con­
nected stations and any apj?ropri ate extensions that would permit a reroute

� to be made.

l 7. Circuit Activations:

• The technical controller activates circuits upon order of DCa

to satisfy requirements of the military departments (and other government
age ncies). It is the responsibility of the technical controller (an d
particularly the technical control designated by DCA as coordinat ing
station) to carry out the orders of DCA and to insure that all units
t i nvolved in the activation do their part. If other units do not complete
their portion of the required 1�ork, it is the responsibility of th e
.. technical controller to see that the matter is brought to the attention
of higher authority. In like manner the technical control d eactivates
and rearranges circ uits, as directed by DCA.

C. "H 500'' CONCEPT OF TECHNICAL CONTROL:

You will often hear reference to the "H soon concept of t echnical
control and may well wonder just what it is. This method of referring
to the technical control facility has arisen because the Defense Com­
m unication Agency ·�mblication specifying the design criteria and

(
v - 3
organization of the facility was, until recently, "DCS Technical Control
Engineering Criteria", DECEO BNGR PUB H 500-12-64 (this manual was recently
designated <lS DCA Circulur 370-175-4 but is still referred to by most < ',
,•
technicians as "H 500" ) . "H 500" does not cover the mechanical construction
details of the equipment, but rather it is confined to specifying levels
that will be present at various patch panels, what patch panels will be
provided and how they will be arranged, \·Jhat caoabilities each patch
panel must posses3, etc.

Figure V-1 sho\vs the general technical control functional flow as

specified by "H 500". ..

Briefly, some of the more outstanding features of "H 500" are:

1. Patch ing and Testin g Arrangements:

a. Cable Testboard (called the Primary Patch Panel in ICS )-Used

to provide test and patching capabilities for local subscriber inter­ •
connects.

b. Voice Frequency Patch Bay - Permits direct access to the input

and output of the mul tiplex equipment before any conditioning is performed.
4
c. Circuit Patch Bay - All voice frequency circuits are conditioned •
to appear in the circuit patch bay at equal le vels (-2 dbm), and Eone I

s ignalling appears as DC control signals (E&M leads). These "equi-leve 1 4

patch bays" are not being installed in Phase 3 ICS sites.

d. DC Patch Panel - All teletype circuits have appearance

) 4

permitting monitoring or loop testing of both the line a nd the subscriber

loop. �

e. Group Patch Bay - Provides the capabi lity for rerouting G'�OUPS. t
4
2. Order T.Jires:

a. Local Voice Party-Line Order ;:,!ire - Essentially an internal

system from the r adio and multiplex facility to the technical control
facility.
•
b. Express Voice Order Fire - Interconnects selected technical
control facilities. Nay have automatic interconnection capability. ..

c. Party-line Data Order \Vire - For the dissemination of cir cuit

orders and circuit layout infor mation.

d. Status Report Circuit - Connected to the responsible Operations

Center.

3. Alarms:

a. Stations.
•
0\1

v - 4
 b. Radio.

( c. Multiplex.

d. Equipment.

4. Standard !.eve ls:

a. Voi ce Frequency Patch Bay:

Transmit - 16 dbm

Receive + 7 dbm

b. Circuit Patch Bay:

Transmit -2 dbm

Receive -2 dbm

c. Primary P8tch Bay:

As required to ::>roperly interface tdth suhscriber.

I
I S. Equipment Cri teria:
•
a. Standard names are given for labelling the vari ous j a ck
� ( appearance s .

b. Test equipment requirements a r e given.

6. Signalling:

Standard s ignalling frequency wi l l be 2600 Hz wi th an E.d.M

lead arrangement •

(
v - 5
 V OICE• VtiCE PlUM -
VF Vf'
FREQUENCY -2 F R EQ PATCH --
E&M E8M
TERM INAL ---- TERM BAY 1--
EQUIPMEN1 EQ PT
(AS

R E QUIRED)
( AS
�EQO)
RADIO- +7dbr
MULTIPLEX VF VF
-15dbr MULTIPLEX -16dbr
INTER-
CONNECTION EQU IP M EN T
CI RCU I T
LINK f.asdbr PATCI1
4 BAY

< VF
PATCH
BAY

l1
V O ICE
DIGITAL
-8dbr-37dbr ow
-30dbr-315dbr TERMIN,�L
VIA EQUIPMENT
SUPER- GROUP
GROUP CIRCUIT
�}
PATCH BAY
joe�
SUP ERGROUP/GROUP ,.---
PATCH BAY VF
� DC VF
PADS � patch TELEGRAPH
oc MULTIPLEX
'--- tfare

rr
1 NOTE: OPt IGINA L FIGUPtE DC

RADI O MODIFIED TO O N- PART

P REMISE OF
XMTRS
AND
AGR EE WITH ICS
� w
TG
� oc
CABLE
f-+ REMOTE
� TG
SUBS TESTBOARD
RCVRS TERMINOLOGY. SUBS
L:J
FIGURE V - 1 .TECHNICAL CONTROL FUNCTIONAL FLOW DIAGRAM

- .... ----- --
 D. OUTLINt: OF TROUBLE SHOOTIN:J i>NJJ CIRCUIT RE.:>TOR..-\.'fiON RE.::iPOJ.SIJ3ILITIES
OF A COtffP.OLUR:
( 1. Coordination.

2. Isol&tion.

3. Restoration.

'r.WUBlli SHOOTING PROCfmurmS

1. Telegraph Circuit

a. Upon notification from sub:

(l) Initiate trouble ticket and Dssign n uwber

(2) Notify distDnt s1:b through tiistant technical control

(3) Isolate trouble

(4) If channel trouble:

(a) Advise distant en d

(b) aestore cir cuit by alt-route

(c) Test bad channel

(
(d) If bad:

1. Have break-out points check

.!• C heck local carrier a n d have distant end do sar.1e

3. Coordinate repair

4. Coordinate with user and restore to normal

channe 1.

(e) If good:

1. Have distCl.nt end sub t est

3.• Check si:�nal and coordinate �.vi.th distant

control to restore.

(4) If all channels bad :

(a) Log out system

(,
v - 7
 (b) Adv ise distant end sto:) treffic on all cha nnels
and test.
l
(c) Advise local users

(d) Have Voice and VFCT MUX terminals check equipraent

and channe1.

(e) Have Rad io Link Terminal check path

(f) Check test from distant end

(g) L.estore user service, by alt-route in accordance

with restoration priorities, if tone pack no t restored in 15 min.

2. Aud io Circuit Trouble Isolation

a. Initiate trouble ticket and assign number

b. Notify distan t sub throu6h distant tech control

c. Isolate trouble

d. If between control and sub:

(1) Test local distribution system

(2) Isolate trouble

)
(3) Advise appropriate mainten ance to repair

e. If between con trol &nd distant end:

(1) Have distant end tone channel

(2) If channel bad:

(a) l{estore service on al t-route

(b) Contact break-out points and isolate f

(c) Have proper maintenance repair

(d) Restore circuit to normal channel

(3) If channel good:

Have distant end check link to sub and restore.

)
-s�
v � a
 �EROUTING PP. OCEDUf'.ES

( "
1. Individual controller has responsibility for initi�ting
reroute action.

2. aestore by restoration �riority and according to �CAC 310-55-1.

3. reroute aids.

a. Systems diagra�s

b. Patch panel labeling

c. Circuit record cards

. '

d. Use complete circuit/system numrier to aid identification

. (

(
v - 9
 VI CIRCUIT CONDITIONING

( A. �\'1llAT IS IT?

Some of the functions of circuit conditioning are:

1. Changing the amplitude of the signal.

2. Changing the form of the signal.

3. Special operations on the signal.

The first two functions are the means by which the signal is made
to comply with the standards specified in H-500. Attenuators and amplifiers
are used extensively to adjust the amplitude of the signal. The form of
the signal is changed when, for example, 20 Hz ringing current i s converted
to a 2600 or 1600 Hz tone for transmission. Some of the special operations
that are performed are 4-wire to 2-wire conversion in hybird units and echo
suppression on extremely long circuits. Also in cluded under special opera­
tions would be impedance conversion, extension of circuits to subscribers
beyond the normal service radius, and reduction of delay dis tortion.

B. HHY?

The primary reason for conditioning has already been mentioned - to

. ( meet DCA standards as specified in H-500.

necessary?"
Bu t you might ask "Why is
The rationale for having all circuits meet the same
that
standards
is to assist the technical controllers in performing their func tions of
supervision and testing of quality, substitution of equipment, on-call
and cir cuit reroute patching, and trouble isolation. Can you imagine the
confusion if every circuit appearing on the patch panel had i ts own
peculiarities? The controllers patching capability would be severely
1 irnited to those circuits that "happened" to have the exact same
character is tics.

Another major reason for circuit conditioning is "interfacing".

This is a much-overworked term. Basically it means get ting the signals
from two different systems to a common set of specifications so that
they may be connected together. This is a relatively common and easily
accomplished task for the typical fixed-plant systems. However, here
in Vietnam, we are con tinually faced with the " tactical-fixed-p lant
interface" problem. A large amount of effort has gone into solving these
problems either through equipment modification or the arrangement of
conditioning equipment in a special or unusual manner. Although many
of these problems have been identified and solved, new ones are continually
appearing. Some specific interface p r oblems will be discussed in Chapter IX.

(
VI - 1
Co CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT:

1. Attenuators - A passive element used to reduce the amplitude of "l

the signal. The attenuator or "pad", as it is often called, is usually
in the form of an adjustable H or T-pad that maintains the same value of
input and output impedence while allowing various amounts of attenuation
to be obtained by changing the ''straps" on the resistance elements. (See
Figure VI-l)o

2o Amplifier • An audio frequency amplifier is used to increase the

strength of the signal0 It is normally adjusted by a variable contr ol.

3. Single Fre4�ency Signalling Unit:

The SF Unit is used to place a tone on the line in response to

a DC sig nal on the "M'• lead (transmits) and to place a DC signal on the
"6'" lead (receive) when a tone Q.n the line is detected (See Figure VI...2).
The E&M leads may come directly from a switchboard with special trunking
equipment, from a ringdown converter, or from another SF Unit

4. Ringdown Converter:

The E&M to 20�ycle signal converter connects a 2MWay, 20Hz

rin g�own circuit (or equivalent) to a signalling system over an M l&ad
when a signal is received from the ringdown trunk cir cuit. Also, it
receives signa·ls over a n E lead from a signalling circuit and transmits
(See Figure VI-3 )o
20 Hz signals to a ringdown trunk circuit.
equipment may be arranged to operate with signalling frequencies other
This
) 4
than 20 Hz, when required.

s. 4-wire Terminating Set-Hybrid:

A hybrid is a network arran gement that splits the energy in one

path between two adjacent paths while offering high impedence between
opposite paths (Figure VI�). In telephone systems such a device is used
to join a two"wire circuit and a four"wire circuit when the paths to the
hybrid are connected as in Figure VI-4. There is a loss caused by the
hybrid since the signal energy in each incoming path is divided between
the desired output path and either the balancing network or the REC
path input connection.

For proper operation, paths connected to opposite sides of the

hybrid should have the same impedence characteristics. Meeting this re­
quirement is the purpose of the "artificial line" or "balancing networ�·
as it is commonly called• Most terminating sets have a built-in balancing
network that pro vides a compromise impedence. However, the .. balancing
of a hybrid" can become quite critical. For this reason the balancing
network is often adjustable or there are provisions for connecting a
precision balancing network (Figure VI-5)•

,�)
VI ... 2
 6. 4-way, 4-wire Bridge:

( It is often necessary to connect more than two subscribers together.

Multipoint circuits are very common here in Vietnam. In such a circuit all
subscribers must be able to hear and talk to all others and be able to signal
them. If the additional subscriber is merely connected into the 4-wire
circuit as it goes through the technical control he will not have the full
capabilitjP.s required (See Figure VI-6).

It is possible to obtain full service with a simple "solder-dro p

bridge" if i t is done at the 2-wire level (See Figure VI-7). This arrangement
usually works quite satisfactorily to obtain the talking paths; h owever, there
is considerable difficulty in keeping the circuit balanced well enough for
proper signalling operation.

A possible solution to the pro blem is to use a 4-wire bridge. These

normally are designed to have 4-le,ss but some in the ICS have 6. Referring
to Figure VI-8 it can be seen that the principle of the bridge is to pr ovide
a low loss path in the proper directions while providing high isolation
against feedback. Of course, a hig h price is paid for dividing the signal
power. The loss of the locally fabricated 4-4 bridges now used in ICS is
14-15 db on the low loss paths while providing over 60 db isolatio n.

If a leg of the bridge is not used, it is essential that it appear

to the other legs as if it is. This is accomplished by placing a 600 ohm
resistor across both the send and receive sides of all unused legs. This
is called "terminating" the unused legs.

. ( 7. E&M Signal-Lead Extension Units (DXl and DX2):

These signal-lead extension units are designed to interconnect two

trunk circuits, when the distance b etween trunk circuits exceeds their
operational limits. They are also used to interconnect an E&M signalling
circuit (single-frequen cy unit) to a distant trunk circuit. E&M signal-lead
extension circuits are usually required where the connecting facility (Cable)
resistance exceeds 25 ohms. These circuits, which have been coded DXl and
DX2, are always used in pairs (a DXl bein g connected to the trunk relay cir­
cuit and the DOC2 being connected to a single-frequency si gnalling unit or
other E&M signalling circuits). The maximum signalling range between E&M
signal-lead extension circuits is 5,000 ohms. See Figure VI-9 fer
block diagrams of these units.

8. Isolation Rela ys:

DC isolation relays are used frequently in teletype systems when it

is desired to have one de signal control another. They are quite simple in
principle (See Figure VI-10). Usually both normally - open and normally -
closed contacts are provided on the output to permit greater flexibility.
The bias winding is used to adjust the sensitivity of the relay. Shown i n
dotted lines i s a variable resistor in the input and output circuits. These
are used to control the current in these two circuits and are found as 1nteg-

(
VI - 3
gral parts of ICS VFCT equipment (the use of isolation relays will
be covered in Citaptcr X nrc Circuits and Patch Panels").
'l
9. Hegeaerative Hepeaters:

''The l! rillli.t ry f u,1c ti on of the re generative telegraph

repeater is to retime and retransmit received signal impulses
restore d to their original strength. It is capable of receiving
\>'ithou t error any set of signals that would be satisfactori).y
received by an ordinary teletypewriter, and of sending these same
si g.:1als proc;.uced by the sending teletypewr iter at the circuit
*
terninal11.

Hany of the teletype cryptological de vices a ct as

regenerative repeater·s. This ex;)lains \vhy crypto equipment
will often work over a circuit aot good enough for unsecure equip­
ment.

10. llelay r·:qulaizers:

Delc:,y equalizers are installed in s eve ra l ICS sites

in SU')port of iJJTOI�IN. Secure voice circuits also requir\! delay
equalization, but these equalizers are usu<::.lly provided at the
secure voice S\Jitch and at the subscriLer1s tenainal.

The ilelay experi enced by di ffere Llt freqnencies within

the message b<<ldwidth is not constant. The princijjlc of the dela y
equalizer is to add s qf fici ent delay in the <l n pr o ;)r i a tc frequency
r2.n,'i�s to make the total delay const.-wt acro s s the mesc;agc bandwidth.
) .

11. l'ulsc Linlc He?eatcr:

rulsc L ink Jtepeate.cs 'der� originally install ed in ICS sites

to interface the E&H leads >vhen two SF U;lits vere O?crated b;:,ck to bc.tck.
Afte r insatllation, it was di scovered they were not really n ecessary.
Page Comnunicatlons Engineers issued a Field Engineering \vork Urder
(FE\vO 226) modifying the I'Ll{1s to functJ.on as isolation rela ys for the
instances vJ hen H leads are extended from the EE to the subscriber and AC
sip;nals are b ei ng introduced on this lead. These AC signals mr..y i1Eer­
fer:� with SF U n i t operation and must be isolated. i\e fer to LL S&l' lten•
i�o. 0214, for installation and use of these modified PL1{1 s .

12. Thru-Grou? l<'ilters:

Although you might not think of thru-group fi lters as

conditioning equi1lll'len t, they are. The fi ltering a ctJ.on taking place
is a bandpa::;s from 60-108 kHz to eliminate the noise above and below
the frequeilcy range of the grou-;:>. The thru-group filter may also 1.nclude
a rejecti('Ll filter net\vork to block the group pilot if necessary.

"� From PrincLples of Electrici t'.{ h.nplil.;ablc to T � l enhoue and Teleg1·aph

Vlork, A.T. ur. Co.. , 1961

,J
VI-4
 13. Echo Suppressors:

( system.
There are many possible sources of echos in a complex communication
A common example is an unbalanced hybrid. Echo s are normally not
objectionable since they occur so quickly; however, if the circuit is an ex­
tremely long one, such as through a satellite or the undersea cable, the echo
can cause extreme degradation of service. Echo sup�tessors are installed o n
the satellite circuits to prevent this problem.

14. Limiters:

.. I n carrier systems, momentarily large peak values of signal power

might cause poo r communication if networks called "limiters.. were not employed.
Limiters automatically reduce the large peak values. A limiter is used in the
voice-frequency channel, for example, to prevent overloading of the common
transmitting amplifier.

The limiters commonly used in telephone carrier equipment are

copper-oxide varistors or germanium-crystal diodes. When a limiter is placed
on a circuit it is important to be able to remo ve it quickly and easily
without disturbing the circuit operation. This may be done with either
special "lifting jacks" or key switches.

D. TYPES OF CIRCUITS:

The basic equipment that is used in too is not very much different
� ( ICS
in principle from that used with transportable t actical systems. The primary
difference is that the various pieces of conditioning equipment are not
built into the multiplex terminal. Rather, they are available as "buildi11g
blocks" that are arranged as necessary to assemble the s peclffc type of
circuit being installed. In this section some of too types of circuit s
found here in Vietnam will be described.

1. Common Characteristics:

The characteristics common to most ICS circuits are those specified

in H500:

a. All VF mult iplex appears at the same levels:

Receive +7 dbm

Transmit -16 dbm

b. In-band single frequency signalling is u sed.

c. In TOG's built prior to Phase III all multiplex channels have

an appearance on the equi-level CKT PATCH PANEL as well as on the VF PATCH

t
,,,
VI - 5
PANEL. Both sides of the circuit are at - 2DBi'l on the CKT PATCH Pi'.NEL.
All signalling appears as DC control signals on the E-M leads at the CfCT
P.ATCH PANEL. .
.:,
''�

d. Phase III Et: buildings do not have equi-level Cf\."T P.ATCH

PANEU>. The E. and M leads appear on the VF .t'ATCH PANbL which is a six
wire layout.

2. Standard Circuit

There are several types of circuits that occur so frequently in

the ICS that they have been "standardized". These have been selected as
standard circuit c onfigurations for technical control layout and are
described in RCG LL S&P Item Nr. 0241. The details as to types of equip­
ment to be used, their values, and the levels to be set are given there.
For this reason, the o nly equipment shown in the sketches in this section
will be that essential to the discussion. All the ampli fiers and attenua­
tors used to obtain the desired levels will not be sho'l-m.

3. ICS Signalling:

Signalling is accomplished in the ICS by transmitting either

a 2600Hz or loOO Hz tone over the V.F. channel bet,veen sing le fre­
quency s ignallins units in the circuit termin<' 1 tech control f.,: ci 1 ities.
The standard signalling frequency is 2600Hz; hoh'ever, due to the wide
use of 1600 Hz signalling in tactical systems, provisions have been made
to incorporate this signalling frequency also in the ICS. The terminal
signalling units, callP.d SF units,
described in subsequent paragraph.
are arranged for "E&.\1" signalling as
) .

4. The "E&t"t" Signalling System:

Transmission of ringin5 signals over the 4-\-.'ire VF channel is most

efficiently accomplished by using a VF tone of 2600 Hz in the voice band.
At either VF channel terminal the 2600 Hz signalling, tone is converted to
DC signals more suit&ble for use by the S\.Jitchboard trunk equipment. These
signals are transmitted over 2 wires separate from the voice path between
the switchboard trunk circuit and the VF channel signalling unit. These
leads are designated "M" for signalling to\\'ard the VF channel and "E" for
signalling toward the switchboard trunk circuit. The entire signalling
system is call "ES,:H" signalling and the 2600Hz unit is called a 6
2 00Hz
SF (single frequency) unit. Among the advantages of such a system is
the ease with which the E�<M lead signals can be adapted to many types of
trunk equipment. The basic E&t-1 signalling layout is sh own in Figure VI-1 .
2
In this c onfiguration the E 7:1'1 leads are exte:lded directly into the
Slvitchboard, and all in and out signalling is ac complish ed by de signals
on these lines. The E and M lead conditions used in th e ICS for ringdown
circuits are not those established as standard by IX::A. (:3ee Chart on
next page f or ICS and standard E&M lead configurations).

;�>
VI - f:
 "M'' "E" I
I
CONDITION TOI,JARD SF TONE FJ:WM .SF
( '

ON HOOK GRD ON GRD

I
OFF HOOK OPEN OFF OPEN

ICS E-M LEAD (Ringdown Circuits Only)

• •

"M'' "E"

CONDITION TQf}ARD SF TONE FROH SF

i
I

I
I
ON HOOK GRD ON OPEN

OFF HOOK BATT

----OFF GRD

. ( STANDARD E-M lEAD

Thus in the idle or off hook state we, in the ICS , have tone-off
the line. (Note: Off hoo k is the idle condition for rin.;down c ircuits only).

Why do we have this non-standard situation? Basically it was brought

about by the requirement to interface 2600 Hz a nd 1600 Hz signalling on
the ICS • N o pulse link repeaters \\'ere provided in Phases I and 2, thus
requiring the interface to be accomplished as shown below (See VI-B-11
and Figure VI-11 for discussion of pulse link repeaters):

gp -2 14P -16

2600 1600
FCC VF FCC
17 SF SF JK 17

16 IE M 14P -2 2P CIIM El 7P ... 7

Note how the E and M leads are "rolled" (reversed) between the SF units.
Now if the standard E and M lead conditions \\'ere used, each M lead w ould

(
VI - 7
be keyed by "opens" and "grounds" from the E lead which is fine, but the
standard condition is E lead grounded in the off hook state (no tone).
Thus if the standard option were used this E lead ground would
to the second SF unit's M lead. Therefore since a ground on an H lead
be connected
' )
is an on hook condition, incoming off hook would be sent out as an on
hook co ndition an d we have falsely signalled. For this reason then, ICS
E lead conditions are grounded for on hoo1:<: and open for off hook.

Bear in mind that this discussion has covered E&vl lead conditiona for
ringdown circuits only. Dial circuits utilize the standard E&"l lead option.
Phase 3 provides pulse link repeaters for working �F sets back to back and
E and H lead conditions co uld be standard. In Phase 3 sites, the E and M
leads will be standard, but in Phase 1 and 2 sites the changeover may not
be made. It would require modification of all ring down converters an d
all SF sets, except those used on dial circuitso

S. 2 ;.Jire Ringdown Circuit:

The E'l.\1 signalling system may be adapted to 20 Hz signalling for

use in tacical switchboards and other subscriber equi;_ment requiring a 20 Hz
signal by using a converter in the 2-Hir<:: line of the S'VJitchboard trunk
as shown in Figure VI-13. 20 Hz is now used to signal in both directions
with the E&M leads operating between the 20 Hz converter and the SF unit
as shown. �·lhen t,his signalling sys tern is used tr.ere is tone on the 1 ine
only when a subscriber is signalling with 20Hz (i.e; tone-off while idle).
All existing tactical manual switchboards in Vie tnam use 20 Hz signalling.
) .
6. Operator Direct Dial Circuit (ODD):

The new dial central offices (DCOs) being in stalled in Vie tnam use
a form of E&M signallin(; directly into a dial trunk relay equipment. Figure
VI-14 ar)plies to the E&M system used in dial-to-dial trunk operation. While
the line is not in use, on hook, there is ground on the t-'; lead and t one on
t he line, ie; tone-on while idle. (note: on hook is the idle condition for
d ial circuit s). When the operator plugs into the lin e, the tone is removed
and the distant end receives a ground which causes the dial equipment to
seize a line. The de dial pulses are converted int o tone pulses which are
detected at the distnnt end as de dial pulses used to activ�te the dial
equipment.

7. E & M Lead Extension:

�vhen the cable resistance between the E&t\1 3ign&llint; unit and
the subscriber trunk relay equipment exceeds 25 ohms per wire it is
necessary to use E&M signal lead extension circuits (DX-1 and DX-2). The
use o f these c ir cuit s wi 11 extend the oper""tional liflli ts of the E&M
signalling t o 5000 ohms. These units are always used in pairs with t he

,,}
VI - 8
 DX-1 at the s ub scriber trunk relay equipment and the DX-2 at
the E&M sF signalling unit. Figure VI-15 shows a method of
( using DX units in a trunk eire u.it.

8. J.tulti:point Voice Circuits:

In a multino.int circuit, it is imnortant that all

subscribers .be able to signal each other as well as talk. The
most sa tisfactozy manner to accompl ish this is with H 4-Hire,
4�vay b ridge (see Figure VI-16). In an emergency, it is possible
to ma.ke a simrle two-wire tap by converting the circuit down to
two wires at the teclmical control; hmvever, this usually results
in poor signalling nerformance. Note that all unused legs of the
4-4 bridges mus t be te rr.ri.na ted by a 600 ohm in1ped ence.

9. Signnll.ing Frequency In terface:

Although most of the ICS technical controls are equip­

ped ••ith both 2600 and 1600 Hz signalling units, t here e"r� still
son-e situo.t ions v<here it is necessary to make a conversion of
sign;:,lling fre·quency. This can be accomplished by the use of two
SF units if the E&H leads are used to control each o ther (this
subject was briefly discussed l::l paragraph 4, p<�ge VI-7). Using
t he moLtified Collins signalling equipment ln t he ICS .EJ:<: buildings
it is .,ossible to intercotHect the E lead to the H lea d directly
(l''igure VI-l7b).

10. 4-Wire Subscribers:

(
There <<re s e ve ra l types of subscribers he re i n Vietnam
A co:r:unon example of this is the full­
'":1o desire a 4-"'·ire ttdrop".
daplex data circu it. PrC'tViding such service is no problem in the
ICS unless sign:1lling is required.

If E&H sig.1alling is to be enployed, the circuit is

relatively s imrle (Figure VI-18a). Hmvever, if 20 H:;:; signall ing
is required, it is necessary to use two ringdmvn converters and
con·1ect the Ef1l1 lead s to the appro'?riate u:1it (Figure VI-18b).

(
YI-9
 l

INPUT OUTPUT

Y-PA D 4TTENUATOR

INI'UT OUTPUT
•

N-PAD ATTENUATOR
FIGURE Yl•l• AD�U8TABLE ATTENUAT.R8 (STRAPPED FOR 408 lOll )

SIGNALINI TOME
GENERATOR
) .

M LEAD

�
TRANSMIT
CARRIER
SUBSCRIBER UltiT
IUCE lYE

IIQitALIN8
IANDPA88

ETECTOit
E LEAD

FIIUR£ Yl-2 SIMPLIFIED SF UNITe

)
VI -10
(

TO CONTINUOUS
RINGING
CIRCUIT

IICONVERTE :- -
EQM TO 20 CPS
-��I - - -,
T

J� �G� �i
T ERMI A I {$ : l I : tl,-,ih I RINGDOWN
TRUNK

VI -::- I
AND MULTIPLEX
' R
OR
CABLE LINE

I
I
I
M

I I
( I
SIGNALING
UNIT
USING
EQM I
I
I
LEADS
I -::"
E

__ _______ j
F I 8UJtE VI - 3. SIGNAL CONVERTERS - E&M TO DC AND E&M TO
20 CPS, TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT

(
VI - 11
 XMT
PATH l

2-WIRE LINE BALANCtNC NETWORK

TO SUBSCRIBER (ARTIFICAL 2-WIRE LINE)

ltEC
LOW IMPEDANCE PATH
PATH

FIGURE Vle4 HYBRID

�------ ---------,
I I
I
I r-------------
�}
.R
---..
-+----��
60011 TRSG
TO 4-WIRE LINE

I I
I
I
I
I COF
)
I I I
I
I A
I f
I I
__._ �

� ....,.rvvv'-, � )-......., I
I I
I COMPROMISE I CROSS CONNECT
j
'I NETWORK
BALANCING TO PRECISION
NETWORK
I
I I
I I
'( I �
I
I
I

---,A
L-----------------r-----��
4}soon.
TO
AEc
4-WIAE LINE

I
HYBRID COil
L j
---- - ---- - --- -

FIGURE VI - 5. FOUR-WIRE TERMINATING SET

}
VI - 12
 lUI
- ...
, lUI
( A.
..,.
'
l -
I
( •
8UB C

SUI C CAN HEAR AND TALK TO ONLY SUI A

leTt: StiiLt LI N E RlPREitNTI A 'AIR 0' CONOUCTORI

FI.VRl Vl•i lMPROPiR MULT1PGINTlNQ•

8U8 lUI

A •

8UI C

NOT£: StNILl LINE RlPRI81NTI A PAIR 0' CONOUCTOal.

t FIIURI Vl•7 "SOLOIR•DROP SRIOQ£" Ul£0 IN MULTIPIINT CtR�UJT.

(
Lll 3

..-
......

LEI 4 LEI 2
......_

_.... . LOW•LOII
PATH
LEI 1 ---·HI IH• LIII PATH

( FIIURl Yl-8 4-WAYt 4•WIRE 8RIOI£t FUNCteo•�L OIAIRAM.

VI - 13
 DECEO ENGR PUB
H500-12-64 31 OCT 1964
REPEAT REPEAT )
COIL COIL

T R UNK CIRCUIT T CABLE PAIR T T RUNK CI RCUIT

.I .:::c

VOICE VOICE
PATH ill, ._I Ill PATH

IDLE
I BUSY
R R

r-�l- ---- j!= _ ----- __ a A

.., r
A B
- - -----
-

IDLE
I R
IDLE I I
I I NEUT
_t
NEUT
I
I _tB USY
CKT
I I CKT BUSY

I I I
I I I
I I
I
I I I
I
I I
I I
I
I I
BAT --u:J I
I
I
-------- l
I 8
---- - J.q_X_!l_--- -- - j
E aM SIGNAL-LEAD EXTENSION CI RCUIT
-
E M SIGNAL -LEAD EXTENSION CIRCUIT
L __ ---- - _ J..D..l'..!..l
_ .J !_ _ - - - -

IDLE -ON-HOOK DIFFE RENTIAL RELAY RESPONDS ONLY TO

BUSY-OFF-HOOK SIGNALS F ROM OTHER END OF CIRCUIT

1
INTERCONNECTION OF TWO TRUNK CIRCUITS )
REPEAT 4-WIRE
COIL TERMINATING
T R U N K CIRCU IT SET I .,. T
T CABLE PAIR T RECEIVE
I 41 R
.I TO MULTIPLEX
CHA N NEL O R
VOICE
._]
4-WIRE CABLE
PATH Iq CIRCUIT
BUSY � T'

R R � R

r--
M E
-- - - - ---- -
B
- - -
A
-, r-
A B
-- - - -- ----- -- - 1
1 I
1
��;-��
IDLE
R I CKT
I
_t
NEUT I I ..
:
M
CKT
I BUSY I BUSY+ I

•IH•I.._j l �
-
_

I I I
I oLE
I I
r'l. TO SF
I
I I
I
l DIFFERENTIAL
RELAY
SIGNAL
1 UNIT
I I
I
I I
I I � 1 I .. E
I I BIASED TO IDLE
I I p BAT

I E aM SIGNAL -LEAD EXTENSION CIRCUIT I : E8 M SIGNAL- LEAD EXTENSION CIRCUIT

X l
L __ ---- ---- j � .!_ __ ___ __ __ _! L ________
D �
.!_ ��
---- --- _j

EXTENSION OF SIGNAL LEAD FUNCTION

FIGURE VI - 9. E&M SIGNAL-LEAD EXTENSION CffiCUITS,

TYPICAL ARRANGEMENTS ,)
VI - 14
 {

l'
_}I /•,,\ ------+---b
__

, �'·' \,
/ . .
CONTR OL 81QMAL

t
v

" I�'
)��'
-1 OUTPUT
8 IQ N A L
f <!)�---'' '

FIGURE Vl-10 OC ISOLATION RELAY.

r---------- ---
- l
I PULSE-LINK
I
REPEATER I
CIRCUIT I
'
I
PULSE-LINK PULSE-LINK I
CIRCUIT EAST CIRCUIT WEST
( I

E
WEST E
EAST
SIGNALING
SI GNALING
SYSTEM
M SYSTEM
M
I
I
I
I
- I
I
I J I
L _______
__ ___ _
_j

F t 8URE V 1-11. PULSE-LINK REPEATER, TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT

(
VI - 15
 --
H
I ! )'l
M I
y
I TFH< s
SF B
u TONE
I w
R I

I f< Ll 8
,
SiG SIG I
p)
X 0 I
I
1
I
I
Ill.
E LEAD

M LEAD
DC SIG

FIGURE Vl-12 BA SIC E&M SIQNALING

1
)
"

I
M H RO I s
y w
u TONE
SF
8
1-- CONY
l2o Hz
TRK
B
I .,.__.
S�G R 0
SIG 8IG
X I I REL
0
l
l ....

..
M LEAD

FIGURE Vl-13 20Hz RtNGDowN SleNALING

)
VI - 16
 _. � ...... - ----

""""'
,.,. ,..-.,

CIRCUIT CONDITION
{) ON HOOK
260�Z TONES
-- - � OFF' HOOK
, ,
......
-----------
NO TONE 2'1 I I SF � : (!} DIAL I N G
DIAL .------.
I - --- ­ TRK
I
SIG Ir--- t (CALLING PARTY)
2600HZ PULSE EQPT
: I
---T�K_P��---; I I
I
--
-·
I I
[ II

-48v

PULSING-48V/GND
<!
�

1-'
"'
r--,
_______
SF --- .J I DIAL
I I I TRK
2600Hz TONES Cl
SIG I L----1--- (CALLED PARTY)
1
EQPT
I I
I I -- -I
� ----
TA �-�.!t!..
NO T O NE (Z\ I I
L __ ..J I
2600Hz PULSES LEAD

h•

PULSES

FIGURE Vl-14 DIAL-To-DIAL TRUNK SIGNALLING E&M LEAD O PER ATI O N

 ' )

�- --,
-1 I
- --- ---

I I
SF
I I - TKR
I -
SIQ I EQPT
I I
----- ___ , I
'- - -·
MAX 5000 01
PER WIRE

�
FIGURE Vl-15 E&M LEAD EXTENSION UNIT OX-1, OX-2.

TERMINATION •
/\IN\
)j
'' 4

4-4 4-4

BR I OGE BRIDGE

..
0 aus

FICIURE Vl-16 MUlTI�OtNT VOICE CIRCUIT

)
VI - 18
 (

4 •WIRE CKT 2600HZ 1600HZ 4-WIRE CKT

w tTH 2600KZ SF SF WITH 1600HZ
UNIT UNIT
8 tGIIALLING SIGNALING

E
M IE " .

T
) rto _.,_[�� �
-
-
":"'

�
PULSE•LINK REPEATER

A. USINI PULSE-LINK REPEATER

�
(

4-W tAE CKT 2600Hz 1600Hz 4•WIRE CKT

w TH 2600HZ SF SF WITH 1600HZ
UNIT UNIT

• IQNALINQ SIGNALING

IM IE -rM Jt

8. USING ICS MODIFIED COLLINS SIGNALLING UNITS

FIGURE Vl-17 SIGNALLING FREQUENCY INTERFACE

(
VI - 19
 )
'

SF ......
MUX
SWBO
UNIT

I j1-----------
E•LEAO------ - �
I

! __ - - - -- _ _t!-.!;_E��-- - - - -+-
I

A. E&M SIGNALLING

�
)

SF
RO -
CONY

MUX ·-- _---.:y SWBO

I
I
RO
...- UNIT
I
I
CONY
I
I I
I
_E:t.l;.\.P_-
I I +
1--- ...J
I I
I
'----- !1-J:.,g_A_Q-----..:

8. 20 Hz RtNGOOWN SIGNALLING

FIGURE Vl-18. FOUR-WIRE SUBSCRIBER.

!

.)
VI - 20
 VII. ICS EQU U HENT

( A. INTIWDUCTION:

}lost of the ICS equipment at each site is located in the

Electronic �uipment Building conunonly referred to as th e 11BE;
Buildi n._t;tt. It is here that are found the :

ltadio tenninals

Voice frequency multiplex ·terminals {HUX)

Voice frequency carrier telegraph terminals (VFCT)

Conditioning equipnent

Patch panels and test positions

Although some of the circuits going through the lCS �.y be

ca rried over nNon-ICS Systems", pieces of transportable or tactical
equipnent are not norm3lly found in the .&E: building. They are locatec
elsewhere and their circ uits enter the EG Building through a tie cable
to the Army Area System Te.chnical Control. The equipment found in the
EE Building is fi>..-ed-plant eqUl.prent purchased specifically for the lCS
contract with the exception of sone multiplex equJ..pment as sociated with
t the AN/}.ffiC-851s of the BACKPOHCH ;:>ystern w hich have been removed from the
van s an d installed i.n the 1<� Building.
(
The EE Building is u sually divid ed into two large areas (Figure Vll­
A-1):

1. T echnical Control Room (Figure Vil-A-2)

2. Hadio an d Multiplex Room (Figure VII-A-3)

On th e following pages brief d es criptio n s will be given of the items

of equipment that are found at the various lCS sites.

(
VI 1-1
 BATTERY
ROOM LATRINE

BRIAIC
ROOM OFFICE

lltADI 0 TECH
AND CONTROL
MULTtPLEX ROOM
< aooM
I Air Conditionin
• Office
Room
1'\)

MAIN
ENTIItANCI

FaGURE YII-A,-1 TYPICAL ELICTRONIC EQUIPMENT BuU.DING

- .... ...... .. ---- -

 - --

,#" �
�

---- ---
- - -- --- -- ------- -
- - - --- - ------ - ,
CIRCUIT
f!JA TCH Meac y�
BAYS BAY AMPS

. II I Ill
PR I MA R Y y�
( (I
PATCH BA YS PATCH
COMBINED BAYS
DIS TRIBUTION � 1 11 1 I II I
FRAME
l
I II I
I RD
DC
CONY
PATCH
< BAYS
- I I
% I II I )
< 0
rl
"' :0
A1 - DC TEST
w I 1 ... N
- 0 E Q UI P VF
n z SIGNALING
• ...
r- • DC ( EQUIP
r-
CD PATCH I II I
- CD
- B AYS CIRCUIT
0
'
"' 0 PATCH
"'
BA YS
2w/4w
HYBRIDS
VF
FREQUENCY
ATTENUATORS
I ORDER WIRE
I AND MONITO R TTY EQUIP

I
L ___ _
_
I _ _____ _ _ ______
I _ _ ____
I 1 j
t-·�aURE VII-A-2 TYPICAL TECHNICAL CONTROL ROOM
 , _____ - --- - -- -- - -- - - - --- - --- ------ 1
PO WER M'ICROWAWE CHANNEL
I
,-AMP&. IF £QUI PMENT eANKa
lI
1 1 ER a�

D D 0 co-ow

•••u•
iI
AND
::::� :
D 0 I
r
8 UP ER -
I
GROUP
j I

I EQUIP
E X C I TERS
£XCITER8 ,.._ AND �
I
ANO R ECE I
ltECE IVERS
I WE�)
I

<
I
I
PEIItFORM4NCE I
M O N I TO it
DOLLY
I
G R O UP
MTD
F I L TE R S 8£L.L
I

MULTIPLEX T E
--v
£QUIPM£NT 8
T D
D OLLY ALARM AND
MTD ORDER WIRE
QltOUP EQUIPMENT
!B PATCH AND
VFCT VFCT
I QUALITY
AMPLIFIEitS MO N I T O R I
I I
- ----- __
I--- -- --- --- - - -- ------- - I

FIGURE VII-A-3 TYPICAL RADIO MULTIPLEX ROOM

';. . .
•
- ...... � - ----
 B. RAD IO EQUIPMENT:

( The radio equipments used in the ICS are:

DESIGNATION M A NUF ACTURE R MODE OF OPERATION

REL-2600 RADIO ENGINEERING LABORATORIES TROPO OR LOS

AN/FRC-109 LENKURT ELECTRIC LOS

AN/MRC-85 (1) REL (2) 'IROPO

AN/FRC-3 9 (4) REL (3)

AN/MRC-98 ( 1 ) BENDIX (2) TROPO

AN/FRC... 39 (4) REL (3)

LRC-3 (1) PHILCO (2) 'IROPO OR LOS

(4) PHILCO (3)
I
, Notes: (1) These are complete terminal assem blies including radio,

(
multiplex, and control equipment.

(2) Manufacturer of complete assem bly.

(3) Manufacturer of radio equipment.

(4) Designation of radio equipment.

On the following pages are given technical descriptions of the various

radio equipments.

1. REL-2600:

T he different models of the REL-2600 terminals used in the ICS

vary only in the power amplifier used. The other components are, for the
most part, i dentical at all sites.

a. Exciter (Figures VII-B-1, -2, -3): The exciter provides a

frequency modulated carrier, in standard rf bands between 350 and 8500 mHz
for the transmission of multichannel voice, telegraph an d data signals. It
is used in a two-way multichannel communications network in the line-of­
sight, diffraction, or tropo-scatter modes of operation. When used in the
tropo-scatter mode of operation, it forms the driver for a klystron power
amplifier. The exciter is capable of operatin g with frequency division ,
time division, or pulse code multiplex equipment. The exciter consists of

(
VII • 5
a modulator, converter-rf amplifier, and power supply units, contained in
a rack mounting. The principal variations are found in chaanel capacity,
carrier frequency, and power output.
transmit band.
The exciter is tunable over the selected l
Functionally, the exciter consists of a 70 mHz modulator section
and a frequency converter rf section. Optional channel capacities of from
12 to 252 each 4 kHz channels may be exercised by the simple interchange
of modules and printed circuit cards. The 70 mHz carrier frequency is
s tandard throughout all 2600..series exciters, and only the frequency converter
rf section need be replaced to change from one transmit-frequency spectrum
to another.

SPECIFICATIONS FOR REL 2600 EXCITER ('! CS APPLICATIONS):

RF Range 755 to 985 mRz ( 1 GHz)

1700 to 24 0 0 mRz (2 GHz)
Type of Modulation FM

Output Power 10 watts minimum

Intermediate Frequency 70 mRz

VF Channel Capacity 72, 132 or 252

MODULATION RANGES:
•
Baseband 12 to 308 kHz (72 channels)
)
12 to 552 kHz (132 channels)

12 to 1052 kHz (252 channels)

Order Wire and Supervisory Channel 250 Hz to 12 kHz

Radio Pilot Frequency 60 kHz

bo Power Amplifier: There are only two types of power amplifiers

used in l CS These are the 1 KW an d tie 10 KW models.

(1) 1 KW Power Amplifier:

The power amplifier is the final amplification stage in

the transmi tting portion o f the radio system. A one to fou r watt frequency
modulated rf drive from the associated exciter is amplified in the tuneable
klystron tube to the final power output level of 1 KW, and is then fed to
the antenna for t ransmission. The power amplifier is hou sed in a single
cabinet designed for front access to all comp01.�nts. nvo- power amplifier
will opperate at reduced output with driving power as low as 100 mW

,4�
VII - 6
 Input Characteristics:

( Driving power 1 to 4 watts

RF range 1700 to 2400 mHz ( ICS application)

Power output lkw

Power gain 30 db

Bandwidth Approximately 7 mHz

Metering capabilities F o rward and reflected power indications

of rf input, klystron drive, and output
power are provided.

Starting time Full power output is obtained within 3

minutes after application of primary
power.

(2) 10 KW Power Amplifier Group:

_A frequency modulated rf drive from t he associated

exciter, in the frequency range of 755 - 985 or 1700 - 2400 mHz, is amplified
in the tuneable klystron tube to the final power output level o f 10 KW, and
is then fed to the antenna for transmission.

, The heat exchanger provides a

power amplifier and dummy load.
liquid coolant for the

( The dummy load provides a nonradiating load for dis-

sipating the output of t he power amplifier during tuning and routine main tenance.

The coaxial patch panel permits connecting the output o f

the power amplifier to either the dummy load o r to its assigned antenna.

All components of the power amplifier group, excluding

the heat exchanger, dummy load, and coaxial patch panel, are housed in a
single two section cabinet designed for front access by use of front hinged
panels and pull out drawers.

The klystron assembly is a removable unit, mounted on

casters for ease of assembly and maintenance. It consists of the klystron
tube, its related circuitry, air cooling, and directional couplers. The
directional couplers monitor the reflected and incident rf input and output
power. The liquid (provided by the heat exchanger) and air cooling dissipates
the heat generated by the klystron operation.

The heat exchanger is housed in a separate cabinet and pro­

vides for the flow of a liquid coolant through the power amplifier and the
dummy load. The coolant is returned to the heat exchanger w hich dissipates
the heat absorbed by the coolant.

(
Vll - 7
 The coaxial patch panel consists of a plate on which five
coaxial connectors and two removable U-shaped coaxial links are mounted. The
'
coaxial links have locking clamps on each leg to insure secure connections to J
the dullllly load.

Power Amplifier Specifications:

RF Range 755 to 985 mHz (1 GHz)

1700 to 2400 mHz ( 2GHz)

Power Output 10 f{t.] ..

Input Driving Power 5 watts nominal

Starting Time to Full Power t¥ithin 5 minutes after application of

primary power and within 3 seconds after
application of beam voltage

Recycling Repetion Will recycle only once within any 5 minute

period.

Coolant

Normal Flow 30 G. P. M.

Minimum Flow 15 G. P. M.

Heat &xchanger:
•
)
Coolant Mixture
Distilled water

Coolant Circulation 30 G. P. M. nominal

Dummy Lo a d :

RF Power Level 12 f<V.1 Maximum

C oolPnt Type Distilled water

Coolant Flow:

Calibrate 1 G. P. M.

nummy Load 5 G. P. M.

c. Receiver (Figure VII-B-4, - 5 ): The receiver group provides

a means of detecting and amplifying a frequency-modulated carrier contained
within the standard rf bands between 350 and 8 5 00 mHz. The receiver gro u p
may be u sed for line-of-sight, diffraction, o r trope-scatter modes of
operation without modif ication. In addition, it may be used singly, or its
output may be combined with that of other groups for diversity operation.

,)
VII • 8
 (1) Description:

( Receiver Group:

The Receiver group consists of a basic receiver with

optional front-end equipment. A preselector may be part of this group or
part of the antenna system. In addition, the group may contain either a
tunnel diode or a parametric rf amplifier.

Preselector:

Selectivity f� the receiver group is obtained by using an

rf preselec tor at the front of the group. The preselector is tuneable over
the same frequency range as the basic receiver. The preselector is tuned to
accept, with a minimum loss, the received carrier frequency and i ts sidebands.
and to reject all other frequencies. Thus the preselector may be generally
considered as performing the functions of a bandpass filter.

Rf Amplifier:

Rf amplification is provided by a tunnel diode amplifier.

Receiver:

The 2600-series receiver is a solid state, superheterodyne,

' frequency modulated receiver, .consisting of a frequency converter, a demodulator
snd a power supply.
(
Channel capacity options from 12 to 252 may be obtained by
the simple interchange of modules and printed-circuit cards. The IF frequency
of 70 mHz is standard throughout all 2600-series equipment, and only the
receiver rf secti on need be replaced to c hange from one receive-frequency band
to ano ther.

In the demodulator unit, th e 70 mHz IF signal is amplified,

limited, and then passed through the discriminator to obtain the original
traffic inputs contained within the 250 Hz to 1212 kHz range.

An automatic threshold extension network may be incorporate

as an option in the demodulator unit to increase the threshold sensitivity of
the receiver under weak signal conditions (Figure VII-B-6). When operative,
this network converts the receiver into a double super-heterodyne type.

(2) System Applications:

Operation in t he line-of-sight mode is accomplished by two

receiver groups, each one associated with a particular reception frequency, t o
provide dual frequency diversity. The outputs from the t w o receivers are
combined to obtain a single summed output that is less susceptible to signal
strength fluctuations. Also of interest in terms of operational reliability

(
VII • 9
is the inherent signal-path redundancy of this conf iguration. This redundancy
means that a major failure in either receiver group will no t affect tre duplex ""

operation of the complete terminal (apart from the loss of receiver diversity .•.J
'
advantage).

Operation with dual frequency diversity in the diffraction

and troposcatter modes is essentially the same as that described for line-of­
sights, except that tre automatic thresho;ld extension option may be used in
each receiver to obtain, in the combined output, an even greater independence
from signal strength fluctuations.
�

A quadruple diversity receiver system may be used in the

tropo-scatter mode, utilizing four receiver groups. A combination o f frequency
and space or space and polarization diversity is employed, the outputs of two
frequency diversity receiver group pairs being combined fcc space di versity.
The corresponding high and low reception frequencies in these two pairs are the
same. This particular receiver syst em configuratio n p rovides the greatest
independence from signal strength fluctuations and the most reliable system,
due to maximum redundancy. •

RF aange 755 to 985 mHz ( 1 CHz)

1700 to 2400 mHz ( 2 GHz)

Baseband Frequency Range:

72 channels 12 to 308 kHz

132 channels 12 to 552 kHz •

252 c hanne Is 12 to 1052 kHz )
Intermediate Frequency 70 mHz

Radio Pilot Frequency 60 kHz

Order Wire & Supervisory Channel 250 Hz to 12 kHz

d. Improper Operation of Combiners: Figure VII·B-7 shows the four

receivers in block form. Only the baseband output signals are considered,
althou gh the discussion here applies equally well to the orderwire signals
also. Since the input signals entering each demodulator are all different,
the four baseband inputs to the combiners may all vary in strength and noise
quality. The four combiners really function as one. By mean of the
,.Baseband Combiner Interconnect" the output signal is derived, and the four
combiner outputs are identical. These four outputs each go through their
own B aseband Amplifier and then appear on the Baseband Patch Panel. The
normal practice is to parallel two BB AMP outputs to form the final BB REG
SIGNAL. The troubles that usually occur during the maint enance of a receiver
are discussed below.

,)
VII - 10
 Under normal operation, if a DEMOD output becomes weak or
no isy, the COMBINER will deemphasize that signal in o btaining the "combined"

( output. If a signal becomes extremely strong

provide the m ajor portion of the COMBINER output.
and free of noise, then it will
Remembering these eff ects,
let us examine what happens when a receiver is taken out of service for mainte­
nance.

one common maintenance procedure is to disconnect the antenn a

input and replace it with a signal generator input. Then with a known input
sign al, the operation of the receiver can be checked.

Example 1:

1. The ANTENNA is disconnected, but the COMBINER link to the Baseband

Combiner Interconnect is left in.

2. The DEMOD BB output of this receiver is all noise and the COMBINER
effectively turns it off •

•
3. A SIGNAL GENERATOR is connected to the RECE IVER input.

4. The DEMOD BB output is now almost completely fre e of noise and the
COMBINER outputs became primarily the SIGNAL GEN ERATOR signal.

s. The entire system is knocked off the a ir.

6. This can happen when any o f the four receivers are worked on in this
, confi guration.

( Example 2:

Applies only to receivers used to form BB OUTPUT (RCVR•s 2&3 in Figure

VII·B-7):

1. The link between the COMBINER and the Baseband Combiner Interconnect
is removed first.

2. The output of this COMBINER is now exactly the sa me as the DEMOD BB

output.

3. The ANTENNA is disconnected.

4. The DEMOD BB output is now all noise.

s. The BB AMP output of this RCVR is also all noise. When this is
paralleled with the combined signal output from the other RCVR used to form BB
OUTPUT, the noise will usu ally drown out the useful si gn al and ag a in the
entire system is off the air because the squelch unit is activated.

6. This can happen only with the RCVR's whose BB AMP o utputs are used
to form the BB OUTPUT signal: --

(
VI I - 11
 Proper Procedure

1. Arran6e connections on the BB PATCH PANEL so that the BB AMP output

of the RC�{ to be tested is not one of those used to form BB OUTPUT.
<}
2. Remove the link to the Baseband Combiner Interconnect on the RCVR
to be tested.

3. Now the ANT�NNA may be disconnected and replaced by the SIGNAL

GENERATOR.

e. Complete Terminal: A block diagram of a quad-diversity REL

2 600 terminal is shown in Figure VII -B-8. This is given primarily to show
the signal flow and the functions of the various patch panels. The key
points to observe are:

(1) There are three sets of input/outputs:

(a) Message baseband (nO kHz and up) to A N/FCC-17

multiplex equipment.

(b) 12-5fi kHz supervisory channel used for transmission

of the remote alarm sig nals and area express order wires.

(c) 0.25-12 kHz low supervisory channel for use as local

eng ineering order wires, major technical control ex•1ress order wires, and
remote alarm system.
�
(2)
(above 60 kHz) are combined
The 12-56 kHz supervisory channel and the message baseband
and separated by a combination of high and low pass
)
fi lters connected to the COMBINED PATCH PANEL and electronic equipment in the
transmitter and receiver.

(3) At the B B (Baseband) PATCH PANEL the transmit signal

power is divided into two equal and identical parts and fed to the two
exciters (BB i nput).

(4) All four BB Amplifier outputs of the receivers appear at

the BB PATCH PANEL. These are i dentical except as noted above and the
receiver BB signal is usually fo rmed by putting two of these in parallel.

(5) At the OW (Order Wire) PATCH PANEL the 0.25-12 kHz super­
visory channel is split to drive the OW inputs of each exciter.

(6) All four OW Amplifier outputs from the receiver are

also avai lable at the OW PATCH PANEL.

,,J
VII - 12
 ----- -

,... ·"""" �
.

ORDER WIRE DET 70MC T R A NSFER

--------., FROM­
INPUT CONTROL
EXCITER (SCHMI T T
RADIO REL AY
r-4' TRIGGER)
SUPERVISORY ---
--, INPUT ---,
INPUT DET 350
70MC !
l 70MC 1 TO
.-- .---B ---, 500 r-------,
I- MC
BASEBAND MODULATION 70MC TRANSFER UP RF SAMPLER
BANDPASS
AND
INPUT
----1 AMPLIFIERS
� MODULATOR 170MC•
AMPLIFIER SWITCH � CONVERTER � FILTER I--
CIRCULATOR

I f I T
TO FROM
SRD
ALTERNATE ALTERNATE
PILOT AFC EXCITER EXCITER
GENERATOR
.� I r 70MC 70MC MULTIPLIER

I I
c:::J c:::J 70 MC
1
AMPLIFIERS
T T
< ---l 0

....
(,.)

RF SAMPLE
OUTPUT
r
RF
AMPLIFIER I - LOWPASS BAN DPASS DIRECTIONAL RF
CIRCUL ATOR L__-1
OR TWT FILTER
1-----.j I-- L__-1 CIRCULAT OR
� OUTPUT
r-­ FILTER II COUPL ERS II
AMPLIFIER 10 WATTS

TO BACK _ TO FORWARD
POWER I
POWER­ r--- - PO W ER
MONITOR
INDICATOR I N DICATOR

F1 G uR E V 1 1-B-1 .2600-Series Exciter, Simplified Block Diagram

 REL Exciters @ FACT SHEET NO. 13

REL Exciters, furnishing frequency­ 'l

modulated carrier waves, are the "start"
of a tropospheric scatter radio system.
Together, Exciters and power amplifiers
combine to constitute the tropo trans­
mitters in REL radio systems.
REL Exciters are continuous wave,
FM units utilized for the generation of
multi-channel telephone, telegraph and
other wideband communications signals �

at frequencies from 350 to 5,000 mega­

cycles, taking in the V e r y H i g h Fre­
quency (VHF ), Ultra High Frequency
(UHF) and Super High Frequency (SHF)
.
(I)
G) rangeso
.....
Electrically, an Exciter is divided
�
+.I into two basic parts: a Radio Frequency
"'
"" (RF ) section and a 70 megacycle modu­
0
..0 lation sectiono In operation, the multi­ Solid -State Exciter 4
5 channel signals from a multiplexer unit
are introduced to the modulation section, tion, a pilot tone signal is generated to
'oD
c where, after multiplication, pre -emphasis provide a means of monitoring the equip-;
......
"" and amplifications, a fully deviated 70 ment operation.
G)
G) megacycle Intermediate Frequency (IF) In a typical system configuration, there
c::
...... is generated. This IF is heterodyned by are two Exciters in each terminal of a
bO
c:: a local oscillator within the RF section frequency diversity systemo Each Ex­
w of the Exciter to produce the correct citer is a self-contained unit incorpora­
.0
..... carrier frequency which is amplified to ting its own power s u p p l i e s , control
�
"& the appropriate power output. This out­ panel, alarms and cooling apparatuso
�

....,
0
put, in turn, is then fed to a power am­
plifier .
In addition
quencies and
to
power
the wide range of fre­
requirements (100 )
The multi-channel signals are distribu­ milliwatts to 10 watts ) at which REL

.
c::
0 ted over two bands of frequencies: an Exciters may operate, there are options
.....
(I)
order wire frequency spectrum and a for the acceptance of from 12 to 300
(I) baseband frequency spectrum. In addi-
...... channelso
s
""

� BLOCK DIAGRAM OF TYPICAL EXCITER

.
.c.
+-'
..... 350-470 MC
OR
� 755-985 MC
OR

"' 1700-2400 Me
OR
G)

. --,
25!50- 2.700 M C
+-' .1_
c CJ
.....
""
p.
���;� I
� ORDER WIRE
AND
IIASE8AND
.. ..
·--� ·-·-·· I I
I .25-601<C
MODULATOR
70MC
I
I
60 -105ZI'IC
MODULATOR
I
I
I
I
TO OTHER
EXCITER 0� FREQUENCY I
SENSITIVE
PORTION
_ _j
VARIABLE RF MIXER POWER OUTPUT
(DEPENDING ON FREQUENCY REQUIRED)

120 VOLTS AC
INPUT
,
"

VII - 14 FIGURE Vll-8-2

 2600 Sarles Exciters @ FACT SHEET N0.25

( REL's 2600 Series of solid-state a deviation according to system re­

exciters, when used with suitable re­ quirements. This FM carrier is pro­
ceivers and power amplifiers, offer a duced at 70 me and is then translated
wide variety of applications in the ra­ to the RF operating frequency in a
dio relay field, including tropospheric varactor up-converter. The source
scatter, line-of-sight microwave and of frequency control for the local os­
ground satellite communications sta­ cillator is either a crystal or fre­
tions. quency synthesizer depending on the
In each of the aforementioned ca­ application. Following the up-conver­
tegories, flexible design provides for ter is an amplifier which may be ei­
•

suitability in all common installation ther solid-state for small power out­
needs: fixed, transportable, tactical puts or a traveling wave tube ampli­
or shipborne. fier for higher power outputs.
The function of these exciters -­
in communications systems employing
up to 300 channels and operating in I tO Wah Excite• (/)

.�
�
�QCY;\..
the Radio Frequency range between
350 and 8500 megacycles -- is to en­ tJ
able multiplexed voice, data and tele­
,_. �. � � s..

� .. 0
graph information to be modulated in­
�
"""'- '
,AI.
4o.f 1·,-

...

':;(J·-·-·
to an FM signal which is converted •.

""
into an appropriate carrier frequency ¥t no

r l
s:::
with a power output suitable for the
I __ •.-I
s..
application. The input of multiplexed
��- �- �
information may comprise frequency •-_ - '-•
'
� .. • .•

....
s:::

bD

r· .·1i�'
division, pulse code or time division
s:::
(>;:�
multiplex. The normal baseband width
is 1300 kilocycles, but 2500 kilocycles
.0
, also may be accommodated for certain
line-of -sight applications.
�� •, .. . • "0
...

<ll
a::
(, When used in tropospheric scatter
or satellite ground communications �
stations, they form the driver for a
klystron power amplifier. When used g
....
by themselves the exciters form the Ill
fll
transmitting portion of a line-of-sight
e:
....

microwave system. The addition of s..

suitable REL 2600 Series receivers The
construction of the exciter is 8.
provides a complete terminal for trans­ completely modular and a large num­

.
.c.
mission and reception of multi-channel ber of versions are available. The ...

�
...
communications traffic. principal variations are found in car­
rier frequency and power output. A "0
(I)
number of other options are available
r:!
...

•.-I
���,gQ]
such as pilot frequency, transfer facil­
s..
ities and input levels, as well as the ,:I.
(I)
�
y
option of crystal or synthesizer con­
"'

trol.
The modules of any exciter are ar­
ranged in slide -out drawers. The
most common arrangement is for the
modulator section, baseband-to-IF, to
be in one drawer and the converter
and output stages in another drawer.
The power supply is also contained in
a drawer. The basic modules can be
packaged into a number of versions
Dr•wer IIJxten<led depending on the application.
tor Eaay Maintenance
The exciters are designed for great
The multiplex input of the exciter stability with time, very high reliability
is amplified to the appropriate level and performance in accordance with the
and modulated into an FM signal with highest standards.
(, FIGURE VI 1-B-3
VII - 15
 IF RECORDER 50 fi RADIO RELAY 70 MC

RF INPUT
1------• PILOT ALARMS

'--r-;::==---- BASEBAND COMB. INTERCONNECT

.-----·COMBINER RECORDER

BASEBAND OUTPUT
'---+-1-�.._.
-t .._...__
BASEBAND ALARM
ORDER WIRE OUTPUT

'-------. g�� �:�:icoNNECT

....-...____

1------• NOISE AMPLIFIER ALARMS

RECORDER

A. RECEIVER WITHOUT THRESHOLD EXTENSION

<
- IF RECORDER 50 fi RADIO RELAY 70 MC

' RF INPUT
1-------• PILOT ALARMS

.._T--;::==�-----• BASEBAND COMB. INTERCONNECT

[=::;�------;====::::;-- COMBINER RECORDER
r ....-.._...__._
.....,
BASEBAND OUTPUT
I TRANSFER BASEBAND ALARM
ORDER WIRE OUTPUT

'----- g���� ��.:.�� CONNECT

LII
r -,
'-------! THRESHOLD I 1------• NOISE AMPLIFIER ALARMS
EXTENSION t------<>1

: I] , .....____,.___,
I AFC � RECORDER

B. RECEIVER WITH THRESHOLD EXTENSION L_ __ _j CJ

T

F 1 GURE V11-B-4. 2600-Series Receiver, Simplified Block Diagram

� - ---
 REL Receivers @ FACT SHEET NO. 18

( REL's
is capable
2600 Series Receiver
of detecting and am­
plifying multi-channel, frequency­
modulated voice, telegraph, and
data signals in the UHF (ultra
high Frequency) band from 350to PARAMETRIC
AMPIJFIE R
8000 megacycles. Its design is
solid-state throughout, and util ­
izes modular construction w i th
slide-out drawers for ready ac­
cess and quick module replace­
FREQUENCY
ment. It can accomodate 12 to CONVERTER
300 channel operation by chang­
ing various plug-in modules.
The basic receiver consists of co
DEMODULATOR
a frequency converter, a demo­
�
dulator and a power supply-blow­ ....
0
er. Depending upon the users ...,
..
performance requirements, either ....
0
a parametric amplifier or tunnel
diode amplifier can be added as
.g
..:I
a preamplifier stage.
Of)
A combiner is provided to per­ .::
....
mit diversity operation, whereby the ....
Q)
signal from one receiver is com -
�
....
bined with signals of other recei­
Of)
vers to obtain the best possible Weight of the overall unit is approximately 250 lbs. c
1':1!1
signal-to-noise ratio. Threshold Ease of operation and maintenance is assured
, extension is optional to enable de­ through the utilization of warning and metering
0
....
tection of signals below the normal devices in conjuntion with the modular construe­ �
( threshold of the receiver.
In a typical rack-mounted con­
tion concept. Warning devices, both visual in ­ tliS
dicator lights and remote audible alarms, point �
figuration, the four slide-out draw­ out the failure of noise amplifier, radio pilot
ers which comprise the solid­ or baseband. Metering is provided for all func­ 6
....
state receiver measure only 33 tions of operation, alignment and maintenance. co
Ill
inches in height, 21 inches in is achieved by the use of easily accessible test
width and 20 inches in depth. points in association with meters.
et
....
'
�-----------, z
I I �
""
I
I
I
�....
�
I
�
L __________ _j
l�
VARIA8LE Rl' CC*VERTER ANO NOISE SECTION
(OEPENOS Ott fREOVEHCY REOUIREDI I
350-·70 MC
OR
I
..
7SS-H5MC
OR
1700-2"00 MC
I
2550-2700 MC

I
RF

RF

RF

(
FIGURE VII-B-5.
VII - 17
 Threshold Extension @ FACT SHEET NO. 19
In an FM Receiver the output sig­
nal to noise ratio varies linearly with
The FM feedback technique reduces
the frequency deviation by a degen -
'l
Radio Frequency signal input when the erative process before transmission
signal is above threshold level. At through a narrow band filter. In
RF signals below threshold the sig ­ this manner threshold may be reduced
nal to noise falls off more rapidly than without excessive distortion. The
the signal. The threshold is some - frequency deviation is reduced by a
times referred to as the break point process of degenerative feedback
and is that signal power which pro - around a typical loop. The
duces signal voltage peaks equal to out-of-phase deviation is obtained
noise voltage peaks at the first non­ from a demodulator and voltage con­
linear element (usually amplitudelim­ trolled oscillator combination. The
iter) of the receiver. The ratio of RF latter output is applied to a frequency
signal power to noise at threshold is converter which feeds the demodu -
9 to 10 decibels. lator and hence closes the loop.
The threshold level is a function
of the receiver noise figure and radio
bandwidth before limiting. To lower
the threshold it is necessary to lower

,..,
co the noise figure or bandwidth or both .
Q)
. Since the noise figure is normally
� fixed, the bandwidth is reduced by
+'
Cll one means or another and with vary­
....
ing penalties on performance .
.8 It is important to understand that
� threshold reduction or extension low­ FUNCTIONAL BLOCK OIAGRAM
bD ers the signal level to which the re­ FM FEEDBACK THRESHOLD EXTENSION
c:
.,.., ceiver output signal to noise remains

�
....

�
linear. In this manner the range of
receiver input signal level variation
.,..,
bD
c:
ta
is increased
improved.
and system reliability
However, at a given in- Degeneration of the FM signal )
0 put signal level the output signal to takes place in the frequency convert­
.,..,
noise remains constant and threshold er because the modulation at the
� extension is not a substitute for high - VCO output is applied out -of -phase
�
er transmitter power. to the incoming signal modulation .
11.1
0 All techniques for threshold ex­ The reduced FM signal is passed
.: tension devices depend on bandwidth through the narrow band pass fil -
0
.,.., reduction or the equivalent to lower ter without serious distortion. The
co
co the threshold. filter establishes a bandwidth lower
.,..,
e During a five-year period of tho­ than normally used and hence, is
.... rough investigation as to various tech­ responsible for reduction of the re­
8. niques for achieving threshold exten­ ceiver threshold. The ultimate li -
..c:: sion, REL engineers have evolved an mit to which the threshold can be
.j.l
.,.., FM feedback design especially adapt­ lowered occurs at a filter bandwidth
:J
ed to meet the special performance of approximately twice the highest
"0
..
requirements of wideband communica­ modulation frequency. The amount
21 tions systems. of threshold extension is measured
c
.,..,
The FM feedback technique, suc­ as the ratio of the normal receiver
tt cessfully demonstrated in the Tel­ bandwidth to filter bandwidth. Prac­
Q)
� star Satellite program, has been al­ tical extension limits are a function
most universally applied in tropo of modulation frequency, deviation,
scatter systems. Many 'units design­ filter bandwidth, and feedback.
ed and manufactured by RE L are in Further detailed information on
the field, and the latest fully solid the application of FM feedback thres­
state models provide the optimum in hold extension in REL receivers ,
performance and reliability. and the additional circuitry functions
While the concept of threshold ex­ required in practical designs can be
tension by FM feedback is simple, the found in a data sheet available from
implementation involves substantial REL's Marketing Department. Ask
and sophisticated circuitry. for TE-l, Notes No. 1.

FIGURE VII-B-6. ·�)

VII - 18
 - � ...... - ---
..
,... � .�

1----- FROM ANTENNAS

I

.. � '
RCVR 1 RCVR 2 RCVR 3 RCVR 4
DEMODULATO R DEMODULATOR DEMODULATOR DEMODULATOR
BB B8 SB 88

., •, .' � '

• COMBINER COMBINER COMB l NER COMBINER·

BASEBAND
SIGNAL � 0.
� 0..
� J :J
CONlROL Sl GNAL: -j
<
"BASEBAND
� , �t • IP
COMBINER �r
IN TERCONNECT" BASEBAND
... BASEBA ND BASEBAND BASEBAND
\C AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER -'MPLIFIER AMPLIFIER

BB 88 BB 88

�, �t u 4

BASESANJ \ I
PATCH PANEL ...... ... _ ...,. ___ ,

l
U NI T
·I SQUELCH
BASEBAND OUTPUT

FtGUR£ Vll-8-7 CONNECTION OF COMBINERS AND BASEBAND AMPLIFIERS

 ••

PATCH
� PANEL
BB "' � ' <�>-
PA
- .. EXCIT£1t L(llt H(llt
u
:.I_MIT.
.
I+-<�>
"
... � '
!..-.---
1 1 ow
56KHZ
' '-
" �,
I
, �
��L���� -<�>-
108
I PAO ,
BB ... � ,
ltCVIt • " ...
L XFMit J
' .-.
-
l �, .. "
'
,
'
..
I
u
l., ,
I
IT} 1 OW
IJIIIT
rQunc,::._ u
� .... ...
, �, XFMit >
BB z
I J
c
ltCVR
l60IEtcl-lz
� ,.,
ANT .1
<
� 2 ,�.> + F;QOf
., AS LRTERS "�)-,
ow �AD � 20

r-
llc_y
-<�' ;
K t_
��\.
1 LP HP J-
BB
T.2 •
56 H
ltCVIt
�
��>-�
3 ow
J ' N
' , :X:
..
BB
�
ltCYit II:
p2.4KHZ
L(llt
.. 0
4 co
�) -
>
OW
1 '-. Ill:
' , w
L
;::)
r--- co

BB ...
--- PA • EXCITER I ' I
2 ; ...
k?> •
.4KHZ
2 OW � :::.
...�,...
e2 L (It
)
FIGURE Yll-8-8 REL 2600 RADIO QUAD 0tV£RSITY

- - � -
 2. AB/PRC..l09:

( The principle equipment used for line-of-sight microwave in the

is the AN/FRC-109 which is the military version of the Lenkurt 76C
(CS
(Figure VII-B-9). This system is used in ICS in the dual-diversity mode
(frequency diversity only).

Specific at ions :

Radio Frequency Range 7125 to 8400 mHz

Up to 960 4 kHz aessage channels ( ICS

"
Channel Capacity
uses maximum of 300)

System Pilo t Frequencies:

300 - channel systems 3.2 mHz

600 - channel systems Either 3.2 or s.s mHz

960 - channel or video systems 8.5 mHz

Transmitting Klystron Output :

Power 1.0 watt, no minal

a. System Description: The Microwave Terminal Assembly (Figure

� VII-B-10) provides broadband microwave transmission in the Government Frequency

( Band (7125 t o 8400 mHz).

Radio Systems,
The system is one of the family of 76-class Lenkurt
and is suitable for the transmission of voice, teleprinter,
high-speed data, graphic services, and video, and is available for single­
channel oper ation and space or frequency-diversity operation. The equipment
is transistorized except for the klystrons, and is capable of handling up
'
to 960 channels of multiplex, or a black and white or color television channel.
'
A supervisory channel is available in the 0.3 to 52 kHz portion of the
baseband. This channel has an input and output separate from the carrier
input and output, and is suitable for order-wire use and supervisory tone
transmission.

b. Monitor and Alarm: System continuity is verified by transmitting

a pilot tone along with the baseband to the far-end receiver, where it is
monitored by a pilot detector circuit. This pilot tone is also monitored
in the transmitter where it originates, to verify that the pilot oscillator
and the baseband transmitting circuits are all functio ning correctly. A system
pilot of either 3.2 or 8.5 mHz is available for all 76C applications, except
960-channel message service or television service, either of which requires
the a.s mHz tone.

(
VII - 21
 Transmitting klystron power output, receiver noise level, and, i n
t h e case of a diversity system, the difference in noise level between receivers ...
are also moni tored. 'lb.e differential noise monitor causes a transfer to the
quieter rec eiver whenever the noise difference between receivers is approxi-
' ) ·

aately 6 db or more. This ensu res that tbe received signal will be as good
as or better than that obtained from the better receiver.

Transmission path fading results in a higher noise level, therefore,

a noise alarm can be caused by excessive fading as well as equipment failure.
Periods of excessive fading are normally short so noise alarms are delayed
for approximately one m inute to prevent short-duration alarms. Equipment
failure will, of course, bring in a sustained alarm. Alarm circuits restore
themselves when the signal returns to normal.

•
)

..

,,
VII - 22
 EQUIPMENT SETS

( RADIO SET AN/FRC-109(V)

�
(

''
I

TYPICAL DIVERSITY TERMINAL TYPICAL NON-DIVERSITY

TERMINAL

FIGURE Vll-8-9.1.5 WATT MICROWAVE

DIVERSITY RADIO SET AN/FRC-109(V)

(
AN/FRC-109(V)
VII • 23
 EQUIPMENT SETS

')
CD{U I
I AI ADU 1 I un1C'r" I I Of'l\10 I
ALARMS

(OPTIONAL)

r
i nLAl
I
ALARMS

ALARMS

dl dRM I
(OPTIONAL)

TO/FROM
MULTIPLEX

rTi PILOT I I -32 DBM -·-·

TO
ANTENNA
�
ALARMS

ALARMS �

-32 DBM I YMTR I )

TO

ALARMS

(OPTIONAL)

ALARMS

-17 DBM
(OPTIONAL)

com
FIGURE Vll-8-10.
TYPICAL MESSAGE DIVERSITY REPEATER
BLOCK DIAGRAM

' i)
AN/FRC-109(V)
VII .. 24
 3. AN/MR.C-85 (AN/FRC-39)

{ Radio Set AN/MRc-85 is a completely mobile communications terminal

using the tr opospheric scatter communications technique in the frequency
r ange of 755 to 985 mHz. The 10 KW system is capable of relayin g up t o
7 2 voice channels ( ICS application) over single hops up t o 200 miles.
Quadruple diversity is used primarily, but dual diversity operation can
be accomplished using one antenna and part of the radio equipment (Figure
VII-B-11).

Installed in three military type vans and two specia l antenna

trailers, the entire terminal is road-and-air-transportable.

The principal components of Radio Set AN/MRC-85 a re:

AN/FRC-39(A) Radio Frequency Equipmen t

AN/FCC-17 Multiplex Equipmen t

CV/566 In-band Signalling Equipmen t

4 ea AN/FGC-61B (OA-7008) 12-Channel Teletype Carrier Equipment.

Two 150 KW Diesel Generators

Two 28-foot Parabo lic Reflector Antennas

Diesel generators located in the power van are capable of

supplying all primary power requiremen ts of Radio Set AN/MRC-85, e liminating
( dependence upon comme rcial power. When desired, however, interconnection
with commercial power facilities is possible.

a. R adio Frequency Equipment: The A N/MRC-85 Radio S et u tilizes

the type AN/FRC-39(A) radio equipment suitably modified fcc the more stringent
requirements of vehicular mobile use.

The transmitting equipment consists of an FM exciter-modulator

and a 10 KW power amplifier with its associated heat excha nger and dummy load
operating in the 755 to 985 mHz frequency range. The principa l characteris tics
of the transmitting equipment are as f ollows:

Baseband Inputs:

Order Wire 25 Hz to 12 kBz

Multiplex Split baseband 12 to 60 kHz and 6 0

t o 308 kHz ( I CS application)

RF Range 755 to 985 mHz

(
VII • 25
 Power Output 10 KW

Planning Range 200 miles

'l
A frequency modulated, quadruple diversity receiver is used,
capable of operating in either space-frequency or space-polarization modes.
A threshold extension unit allows detection of signals below the normal
threshold level of the receiver. The principal characteristics of the re­
ceiving equipment are as follows:

IF 70 mHz

Bandwidth 72 channels 4 mHz ( l ()j application)

b. Multiplex Equipment : Voice multiplex equipment (AN/FCC-17)

and telegraph carrier equipment �1ill be discussed later.

c. Antenna Equipment: The AN/MRC-85 is normally supplied with two 28"'

solid parabolic reflectors equipped with cross polarized feed horns. E ach
of the two antennas is a se If-contained unit constructed of modular packages
w hich disassemble easily for transporting. The reflector mounts on a stable
tripod type tower which eliminates the need for guy wires and supports.
When asembled, the antenna tripod tower structure with reflector mounted is
stable withou t ground anchors in winds up to 25 knots. With a ground anchor t
at each leg of the tripod, the antenna can be operated in winds up to 120
�
knots with 2 inches of ice.

Erection c an be accomplished without the use of winches or �

other special equipment in 24 man hours. No site preparation such as excava­
tion, footings, and concrete pads are required. The tripod tower is designed
to disassemble into a trailer bed upon which all of the component parts of
)
t he antenna can be transported. T he complete tower and antenna assembly forms
a two axle trailer 20 feet long, 7 feet wide, and 8 feet high. The trailer can
be towed by standard vehicles. This antenna arrangement is not normally
used at lCS installations. Antennas shown in Figures IV-A-2 and 7 are
similar to those used at ICS AN/MRC-85 installations).

High power transmission lines are 3-1/8 inch coaxial cable

between the transmitter output and the diplexer, and pressurized wav e-guide
be tween the diplexer and the feed horn. All low power RF transmission lines
are 1-5/8 inch c oaxial cable. (ICS installations utilize wave guides in
lieu of high power transmission lines) .

d. Control and Ancillary Equipment: T he AN/MRC-85 is normally

supplied with co ntrol and ancillary equipment to support its mission.
Equipment normally supplied includes protected distribution frames, audio
and DC patching facilities, in-band signalling equipment, order wire, system
alarm and performance monitcc. In addition, two to four wire converters,
sources of ringing voltage, special matching devices, teletype loop current
controls and other similar equipment can be provided to adapt the system
to any special circumstances.

,)
;

VII .. 26
 The usual order wire provides a voice and/or teletype channe1
between terminals to be used for maintenance and operational checks and

( changes.
wire band of
It uses the 250 Hz to 4 kHz channel
the radio set.
in the 25 Hz to 12 kHz order
The remainder of this band, 4 kHz to 12 kHz, is
a vailable for additional order wire channels.

e • Equipment Alarms: The radio set is equipped with fault indicator

panels containing aural and visual indicators indicating abnormal operation
of various sections of the radio equipment. The fault indicator panel contains
provision for ind icating malfunction or reduced performance of 21 separate
circuits of the radio set. It is mounted directly over the operator's desk
to provide an immediate indication of the location of a malfunction resulting
in degradation of system performance. For each malfunction an appropriate
indicator lamp is lit and a com mon alarm bell is sounded. A single common
reset switch silences the alarm bell and restores it to the common alarm
circuito The trouble indicating lamp remains lit until the fault is cleared.

Additional contacts on thealarm relays permit remoting of

the alarm function to locations such as personnel quarters.

f • Power Equipment: Two tandem generator sets and four diesel

engines form an extremely reliable power generating system for the radio set.
Each power system consists of one 150 kw generator and two diesel engines,
one located on each end of the generator shaft. Either of the two systems
is capable of providing full power to the radio set but during normal operation,
each generator supplies 50 percent of the load or up to 75 kw each. One diese1
engine is used to drive each generator and the other engine is a standby.
The system is designed so that one generator and two en gines can fail and
the dual tandem system will still produce the total 150 kw load. Furthermore,
( if three engines fail, the remaining engine can still produce 150 Kw for up to
t hree hours without harmful effects on the engine. This method results in
the ability to continue producing power under practically all adverse con­
ditions of engine or generator failure.

Automatic monitoring and switching equipment effects transfer

in the event of a power failure •

..

(
VII - 27
 - ,---- --,
liE l t HEAT
AT 1
i E.XCHA.NGER I I EXCHANGER I
I 10 KW ONLY I kW ONLY I
L-- ---'
�0--. ---'
T I
I
---' -
POWER AMPLIFIER L- POWER AMPLIFIER
OUPLEXER OUPLEXER
� I KW OR 10 KW
_1 I KW OR 10 KW
1t
I
[/)
tr:l
t-3
[/)

PRESELECTOR PRESELECTOR PRESELECTOR PRESELECTOR

I
PARAMET RIC PARAMETRIC ! EXCITER EXCITER PARAMETRIC PARAMETRIC
AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER I AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER
I MODULATOR AUTO
MODULATOR
TRANSFER -
SWITCH
-1 r
OW LF HF LF HF
_j
ow
J
<
'--
' r--
CONVERTER CONVERl:_fR CONVERTER CONVERTER
FM RECEIVER FM RECEIVER FM RECEIVER FM RECEIVER
COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER
I
FAULT J
, OR INDICATOR
f---.j '---� .r-
n -� :���; I I
I
I 1 J
-

'
VF MULTIPLE)(
OEN
EQUIPMENT
VF CHANN£1..!1
CONTROL STATION
J-: WI:-]L
)
___
il
--- - --
THRU GROUPS DIST
YF MULTIPLEX
____ .,. FRAME
EQUIPMENT I
-- --.- --
.. . - VF CHANNELS i :
AND/OR THRU-GROUP I
I
FIL TEAS
I"'" I
L_j
FIGURE v 11-B-·11. RADIO SET AN/MRC-85
BASIC SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
 4. Radio Set AN/MRC-98 (AN/FRC-39):

( General Description: Radio Set AN./MRC-98 is a transpo rtable communi-

cation fac ility operated in the tropospheric scatter mode in the 755 t o 985
mHz frequency band. It provides up to 60 nominal 4 kHz VF channels in its
modulation baseband. The VF multiplex equipmen t used is the AN/FCC-17 which
is described elsewhere in this material. One voice channel is allocated for
telegraph operation permitting full duplex operation of up to 12 teletype
c hannels-over the system with the VFCT (v oice f requency carrier telegraph)
equipment provided. Transmitter output power is 10 KW. Each receiving
system has a noise figure of 2 db through the use of parametric ampli fiers.
Both space and p olarization diversity are used to offset fading conditions,
resulting in a considerable improvement in overall reliability. Radio Set
AN/MRC-98 is housed in two air condi tioned semi-trailer vans. A third van
houses the two diesel engine generator sets, either of which can supply the
complete power requirement f or the facility. TWo anten nas are provided for
the system. One leg of the suppor ting tower of each antenna is provided
with wheels; it forms its own trailer bed for an en tire anten na assembly when
disassembled (Figure VII...B-12 ). The Radio Set AN/MRC-98 is transportable
either by land or by five C-130 aircraft. When at an operational location,
approximately 100 manhours are required to put the system in operation.

Interface Characteristics:

Radio Equipment

Frequency Range 755 ·to 985 mHz

( Transmitter Power Output 10 KW

Th ..:e only MRc-qg deployed in SEA are located in Thailand.

\
VII - 29
 " ------------------------------------------
""'.

POWER
VAN

-FUEL TANKS

30' MIN

6'MAX

ELECTRONICS VAN NO. I ELECTRONICS VAN NO. 2

l V-267/MRC-98) l V-268/MRC-98)
<

�---1
--- 30' --------�

28' SOLID PARABOLIC 28' SOLID PARASOl •C

DISH DISH

ANTENNA GROUP ANTENNA GROUP

OA-4429/MRC-98 f---=! E----1 OA-4429A/MRC-98
755 TO 985 MC n5T0985 MC

r------ WR-975 WAVEGUIDE -------,

FIGURE v 11-B-12. RADIO SET AN/MRC-98

FACILITY SITING PLAN
 s. I.Rc-3:

( The I.RC-3 equipment is used only on the system p roviding entry

into Thailand via t he southern route. This is from Phu Lam to Vung Tau to
Green Hill in Th ailand.

Radio Set lRC-3, consisting of exciter equipment and receiver

equipment, is used for tbe transmission of multiplex and video information
over both line-of-sight distances and tropospheric scatter systems (wi t h a
s eparate high-power RF amplifier). VF multiplex equipment used is the
AN/FCC-18, which is described elsewhere in this material.

The mode of transmission is f requency diversity, space diversity,

or a combination of the two.

Provisions also are included for communicating over a service

channel (order wire) located in the low frequency end of the base band.

The Exci t er LRC-3E consists of the following units:

1 Signal Splitter Unit

2 Exciter Units

2 Power Amplifier Units

l Pilot Tone Unit

( 2 Main Power Supply Units

2 Power Amplifier .Power Supply Units

The Exciters RF Output Power, is from 1 to 10 watts and its RF Range is

1700 to 2200 mHz.

The receiving equipment consists of the following major units:

1 Diplexer

2 Phase-Lock Receivers

1 Dual-Diversity Combiner

I Common Baseband

Specifications:

R eceiver Frequency modulation, single conversion

superheterodyne; fixed tuned; RF preselec­
tion.

(
VII .. 31
 RF Range 1700 to 2200 mHz

Intermediate Frequency 70 mHz; 1 or 3 mHz bandwidth, as selected �l

C. VOICE FREQUENCY 1.>1ULT1Pl.EX EQUIPMENT:

1. AN/FCC- 17

The AN/FCC-17 is the standard VF multiplex terminal used in ICS

in Area 1 (Vietnam). It is also used in some of the transportable tropo
systems.

a. General: A single Multiplexer Set AN/FCC-17 provides sixty

4-kHz voice channels in the supergroup number l frequency (60-300 kHz) allocation
(Figure VII-C-1). The physical arrangement of the AN/FCC-17 is such that the
set may be used as the basic unit of a high density terminal providing up to
600 channels. The channel capacity of this assembly may be expanded to a
maximum of ten supergroups (600 channels within a frequency spectrum of 60-
2540 kHz) by the addition of applicable equipment (Figure VII-C-2).

A single Multiplexer Set AN/FCC-17 is contained in five

equipment racks. A total of 13 equipment racks are required for a full 600-
channel arrangement.

b. Specifications:

Channel Capacity From 12 up to 600 four-kHz duplex

channel s in 12 channel increments.

Modulation
SSB, suppressed carrier, Twin C hannel. )
Type of Multiplex
Frequency division.

Frequency Allocations:

Channel Drop 300 to 3500 Hz

12-Channel Group 60-108 kHz

60-Channel Supergroup 312-552 kHz

Line Frequency:

l 2�Channel Group 12-60 kHz or 60-108 kHz

60-Channel Group 12- 252 kHz or 60-300 kHz

240-Channel G roup 60-1052 kHz

600-Channel Group 60-2540 kHz

�)
VII - 32
 Transmission Facilities Designed for operation with either FM
or single side band r adio facilit ies in

( line-of-sight or tropospheric scatter

links; output may be adapted for cable
or open wire transmission by use of
appropriate auxiliary equipment, in­
cluding repeaters, equalizers and regula­
tors.

Processing Capabilities Voice, Digital D ata, T eletype, Facsimile,

or other graphic information.

Type of Carrier Frequency Slave terminal synchronized to a 96 kHz

Synchronization pilot introduced into the high f requency
line at the master terminal.

Voice Channel C haracteristics:

Frequency Response (6000 3 db variation, 300 to 3500 Hz, referred

mile DCS circuit) to 1000 Hz test tone. 1 db variation, 325
to 3450 Hz, referred to 1000 Hz test tone.

Envelope Phase Delay 225u sec, 600-3200 Hz, l30u sec, 1000-
(�000 mile DCS Circuit) 2500 Hz.

Impedance 600 ohm, balanced

;pve ls:

(
Input -16 dbm

Output ..,.7 dbm

f1anufacturer Lenkurt Electric Company, Inc.

The most significant performance characteristic of the

AN/FCC-17 is the ability to maintain low channeJ noise and distortion u nder
100% data loadin g.

c. Modulation Plans: Note that the modulation plan, Figure VII-C-�

uses the lower and upper sidebands alternately on adjacent channels requiring
only six channel carrier frequencies. This type of modulation is called
"Twin Channe 1 Mod ulation" (TCM).

The diagram of ...

Figure vn-c 3 of the AN/FCC-17 multiplex system
shows the relationships of the GROUP patch panels and the SUPERGROUP p a tch
panels to the multiplex gear. The GROUPS go throu gh the GROUP patch pa nel,
where patches can be made if necessary, likewise, the SUPERGROUPS go
through the SUPERGROUP patch pane 1.

(
VII • 33
 The A N/FCC-17 is used with the AN/MRC-85 radio equipment t o
provide 72 channels (Figure VII-C-4). In this case, SUPERGROUP 1 consists
of 60 channels and SUPERGROUP lA consists of GROUP 5 only, in the frequency
''
·.,�,,
range 12-60kHz. The AN/MRC-98 uses the AN/FCC-171 SUPERGROUP 1 only, to
provide 60 channels (Figure VII-C-4).

d. Equipment Configuration: A typical AN/FCC-17 equipment configura­

tion is shown in Figure VII-C-5.

e. Failure Alarm System (Figure Vll·C-6):

General: All vital circuits of the AN/FCC-17, including the

power supply, carrier frequency supply, supergroup equipment, fuse panel,
group pilot and the synchronization pilot circ uit, are connected to an alarm
system which provides visual (and audible) indications in the event of an
e quipment failure.

The AN/FCC-17 uses g roup pilots insert�d in the channel

multiplexers and picked-off in the chanr�l dem ultLplexers to monitor opera­
tion and activate the alarm system in case of failure in any stage of the
transmit and receive path equipment. In ad dition, th e outputs of the various
carrier equipment shelves and the power supply sets are also monitored by the
alarm system to indicate equipment status. The AN/FCC-17 does not depend on
a fuse failure to activate an alarm.

The A N/FCC-17 contains two types of alarm circuits: (1)

major alarm and (2) minor alarm. The minor alarm circuit is activated by
the failure of any unit which is operated in parallel with an identical
unit. The major alarm circuit is activated if both units in a parallel cir­
cuit fail, by loss of any one of th e incoming group pilots, or by loss of )
the 96-kHz synchronization pilot; thus a minor alarm indicates only that
system reliability is reduced, whereas a major alarm indicates a partial or
complete loss of the system.

Master Alarm Panel: The Master Alarm Panel, receives the alarm
signals described above and provides a centralized location of the alarm
condition of the AN/FCC-17. The alarm conditions indicated on the Master
Alarm Panel may be connected to an external alarm circ uit to activate remote
alarm lamps or buzzers.

Group Pilot Alarm: A 64-kHz group pilot sign al is inserte d in

the 12-channel group output of each Channel Multiplexer. These signals are
picked off at the receiving terminal and passed to the �oup Pilot Alarm.
In the event one of th e pilots is not received, a lamp on t he front panel
of the Group Pilot Alarm lights to indicate which group has been lost. At
t he same time, a major alarm condition is indi�ated on the Master Alara Panel.

* Reprinted from AN/FCG-17 Training Text with permission of Lenkurt Electric

Co., Inc.

' ,)
'

VII - 34
 Equipment Shelf Alarms: In addition to the alarm lamps
provided on the Master Alarm and the Group Pilot Alarm panels, alarm lamps

( and alarm cutoff switches are also provided on the front panels of the
various equipment shelves which are monitored by the alarm system. The
shelf alarm circuit and lamps isolate the equipment f ailures to the defective
circuit and activate either the minor or the major lamp on the Master Alarm
Panel, whichever is applicable. The alarm cutoff switc h turns off the alarm
lamp on the Master Alarm Panel and lights the alarm cutoff lamp on the
defective shelf.

f. Test Facili ties*: A Transmission Test Set f or monitoring and

maintaining equipment and system performance is supplied as an i ntegr al part
of the AN/FCC-17. It is desig ned for use by relatively inexperienced operators
and technicians. Personnel with very little training can use the Transmission
Set to quickly and accurately perform alignment as well as routi n e maintenance
a nd trouble-shooting procedures. With the exception of a multi me ter, - no other
test equipment is required to per form all test functions required for lineup
and operation of t he AN/FOC-17.

Specific functions of the Transmission Test Set are listed

be low:

(1) �nerates a 1- kHz test tone and provides for local terminal
alignment of the VF transmitting path and receiving path. The terminal may
then be connected to the hf line for end-to-P.nd tests at the correct signal
leve ls.

(2) Measures group pilot signal levels at each modulation and

( demodulation stage.
readily apparent .
Thus, by r o uti ne checks, any system degradation is

(3) Generates pilots at line frequencies for l ocal terminal

alignment of the receiving transm ission path . The terminal may then be con­
nected to the hf line for end-to-end testing and ope r ation.

(4) Measures the carrier frequency output l evels of all carrier

frequency supplies and ampliEiers.

The de and ac supply voltages are checked with a multimeter.

Since th ese meters ar� standard in all communications centers, this function
was no t included in the test set.

For large fixed-office applicatio ns, the test set c an be

supplied mounted in a dolly cabinet; for small fixed-office or tactical ap­
plications, i t can be supplied rack-mounted with t he multiplex equipment.
One dolly-mounted test set can be used as test facilities for any nua.ilier of
AN/FCC-17 multiplex terminals installed at the saroo locations.

* Ibid

l
VII - 35
 NOTE:
WHEN DC VOLTAGE IS REQUIRED FOR L AMP
POWER, CONNECT TO EXTERNAL DC POWER
SOURCE.

C H 2 THRU 1 2 - GP 2 THRU 5·- SGP 2 THRU 1 0

- 3 6.0 DBM
••
VF IN ·-33.5 DBM -18.0 DBM
CHI 135 OHMS GPI 75 OH M S SGP I 75 OHMS TRANSMIT
0,-4, OR
-t MULTIPLEXER MULTIPLEXER MODUL ATOR LINE
-16 DBM (I OF12) (I OF5) (I OF 10) CONNECTOR
600 OHMs
• 9
6 4 KC PILOT PILOT IN
iI
SGP 3 THRU
M}J
10 CARRIERS 30TO 50 VDC
GP SGP I CARRIER
- CARRIER 40V AC/DC MASTER l
SUPPLY LAMP -4-- SEE NOTE
ALARM
POWER -40 DBM
1
< 75 0HMS
FUSE
r
� PANEL

124
T 48V DC
• 8KC GP KC SGP SGP POWER
FREQ � CARRIER MULTIPLEXER 4--
CARRIER I-- + CARRIER --+ CARRIER � SUPPLY -II TO
POWER
SUPPL'Y GEN GEN GEN SUPPLY
(t.)
�----;�--- -����;; 1 I
1 r-
-26 DBM
O'l j_ ____ j [_ _____
75 OHMS

I AC POWER
DISTRIBUTION
i 96 KC
O, +I OR PILOT OUT .., L
+ 7 DBM
-12 DBM -28 DBM i AC POWER
-29.5 DBM
I
600 0HM GP I 75 OHMS SGP I REC E IVE
135 OHMS 75 OHMS
VF OUT MULTIPLEXER MODUL ATOR LINE
(I OF 12) (I OF 5) (I OFIO) CONNECTOR
�'"' CH 2 THRU 12
"'"""' J GP 2 THRU 54- SGP 2 THRU 10 �
,
Fl GURE VII-C-1. AN/FCC -17 FAMILY OF MULTIPL EXER SETS
(600 CHANNEL S YSTEM), DETAILED BLOCK DIAGRAM
 ---
..

f""", �
�

". '•lN�Ec
�- , 64 KC 72 KC �0 KC 88 KC 96 KC I 04 KC CHANNEl CARR' ERS t:r:l
,,-J
0u.3�� : \K' §
I I I I I I H

1:::::=., �EPRESENTS ON£ TELEPHONE �����

:HANNE L IN WHICH THE AUD I 0 �
z
FRfOUENC IES ARE I NVERTEO t-3
60 K � BASIC GROUP I 08 K C
r:n
�£PRESENTS I GROUP AlARr, t:r:l
't
•
P' :. !T FRfDUf�f,'' t-3
GROUP TRANSLATING EQUIPMENT r:n
IT
GROUP
CARRIERS

REPRESENTS A GROUP OF 12 TELEPHONE CHANNELS ������

< Ll WITH VIRTUAL CARRIER FREOUENC IES SPACED AT 4 KC
INCREMENTS ANO IN WHICH THE AUO I0 F�EOUENCIES
ARE INVERTED IN THE VARIOUS TELEPHONE CHANNELS
BASIC SUPERGROUP ( SDF)

(A) 3 I2 360 408 456 504 552 I KC

�

SUPERGROUP TRANSLATING EQUIPMENT

REPRESEHS A FREQUENCY
i SYNCHRONIZING PILOT
SUPERGROUP
612 1116 1364 1612 1860 2108 2356 2604 2852
CARRIERS

REPRESENTS A 60 CHANNEL 96
L:] SUPERGROUP WITH ERECT
SIOEBANOS

REPRESENTS A 60 CHANNEL
� MULTIPLEX
����������
60 312 564 812 l060 1308 1556 1804 2052 2300
SUPERGROUP WITH INVERTED 1 1 1 j 1 1 1 1 j I BASEBAND
SIOEBANOS 300 552 804 1052 1300 1548 1796 2044 2292 2540
NO MODULATION
�
-
l'%j
(") F 1 GURE VI 1-C-2. F REQUENCY ALLOCATIONS AND MODULATION PLAN
(") F OR THE AN/FCC-17 FAMILY OF MULTIPLEXERS
I
I-'
.....
 GRP GRP SGR
PATCH PA T C H PATCH
SAY PANEL P AN L
-
FROM SGR'S 4,5,
�
E
�
r,
. _J GRP 5
MUll.
'I
r
F OM
SGR 3
CHNLS
R4-12
..
- ...llo.
_J 4 f4'
'I r MOO
FROM
FROM
�ROUP
,..
3
jc HNL
I _J 3 MOO- SGR MOD
.,
L SGR 2
....s.
!M o o - I EMS ,..
fROM EMS �� COMB !--+-
} _r
VF 2 NET
J 2
FILTER
Xtv11T r
I
..J
'-
DROP I
} _r
j CH N 1 SGR 1
....
-L MUle
L b j GRP 1 l r+
<
1 lrlllf I MOO

_I MSG
8ASE:f1ANO
1
FI ER CONNECTION
TO RADIO
l �; J [FI�;ERJ
I -�
,
L � j GRP 1 I SGR I
1 LDEMUX
.r r<-
DE MOD
1��':,� �
TO ,... 2
.,. J
VF L
2}
REC SGR
}
DROPS �
...
J 3 r SGR 2 DEMOO
' ,
J 1'-t- � COMB r--<
L
....
a_r TO L FILTER
C NL
_r NET
J 4 TO
H MODEMS
I _r "ROUP 1
MOO-
jQ P SGR 3
EMS
......
TO
R 0 .t �
...."" lOEMUX
CHNLS 4- 12 DE MOO

'--- -- TO SGR1S 4,5,

fiGURE VII-C-3 A N /FC -

C1 7 (120,180,240 CHANNELS)

- - ...... _ -
 - - ..... - -

. ..

� �"'-· �'

SGR
PATCH
PANEL

, , SGR 1 �
fi«>O SGR
SGR PATCH
..
K>O
� COMB 1-+
SGR 1A NET
MOO
.. _,. � � I !Pol s':oJ"
<

TO/FROM LINE
• > RADIIJ COHNfCT
c..>
PANEL
\0
SGR 1A
SGR 1A �I I� I
I ll MOO
DE MOO I+
SGR
DO•toO
� COMB H
..
SGR 1 NET
OEK>O
1-tc-

12 CHANNELS • 60 CHANNELS,
AN/�C-85 AN/MRC-98

Fteuar VII-C-4 AN/FCC-171 S�£ctAL Cew�IQURATtOMI

 Common Equipment (Rack 1)

INDEX COMMON NAME

l
1 I Terminal Board

2 I Power Supply Set (net in I Cl:>)

3 I Carrier Supply Fuse Panel

4 Master Alarm Panel RACI( I RACK!

5 Master Frequency Generator
li!l El l!!l
6 Supergroup Carrier Generator
IE] j
� Diil
7 I Supergroup Carrier Supply

8 Iiil.
• • • .�;?
Group Carrier Generator
2 2

9 I Group Carrier Supply

10 Group Carrier Amplifier 2 �- • . • .•

••
�
11 Channel Carrier Generator -··�··�;�;��;
a�. .lSI
(for LSB or twin channel equipment)
2 • • • •• �.. . ...a
or 3 - ·--·
- . ..
.. .
4 • 5 �111
. . . . . . ·r=
ISJ:o o: ::::: :::::::
Channel Carrier Supply
D
(for twin channel equipment only) � I !::I
5�11 � • • • • . • • • � �
11
12 Storage Cabinet s EJ.'. • • •• • •• • •• •

1!!1 CiJ
� G
.. 5
6 ! ca•a• S
lliiil!• :::�!:::�:::
•
Iii§ @!I 1!!1 ••••••• ••• t:J
3) ••
Channel Equipment (Rack 7 •• • 8
. .
•
. ...... .
INDEX COMMON NAME
8

9
••
••
•
1!!1 •• •• l!!l
.� )
1 Terminal Board 12) .KJ
10 -·-·fD· S!l
2 in • E
Power Supply Set (net ICS) llil • • ••
•
•

3 Channel Demultiplexer Fuse Panel • Ill

11:1
4 Channel Carrier Amplifier (Even) 12
••
7�1-
5 Channel Demultiplexer
(LSB or twin channel as required)

6 Group Pilot Alarm

7 Channel Multiplexer
(LSB or twin channel as required)

FIGURE Vll-C-5. AN/FCC-17, MULTIPLEXER SET,

RACK ELEVATIONS (PAGE 1 OF 2)

j)
VII - 40
 RACK 2

Group/Supergroup Equipment (Rack 2) liiiJ ljl,

( 1 -

1 - • i!],
INDEX COMMON NAME
1 - Ill liiJ,
1 Terminal Board
.. ..- ..........•.
2- ·• •:::::::::::: .
2 Group/Supergroup Fuse Panel
3- liil 11!1
3 Supergroup Demodulator Combining Panel I
4- ... lliil
4 Supergroup Modulator Combining Panel ....... .. ....... .
5- .......... .. .. .. .

5 Supergroup Jackfield 6 .( . . . '"" 1-- 7

14 - all
8 . .... ,.� � 9
6 Supergroup 1 Modulator 14 - -
10 r• • " ""
• • •
II
Supergroup 1 Demodulator 14 � lill'
7
12 .r• .• . ": 13
14 - -
8 Supergroup 2 Modulator 15-
. ..
. ;__. .
...
16 ::::::·!··
9 Supergroup 2 Demodulator 17 - iii . ..
Iii
..

10 Supergroup 3 Modulator 17 - Bl Iii

... . .

11 Supergroup 3 Demodulator 17- 811 . .. . .

iii

17 - 1!!1 .. . . £iil
12 Supergroup 4 Modulator .

• !iii
18-
13 Supergroup 4 Demodulator
18- lii1 JiiJ
14 Supergroup Equipment Support 1111 liiJ
1 ...
( 15 Group Receive Jackfield 18 - �
L_
liiJ'

16 Group Transmit Jackfield

17 Group Demultiplexer

r 18 Group Multiplexer

•
FIGURE VII-C-5. AN/FCC-17, MULTIPLEXER SET,
RACK ELEVATIONS (PAGE 2 OF 2)

(
VII - 41
 ,,_
,,,,

FAILURE ALARM
SYSTEM

FUSE
PANELS

MAJOR JOR
ALARM M&.STER
CARRIER
...
•
,.
EXTERNAL
GENERATION MINaR
ALARM
ALARM$
SHELVES , PANEL •
ALARM NOR

SUPERGROUP •
MOD AND DEMOO
SHELVES

)
CHANNEL GROUP
64tcH.z
DEMULTIPLEXER PILOT �
PtLOT
SHELVES ALARM
--

FIGURE VII-C-6 FAILURE ALARM SYSTEM, OYER-ALL BLOCK OtAQRAM

,J
VII - 42
 2. AN/FCC-18

( (Thailand).
The AN/FCC-18 is the'� multiplex terminal used in ICS
It is also used in the LRC-3 in Vietnam.
in Area 2

A single multiplexer set AN/FCC-18 provides sixty 4 kHz v oice

channels in the supergroup one frequency spectrum. The physical arrangemen t
o f the AN/FCC-18 i s such that the set may be used a s the basic unit of a
high density terminal providing up to 600 voice channels. The channel capacity
of this assembly can be expanded in basegroup (12 c hannel) increments to a
maximu m of ten supergroups (600 channels occupying a frequency spectrum of
60-2540 kHz) by the addition of applicable equipment (Figure VII-C-7).

A single multiplexer set AN/FCC-18 is contained in three equipment

racks. Internal alarm is provided in the event of loss of channe1 carrier
within the multiplex. Only one means of path alarm and syncronization is
provided between terminal points. This is done by the 60 kHz pilot frequency
generated by the multiplex terminal set. Additional terminal sets can be em­
ployed and slaved to a master terminal for syncronization purposes. In the
event of failure of the 60 kHz pilot from the m aster station, a standby pilot
takes over instantly. There are no pilot frequencies generated in each base­
group (12 VF channels) to provide alarm m onitoring in case of basegroup failure
at the receive terminal.
I
• Multiplexer set AN/FCC-18 does not normally provide fcc individual
channel patching of circuits. If individual patching of channels are desired,
special provisions for installation of jack details will have to be made.
Multiplexer set AN/FC-18 in the 60 channel (one supergroup) configuration
does not provide for group patching facilities.
(.
•.

Technical specifications:

Channel capacity From 12 to 600 4 kHz duplex channels i n

r
1 2 chan nel (one group) increments.

Type of multiplex Frequency division, single sideband,

and modulation suppressed carrier (lower sideband).

Frequency allocations:

VF Channel 300 to 3450 Hz

12 channel group (one basegroup) 60-108 kHz

..
60 channel group (one supergroup) 312-552 kHz

240 channe1 group 60-1052 kHz

600 channel group 60-2540 kHz

(
VII - 43
 Employment Designed for operation with either FM or
SSB radio facilities in line of sight or
troposcatter links; output may be adapted )
for cable or open wire transmission by
use of appropriate auxiliary equipment,
including repeaters, compandors, equalizera,
and regulators.

Processing capabilities Voice, digital data, teletyi� and fac­

simile.

Type of c arrier frequency Slave terminal synchronized to 60 kHz

synchronization pilot generated into the baseband a t the
master terminal.

Envelope delay From 800 to 3000 Hz the differential de­

lay (maximum with respect to minimum)
between two frequencies is 350 seconds
nominal in a single back-to-back arrange­
ment.

I.e.vels (4-wire)
i
I nput -16 dbm 4

Output +7 dbm

When the modulation plan for the AN/FCC-18 in compared to that for
the AN/FCC-17, a point of incompatibility is noted. In the AN/FCC-18, all of )
the individual ch annels in the GROUP are inverted (lower sideband, single­
sideband-supressed-carrier), whereas in the AN/FCC-17, the channels alternate,
inverted and erect (twin-c hannel modulation). If it is necessary to c onnect
a GROUP between these two pieces of equipment, only half of the channels would
be usable. ,

,,)
VII - 44
 EQUIPMENT SETS

( MULTIPLEXER SET AN/FCC-18(V)

;r

FIGURE VI 1-C-7.
600 CHANNEL, SOLID STATE, VF MULTIPLEX (FDM)
SET AN/FCC-18(V), 120 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION WITH SIGNALING

(
VII - 45 AN/FCC-18(V)
 C H A N N E L M O D E M-------,

FROM CH 2,
4, 6, B, 1 0,
FROM SG 2, 4,
AND 12 MOD AND
6, B, ANO 1 0 MOD
BANDPASS FILTERS
ANO BANDPASS
SIGNALING FILTERS

CH 1
+
VF CH 1 BASEBAND
MOD
300 TO 3450 CPS __ TERMI NAT ION 1----· 60 TO 254UKC
_,�� � AND
0 TO -16DBM UNIT -35DBM/CH
BANDPASS
600 OHMS 7 5 OHMS
FILTER

tI
CH t
GP I SG 1
CARRIER CARRIER CARRIER
I
FROM CH 3, 5, 7, 9, AND II FROM SG 3,
FROM 3 AND 5 --+--'
�OD AND BANDPASS FILTERS 5, 7, AND
MOD AND
9 MOD AND
BANDP ASS FI LTERS
BANDPASS
J
FILTERS
.- --- __ -_ _ _ ,
CHANNEL, GROUP,
<
I
AND SUPERGROUP
CARRIER SUPPLY

TO CH 2'
I TO SG 2,
4, 6, B, 4' 6,
10, AND 12 B, AND 10
OEMOD AND DEMOO AND
TO
BANDPASS BANDPASS
I GP 2 AN04
FILTERS FILTERS
OEMOO ANO
BANDPASS FILTERS

CH 1 GP I SG 1
VF CH 1 BASEBAND
DEMOD OEMOD DEMOO
300 TO 3450 CPS +---- 60 TO 2540KC
AND AND ANO I
0 TO +7DBM -35DBM;CH
BANDPASS BANDPASS BANDPASS
600 OHMS 7 5 OHMS
FILTER FILTER FILTER

t t
CH 1
CARRIER
Jl
CARRIER
SG 1
CARRIER
TO TO TO
CH 3, 5, GP 3 SG 3, 5,
SIGNALING 7, 9, ANO II AND 5 7, AND 9
OEMOD ANO DEMOD ANO MOD AND
BANDPASS BANDPASS BANDPASS
FILTERS I Fl LTERS I FILTERS

MULTIPLEXER AN/FCC-IS(V) (600 CHANNEL CONFI GURATION), BLOCK DIAGRA�

FIGURE VI t-C-8.

-- - -- -- -
 -- - -- --
•

,
,.., �· �

CHANNEL TRANSLATING EQUIPMENT

s;
-­
VF CHANNEL
64KC 68 KG 72KC 76KC 80KC 64KC BBKC 92KC 96KC 100KC 104KC 108KC CHANNEL CARRIERS
":! �
0.3KC 3.4KC I I I
("')
("')
I I I I I 184.08 I I I
I
I-' t::::.. REPRESENTS ONE TELEPHONE �����
00 CHANNEL IN WHICH THE AUDIO
,....
FREQUENCIES ARE INVERTED
$ 6 0K C B A S I C G R O U P (GDF) I 08 K C

REPRESENTS A PILOT FREQUENCY

i GROUP TRANSLATING EQUIPMENT

GROUP
CARRIERS

REPRESENTS A GROUP OF 12 TELEPHONE CHANNELS

< �����
1-1 ...::::l WITH VIRTUAL CARRIER FREQUENCIES SPACED AT 4KC
1-1 INCREMENTS AND IN WHICH THE AUD I 0 F�EQUENC IES
ARE INVERTED IN THE VARIOUS TELEPHONE CHANNELS
I BASIC SUPERGROUP (SDF)
L
�
..... 312 360 � 456 504 552 I KC

SUPERGROUP TRANSLATING EQUIPMENT

SUPERGROUP
612 1116 1364 1612 1860 2108 2356 2604 2852 CARRIERS

REPRESENTS A 60 CHANNEL
.L:1 SUPERGROUP WITH ERECT
SIDEBANDS

REPRESENTS A 6D CHANNEL ���������� MULTIPLEX

t::::.. SUPERGROUP WITH INVERTED 6o
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 312
1 1 564 a12 1o6o 1308 1555 1804 2052 23oo
BASEBAND
SIDEBANDS 552 804 1052 1300 1548 1796 2044 2292 2540
300
NO MODULATION F R E Q U E NCY K C

AN/FCC- 18 (V),
FREQUENCY ALLOCATION AND MODULATION PLAN
FIGURE VII-C-9.
 3. ICS System Synchronization:

A 96 kHz pilot frequency is used for synchronization of the

entire Area 11 CS system.
,,,
..
The ..Master 96 kHz is produced by the Master Frequency Generator
(MFG) at the Nha Trang cable terminal. This signal is then transmitted via
cable or radio to all other sites in the ICS system, whose frequency generators
operate as "slaves,. (Figure Vll-C-10) •

This pilot is received at the terminal, separated from the channel

signals, and fed into the Master Frequency Generator drawer (Figure VII-C-11).
A phase detector compares the phase of the incoming 96 kHz tone and the p hase
of the locally produced one. If there is an error in phase between the two
signals, an error voltage is produced which is proportional to the error.
This voltage is then fed back into the oscillator which will produce a fre­
quency change in the local "slave" MFG drawer. The MFG drawer supplies a
basic 8 kHz signal which is used in the carrier equipment to generate all
c hannel, GROUP and SUPERGROUP carrier frequencies. As the basic 8 kHz fre­
quency is corrected all carrier frequencies are also corrected and frequency
s ynchronization is maintained.

If the incoming 96 KHz pilot tone is lost, the MFG will lock in on the last
received signal. At this time the MFG will continue to supply 96 KHz p ilots
to all sites "doV>mstream" but the MFG in the absence of the phase lock con­
trols will be subject to drifts. (Figure VII-G-10)

It is n ot desired for the 96 kHz pilot to enter the channel

demultiplexers. Figure VII-C-11 shows how it is eliminated as well as other

)
•
details as to its routing in the terminals.

Area 2 (Thailand) uses a 64 kHz synchronization pilot. Synchroniza.

-
tion between the two areas is provided over the Vung Tau - Sattahip undersea
cable and Monkey Mountain Warin Radio System. Pilot interface is accomplished
at the 8 kHz level.
,

}
VII - 48
 ·- ..,_ - - - - .._...... - - ..,._ ..... - .._.

..
,...
. .-... """"

CAM RHAN BAY CAM BAY

AB

CAM RHAN

LONG BINH r ...

, 1

VUNQ MACV-1
CABLE

TH I ET

<

FROM WETWASH
I CABLE
•
[BAN ME THouT ]
U)
1----- II -i NHA TRANG � • � PR' ll NE I � j PLEIK u J
I

IPHAN RAN8 Jl
�----� �
DA NANa lcHu L••l
CABLE TERM�--��
��--�
MoNkEY MOUNTAIN

DA NGA I

FIGURE VI 1-C-10 ICS SYSTEM SYNCHRONIZATION1

96 KHZ PtLOT ROUTING PLAN
 EACH SUPERGROUP 96 KC PILOT ELIMINATION FlLTER WIRED IN THE
96 ICC PILOT SYJIC 312 TO 552 ICC LINE. LESS THAN l/2 DB INSERTION LOSS FOR
TOllE PICICED OFF OTHER I=REQUENCIES 60 TO 108 KC.
BY HYBRID A T
THIS POINT

GR 2 060 - 408 KCl

SGR 1 GR 3 !408- 456 KCl

DEUOO
GR 4 1456- 504 ICC l
..------.

GR 5 !504 - 552 KC) GROUP 5 GROUP 5

CHANNEL VF DROPS
DEMOD DEMOO 0- 4KC

RADIO
60 TO 552 ICC
GR 1

GR 2

SGR 2 GR 3
D EMOO
<
GR4

GR 5

(11
0

PILOT APPEARS PILOT APPEARS PILOT APPEARS HERE AS NO PILOT TO APPEAR HERE
HERE AS 96 KC HERE ONLY IN 96 KC. PILOT TO BE OR ON ANY TH RU-GROUP
GR 5, SG 1 AS ALTERED OUT OF LINE TRANSMIT LINE
516 ICC PRIOR TO APPEARANCE AT
GROUP DEMUX OUT JACK

NOTE
96 KC PILOT DOES NOT APPEAR IN SUPERGROUP 1A
LINE FREQUENCY !PHASE ONE ONL Y1

FIGURE VII-C-11. 96KHZ PILOT APPEARANCES.

--
 D. TELETYPE MULTIPLEX EQUIPMENT:

( There are two primary types of teletype multiplex equipment in the

fCS:

AN/FCC-19, -25 (Contractor Fur nished)

AN/FGC-60 (Government Furnished)

It is common to refer to teletype multiplex equipment as VFTG (voice­

frequency telegraph) equipment; however, DCA publications use the ABBREVIATION
VFCT (voice-frequency carrier telegraph).

1. AN/FCC-19, -25 Telegraph T ermi nals:

a. General �scription: The AN /FCC-19 and .AN/FCC-25 are full duplex,

non-diversity, frequency division telegraph multiplex equipment for transmitting
telegraph information over microwave, tropospheric scatter, or landline facilities�
(Figure VII-�1,2 ). The AN/FCC-19 multiplexes 16 channels of telegraph
information into a single voice channel. The AN/FCC-25 multiplexes 32 channels
of telegraph infor mation into 2 voice channels (essentially two AN/FCC-19's in
a single rack). The FSK (frequency shift keying) modulation and channel
carrier frequencies are in accordance with DCA stan dards. The AN/FCC-19, -25
has a meter and test panel which provides a 90 baud square wave test signal,
a 600 ohm balanced line step-attenuator which may be patched into any VF cir-
cuit, a loop meter for measu ring telegraph loop current, a delay meter for
comparing relative transition times on two independent loop circuits, and VU
meter for bridgi ng or terminating measurements on 600 oHm VF circuits.

(, Manufacturer: Tele-Signal Corporation

b. Technical Characteristics:

OC Loop Input:

, Input Keying 10 to 100 ma de, up to 150 vdc, neutral

or polar, positive or negative

Keying Sense Direct or i nverted, positive or negative

Keying Speed Up to 90 baud

Bias Distortion Tolerance Bias correction adjustment compensates

.. for up to 10% marking or spacing bias •

DC Loop Output:

Relay Output Polar relay contacts, electrically f loating,

for 10 ma to 100 ma loop current

Direct Output Neutral -12 v dc, 10 ma max (source im­

pedance approx 200 ohms)

(
VII - 51
 Keying Sense Direct or inverted, switch selectable

Bias Distortion Less than 5' at 90 baud

l
Signal Delay Compensation 5 milliseconds minimum adjustable range

Keying Speed Up to 90 baud

VF C hannel Input:

Frequency Range 3 00 Hz to 3 kHz

Modulation FSK

Signal Leve 1 -45 to +5 dbm/c h

...
Impedance 600 ohms

VF Channel Output:

Frequency Range 300 Hz to 3 kHz

Modulation FSK I
4
Signa 1 Leve 1 -5 to -30 dbm/ch

Impedance tiOO ohms

Block diagrams of a send and a receive channel are shown in " )

Figure VII-D-3.

2. Telegraph Terminal AN/FGC-60 (V):

a. General Desciptiont The AN/FGC-60 (V) Diversity Telegraph

Terminal is intended for use on long distance communications links. It
,
provides for transmission and reception of a number of independent telegraph
c hannels whic h are simultaneously conveyed over one audio circuit. To insure
a high order of realibility, the receiving portion of this systew is equij>ped
wit h dual diversity as well as quadruple diversity facilities. (The ICS
does not use the diversity terminal).

The AN/FGC-60 (V) Nondiversity Telegraph Terminal is in-

tended for use on communications links where diversity is not required. The •

terminal provides for the simultaneous transmission and reception of a number

of independent telegraph channels, and contains the identical basic components
of the diversity terminal except for the diversity comparators and twinning
panels. (This is the terminal found in the EE Buildings).

Both terminals are f ully transistorized 16 channel frequency

division multiplex systems. All the channels are individually operated and
utilize the audion frequency shift keying method of signalling. Maximum key­
ing speed is 100 wpm.

,)
VII - 52
 b. Technical Characteristics (Nondiversity Telegraph Terminal):

( Number of Channels 16

Channe 1 Spe ed 100 w pm max

Modulation Type Independent audio frequency shift

keying of each channel

Frequency Band 3 kc nominal speech circuit for 16 each

.. 100 wpm tel egraph channels •

Channel Center Frequencies 425 to 2975 Hz, s paced 170 Hz

Frequency Shift z42.5 Hz

Signal Sens e Positive all channels (mark is center

frequency+ 42.5 Hz)

Receiving Section :

Input:

Type Frequency s h ift keyed audio

�requen cy Bandwidth 3 Hz nominal speech circuit

( Keying Speed 100 wpm

Impedance 60 ohms balanced (transformer isolated)

Output:

r Level and Impedance Neutral floating output of 65 ma maximum

into 200 ohms.

Telegraph Battery Internally provided (may be disabled if

external battery desir ed)

Loop Current Adjustment 2500 ohm, 25 watt potentiometer inter­

nally provid ed in Electronic Switch.

Transmitting Section:

Input:

Gereral Electrically f loating; input terminal may

be grounded or left ungrounded.

(,
VII - 53
Keying Neutral: ±40 to 65 ma into 220 ohm load,
direct or inverted; j20 ma into 620 ohm
load. Neutral: ±1 aa min into 2200 olua
internal load, 10 vdc. Polar: d ire ct or
'l
inverted, +1 ma into 2200 ohm internal
load polar.

Keying Spee d 100 wpm

Power Sending battery not provided; external

battery required. ..
Output:

J\udio Impedance 600 ohms balan ced.

I
�

j
VII - 54
 EQUIPMENT SETS

( TELEGRAPH TERMINALS AN/FCC-19 AND AN/FCC-25

'

FIGURE VI 1-0-1 • 16 CHANNEL, FULL DUPLEX

TELEGRAPH TERMINAL AN/FCC-19

(
Vt6 .. 55 AN/FCC-19
 EQUIPMENT SETS

/
�

1- - - - - - - - I I I
I I 1- - - - - - - -�
..f.lJ
CHANNEL CONVERTER
.
I
1---- ----1 1--------1
MOOU LES

.
o J9,
-e -e----=---
0
o
o D o D ,'
' MONITOR & TEST PANELS
a e
.o�0 a
C:S
0 o
0 D o
o o .o.
0
o 0 o

0 0 0. 0
· . .

I,, I II
o
.o o .o. o _ o o. •

,I ' PATCH PANELS

='
Ill �
00
•

L KEYER

)
ULES

- -----
1- - - - - - -II III
CHANNEL CONVERTER
MODULES

1--------1 � ,
1'------...o;
I ' " " ' PA<ELS

[QID D
I [QQ] D

AN/FCC-25 AN/FCC-19

FIGURE Vll-0-2.
EQUIPMENT LAYOUT OF TELEGRAPH TERMINALS
AN/FCC-19 AND AN/FCC-25

)
,,

AN/FCC-19 VII - 56
 -- - -- --- -- -

"""' �. �'

CH.I
KEYER IN

>- DIGITAL
1- MON KEYER
_J
C H.I
0
------ (ODD)
� 1
ILl
I I
1.1..� HYBIRD CH.2 CH.2
I KE YER VF OUT KE YER IN
>-I 1�__.-A/'..._
l _,:_j

L.::= ___ j
oz
DI GIT A L
zO
w­
�
o· �
KEYER
cncn
o::E
l-en CH.2
(EVEN)
z
<1:
lr
1- AGGREGATE BUSS FROM EVEN AGGREGATE BUSS FROM ODD
CHANNEL KEYE R VF OUTPUTS CHANNEL KEYER VF OUTPUTS

< '------ SEND VF AGGREGATE CIRCUITS--------J '\ SEND DC CIR CUITS /

CH.I CH.I RE CEIVER

RECEIVE R LINE IN LOOPIN G
U1 REC VF IN
"""" L INE O UT TNG � CHAN . I RECEIVE
MON FS TONE � DC LOOP OUT
RECEIVER
a �.��.-
REC 0 REC C H.I
(ODD)
z
LINE IN
0
OUT
ILl ii) >­
> (/) 1- ,-----il CH.2 CH. 2 RECEIVE
H y Bl RD RECEIVER LINE IN LOOPING
iii � :J __.,.{)(}_.:..j
l I
OUT
ocn­
lr <1: �
w z0
I I
L.:: ____ :J C H AN. 2 REC EIVE
FS TONE
DC LO OP OUT
::E !!= liJ �/
0 z
RECEIVER
0:: 1.1..-
1.1.. > _J
CH.2
VF AGGREGA TE B USS TO ODD (E V E N)
C H A N N EL FS TONE RECEIVER INPUTS

AGGREGATE BUSS TO E VEN CHAN

FS TONE RECEIVE R INPUTS

'------R ECEIVE VF AGGREGATE CIRCUI TS--------...-/ '----RECEIVE DC CIRCUITS /

FIGUR E V II-D-3 SIMPLIFIED B LOCK DIAGRAMS SEND AND RECEIVE CHANNELS, AN/FC C-19,-25
E. ICS CONDITIONING EQUIPMENt':

1. The following list of conditioning equipnent represents

what nay be expected to be found in all ICS Tech Controls:
'l
a. Vi" Amplifiers

b. VF Attenuators

c. � Units (1600 Hz And 26 00 Hz)

d. 2Ulz Ringdmm Conv erters

e. 2W/4W Tenn Sets

f.· DC Isolation Relays

g. 4\Jay -4\vire Bridges

h. Limiters

i. DX-2 Units ( AT E� 0 i-1 E S I T C :� )

I

j. Pulse Link Repeaters f

k. Regenerative Hepeaters

1. lJC Hubbing Un it s
)
2. It nay be that additional pieces of specialized gear may be
found in o ne o r more rZ's, hO\vev�r this equipxrent is usually installed
for s�c:ial applic ations an d is not comno n to all s ites.

l. Voic e Frequency Amplifier: 1

Hodel: 456B

}lanufacturer: Alte c Lansing

a. Specifi catio n:

Frequency Hes pons e +l db, 200-6000 cycles

.Haxirm.un Power Input -22 dbm (at maximwn ga in)

}iaxinnun J>O\·.rer Output +17 dbm

··l)
VII - 58
 Output Noise Level -70 dbm

( Input Gain Control varies gain from -2 db to maximum of 39 db

Operating Voltage 24 or 48 vdc {selected by moving screw,

accessible on bottom of amplifier case)

Input Impedance 600 ohms

Output Impedance 600 ohms

Current Drain 20 ma (at 25 and 50 vdc, when selector

screw is in proper position)

b. Description: The 456B amplifier is an all-transistor unit,

I • utilizing three silicon transistors and a printed circuit for maximum uniformity
of production and minimum variation in operational characteristics when subjected
to ambient temperatures as great as 140°F.

The circuitry of the 456B Amplifier has been designed to

minimize RF radiation from nearby relays, stepping switches, battery supply
spikes, etc., in order that relati vely high speed data may be pas sed through
the amplifier without excessive signal mutilation.
I
• The gain control affords a range of approximately 40 db. In
order to adjust the gain, the lock nut on the control must be loosened. The
level at the monitor pins on the front panel, bridged by 600 ohms, is 11 db
below the output level of the amplifier. After adjustment is completed,
carefully tighten the locking nut and recheck the gain setting to ascertain

( the control shaft was not disturbed in the tig htening operation.

2. VF Attenuators:

Manufacturer Lenkurt Electric

r Model 5200 A

Mounting 4 t o a shelf

Values 0-31 db in 1.0 db steps

Impedance 600 ohm balanced

Levels:

Input ...20 dbm. maximum

Output Depends on option and input level

Construction Purely resistive, suitable for use on

voice or carrier frequency circuits.

(
VII • 59
 The attenuator consists of a series of balanced H-pads (Figure
V II-E-la).

The desired amount of attenuation is selected by placing straps

'l
on the terminals to either connect the appropriate H-pad in the circuit or
to short it out. The dotted lines on the schemati c in Figure VII-E-la depict
the straps for 10 db. The straps are actually made on the front of the u nit.
Figure VII-E-lb show the front of the unit properly strapped for 10 db loss.

Problem Areas:

The problem with straps on the attenuator is that the wiremen will
fail to place the straps on bottom row of lugs. This causes the circuit to
b ecome unbalanced.

� I
3. Single Frequency Si gnalling Units:

A typical application of the Collins SF Unit is shown in Figure

VII-E-2. The theory of E&M signalling was covered earlier in section VI-D-4.
Both models of signalling units are small transistorized plug-in .adules
mounted 20 units to a shelf, 3 shelves to a bay.

The two units are:

j
•
2600 Hz Mode 1 20D3-1MX

1600 Hz M odel 20D4-1MX

These units are quite similar in appearance; however, the

unit can be easily recognized by the presence of a black push button on the
1600H z
)
front panel. The Collins SF units in the ICS EE buildings have been modified
so that it is not necessary to have battery on the M-lead to turn the tone off.
The modification is such that either battery or an open condition on the M-lead
will cause the tone to be turned off. However, if there is an open on th e
M-lead, there is the possibility that noise on that lead will cause the tone ,
to be turned on; therefore, for long M-leads (those leaving the EE building)
battery-on�the-lead should be used to insure proper operation. This modifica­
tion becomes especially valuable when it is desired to place two SF Units
back-to-back to change signalling frequencies. In this confi guration the
M-lead ot one unit connects di rectly to the E-lead of the other.

E I.e ad M lead
(From SF Unit) (To SF Unit)

S tandard Conditions:

Tone (on hook) Open Ground

No Tone (off hook) Ground Bat te ry

)
VII - 60
 Option Possible for Short Control leads:

( Tone (on hook) Ground Ground

No Tone (off hook) Open Open

4. 20 Hz Ringdown Converter:

Manufacturer Collins

Model 20El-MX

Converters incoming AC ringing tone bursts into DC signals

(M lead) to key a signal tone for transmission. The uni t also co nverts
�
receive DC signals (E lead) in to 20 Hz Ringing to provide ringdown conversion.

Input Ringing Tone Requirements:

16-100 Hz

40 �olts rms minimum

Ou tput Ringing Tone (determined by local source)

•
20 Hz

100 Volts

( 5. 4-Wire �rminating Unit:

Manufacturer: Lenkurt Electric

I

r
Model: 31041

The 4-wire terminating sets, hybrids, installed in the EE buildi ngs

have several important features (Figure VII-E-3).

a. The hybrid action causes a loss of 3. 5 db in both the receive

and transmit paths.

b. There is an adjustable at tenuator in each leg that may be set

to any value between 0 and 7.75 db in .25 db steps.

c. There is a varistor that may be installed across the XMT

Pair to suppress dial transients, etc. When this is done, an additional 6
db of loss is added in the transmit path.

d. There is built-in adjustable "network build-out" available

as well as a compromise net and terminals to connect a precision external
ne twork as desired.

(
VII - 61
"ICS Standard"

VII-E-4):
The normal use of the hybrid in I CS circuits will be (Figure ''l
a. Varistor connected in XMT line.

bo Total loss in XMT line - 16 db.

c. Total loss in REC line - 4 db.

do Network build-up set to "Compromise Net".

Strapping
� I
The adjustable attenuators are set by connecting straps on the
front of the unit (Figure VII-E-5 a & b). The varistor and COMP NET are
connected by straps on the rear of the uni t (Figure VII-E-5 d).

The proper method of strapping is not understood by most technical

controllers. Any term sets strapped other than shown in figures VII-E -5 b & d
should be questioned.
f
6. I solation Relay Assembly: 4

Manufacturer Northern Radio

Model 304-lA

The isolation relay assembly installed in the EE building is very

)
small and compact. On a panel occupying only 3� inches in a 19 inch rack
there are 9 relays mounted together with the adjustable resistors in the bias
winding loop of each relay. The relay itself is the Sigma 72A, a very common
plug-in isolation
operation.
relay. The relay is capable of either de neutral or polar
The bias winding current is obtained from the 48v station battery.
,
The relay assembly panel is mounted beneath the jack strips in the DC Patch
Bay.

7. 4-Way, 4-Wire Bridge:

The 4-4 bridges presently in use in the EE buildings were locally

fabricated. They are completely passive units with an insertion loss of
approximately 14.5 db and provide isolation in excess of 60 db. A schematic
of the bridge is shown in Figure VII-E-6. For details as to their construc­
tion and use refer to RCG LL TCG S&P Item Nr. 0521.

8. Limiters:

The limiters used in the E E building are WECO lOOA varistors.

There are 50 of these mounted directly on a vertical pin block. Wired in
series with the v aristor is a jack that is used to "lift" the varisto r off
the line ( Figure VII-E-7). This lifting is accomplished when either a dummy
plug or a plug from a monitoring or test device is inserted in the "Lifting
Jack".

d)
VII - 62
 The lifting jacks are located in the miscel laneous jack strip
on the PRIMARY Patch Panel. However, the WECO lOOA v�ristor are designe d for
use at the -2
( CKT Patch Panel
dbm l evel an d must be
point.
install ed across the line at the

9. Repeating coils:

These are standard 600 ohm center-tapped to (/X) ohm c�rt er­
tapped transformers used to p rovide audio continuity and DC isolati<n.

10. DX 1 and D.X 2 Units:

DX 1 and D.X 2 units, made by Stranberg Carlson, are used to

extend the c apabilities of the E & M leads over circuit paths greater
than 25 ohms . These units are generally used at locations lobere the
signal site is located some distance fran the dial central o ffice (DCO).

11. Regenerative Repeaters:

The TH-73/UGA-5 regenerative repeaters are used in the ICS to

restore distorted (up to 45%) teletypewriter signals to 5% distorti on
I or less. This is accomplished by circui ts that electronically time
and regenerate the signal.
�
12. DC Hub Repeaters:

DC Hub Repeaters, Northern Radio Model 353, are used to provide

( multipoint terminal operation for teletypewriter subscribers without
the usual series circuit co nfigurati ons. In this fashion, circuit faults
in one leg of the multipoint circu:it will not disable ccmpletely all ather
legs or the circuit.

r 13. Echo suppressors:

The long haul circuits (SATCOM, oversea cable,etc.) requi re the

use of echo suppressors to reduce the amplitude of return signals "echoed"
from the distant end. These echos, usually caused by an unbalanced hybrid
at the distant end, are not noticeable on short circuits because the
returned signal is nat distinguishable from the sidetone in the
telephon e circuit. The longer circuits, because or the transit ti mes
involved , have echo problems because the user can easily separate the
echoed (and delayed) signal fran the telephone sidetone signals.

(
VII - 63
 1 Dl 2 Dl 4 01 8 Dl 1§ H
I I I I

r---,
'l
/ '
'

INPUT OUT�UT

..
--
\ '
\ I \
/
/
, ___,
I
'- ' , ___

A. ATTENUATORS ScHEMATIC

(DOTTED LINES-STRAPS FoR 1008)

� DO Db ,
2 0 Q �
1
0
D � d 0 0

� CUJ �
B. FRaNT VIEW (STRAPs FoR 1008 L•aa).

fiGURE VII-E-1 VF ATTENUAT8R

,)
VI I .. 64
 (
--
r--s-; unite�� equipme t � - ,
1 (the top shelf of each bay 1
contains the 48-24v converters
I for that bay) I
I (one oscillator,with standby, 1
can provide signaling tone for
1
I
5 bays of 60 units each)
1
I 2600 or I
I 1600 Hz
- ....--
converter -' 48 v
oscillator "'

I I
I
I I
L-- -- - ______ _I
-- tone - 24v
I

� v It

transmi .. t ransmit
transmit
veice
sectien ,
... signa lin g t one
or voice
M l ead .. •

(
receive :"
voice � recei ve receive:
secti on signa.ling tone

r
�

or voice
E lead

Figure VII-E-2 APPUCATION OF COLUNS SF UNIT

( ,

VII-65
 XMT
'A IR

o... 7.75 * (6.00:; l

2 w lit! 3.501
,A lit

0-7.75 01
ltf:C
�------ �
PA lit

• I

FIGURE VII-E-3 4-Wtlt! Tt;ltMINATINI UNIT

---+- XMT
I

�
.. r! /
2-WIItl:

\-A ..

)
'

..,..__ ltiC
I

A. WITHOUT RINIOOWN CtNYEAT£1t

,
____,.. XMT

RO
-�CONV
2-WIR£
.508

'------ � R£C

a. W t TH RINaoowN CeNVERTER

FtGU,_E VII·E-4 "fCS STANDARD" 4-WIItl: TEAM SIT

,,
VI t • 66
 ( 3
I
0
4
'

0
A. HEAVY liNE INDICATE S TYPICAL STRAPPING
XMT SHows STRAPPlD FoR 1.25 DB
REC SH O WN STRAPPED FoR 5.5 DB

VIEW)

3 3
'
'
0 0
4- 4-
1 1
t

�
0 0
----- ---� --- -- ---- ·-y

W/0 RINQDOWN CONVERTER WITH RtNGDOWN CONVERTER

( XMT 6.5 DB XMT 6 DB
REC .5 DB REC 0 DB

r B. " ICS STANDARD" STRAPPING

( REAR WIEW) { REAR VIEW

0 0 0 ol lo 0 0 0

T I! Tl "' T R Tl Ill

Q--D
01/T 0 our
<IWo 0 0 0 1180 4W 0 0 0 11&0
�---q 0
0 f "
0 F
tl ll E I E
T2 z 0 T2 z 0 0
lifT 0 �--� r' b" "t, c
0
K
o-o
OG
0
11no r:;- �� .0 N N' c N G
( 0 0

7
A. • T1 '1!1 A II T\ !RJ
t.wo 0 0 �'0 2.w o 0 0 ·-o
o-oiil--o � O&iifO

c. REAR VIEW• NO STRAPS 0." ICS STANDARD" S TRAPPING

VARISTOR IN
CoMP NET IN

FIGURE VII-E-5 lEN�URT 4-WIRE TERMINATING SET, STRAPPING

(
VH - 67
 OUT IN
32 29 5 8
'l
LEG I

,
LEG 2

ALL RESISTORS 9)
tl 2 ) (36) (33'
ARE 750.11..
IN OUT
NOTE: TERMINAL. NOS FIQURE VII-E-6.
ARE PIN NOS ON PIN
BLOCKS
4 WAV-4 WIRE BRIDGE
SCHEMATIC
14 DB NET LOSS

)
VII - 68
 �r
) c) () C)
I"'
.�' (1\
\D
Jtf'
)If' A� 3NI1
•
. .. ..... ...
)
88 -.J.
13N Y4 H�J. Y4 A_,Ytotl•4 'd >
OJ.
..L
c c ) (
v A
u
F. PATCH PANElS:

A number of patch panels are found in ICS EE Buildings,

the capability for patching circuits and groups, and for testing.
providing
This
�l
large number of patch panels distinguishes the EE B uildings from tactical
technical controls and gives the technical controllers increased capability
for restoring circuits by patchin g, as well as a testing capability .

1. GROUP Patch Panel:

The GROUP Patch Panel, located in the multiplex equipment room

of the EE Building, provides a capability of testing and patchin g at G ROUP
leve 1 (Figure VII-F-1). A group can be rerouted by using a patch cord, just
as a circuit can. Each GROUP has two appearances on the GROUP Patch Panel -
one for each direction. These are arranged by SUPERGROUPS on two separate
jack strips (Figure VII-F-2). Strip JFl is the transmit side and strip JF9
is the receive side. These two jack appearances for each GROUP have the
characteristic common to most patch panels - u nless a patch cord is inserted
in the jack, the GR MX I N is connected to the CH MX OUT directly bel ow it,
and simil arly GR MX OUT is connected to CH MX IN. When a patch c ord is
inserted into a jack, the "normal-through" path is broken and rerouting may be
accomplished. There are also jack appearances for the input and output of
the through-group filter pairs (JF7 in Figure VII-F-2).
j

2. Audio Patch Panels: �

There are three type of audio patch panels (see Figure VII-F-3):

(4 wire)
)
Voice Frequency

Circuit (6 wire)

Primary (2 wire)

These provide a patching and testing capability at various points ,

in the circuit.

a. VF patch bay - this provides jack appearances at channe 1

modem input and o utput. A VF patch ba y is shown in Fig ure VII-F-4, Figure
VII-F-5 shows the jack module assembly of the VF patch bay and the wiring
schematic of a VF jack set is shown in Figure VII-F-6. Figure VII-F-7 shows
the VF patch bay arrangement as it is used for testin g. An enlarged viel-l o f
the VF jacks for two 4-wire circuits is shown in Figure VII-F-8.

b. Circuit Patch Bay - t his patch bay provides equal-level

appearances of all circuits. If there is signalling on the circuit the SIG
(E&M) leads have a separate appearance on the CKT patch bay. A circuit patch
bay is shown in F igure VII-F-9. Figure VII-F-10 shows a circuit patch bay jack
assembly which will handle twelve 6-wire circuits. The wiring schematic of
a circuit jack set is s hown in Figure VII•F-11 and Figure VII·F-12 shows the
in-out wiring of a circuit jack set. An enlarged view of the jacks fcc one
circuit is shown in Figure VII-F-13.

.J
VII - 70
 c. Primary patch bay - this patch panel provides a patchin g
capability at t he sub scriber end o f the circuit. A p rimary jack patch bay

( is shown in Figure VII-F-14. Figure VII-F-15 shows a p rimary jack module

capable of handling t wenty-four 2-wire circuits and Figure VII-F-16 shows
the wiring schematic of a primary jack set.

3. DC Patch Panels:

A DC patch bay is shown in Figure VII-F-17 with one DC jack

assembly, capable of handling 12 circuits s hown in Figure VII-F-18. Figure
V II-F-19 is an enlarged view of the jacks for one 4-wire DC circuit.

(
V II - 71
,
,'""
,..--- --------------------------

300 312 312 108 108 =-

�
GROUP CHAN
- - �
I 1-12 ;::
=
360 60 160 �
1360 108 108

GROUP CHAN
--
2 1 -12

408 60 - l�o
..
408 108 lC 108
ID
GROUP 0 CHAN
- -
-r-
A. 3 l-l2
0
:::> .,
< 0 -
BASEBAND II:
0
456 60 60 IO VOICE CHANNELS
%
60-300 Kc
456 108 0 108 EACH CHANNEL
II: ...
..., <II[ .3 TO 3.5 Kc
-:a Q. GROUP Q.
CHAN
1\) ::> - -
(/) 4 A. 1-12
:::>
0
504 60 II: 60
"
1504 108 108

GROUP CHAN
-
5 1-12

60 552 1552 60 l�n

..,

FtaURE Vlt-F-1. locATION 01' GROUP PATCH BAY

- - .......,_ -
 -- - ._,... _ -- -

• • • •

.,...,. i.-.·. �

JFI
I TO SITE 18 I SGR 2 TO SITE 18 I I SGR 3 TO SITE 18 I SGR 4 TO SITE 18 I I
I I SGR
GR GR
MX MX
IN IN
�000000000000000000000000�
CH CH
MX MX
OUT 0000000000000®00000000000® OUT
I IGR I 2 3 .._ 5 I I 2 3 4 5 1 1 I 2 3 4 5 I I 2 3 4 5 I I

JF9

I I SGR I FROM SITE 18 I SGR 2 FROM SITE 18 I I SGR 3 FROM SITE 18 I SGR 4 FROM SITE 18 I I
< GR GR
DMX OMX
OUT 00000000000000000000000000 OUT
CH CH
DMX DMX
-:a IN
w
�0000000000000000000000000 IN
I IGR I 2 3 4 5 I I 2 3 4 5 I I I 2 3 4 5 I I 2 3 4 5 I I

JF7

I I PAI R 9 I PAIR 10 I PAIR II I PAIR 12 I I PAIR 13 I PAIR 14 1 PAIR 15 I PAIR 16 I I

IN IN
GR
GR 00000000000000000000000000
FIL F IL
OUT OUT
00000000000000000000000000
I I I I I I I I 1 I I I

FIGURE VII-F-2. GROUP PAT C H 8AV, JACK ASSEMBLIES

 TRSG -16 -16 -2 -2 - 16 -.s
LEVEL
REC +7 +7 -2 -2 -2 -5.5 -6

VF JACKS CIRCUIT PATCH

o-f-=-r
PRIMARY JACKS
�
INBAND TO/FROM
223A SIG 238A
- 2WC�BLE
2600 CPS c:>- SUBSCRIBERS

TRSG
DROP
o-l
238A

239A
�
MON

223A 238A

<: �

FIGURE VII-F-3. TYPICAL VF CIRCUIT SHOWING LOCATION OF

VF, CIRCUIT, AND PRIMARY JACKS.
 (
TERMINAL BLOCK
COVERS

...
t

DESIGNATION DESIGNATION

LABELS LABELS

(
JACK MODULES

..

NAMEPLATE

FuuRt:VIt-F-4. 4-WIRE VF PATCH BAY

(,
VI I - 75
 DESIGNATION
LABELS
l
HOLE PLUGS OUT IN

DESIGNATION STRIP WITH

CARDS AND WINDOWS

...

One Jack AssemblY serves

24 4 wire circuits

n {�· ==
'

In I
FtQURE VII-F-5. VF JACK MODULE ASSEMBLY
)
TBI TB2 TBIO
- r-'---1 � ,---'-----,
01 0
<t
"' � "' <2 "'
'i: x J: J: J: x
<> <> (J (.,) (,) 0
THRU THRU THRU THRU
R R R R R
MOO T T T T T T

R R R R R
E"Q
·T T T T T T
OUT

MON

�
MON jacks are
01 0
<t
- �
"' N 0 �
J: x J: J: J:
on MOD and on <>
J:
<> <> <> <> <>
R R R R R R .,
OEM T T T T T T
DEMOD sides

n
R R R R R
EQ T T T T T T
IN

MON
II v
0
I

Fe�t. Vlt-F-6. VF JACK WIRING SCHEMATIC ·"')

VII - 76
 ( .--

MODULATOR­
DEMODULATOR
OF
CARRIER
CHANNEL

I 1

l
REC +7 OBM TRANS -16 OBM

..

i
OEM MOO
OUT IN

{��-; i-�J
TEL 4-WIR E
..
--
11
i
rl
4-

--
WIRE
PATCH f-il> MONITORING

I CORD AND
TALKING

I I CIRCUITS

n
v

I
�
I
I I
I I
n v
MON MON

I I
11 lL---o--+--'
L.o---v n
1 1
I I 600.0 TST

L _;_--------+---..
TRANSMISSION
I .

�
NOIS E AND

:.
CROSSTALK

I
VOLUME

( MEASURING
CIRCUITS
EQ
I EQ

I
IN OUT

rv n
4- i l �
� I I I

L-t------1---+---_. � �
I 1000 CYCLES
1-MW SUPPLY
600 OH MS

I
NOTE:
I
I
DOTTED LINES
INDIC A TE PATCHING •

I
A R RA NGE M EN T
FOR TESTING

I
t
PURPOSES.

�
L _____ ..J..__�---+

TO VF T ERMINAL EQUIPMENT

FtauRt VI-F-7. 4 -WIRE VF PATCH BAY JACK ARRANGEMENT

(
VI I - 77
 'l

J.\CK S
FOR
ONE
CIRCUIT

..

JACKS
FoR
ONE
CIRCUIT

FIGURE VII•F-8• LAYOUT OF VF JACKS

(Two CIRCUITS)

,)
VII- 78
�
(.)
0 (/)
......J w
z _J
co ::J
0 w
......J
1- 0 1-
<{ <{ 0 <{
z (/)
- cc z (/) �
......J
Q_
� w (.9 ......J w
w �
cc > (/) co () � ,..
w 0 w <{ <{ •
I- () 0 ......J <{ en
J z
X
u
....
•
a..
....
-
:;, 0'\
0 t-
• I
-
0
>
•
c:n
I
LL
•
>
...
z
-
!
0 .....
1-
<{
z (/)
(.9 ......J
w
(/) co
w <{
0 ......J
 DESIGNATION LABELS

DESIGNATION STRIP WITH

"�)
CARDS AND WINDOWS

..

HOLE PLUGS

ov"�
One Jack Strip serves
lli- � 12 6 wire circuits

FIGURI VII-F-10 . CIRCUIT JACK MODULE ASSEMBLY

TBI TB2 TB7 )

- :;: THRU
"'

;:
,.,
;: THRU
.,.
N
J:
,.,
r-
J: THRU
.,.
"'
J:
u u u u u u

R R R R R R

nv
REC
T T T T T T
MON

n�
REC
LINE
REC MON and
R R R R R R TRSG MON are
T
TRSG
LINE
n� ""--<
J
T T T T T T both on LINE
side

n·v I
TRSG

I
MON

M M M M M M
SIG
LINE
n\ E E E E E E

R R R R R R
REC
DROP
Wv T T T T T T

R R R R R R
TRSG
DROP
n·v T

M
T

M
T

M
T

M.
T

M
T

M
SIG
DROP
nv E E E E E E

...
FltURI VII F-11. CKT JACK WIRING SCHEMATIC
VII - 80

�)
 (

� I DROP I

..
Tl
.-----J'

�
MON

-R
I

T
-R

TO VF
TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT

(
: l£� SIG u .:�� :

CIRCUIT PATCH BAY

FIGURE V 11-F-12 • CIRCUIT PATCH BAY JACK ARRANGEMENT

(
VII - 81
 'l

l II II J
n

"'

')

FIIURE VI 1-F-13. LAYOUT OF CIRCUIT JACKI

(ONE CIRCUIT )

,)
,

VII - 82
 f TERMINAL BLOCK
COVERS

,.
I

DESIGNATION LABELS DESIGNATION LABELS

JACK MODULES
(

� NAMEPLATE

Ftautu: VII·F-14.
2-WJRE PRIMARY VOICE
FREQUENCY PATCH BAY

(
VII - 83
DESIGNATION LABELS
,,
,,,_,

DESIGNATION STRIP WITH

CARDS AND WINDOWS

"'

One Jack Strip serves

HOLE PLUGS
24 2 wire circuits

'
nv� r---_
nv' ..;�·=====

PRIMARY JACK MODULE ASSEMBLY )

FIGURE VII�F-15.

..:. T�l T�2 T�B

I I I I I I
'ot �
MON is connected - N :c Cl)
- �
across line
11.1 THRU
z
-
..J
11.1
z
-
•.•

z
-
..J
THRU oot THRU
�
-
..J
�
-
..J
.
T H RU-
11.1
iii!::
..J ..J

R R R R R R

MON
I,
�IT •. T T T T T T
(II
Cl) N
'ot It) U)
N 'ot (II
N
CL
CL CL CL CL CL
5
LINE 0 5 5 5 :::1 5 *

11.1 0 0 0 0 0
11.1 11.1 11.1 11.1 11.1
R R R R R

EQUIP 0� ! u I' � T T T T T

FIGURE Vli-F-16.

PRI JACK WIRING SCHEMATIC

)
VII - 84
 (

TERMINAL BLOCK
COVERS

DESIGNATION LABELS :::--����tt:::1T DESIGNATION LABELS

SWITCH, LAMP & JACK

( MODULE S

NAMEPLATE
•

FIQUREVII-F -17. DC PATCH BAY,

(
Vlt - 85
 DESIGNATION LABELS

DESIGNATION STRIP WITH

CARDS AND WINDOWS
)
"

=
SEND
REC

1''..,£/ 11-=-.. ..-..11...-. 2'W�'"""""' ''

-. .,..,... ---
'' -- -
' '........,. ��� '' """" -.."
���......._......,."_ - lcS? �

�E�EC
THIIIU.

,.,e

HOLE PLUGS

One Jack Strip serves

12 4 wire DC circuits

� 1�1
n�·:::= C!L� I©= I In<:::==
FIGURE VII-F-18. SWITCH ' LAMP & JACK
)
MODULE ASSEMBLY

c)
VII - 86
(

-
r-- u- 11 1

FtQURE VII-F-19. DC JACKS FOR ONI: CIRCUIT

( (SEND AND RlCltVE)

VII - 87
G. COMBINED DISTRIBUTI ON FRAME - CDF:
c'
There is a large degree of individuality in the layout of the · ··
'\,
distribution frames in each EE building, but th ey do have certain common
c haracteristics:

1. There is only the one Combined Distribution Frame in each

EE b uilding.

2. All outside cables are terminated on the vertical side. These

cables are normally protected; h owever, in a few instanc es, short cables are
not.

3. Many sites have a terminal box mounted on a pole adjacent t o

t h e E E building. This "pole box" h a s a cable tha t is also terminated o n a ..
vertical.

4. The termination of all jacks (VF, CKT, PRI, and DC) appear o n
the horizontal side of t he frame.

s. All equipment, SF units, attenuators, amplifiers, mul tiplex

inputs and outputs, etc., appear on the vertic al side of the frame.

6. Since the EE buildings were des igned with a certain degree of

planned expansion capability, there are often house cables terminated on pin
blocks on the frame but not connected to any equipment. Sometimes they a re
wired to a plug-in module cage and the module capacity can be �xpanded by
simply plugging in the additional modules. In other cases. s uch as attenuators
and 4W terminating sets,
in order to expand.
it is necessary to "hard-wire" in the additional units
.,..
'

B. ORDER WIRE SYSTEMS:

Order wires are sole-user, dedicated circuits which are used for
the operation and maintenance of the communications system. There are f our
diff erent types of order wires found in the I CS.

Local Order Wires

Circuit Restoration

Express Voice Order Wires

Express Digital Order Wire

•

1. Local Order Wires:

There is a local order wire connecting the two terminals of

each ICS radio system, LOS, scatter, or diffraction. These order wires are
often called the "engineering channels", and as the name implies, they are used
primarily for the engineering maintenance of the system. They are terminated
in the radio and multiplex equipment room at several handy locations, usually

. )
VII - 88
 at the end of a row of bays. Since each site usually has more than one system
connecting it to other sites, the v arious local order wires are terminated on

( a jack strip and the maintenance man selects the desired one by merely inserting
his headset plug in the proper jack.

2. Circuit Restoration Order Wires:

The primary users of the circuit restoration order wires are the
technical controllers working at the patch panels. These order wir es are
usually terminated on .. Lynch panels" mounted in the patch pane 1 bays. The

.. Lynch panel not only provides the capability to answer incoming calls and signal
the other terminal by using the key switches, but it may also be used as a
.. cordless patch panel" to extend a call received over one order wire out onto
another one.
�

As stated above, the purpose of these order wires is to provide

communications for the technical controllers from one end of a circuit to the
other. For this reason the allocation of circuit restoration order wires is
not based necessarily on the number or size of links en tering the site, but
rather on the major terminals for circuits originating at this site. This
is the same hasis that is used for d etermining thru-group allocations , and it
is not surprisi ng to see a close correspondence between the thru-group plan
and the circuit restoration order wire plan.

3. Express Voice Order Wires:

The express order wires found in the ICS represent a rather

unique type of engineering channel. Equipment is provided at each IWCS site

( to permit selective sv,g nalling over the express order wire by dialing a two­
digit number. One drawback to this system however, is that it is effectively
a party line. Therefore, there have been six different express order wire
networks established.

The first of these is the Major Technical Control Express Order

Wire. This connects the technical control stations shown in the boxes in
Figure VII-H-1. The other station in the network is the "SOC'', the DCA/
STRATCOM Operations Denter located adjacent to the EE buildi ng at Ta n Son
Nhut. Figure VII-H-1 also shows the routing of this order wire circuit. It
can be seen that it makes a complete loop that is open at the SOC. If some­
thing should happen to disable one of the links in this network, it would
still be possible to contact all the stations by going around the loop the
other way •

.. The other six express order wire networks are the Area Networks
shown in Figure VII-H-2. The SOC is a member of each of these area networks.
A major technical control is a member of two n etworks and will have two ex­
press order wire control panels, whereas a minor station will have only the one
and the SOC will have seven (note, there is one for each direction of the major
network).

The express order wires may be used only to call other stations
in the same network. Therefore, Phu Bai would not be able to call Nha Trang
or Cam Ranh Bay. Note, however, that the SOC can dial directly to call any
---
site.

(
VII - 89
 The primary purpose for the express order wire system is to
provide communications fcc the SOC. These channels are intended primarily for
system maintenance, control, a nd reporting of maintenance activities.
,,,,
4. Express Digital Order Wires:

Associated with each voice express order wi re system, th ere is

also a selective-call digital order wire network which permits passing teletype
traffic to a specific location. It operates in a manner similar to the voice
system.

5. Routing of Order Wires:

Order wires are generally classified as eit her "in-band" or "out­

o f-band" according to w hether they are ro uted over a standard voice channel �

of the voice multiplex equipment or over a "supervisory chann e 1" derived in

the frequencies below t he multiplex message signal (i.eo, below 60kHz). The
exact det ails of how this is accomplished are covered elsewh e re.

The four types of order wires discussed here are classified as:

In-Band: Circuit Restoration Order Wires

Out-of-Band: Local Order Wires

Express Voice Order Wires

Express Digital Order Wires

..

,,)
VII - 90
 (
DNG

QNH
26/QENO

� �
WRN

..
l24r·l (VCM)

�HNHA(BP) {WW)
�p}<Wil I34/NAJB 35/NATW

25/PLKU
..--1 I
(CRB)
I
PRL
I
, I
VTU
27/UNGAI I
PLM
I --- t36/PHUL

( _______
____j_ ---

..,,.., TS N
I � ��, .....
43/CANO

( } INDICATES R OUTING
THROUGH THIS STATION
soc
AS A RELAY ONLY.
23 /XSOC

ROUTING OF MAJOR TECHNICAL CONTROL

EXPRESS ORDER WrRE
VOICE CALL CODE/ DIGITAL CALL CODE
�

FJ G UR E V I 1 -H - 1

(
\ 1 f I _q,
 I
, ,
NORTH CENTRAL AREA I NORTH AREA
I
24 I
\'JRN I
UBON
I
I
I
I
I
I •

23

----· -- - ------
- -- -----
soc
BLDG
xsoc

1--- ---- -- ------

)
SOUTHEAST AREA
I
I

St:dGON AREA

CJ P!.AJOR TECH CONTROL

0 i'viiNOR TECH CONTROL DELTA AREA ·�

AREA EXPRESS ORDER WIRE SYSTEMS

VOICE CALL CODE/ DIGITAL CALL CODE
F I GuRE V I I - H -2

.,j
.
VI I -92
 Ie REMOTE ALARM SYSTEM:

( When you are out at an

Brother•• is watching •
I CS site you might truly think that "Big
and you would be correct, for the remote alarm system
is transmitting detailed information about the status of your equipment to
the DCA/STRATCOM Operation Center (SOC) at Tan Son Nhut. The system has been
designed so that the occurrence of as many as 155 different conditions c a n
b e detected and transmitted to the S OC almost a s quickly a s t he local personnel
learn of them through the local alarm bells and trouble indicating lights.

When either a major or minor alarm occurs at a station, or an existing

one is cl eared, the SOC receives immediate notification. The personnel on duty
at SOC may then interrogate the alarm transmitter at the remote site to obtain
detailed information as to which of the 155 conditions exists. It s hould be
.. pointed o ut again that all of this is accomplish ed with no action being taken
by site personnel.

1. Major Alarm:

A major alarm is defined as the indication, local or remote, of

the failure of a por tion of the system that may result in a significant reduc­
tion in the quality and/or quantity of channels available fer service.

This may be caused by the complete failure of:

a. Any power amplifier (indicated by law forward power)

b. Any exciter (indicated by low forward power)

( c. Any receiver (indicated by received pilot failure or high

noise).

d. Any baseband amplifier (indicated b y baseband amplifier

transfer).

e. Squelching of the radio baseband (indicated by operation)

f. Multiplex transmission path.

Or the occurrence of any of the five quality m onitor alarms on the

d iffraction or troposcatter propagation mode paths, which are as follows:

a. Reduction of the received signal intensity beyond a pre-set

limit (severe long term fading).

b. Variation in test tone level beyond pre-set limits.

c. Idle channel noise above pre-s et limits.

d. Digital error rate beyond pre-set limits.

e. Transmitter loading above pre-set limits (over deviation).

'
VII - 93
 Or the occurrence of a DC power system failure, which will result
in an immediate or certain loss of DC power at the station in a short period of
time as indicated by rectifier failure or a major power system fuse alarm.
'1
2. Minor Alarm:

A minor alarm is defined as the indication, local or remote, of

the failure of a portion of the system that may result in the loss of one por­
tion of a redundant circuit that does not affect end-user service, or the
various fuse alarms whose failure does not affect more than one voice channel.

3. Path Alarm:

A path is defined as the wide band transmission facility between

adjacent stations, whic h includes the complete radio baseband made up of the ..
radio equipment, antenna and transmission line equipment, and the propagation
media between the adjacent stations.

A path failure alarm is defined as an indication of the complete

failure at the station of:

(a) Both power amplifiers.

(b) Both exciters�

(c) All receivers.

(d) Both baseband am plifiers.

(e) Squelch relay panel operation on a particular path. )

4. Summary Information:

Summary Alarm information is received at the SOC fo r all stations

at all times. It indicates whether or not there has been a change of state,
whether it is a major or minor alarm, and whic h path is affected (the system
permits identifying up to 9 paths terminating at a single site).

5. Detailed Informati on:

When the operator receives a "Change of State" indi cation, he notes

the summary informa tion and then interrogates the site's alarm transmitter to
provide detailed information about the alarm. The detailed infor mation covers
as many as 16 different alarms for a quadruple diversity troposcatter link to "

as few as 5 for a dual di versity line-of-sight microwave system without quality

monitors or power amplifiers. Table VII-I-1 specifies the alarms covered for
each type of system.

6. Automatic Performance and Quality Monitoring:

In addition to the equipment failure alarm, link performance

parameters wi ll be monitored and alarmed by a Link Performance and Channel
Quality Monitoring System. The monitor is made up of two su bsystems, a voice

VII - 94

)
 panel and a r ad io panel. The voice panel monitors and alarms the v oice channel
performance parameters of binary error rate, test tone stability, and �dle

( channel noise. The radio panel monitors and alarms the radio performance para­
meters of baseband loading and received signal intensity.

One vo ice channel in the message multiplex, preferably the hi ghest

fre quency or .. top.. channel, is required on each of the troposcatter and dif­
fraction paths to monitor the idle channel noise, digital error rate, and test
t one stability for the alarm syste m.

The voi ce panel is a full duplex terminal which utilizes a single

multiplexed voice channel (300 to 3400) to transmit thro ugh the link and
to monitor binary error rate, test tone stability, and idle channel noise.

.. With the excepti on of the bit error rate,

tinuously recorded on integral strip charts.
all performance parameters are con­
The binary errors are displayed
on a front panel totalizer counter. When the monitored parameters deviate
beyond the adjustable preset degradation threshold , an alarm will be give n and
a visual display wi ll be activated.

The radio panel will monitor , continuousl y record, and alarm

baseband loading and received signal intensity. When the adjustable preset
degradation threshold of a monitored parameter has been exceeded, an al arm will
be g iven and a visual display will be activated.

Radio Pane1 :

Receive Signal Intensity

( The voltage from the existing radio equipmen t si�al intensity

recorder is amplifi ed and fed into the recorder. This recording chart's very
low chart speed of 0.5 inches per hour will enable the operator to quickly
o bserve perf or mance over a 24 hour or longer pe riod . The adjustable alarm
threshold is set by a control on the front of the rec order. A time delay
relay is used between the recorder and the alarm relay suc h tha t the t hreshold
must be exceeded for thirty seconds before an alarm is indicated.

Baseband Loading:

The exciter output is monitored by this c hannel.

Voice Panel:

I dle Channel Noise

The test voice channel is essentially terminated at the transmit

terminal with the exception of a single hit,fh amplitude stability, 100 wpm VFCT
ch annel inserted at 3.145 kHz. The receive test c hannel modem filters out the
VFCT c hannel and furnishes to the id le channel noise monitor circu it the channel
noise between 300Hz and 2.1 kHz. This is then amplified and its average value
detected and ap�lied to the recorder.

\
VII .. 95
 �st Tone Level:

The transmitted VFCT carrier is used for both the binary error
rate and the test tone level stability measurement. The transmit terminal
�,
incorporates an automatic level control which stabilizes the VFCT carrier
o utput to within several tenths of a db. In the receive r section, the VFCT
signal is filtered and applied to both the binary error rate and the test tone
level stability circuit;ry. The recorder co ntains a dual adjustable threshold
circuit such that an alarm will be sounded for test tone levels which are either
�bove or below the desired value.

Binary Error Rate:

T he binary error rate monitor pro vides a true real-time measure of

link erro r rates. The transmit section generates a known pseudo random binary
pattern at a 75 baud rate 'Which is used to key the VFCT tone keyer. In the
..
receiver sect ion, the VFCT signal is demodulated in a tone receiver and the
binary o utput is applied to an automatic error detection system incorporating
automatic bit rate and pattern synchronization.

7. Alarm Receiving Sites:

It was already pointed out that the SOC at Tan Son Nh ut is a

receiving and monitoring site for the remote alarm system. At the SOC, the
alarm signal will activat e indicators on both the control console and the
wall display. In addition to the SOC, there are alarm receivers at Pleiku
w hich di splay the alarm signal on a-console only. Other than this, the operation
is identical with that at the SOC.

Figures VII-K-1, 2, 3 are reference material on the alarm and

performance monitor equipment.
)

¥)
VII • 96
 ALARM CONDITION CONFIGURATIONS
l 2 3 4 5

( 1. Power Amplifier #l low forward power X X

2.
.. .. #2
.. It .. X X

3. Exciter #1 low forward power X X X X X

4.
••
#2
tt .. .. X X X X X

5. Receiver #1 received pilot failure or high noise X X X X X

6. ••
#2
.. .. .. It .. .. X X X X X

7.
.. #3 .. .. .. .. " .. X

a. "
#4
.. It .. .. It .. X

9. Baseband failure X X X X

10. Multiplex major alarm X X X X X

11. Reduction in the received signal intensity X X X

beyond a pre-set limit (severe long term fading)

12. Variation in test tone beyond pre-set l imit X X X

13. Idle channel noise above pre-set limits

( X X X

14. Digital error rate beyond pre-set limits X X X

15. Transmitter loading above pre-set limits X X X

(over deviation)

CONFIGURATIONS:

1. AN/FRC-39 or REL 2600 equipment, operating in quadru ple diversity and

equipped with quality monitors and power amplifiers,

2. REL 2600 equipment, operating in dual diversity and equipped with

quality monitors and power amplifi ers,

3. REL 2600 equipment, operating in dual diversity and equipped with

quality monitors and not equipped w it h power a mplifiers,

4. REL 2600 equipment, operating in dual diversity and not equipped with
quality monitors or power amplifiers,

5. AN/FRC-109(V) equipment, operating in dual diversity and not equipped

with quality monitors or power amplifiers.

TABlE VII-I-1. AlARMS ASSOCIATED �\'ITH VARIOUS CONFI GURATIONS

(
VII - 97
 Fault Indicators @ FACT SHEET NO. 23

�,,
REL Fault Indicators provide instan­ dimensions are approximately 10-1/2 inches
taneous alarm, both visual and audible, of high by 2 1 inches wide by 20 inches deep.
failures detected in the various components The front panel contains 20 (amber)
of its associated radio equipment. Install­ fault indicating lamps (including 2 spares),
ed in radio stations the units provide opera­ an alarm sounder, sounder and lamp re -
tors with an immediate indication that a set pushbuttons, a power circuit breaker,
fault has occured in the radio equipment. and a (white) power indicating lamp. The
Fault indicators may be located in the drawer-type front-panel-and-chassis pulls
radio room or at some remote central
Cl)
Cl)
position in a station. In addition, opera­
•.-I
s-o
tional facilities allow further remoting by
0
+.J
provision of additional relays in the equiir­
<iS ment, in some cases.
r
- -
Itt C· t'· ._
� RELradio equipment, for both line-of­
• • .
:liiili£ ;lllliJ: -
� - --
sight and tropospheric scatter communi­
cations, is provided with dry contacts for
'oD critical and important functions. Should
e •· t�: _•_ _ _
.,.,e.
..... _.-: _
s:
•.-I a fault occur, the contacts close and cir­

iJ II II· � I> �'' •·

cuitry within the REL Fault Indicator en­
�
•.-I
ables the information to be centrally ob­
served.
- - --- -..: -�- ...

"" Compact Fault Indicator tor

'oD
s: Normally, each Fault Indicator handles

0
the faults for two receivers, one exciter Special tO kw Terminals
•.-I and one power amplifier. Two Fault In­

eX
� dicators are provided for a quadruple di­

<1-1
versity station, but it is possible for all out to allow access to�all electrical com­
0 faults to be displayed on one unit. ponents. Each fault indicating lamp is
s: )
0
Fault Indicators may be used in all associated with a specific failure. When

Cl)
classes of REL radio designs: 2300, a failure occurs the associated lamp comes

Cl)
•.-1
2400, 2500 and 2600 Series equipments, on, and the alarm sounder is actuated.

a
encompassing 1, 10, 50 and 100 KW
.....
•.-I

terminals. Each Fault Indicator is slight­

� ly different depending on the particular TYPICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A 10 KW UNIT
..c:
+.J
equipment configurations. If required,
.-1
:J
extra or spare positions may be supplied.
INPUT VOLTAGE: 120 VAC.:!:.5%, 47
•

'0
Generally, a Fault Indicator consists

Cl)
to 63 cps, single

+.J
of three basic sub-units: a display panel
phase, 180 VA
s:
.-I
for visual presentation which also carries
maximum
•
a bell for audible warning, a component
.....
0.. mounting panel which contains the relays
O PERATING 0 to +45 degrees
� and capacitors to permit visual signal -
TEMPERATURE: Centigrade
ing and a bell-ringing impulse, and a
power supply containing the appropriat e
RELATIVE HUMIDITY: 0 to 100 %
transformers and rectifiers to provide
D. C. and A. C. voltages.
HEAT DISSIPATIO N: 650 BTU/HR
The Type 1099 Fault Indicator dis­
(to air)
played is a compact unit used in con­
junction with REL's 2600 Series of so­
lid-state gear. In typical application,
associated radio gear consists of one 10 Four indicator lamps are associated with
KW power amplifier, an exciter and two the Exciter, seven with the 10 KW. Power
receivers. Amplifier, ·three with the Power Amplifier
The Type 1099 Fault Indicator is housed Heat Exchanger, and three with the Re­
in a cabinet -type enclosure for m ounting on ceivers (whose similar fault indications
a 19 -inch relay rack. The unit' s overall are connected in parallel).

FtQURI VI,_,_, .I
. .•�
vu - 98
 1072 Terminal Facilities Bay
@ FACT SHEET NO. 21

( REL's Type 1072 Termi­ fiers and receivers. This is available to permit 0. 1, 1. 0
nal Facilities Bay constitutes permits test corrections to the or 10. 00 second time constant.
a useful accessory to any system via this panel as well All REL receivers are provid­
tropospheric scatter system as providing monitoring facil­ ed with a signal strength re­
by providing a convenient in­ ities for the RF. corder output jack.
terface between multiplex
channeling equipment and the Modulation Patching Panel:
radio equipment. In addition, This provides for patching the
special patching facilities al­ exciter and receiver order
low for the performance of wire and traffic basebands.
most operational and main­ Proper terminations are pro­
(fJ
tenance testing. These in­ vided and measurements of (j)
levels may be made. Spare ·rl
clude selecting, combining , H
terminating, and monitoring jacks are provided to allow 0

one link of a diversity system. special patching facilities as �

The terminal facility can required in the field. 8
be
a
used in
performance
conjunction with
monitor to Hybrid Interconnect Panel:
j
tlO
perform system checks or This provides the correct s::
to provide a means of con tin­ arrangement of hybrids to in­ 'd
0)
uously monitoring the receiv­ terconnect the carrier multi­
ed signal strength. plex and order wire equipment i§
·.-!
tlO
Each terminal facility is to the exciters and receivers.
slightly different depending Correct impedances are main­ �
upon the radio equipment such
r tained. 0
as the REL 2300, 2500, or B
(1j
2600 series, type of multi­
plex usedand desired test fea­ l oooooo .
000000
---oooooo
00 000
Order Wire Assembly: This
provides for voice communi­
!):;
'H
0
tures. Any arrangement of cation over the radio service
facilities is available and the channel. Signalling is pro­ s::

(
0
combination of equipment may vided together with all filter­ ·rl
(fJ
be specifically built for each ing and bridging networks. A (fJ
·rl
system. separate amplifier and loud­
�
The terminal facility may speaker is provided. A head
�
be comprised of any or all of set is included.
..c:
the following units: Terminal +>
Panel, RF patching Panel , Line Amplifier: In those cases '9
Dual Recorder Panel, Modu­ where the carrier multiplex 'D
(!)
lation Patching Panel, Hybrid and radio levels may not be
Interconnect Panel , Order compatible a transistorized 1::
·r-1
Wire Assembly Panel, Line line amplifier is provided. H
·" P<
Amplifiers and Loop Conver­ This is extremely linear with
ters. In addition to the above,
.%l
a very flat response. Nor­
a filing and writing shelf, mally, two such amplifiers
drawer, test cords, head set are provided in one small
and other accessories are panel.
provided.
Loop Converter: '�:his pro­
Terminal Panel: This provides vides for converting the trans­
the control circuitry for the mitted RF signal to the re­
Order Wire assembly and ·.
ceived RF signal. This per­
Dual Recorder. Power mits local loop testing of a
switches with indicating lamps complete system.
are provided for the main Dual Recorder Panel: This
power circuitry. provides for the permanent re­ Overal dimensions of a

-- 72
cord of received signal strength fully equipped facility are:
RF Patching Panel: This pro­ of an individual receiver and height inches, width--
21 -- 18 1/2
-
vides points for RF sampling the combined signal strength. inches, depth
in the exciters, power ampli- A time constant selector switch inches, weight - 480 pounds.
FIQURI Vlt-1-2.
(
VII - 99
 Performance Monitors @ FACT SHEET NO. 12

REL Performance Monitors constitute

l
completely integrated test facilities for
checking the performance characteristics
of tropospheric scatter radio systems. As
a unique collection of special test equipment,
Performance Monitors offer maximum flex­
ibility for both in -service and out -of -service
tests through self -contained substitution
and measurement tests.
Mounted in standard relay rack cabinets
in either one, two, or three bay config­
urations, REL Performance Monitors are

.
co
<II optional customer items. Available in
...
every series of REL tropo radio sets, ..
a they are specifically designed as to fre­
..
IU
quency requirements and channel capacity.
a Performance Monitors serve two main
'@ functions by providing frequency conver­
�
sion facilities and test facilities not nor­
till
. c::
...
"'
mally available from standard test equip­
ment. In everyday practical use, Per­

�
.....
formance
service -tests
Monitors
while
are utilized
tropo equipment
for in­
is
� operatwg and carrying traffic, and in out­ Typical Two Bay Configuration
f;L! of-service tests when equipment has been

....
'T;i
C) r(:moved from service and is not carrying
traffic. Under these two basic categories,
Analyzers
without
(permit intermodulation
interrupting service),
tests
Noise Gen­
<11
Crl most prevalent testing consists of three erators for out -of -service intermodulation
""' tone intermodulation distortion tests and tests), Noise Analyzers (measure inter­
0
full baseband noise loading intermodulation modulation at receiver output), Carrier

.g distortion measurements, respectively. Zero Test Receivers and Oscillators, High )

... test units provided by Per­ Frequency and Low Frequency Modulators,
!1,1
til ·or .rnance Monitors for typical application Demodulators, Baseband Oscillators (pro­
....
s ''ons1st in part of: Monitor Converters vice baseband frequency for modulation
...
(convert transmitting RF signals to receiv­ deviation test and frequency response level
8, ing RF signals or IF signals), Test Con­ measurements), Baseband Voltmeters, 70
.c
+.> verters (convert IF signals to receiving megacycle Attenuators, and Patching
�roi
RF signals), Three Tone Generators and facilities.
:J:
"0

21 BRIDGE BRIDGE
r::;
.,.;.
·.
CONNECTION CONNECTION
I
...
1!'1<
<I)
CliJ

Block Diagram Showing System Three To11e Intermodulation Measurement

Block Diagram Showing FM Deviation Measurement

F I &URI: V I l- l- 3 •
.z;)
VII - 100
 J. Test Equipment:

( The va riet,y and quantity of pieces of test equipment installed

in a m building is astounding. There are over 199 different types
of test e q uipment in the ICS. The total quantity to be supplie d for
Phase I and II sites only is 4718. This is an a v erage of 132 i tems
ner site - ce rta inly a formidable capability.

However, test equipment that is malfunctioning or out of

calibration is valueless and may create a great deal of trouble.
The maintenance of the snecial types of e qui;me n t found in the ICS
has bee11, and will sure ly continue to be, a problem. Lalibration
servic es are provid e d by Field Calibration Teaii5 f rom Okinawa.

The proper and eff icient operat�on of the ICS stations re qui res
operating test e quipme nt . Experience in the past indicates that
this should be an area given c lose super vision.

(
VI 1-1 01
K. l CE Power Systems:

s it es,
If t here is one feature of each I CS site that is not uniform for all
it is p robably the pr imary ac power supply. There are se�ral c ombina-
')
tions found: sane with all I CS gen erat ors , others having 1 CS generators
only for emergency b ack- up, etc. The one feature th at is common to all sites
is the use of a de system to power a portion of the equipmen t .

1. DC Eq uipment:

The 48 volt de power source is furnished by several banks of

hi gh -c ap ac ity storage batter ies which are continually on "floating c harge"
from the station rectifiers. The de equipment is c onnected di rectly across
the batteries; therefore , any in t err uption in the rectifier output will not
affect t he op erat ion of the equipment. The equipment that is connected to the "

de system is:

a. Microwave Radio Terminals.

b. Order Wire and Alarm Systems.

c. Voice Frequency Multiplex T erminals.

d. All Con dit ioning Equipment in the Technical Control Area.

2. AC Equipment:

As stated above , the primary ac source may be either l CS or

some
have
generator; however, all s ites, except for those having no tropo terminals,
I CS emergency back-up generatcrs ">hich are installed and controlled so
)
a s to minimize power ou tages. The equipment that is ac powered is:

a. Tropo Radio Termin a ls.

b. Voice Frequency Carrier Telegraph Terminals.

c. Test Equipment.

d. Lighting (emer genc y lighting provided by battery units)

e. Air conditioning (not powered under emergency c onditi ons) .

3. Split-Bus Operation:

Where it has been possi ble to do so, the ac eq uipment has been
i nstalled on a "split bus" (Fig ure VII-K-1). The ac equipment is arranged
so that redundant equipmen t, such as the two transmitters in a tropo terminal,
is " sp lit " between the two power buses. When one generato r f ails , the system
is degraded, but not completely down �hile another generator is started. The
o ther feature of the systems is the ability to combine the two buses if both
generators on one bus f ail.

)
,,

VII - 102
 �- - -- - - -- -- --- ...... ,... --- --

,.. .�. �

. -- - ---- ----- - - - --- --- -- ,

I
I

RCVR RCVR XMTR

POWER
NR.2 NR.l NR .1
BUS A

<

.....
0
c.>

POWER RC VR RCVR XMTR

BUS B tiL4 NR.3 NR.2

L-------------------------J

F18U"' Ylt-K-1 S�aT-8UI o��RATI ••

�' ..
......

- - - _ ...._ ----
 VIII. TACTICAL EqUIM1ENT

( The primary reason for covering tactical equinment i.n thi.s text is
to provide the information required to properly interface it with the
lCS fixed-plant facilities. For this reason, in the discussion o f the
tactical items, emphas is is placed on thei r interface snecifications.

The following items of "tactical" or "transportable" equipment are

covered:

Radio

AN/GRC-50

AN/TRC-24

AN/TRC-29

VF HUX

AN/TCC-3

AN/TCC-7

AN/TCC-13

VFCT

( AN/TCC-20

AN/TCC-4

TH-5

Signalling

TA-1 82

Modified TA-1�2 (TI!CS)

Technical Control

AN/MSQ-73

Circuit Control Facilities

SB-611/MRC

SB-675/MSC

'
VIII • 1
Tropo Systems

AN/TRC-66 ,'
,,,
··

AN/TRC-90, AN/TRC-90B

AN/TRC-97, AN/TRC-97A

AN/TRC-129

AN/TRC-132

FCM (Pulse Code Nodulation) Equipment

A. AN/GRC-50, RADIC SET

The A N/GRC -50 (V ) is a trans�ortable, VHF, radio set. It may be

used with 4- 12-, or 24- channel TDH equipnent to provide tele:rhone,
teletypewriter, data or facsimile circuits.

TECHNICAL CH.&&CTcii.ISTICS:

Configurat ions:

AN/GRC-50 ( V ) 1: Low and high band.

•
AN/GRC-50 (V) 2: Hifh band only. I
I

AN/GRC-50 (V ) 3: Low band only.

) !
j

AN/GRC-50 (V ) 4: High band only (has ad ditional x.mtr and rcrv).

AN/GRC-50 (V) 5: Low band only (has additional xmtr and rcvr).

Frequency ra.n[e:

Low Band: b01.5-999.5 mHz (400 channel in 1.0 mHz steps).

High Band: 1350.5-1849.5 mHz (500 channel in 1.0 mHz sters).

Baseband: 2/_.,0 kHz (250 to 240,000 Hz).

Input devices:

AN/TCC-3 (FDM); AN/TCC-7 (FDH); TD-202/U (TDM-fCH):

Flanning range (KM): 40 to 48.

c)
VIII - 2
 B. AN/TRC-24, RADIO SET

( The AN/TRC-24 is a transportable, VHF-UH.it, radio set. Conf igurations

of t he AN/TRC-24 are normally used in co njunction with Ter-minals, Telephone
AN/TCC-3 (4-ch annel) and AN/TCC-7 ( 12-cha nnel ).

TECHNICAL CHARAC'fEn.ISTICS:

Frequency range:

A Band: 5) - 100 mHz (200 channel in 0.25 mHz steps).

B Band: 100 - 225 mHz (250 channel in 0. 5 mHz steps).

C Band: 225 - 400 mHz (175 ch annel in 1.0 mHz steps).

D Band: WJO- 600 mHz (133 channel in 1.5 mHz steps).

F Band: 790 - 925 mHz (350 c hannel in 0.5 mHz steps).

J Band: 1,350 - 1,875 mHz (1,350 channel in 0.25 mHz steps).

Baseband:

68 kHz (250 to 68 ,000 Hz)

� 10 8 kHz (250 to 108,000 Hz, B Model only)
(
Input devices:

AN/'l'CC-3 (FDM); AN/'fCC-7 (FD1'1).

Planning range (KM): 40 to 48.

C. AN/TRC-29. R.ADIO SET

T he AN/TRC-29 is line-of-sight, VHF, ¥ucrowave terminal mounted in

f ield transportable cases. The AN/TRC -29 is capable or handling the
following si gnals:

Time Division Multiplex (TDM)

Frequency D ivision Multiplex (FDM)

Televisi on

Radar

(
VIII - 3
 At the present time, here in Vietnam, the only multiplex -equipment
in use is the TDM term inal, AN/TCC-13; however, t h ere are plans to UBe

a special modulator
over the AN/ThC-29.
to provide 4 wideband (50 kHz) s ecure voice channels cl
Tb;CHNICAL CHARAC TEJ:USTICS:

Frequency range:

1700 to 2400 mHz (27 RF c ha nnels , 25 mHz apart )

Baseband: 30 Hz to 4. 5 mHz.

Baseband In put Requirements:

.. I

Impedance � ohm

Frequency 30Hz to 4.5 dbm

Le vel -3 to -t'l dbm

Antenna;

Type Horn fed P ar abol ic Reflector

Size 3 foot d iameter

�
Gain 30 db
)
Planning range ( km) : lJ) to 48 •

D. AN /'fG C-3 , TEUPHON.l!: Crutrtl&t. T�ltlYilNAL

The AN/TGC Telephone Carrier Terminal is effectivelY one th ird of

and AN/TCC-7 Telenhone Carrier Terminal; however, it nrovioes only four
(300..3,500 Hz) voice channels or one (16kHz) !'!peciaJ �e:rvice ch11nnel.

In addltion to the four voice channels a separate voice orderw�re,

with 1600 Hz ringing faci lities, is provided.

The interface requirements f or the AN/TCC-3 are the same as those

for the Al"/TCC-7.

E. AN/TCC-7, TELEPHONE CAIN.IER TERMINAL

1. Purpose:

,,j
Vlll - 4
 (1) The AN/TCC-7 system provides 12 telephone carrier channels
over a single nonloaded spiral-four cable and/or radio links, such as
( AN/GRC-50 er AN/TRC-24, for distances up to 200 miles. Facilities are
provided for replacement of all or a portion of the 12 telephone carrier
channels by broad-band special service circuits in 3 frequency ranges.
The communication channels available for simultaneous use are listed in
the table below.

(2) An order wire circuit is provided in addition to the above

listed communication circuits.

(3) The message channels (or the special service channels used
in their place) are translated to a band of 12 to 60 khz for transmission
over the cable or radio links. The order wire circu it operates in the V}�
(voice-frequency) range.

2. Technical Characteristics.

a. Message Channels.

Nwnber 12
Frequency band 300 to 3,500 Hz
Impedance 600 ohms

Levels:
Input to Output from System net
Operation AN/TCC-7 terminal AN/TCC-7 terminal loss or gain

� 2-wire 0 db -3 db 3 db loss

( 4-wire -4 db +1 db 5 db gain

NOTE: The level at any point in a system is defined as the

gain (or loss) in db from some reference point to a
point under consideration. In the AN/TCC-7 system,
the 2-wire messa�e channel transmitting input is the
reference point {Odb level)

b. Special Service Channels.

Level: Input to Output from

AN/TCC-7 AN/TCC-7 Impedance
Frequency band kHz No. of channels terminal (db) terminal (db) (ohms)

4 to 20 3 0 0 600
12 to 60 1 0 -2 1 35
60 to lOS 1 0 -5 135

(
VIII - S
 e. Order Wire.

Frequency range
Signalling frequency
300 to 11700 Hz
11600 Hz
l
Transmitting level to cable +20 db max
Transmitti ng level to radio +10 db
2-wire extension to control board:

Impedance 600 ohms

Transmitting level 0 db
Receiving level 12 db

3. Modulation Plan and Frequency Allocation

Although the AN/TCC-7 produces a 12-channel GROUP in the standard

frequency band (60-108 khz) 1 it does this in a manner somewhat different
from that used in the AN/FCC-17. This two-step procedure can best to de­
scribed by referring te Figure VIII-1. First, 4-channel SUB-GROUPS are
formed in each of the three CHANNEL MODEMS. Then these 3 SUB-GROUPS are
combined into one 12-channel GROUP in the standard GROUP frequency band
60-108 khz. Finally the GROUP is translated to the frequency range 12-60
khz and an order wire signal is added to produce the output signal.

Since the frequency ranges are identical (60-108 khz), the 12-
channel of the AN/TCC-7 could be used as a thru-group on the AN/FCC-17;
however, it would be necessary to have an AN/TCC-7 at the distant end
to demodulate the signal because of the incompatibility of the inverted
and erect channels . I! the AN/FCC-17 channel multiplex was used, it would 1
be possible to reco ver only every other channel, the even numbered ones.
)
F. AN/TCC-13, MULTIPU.."""m SEI'

The AN/TCC-13 multiplexer in a pulse position modulation (PPM) terminal.

It is the principle multiplexer used with the AN/TRC-29 radio set.

TECHNICAL CHAR�CTERISTICS:

Type of modulation Pulse position

Type of multiplexing Time division

Audio channel:

Band vJith 300 to 3500 Hz

Signalling 20 Hz on subscriber loops. Signal is
transmitted over system by "blanking"
the pulse for the channel ("drop-channel
signalling")

,)
VIII - 6
 2-wire operation:

( Input level 0 dbm

Output level -3 dbm

4-wire operation:

Input level -4 dbm

Output level 0 dbm

Number of channels:

One A N/ TCC-13 provides 23 audio channels; however, it is possible

to "Slave" another AN/TCC-13 to the master to provide an additional .22
channels.

A. major cause of excess noise in AN/TCC-1J(AN!mc-249} systems here

in Vietnam is excessively high input levels on th e audio chamels. Otten,
it has been found that the input level to a 4 -wire channel has been set
at 0 dbm. If t his is done for all 45 channels, th ere is a significant
decrease in the signal-to -noise ratio in each channel.

G. AN/TCC-4. AN/TCC-20, TELEGRAPH Yliltl>UNALS

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

� The AN/TCC-24 and AN / TCC-20 provid e high -speed ( up to 100 wpm),

( half or full-duplex, frequency shirt, carrier telegraph circuits within

a voice frequency band of - 3,100 Hz and over two-or f our-wire
.300
circuits. The basic AN/TCC-4 provides an 8-channel system. Alternate
arrangements of the equipment are described below. These terminals pro­
vide for either a voice frequency or a direct current type of loop circuit
operation. The major components of the AN/TCC-4 are:

1 each Telegraph Modem TH-14/T (49 lbs)

2 each Telegraph Terminal Group TH-13/T (104 lbs)
2 each Telegraph Modem Assembly TH-15/T (82 lbs)

N0TE: The AN/TCC-20 is an AN/TCC-4 less t he TH-14/T

2. TECHNICAL CHA.ti.ACT.KtUSTICS
Loop arrangements:

2w - vf - HDX;
4w - vf - FDX;
4w - de - N eutral FDX;
4w - de - TAND�I - Neutral FDX.

(
VIII - 7
 Loop signal:

Vf: Mark - - 1,325 Hz

Space - - 1,225 Hz
)
'"

De: Mark - - 20 ma de
Space - - 0 ma de

Loop receiving sensitivity (vf): 0 dbm to -40 dbm.

Ringing in vf loop circuits:

20 Hz, 115v from terminal to loop;

20 Hz, 90v from loop to terminal.

Signalling in line circuits:

Channel space frequency operated two seconds minimum.

Break in one half-duplex operations:

Channel space frequency operated two seconds minimum.

Transmission level to line:

0 dbm (adjustable depending on number of channel).

�
3. Equipment Arrangements:
)
Channels re Transmission facility Components
lHDX or FDX J (Carrier. chanpel or Pbysical wire lin� required

4 Four-wire 1 ea TH-13/T;
1 ea TH-15/T.
(1 ea AN/TCC-20)

4 Two-wire 1 ea TH-13/T;
1 ea TH-15/T. �
(1 ea AN/TCC-20)

e Four-wire 2 ea TH-13/T;
2 ea TH-15/T.
(2 ea AN/TCC-20's)

8 Two-wire 1 ea TH-14/T;
2 ea TH-13/T;
2 ea TH-15/T.
(1 ea AN/TCC-4)

)
.,

VIII - 8
 12 Four-wire 2 ea TH-14/T;
3 ea TH-13/T;
(' 3 ea TH-15/T.
(one each AN/TCC-4 and
one each AN/TCC-20)

16 Four-wire 1 ea TH-14/T;
4 ea TH-13/T;
4 ea TH-15/T.
(two each AN/TCC-41s)

H. TH-5/TG, TmrRA.PH TERMINAL

Telegraph Terminal TH-5/TG is used between teletype stations to provide

teletypewriter transmissions over facilities which will not pass direct
current. For transmitting, the neutral Mark and Space signals from the
teletypewriter are converted to 1325 and 1225 Hz, respectively. The re­
ceived VF signals are reconverted to the corresponding neutral de signals.
The TH-5/TG also provides for connection of a local battery field telephone.
Telephone and telegraph transmission, however, cannot be simultaneous w ithout
additional equipnent (1"98 filter).

Circuit Application: Either 2-wire or 4-wire

Transmission Speed:
Type of Modulation:
Impedance (at 1000 Hz) :
Output level:
, Sensitivity:
( J aek Current:
Distortion:
Transmission Frequencies:
60, 75 , or 100 wpn
Frequency shift
600 ohms input and output
0 dbm +2
VF sigials -50 dbm; ringing 90v, 20Hz
14.85 to.l5 ma send, 19 to 23 ma
receive
5% maximum send and receive
1325 ±2 Hz Mark, 1225 ±2 Hz Space,
20 Hz ring (break)

I. T.A-182, CONVERTER, TELIDRAPH - TELEPHONE

The TA-182 is used to provide in-band signalling over the tactical

carrier equipment. It combines the operation of two pieces of fixed-plant
� equipnent into one unit, SF Unit and Ring-Down Converter.

The telephone signalling frequency of the TA-182 is 1600 Hz. It is to

provide caapatibility with the TA-182 that 1600 Hz SF Units were installed
in the l CS ; however f the tone output of the standard TA-1$2 is so high that
it over-drives the CS signalling unit causing signalling problems. A
modification program for the TA-182 has been initiated here in Vietnam to
correct this problem (refer to Paragraph J)
.. •

'
VIII - 9
TKCHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS:

Frequency of telegraph signalling:

Frequency of telephone signalling:
1,225 Hz
1,600 Hz
l
Loop signal input: 20 Hz
20 Hz output level to line: 1000 volts
Output level to line: 0 dtm ±2 db
Receiver sensitivity on line side: Low: -25 dbm;
High: -45 dl:m
Sensitivity on loop side: 25 volts

J. TA-182, (I CS MODIFIED)

The TA-182 has been modified for use on DCS circuits that traverse
the 1 CS by lowering the output level o! the 1600 Hz tone. This required
merely changing three resistors in the unit. Aside !rom the output tone
level, all other characteristics remained unchanged.

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS:

Frequency of telegraph signalling: 1,225 Hz

Frequency of telephone signalling: 1,600 Hz
Loop signal iriput: 20Hz
20 cps output level to loop: 100 volts
Output level to line: -1 0 dbm +2 db
Receiver sensitivity on line side: Low: -2'5 dbm;
High: -45 dbm
Sensitivity on loop side: 25 volts �
Instructions have been issued by the USARV AC/S C-B to modify all )
TA-1821s in Vietnam; however, there appear to still be a large number of
unmodified units in use.

K. AN/MSQ-73, COMMUNI CATIONS TECHNICAL CONTROL CE2iTER

1. Purpose. The U/MSQ-7.3 technical control van is an air-transportable

communications technical control center used to patch, monitor, and test
voice and teletypewriter circuits. The !loor plan of the van is shown in
Figure VIII-2.
�
2. Voice Circuits. Voice circuits from telephone subscriber equipment
telephone central offices, and multiplexer equipment can be interfaced at
the technical control van. The Following equipments are examples of multi­
plexer sets which can be connected through the technical control van: AN/TCC-.3,
AN/TCC-7, AN/TCC-1.3, C ollins MX-106 (used in transportable tropo systems),
and Len kurt 45BX.3. The technical control provides equipments for 2-a.nd
4-wi.re ..

,)
VIII - 10
 20 Hz signalling, 2-and 4-wire E and M signa lling and dial loop signalling .
Interlacing equipment provides compatible operation fo r voice and ringing
f signals between 2-wire and 4-wire corrmunication equ iprent. Examples of
th e typical modes of VF operation which rray be interfaced are as follows:

a. Tl«>-or four-wire ringdown to multiplexer

b. Two-wire E and .H or dial to multi plexer
c. Multiplexer to multiplexer wit h compatible or inc ompatible
signalling.

3. Teletypewriter Circuits. DC and voice-frequenc y (VF) teletype­

writer circuits from single or multi channel lines c an interfac e at the
technical c ontro l van. DC teletypewrit er signal co nverters ar e provided
to interconnect 20 ma and 60 ma lines. Voice-frequenc y telegraph (VFTG)
channel demodulators are provided to chec k any of the multiplexer channels
by means of t eletypewriter m:mitor and test equipment. A block diagram
or t he DC operation is shown in Figure VIII-3. DC patching and c ross­
cormect a.rrangerents are sh own in F igure VIII-4.

4. Test Equipment. All lines and signals which are connected thr ough
the c an be checked by test equipment which is included as part of the
van
van. Up to 12 ch annels of a multiplexer VFTG composite signal can be de­
modulated, tested and ana�zed by the test equipment.

5. C ircu it Capacity:

p VF 4-wire 120 c ircuits

VF 2-wire 96 lines
(
I

� DC teletype 4-wire 120 lines

6. Patching Levels: -2 dba

7. Multiplexer channel si gnalling: 1600 Hz and 2600 Hz.

8. Equipment installed::

VF Attenuato rs 450
l VF Amplifiers 150
Ringdown Converter 15 0
Hfbrid 2W/4W Terminating Units 100
1600 Hz SF Units 75
2600 Hz SF Units 75
Loop to E&M Converter 10
DC Isolation Rel�s 30
Repeati ng Coils 30
Pulse Link Repeaters 78
Teletypewriter S ite AN/FGC-69 1
Telegraph Terminal AN/FCC-19 1
Test Equipment Assorted

(
VIII - 11
L. SB-611/MRC, CO��ICATIONS PATCHING PANEL

1. Purpose. The SB-611/MRC is an air-or vehicular-transportable ')

ci rcuit control faci lity which permits patching (routing and re-routing),
testing in both directions, and monitoring telephone, vf and de teletype-
writer circuits.

2. Capabilities. The SB-611/MRC provides facilities fo r connection

of forty-six 26-pair cables, two spare 26-pair cables, and eighteen f ield
wire pairs. It contains faci lities for terminating and patching 528 lines,
and for termina ting and switching 12 circuits. Twelve hybrids are pro­
vided fo r converting 2-wire c ircuits to 4-wi.re circuits. A functional
diagram is shown in Figure VIII-5.

3. Major Components:

3-Bay Patch Panel 1

Manual Telep hone Switch board SB-22A PT / 1
Telegraph Terminal TH-5 /TG 1
Telephone Set TA-312/PT 1
Teletypewriter Set TT-44 TG/ 1
Generator, Static Ringing TA-248 TT / 1

M. SB-675/�llie, CO��illNICATIO�S P ATC HING PANEL

1. Purpose. The SB-675/MSC is an air-or vehicular-transpor table

circuit control faci lity which permits patching, t esting and monitoring �
of telephone, vf and de teletypewriter and system control (telephone and
interco mmunication) c ircuits.
)
2. Capabilities. The SB-67 5/ MSC permits connection of thirty-six
26-pair cables and twenty-field wire pairs to the patching panel. Twelve
of the field wire pairs appear on jacks on th e patching panel, and twelve
field wire pairs are terminated on line appearances on an SB-22/PT. A
total of approxi.nately 400 2-wire and 200 4-wire c ircuits may be patched.
�brids are provided for converting 2-wire and 4-wire circuits. A functional
diagram of t he SB-675 is shown in Figure VIII-6.
�
3. Major Components:

3-Posit ion Patch Panel 1

Manual Telephone Switchboard SB-22A/PT 1
Telegraph Terminal TH5/ TG 1
Telephone Set TA-312/PT 3
Teletypewriter Set TT-4A TG/ 1
Test Set TS-140/PCl•l* 1
Generator, Static Ringing TA-248 TT / 1

*(Includes DB Meter ME-22A/PCM and Sig C",.en SG-15A/PCM)

,}
Vlli - 12
 N. AN/TRC-66 RADIO Sl!:T

( A tropospheric scatter and line of sight radio relay equ ipment c apable
of transmitting 60 voice channels over single hops up to approximately 100
nautical miles and tandem hops to system lengths of approximately 1000 miles.
The radi o set is packaged in equipment shel ters capable of being transported
by truck, cargo plane or helicopter. Power output 1 KW.

System uses th e AN/FCC- 17 multiplex terminal equipment.

O. AN /'rrl.C-66A RADIO SE.T

A high ly transnortable tropospheric scatter rati o set capable of operating

either as a single or dual line-of-sight terminal, line-of-sight relay or a
quadruple diversity sca tter terminal or relay. 60 channels. 1 KW maximum
power output in the 4400 to 5000 MJ frequency range. Transpor table by land
or air (including helicopter). 100 nautical mile single hops or 1000 nautical
miles in tandem.

System uses the AN/FCC-17 multiplex tenninal equipment.

P. AN/TRC-9(), RADIO T.GHlillAL SET

1. General

The AN/TRC-90 series was developed from existing types of equipment;

� the MX-106 was a standard configuration of a 600 channel radiotelephone

�
( frequency division multiplexing terminal; the AN/TrtC-80 terminal which was
designed for a �ingle speech plus circuit on a dual-diversity tropo system
for use on miss:iJe ranges; and a modificati on of the N orthern Radi o Company
(NRC)-235, which is a 16 channel voice frequency carri er telepranh (1Tl"C'T').

The TRC-90 is a dual-diversity (space) tropospheric scatter radi o term­

inal with 24 voice frequency (vf) channels, 16 teletype (tty) channels, and
a speech plus service channel.

The transmitter is a 1 kilowatt frequency modulated unit operated in

l the 4.4 to 5.0 gHz range w.i.th a 15 f oot parabolic antenna which offers a
nominal 45 db gain factor.

The two receivers are dual-conversion super-hetrodyne FM types operating

in gombining dual-diversity. The original receiver front ends have been
changed from a three cavity to a four cavity preselector and a tunnel diode
amplifier has been added resulting in better sensit ivity, selectivity, and
s ignal-to-noise rati o.

(
VIII - 13
 The multiplexing equipnent (mux) is of the three step (channel),
basegroup, and supergroup), 24 channel, frequency division multiplexing
type utilizing th� lower sideband in all modulation processes. There are �}
two or four wire terminating options en all channels, though originally
it was available only on Basegroup 4. There are.!!! internal ringing fa­
cilities. Ringing is accomplished with externally wired TA-182 type con­
vertors. An order wire channel that is capable of simultaneous transmission
and reception of voice or TTY signals is also available.

The voice frequency teletype terminal is a 16 channel frequency

shift keying type. It has the keying line options of neutral 20 or 60
milliQlllperes {ma), or polar 20 or .30 ma with the battery being supplied
by the VFCT or by an external source.

There is a .32RS1 single sideband transceiver included as an integral

part of th e van which is utilized to establish initial communications and
for emergency purposes. The unit is a 4 channel crystal controlled
pretuned device using 455 kHz lower sideband selection for transmit and
receive functions. The operating »ange is 2 to 15 mHz with a 100 watt
peak envelope power rating. A shelter mounted 32 foot vertical whip antenna
is provided for the HF transceiver system.

Two air inflatable parabolic reflecter antennas and transportable

towers are stewed within the equipment shelter fer transit, and the set
can be t ransported by truck, helicopter, or fixed wing aircraft. A trailer
mounted diesel engine ac power generator (PU-402/M) is used to supply 208 v
at 15 kva primary power for the communication terminal. Radio Terminal Set
AN/TRC-90 can be set up by a team of six trained men in approximately 6
hours after arrival at a suitable site location. Interior layout is shown
�
in Figures VIII -7 and -8. ) �
2. Technical Characteris�ics

Transmitter

Frequency Range: 4400 to 5000 mHz

Type of Transmission: FM

Power Output: lkw

�
Radio Channels: .3.33 discrete transmit and receive
channels in the 4400.8 te 4998.4 mHz
band with 1.8 mHz channel separation.

Voice Channel Capacity: One order wire channel, full duplex

teletype or voice channel; or, one
4 kHz order wire channel and twelve
4 kHz voice channels with channel
No. 12 normally utilized to handle
16 full duplex narrowband FSK teletype

J
·.. , "

VIII - 14
 channels (+42.5 Hz); or, one 4 kHz
order wire channel and twenty-four
(' 4 kHz voice channels with one of
Them used to handle 16 teletype
signals (modulation Plan shown in
Figure VIII-9)

HF Capability: One 100 watt SSB transceiver with 4

switch selected crystal controlled
frequencies in the 2.5 to 12.0 mHz
•
range •

Hybrids: 2-wire/4-wire termination units are

provided for all channels.

DC Jacks: Jacks for 16 TTY loops with one set

jack and two looping jacks for each
channel; jacks fo r AN/FGC-25X and
loop current meter are provided.

Multiplexing: FIM

Standard Channel 400 to 3000 Hz +1.0 db, -1.0 db

Amplitude 300 to 2400 Hz +1.0 db, -2.0 db
Frequency Response
' Terminal to Terminal
(Channel Modem):
,
VF Termination Impedance:
(
'

•
2 wire: 600 or 900 ohms
4 wire: 600 ohms

VF Levels Transmit:

4 wire: -16 dbm ( -13 dbm available)

2 wire: Odbm

J VF Levels Receive:

4-wire: +7 dbm (+24 dbm available)

2-wire -3 dbm nominal
Signalling Provided external�

Q. AN/TRC-90A 1 RADIO TERMINAL S1'T

1. General

There is no major difference in the radio frequency (rf) portion

o! this terminal. There has been a 2300 Hz signalling function added to
the speech plus service channels. The front end of the receivers have again

\
VIII - 15
been changed to the four cavity turmel diode, amplifier type. The
antenna has been changed to a f our section 10 foot parabolic dish type.
The nominal gain of the antenna is 35 db. ''l
The mux terminals are mounted in swing out racks which allows
easier cleaning, maintenance, and faster troubleshooting. The jackfeilds
have been changed to an 'in-line' configuration to make the operation
simplier a nd faster. The ringing function is integrated in t o the ter­
minal's termination unit with a 1600 over 20 Hz ringing mode.

The VFCT jackfield has an added Line Lift jack which facilitates
troubleshooting and allows for altrouting around bad cable and/or bad
equipment. A fuse has been added in all the direct current loops .

Pi filters have been added in the vf and de signal entry pannels

offering both protection and cable noise suppression.

The 32RS1 has been replaced by the battery operated P�/PRC-47

single sideband high frequency (2-12 mHz) transceiver.

The air conditioner has also been changed.

The two antennas are secti onali z ed metal parabolic reflectors

10 feet in diameter. Each anten na is mounted with its center 15 feet
I
above the ground on a sectional tubular mast. (10-foot mast extension 4
sets may be ordered separ ately if required). Bipolarized feedhorn permits
using one of t he antennas for transmission and reception simultaneously. �
15-foot sections of low-loss flexible waveguide are provided.
) �
2. Technic al Characteristics:

The same as the AN/TRC-90 except that 1600/20 Hz s i gnalling

units are provided in te rn ally.
R. AN/TRC-90B, RADIO TERl'tiNAL SET

The RF portion of this equipment has undergone some major changes.

The Frequency Synthesizer, which is th e operating frequency determining �
dev ice, has been completely transistorized giving higher reliability,
stability, and accuracy.

The rece ive rs have the four cav ity tunnel diode amplifier front ends
as standard equipment. The IF has been increased from 8 to 10 mHz to
allow for a broader baseband (more channels). The IF unit has also been
transistorized and both receiver IFs are now incorporated into the single
Du al IF Unit.

j
VIII - 16
 The FM modulator has been transistorized making it mare compact ,
stable, and reliable.
(
The antenna is a 29 foot mes h 12 section parabol ic with a nominal
gain factor of 55 db.

The mux has several ch anges. The terminating and ringing facilities
for each channe l have b.een separated into two units. The op tion of 2600
or 1600 Hz is now available wit h either AC ring or an F&M line.

Redundant amplifiers have been added at th e basegroup level, al ong

wit h Basegroup Demod Regulators , which means more stability , higher re­
liabi lity, and bett er channel signal-to-noise level.

The VFCT's unused diversity op tion on the receive side has been
removed allowing a much more compact terminal. The keying on the even
numbered channels has been 'inverted' to make the equipment compatable
with the FGC-60, FGC-61, FGC-61A, FGC-61B, FCC-19, FCC-20 and several other
VFCT1s.

The 90B has an option of 24 or 48 vf channels and dual - or quad­

diversity when integrated with another 90B or 129 van. The 48 channe l
operation is accomplished with one interco nnecti ng cable and the changing
of the Basegroup Carrier Selector for both of the basegroups in the aux­
iliary van and the setting of two mode switches in each van. The quad­
di versity option requires two cables and the moving of the two receiver
, combiners f rom the Auxiliary van's Dual IF Unit to the FM Modulator in the

• (
14ain van. Also the Diversity mode switch has to be set in the ¥..ain van.

S. AN/TRC-97/97A, TiWPOSCATTER MDIO lilll..AY SE'f:

1. General

A completely solid state (except for klystron) transportable radio

terminal providing tunabl e microwave. diffraction, or tropospheric scatter
communications in the 4400 to 5000mHZ frequency range. Full y militarized
and designed for f ull duplex multi-cnannel voice, data, or teletype. Output
� power: 1 KW for Tropo & 1 watt fo r line-of-sight. 12 or 24 VF channels
available. 1300 RF channels in 432kHz incremen ts. 16 telety pe channels on
any one VF channel.

The set is transported on one M-37, 3/4 to n t r uck in an S-308 sh elter.

2. System Characteristics:

AN/'l'RC -o/7 AN/TRC-o/7A

Frequency Range 4400-50QOM:;

Transmi tter Powe r 1 Wat t Exciter; 100 -

1000 Watt s with P. A.

VIII - 17
 AN/TRO-,., Alf�C-2:zA

Number of RF Channels 1200 ,,

Diversity Dual Space

Modulation FM

Multiplex Type l'DM

Multiplex Ba seband 12-60 kHz 12-10S lt:Hz

Voice Channels 12 24

Teletype Channels 16 (In a VF 16 (In � V'P'

Channel D Channel

Shelter 'l';ype S-300 S-300

Sh elter Weight 1655 lbs 1�5 lbe

Trailer 'l';rpe M-101 M-101

Generator Set Diesel Engine Gas Turbine

3. Multiplexers:

!.Q!g!: The voice channel m ultiplexer AN/GCC-5 ccmbines 12, kHz

nominal voice channels into one basic group at a line baseband frequency �
/
spectrum or 12-60 kHz for use in the AN/TR.C-97. The AN TRC-97 A multiplexer,
AN/GCC-6, stacks two 12 channel groups at a line baseband frequ ency spectrum ) 4

4
or 12-100 kHz.

A patch panel is included for loop testing, monitoring and tor

teletype channel insertion and extraction in any voice channel.

The AN/TRC-97 Voice Multiplexer uses a twin sideband modulation

plan while the AN/TRC-97 A Multiplexer provides both inverted and twin
sideband modulation plans eith er being selectable by an internal switch.

TELETYPE: The teletype multiplexer is canpatible on the loop f

side with the TH-5/TG TTY converted and combines up to 16 TTY channels into
a single voice channel frequency band.

MULTIPLEX CHARACTERISTICS

VOICE CHANNEL MULTIPLE:Xm. AN/TRC-97 AN/'m.C-97A

..
--------�AN�Z�M�cc-�5 AN/GCc-6

Ne. ot Voice channels 12 24

VIII- 18
 Line Frequency Allocatj_on 12 - 60 kHz 12 - 108 kHz

( Modulation Plan Twin Inverted or Twin

Termination 2-wire or 4-wire

Signal.ling 2600 Hz

Levels:

2-ll/ire

Send -0

Rec -6

4-Wire

Sen:i -16

Rec +7

m.E'I'YPE MULTIPLEXER

VF T ransmit/Receive Terminal
,
Mark Frequency 1325 H z ± Hz
•
(
Space Frequency 1225 H z + Hz

Termination 2 T.f.ire or 4 wire

FDM Sixteen Channel Group

Channel Center Frequencies 425-2975 Hz in 170 Hz

Increment s

l Frequency Deviation + 42.5 Hz from each center freq.

Frequency stability +Hz

�
Data Rates 60,75, and 1 00 WPM

4. Antenna System:

The AN/TRC-97, 97A system uses dual space diversity for maximum

(
VIII - 19
propagation reliabilty. Two eight toot parabolic refiectors are normally
used and 1 5 .rt. parabolic dishes are available tor more demanding re�ire-
ment.s. In operation over wooded areas, horn antennas may be used for .,J
.
line-ot-sight and diffraction paths. Dual POlarized feedhorns are used
interchangeably with all of the reflectors.

T. AN/TRC-129, RADIO TERMINAL SET

This van is the same as a 90B except the antenna is the 11 foot t:rl'8
a s used with the 90A and the make of air conditioner has been changed.

1. Functional Description:

a. Radio Terminal Set is a transpOrtable, shelter­

AN/TRC-129
mounted radio tenninal wh i ch provides full-duplex FM SHF communications
with the capability of kHz voice channels, 16 .full-dunlex narrow­
24-4
band TTY channels, one 3 kHz telephone circuit and a teletypewriter both
for service channel use. separate auxiliary HF
A transceiver is Pro­
SSB
vided for camnunication during setup and instaUa tion. Tropospheric
scatter Propagation is the principal mode used by the main radio equipment;
however, line-of-sight transmission may be used with reduced power output.
2W/4W and 20-cycle ringdown capabilities are available for all channels.

b. Each set has two receivers which use physically seParated

antennas in a space-diversity terminal configuration.
�
c. !!!2 � may be interconnected to nrovid e the capability of �
operatin� as a auadruple (space-freouency or space-snaee) diversity
terminal configuration. ) �
In quad diversity the voice multiplexing equipment of both
NOTE:
shekters could be used to nrovide 4S-channel capacity. However, only
Radio Terminal Sets (which are electrically similar to
AN/TRC-90B AN/T"Rr.-
129) have this capability since each shelter of the uses twoAN/TRC-oOB
large 29-foot diameter antennas.

d. Relay station confim1rations can be set up using t!!Q ,2!: 1:2!!!:

� for dual � quad diversity respectively. �
2. Technical Characteristics:

a. General

( 1) Range: Up to 160 KH ( 100 miles)

•

(2) Terminal Setup Time: About 4 hours using experienced

7 man team.

b. Transmitting and Receiving Systems.

)
..,

VIII - 20
 (1) Frequency: 4.4 to 5.0 gHz

( (2} Number ot R1 Channels Available: 333 channels at 1.8 mHz

intervals.

(3) Power Output: 1000 watts FM (continuous duty cycle}

(4) Receiving System: Dual receiver in space diversity

configuration using separated antennas.

( 5) Receiver Bandwidths: Automatically variable fran 4 mHz

down to 200 kHz depending on signal strength.

(6) Antennas: Two sectionalized metal parabolic reflectors

10 feet in diameter. Bach antenna is mounted with its center 15 feet
above the ground on a sectional tubular mast. (10 foot m&st extension
set may be ordered separately if required). Bipolarized feedhorn permits
using one of the antennas for transmission and reception simultaneously.
15 .toot sections of low-loss flexible waveguide are provided.
NOTE: The above antenna system is identical with that used by Radio
Terminal Set AN/TRC-90A.

Co Multiplexing System

(1) Synchronized frequency division carrier equipnent is used

� to multiplex the 24 voice channels. In order to increase the overall
reliability of the voice multiplexer, power supply units are paralleled,
•
( and all active circuits requiring DC power and affecting more than one
channel are paralleled with standby units.

(2) The 16 teletype channels are narrow-band FSK Northern

Radio Co. carrier multiplex equipnent and are normally applied in place of
voice channel 12.

U. AN/TRC-132, RADIO TEIOO.NAL SET

� Basically the RF equipaent is the same as the 90B except it now has
the equipment necessary for a quad-diversity option (two transmitters and
.tour receivers) and 48 channel operation all in the one van. The VFCT
has been deleted to give the needed space •

The 132 has the option, with� ,!.!!! 1 of operating as a 24 or 48

•

channel, dual - or quad-diversity system, or as two independant dual­

diversity systems.

The van is equipped with through-grouping facilities so channels

ll&f be grouped through a relay station twelve at a time at the Basegroup
level.·

(
VIII - 21
 The single van may al so act as a dual-diversity 24 channel through­
group repeater with a 24 channel drop, or as a dual-diversity 4� channel
Ba seband r epeater with a party line service channel in all options. 'l
Two vans may be i nt erc on nect ed in an;r or several through group and
channel drop configurations, or as a Baseband relay all or the options
having the possibility or quad-diversity an:i a part;v line s ervice channel.

The ant ennas are 29 root parabolic reflectors.

All 48 channels are equipped with 21f/4W terminati� units an.d outions
o:t 1600 or 2600 Hz with 20 Hz or E&M signalling.

V. SUMMARY OF INTERFACE CHARAC'I'ERICS AN/TRC-90, -90A, -90B, -1291 -132

1. Voice Multiplex:

EquiJIIlent

All models Collins MX-106 (Modulation Plan

shown in Figure VIII-9)

Channel s

-90 24
-90A 24
-90B 24 �
-129
-132
24
4S ) �

Levels - All models

2-wire:

Transrdt Odbm

Receive -3 d't:m (nominal)

�
4-wire:

Transmit -16 dbm (-13 dbm available)

Receive -tJ7 (+24 dbn availab l e)

2. Teletype MUltiplex:

The AN/TRC-132 has no VFCT canability

EquiJDent:

-90 Northern Radio NRC-235

-90A Northern Radio NRC-235

,,)
VIII - 22
 -90B Northern Radio NRC-235 modified
-129 Northern Radio NRC-235 modified
(
Type of System

-90 Diversity (old channels inverted)

-90A Diversity (old channels inverted)

-90B Non-diversity (compatible with)

AN/FGC-60, -61, -61A, -61B,
-129 AN/FCC-19, -20, -25 and others)

3. Signalling

-90 None internal

-90A 20/1600 Hz only

-90B 1600 and 2600Hz SF Units;

-129 20 Hz ringdown crr E&l' sigmlliw
• -132
•
4. Tenninating Units

All models h ave full c apabilities for 2.;.;l'!ire or 4-wire termin ati!U" •

• 5. Antennas
(
• -90 15 root inflat able parabolic
-90A 11 foot sectional narabolie

-90B 29 foot mesh, 12-secti.onal parabolic

-129 11 root sectional piraholic

-132 29 foot mesh, 12-e:eetj_on narabolie

� 6. �fode or Operation

-90 Dual-diversity (snace only)

• -90A Dual-diversity (space only)

-90B One van: Dual-diversity
-129 Two vans: Dual-diversity

-132 Quad-diversity

(
VIII - 23
W. PULSE C O lE MODULATION E.QUIPMENT

Presently the AN/TCC -7 multiplex equipment used with the AN/GRG-50 radio ·')··. ·
system in RVN is being replaced by TDM-PCM equipment such as the TD-202/U
and TD/352/U. These and other related items of PCM equipment are discussed
below, following a brief introduction to PCM theory.

1. PCM Theory*:

Pulse code mo dulation (PCM) is a communication technique in which

voice, data or facsimile signals are converted into a series of digital
pulse codes. Each pulse code represents signal amplitude at a particular
instant and a series of pulse codes represents a complete waveform.
Since the transmitted signal is in digital form, it is less susceptible
to noise and distortio n buildup over long distance lines, and may be
regenerated at repeaters along the route without introducing ad ditional
distortion.

In the PCM process (See Figure VIII-10), standard amplitude levels are
assigned and are represented by digital codes. The incoming voice wave­
form is sampled at a high rate, and each sample. is converted to a pulse
�
at the closest standard amplitude, producing a pulse amplitude modulated
�
(pam) waveform. The standard amplitude pulses developed are then meas­
ured and converted to a binary pulse code for transmission. The pulse
codes are decoded at the receiving station and reconverted to a pam
waveform, which is then demodulated to produce approximately the original
waveform. As the sampling frequency is increased, the waveform generated �
at the receiver more ac curately resembles the original waveform.
) 4
In the TD-352/U and TD-353/U, PCM multiplex units to be discussed
below, the amplitude range of the incoming voice sig nals is divided into
64 levels which are then converted to 6-digit binary pulse codes. Com­
pandin� (compression-expansion) circuits are used at t he voice inputs to
improve the fidelity of very high-level or very low-level signals. These
circuits pro vide a non-linear ampl ification which compresses high-level
signals to the amplitude range required for conversion to the 64-level
range of the encoder and decoder, and expands very low-level signals to
provide more accurate coding. The low-level signals must be expanded �
because they would cover only a few pulse code levels and would be more
distorted than higher sign als. A complimen tary companding circu it is
incorporated in the receiver circuits to rest ore the signals to their
o riginal levels after decoding and demodulating.

2. Purpose and use of PCM Equipment:

a. General: The T D-202/U, TD-203/U, TD-204/U TD-260/G, TD-352/U

* Reproduced from TMll-5805-367-12.

)
VIII - 24
 TD-353/U, and CV-1548/G Provide voice-frequency (vf) channel multiplexing­
demultiplexing and telephone signal conversion in multichannel communication
( systems.

b. Multiplexer TD-202/U: This multiplexer is pr esentl y bein g

utilized in RVN. It is a 12-or 24-channel, pcm, radio transmission interface
unit. Its transmit section accepts time division multiplex (tdm) pcm
outputs from one or two TD-352/U's, a TD204/U, or from another T D-202/U,
and processes these outputs for radio transmission. The receive section
accepts a pcm signal from a radio receiver, processes and retimes it, and
�
extracts the order-wire signal.

c. Multiplexer TD-203/U: This multiplexer is a 48-or 96-channel

pcm radio transmission interface unit which performs the same fu nction
-
described above f or the T D 202/U , except it operates with the TD-353/U,
TD-204/U, or another TD-203/U.

d. Multiplexer TD-204/U: This multiplexer is a 12-24-, or 48-

channel pcm cable transmission interface unit. Its transmit section accepts
tdm-pcm output signals from a TD-353/U, from one or two TD-352/U's, from

I another TD-204/U, a TD-203/U or a TD-202/U, and processes these signals

� for cable transmission. The receive pection accepts a pcm signal from the
transmission cable , processes and retimes it. In addition, the TD-204/U
provides power for up to 39 TD-206'/G's in the transmission cable, and
contains an order wire facility.

, e. Multiplexer TD-352/U: The TD-352/U co n ve rts 12 fo ur -wi re vf

•
( channels to a tdm-pcm signal in its transmit section and vice versa in
its receive section. Two TD-352/U's are used with a T D-202/U or TD-204/U
to provi de a 2 4-channel capacity.

f. Multiplexer TD-353/U: This unit performs the same function

described above for the TD-352/U, except it has a 48-channel capacity.
Two TD-353/U's are used with a TD-203/U to pr ovide a 96-channel system.
One TD-353/U is used with one TD-204/U to p rovide a 48-channel capacity.

� g. Restorer, Pulse Form TD-206/G:

unattended repeater for pcm cable systems.
This unit is a two-way
It is installe d at 1-mile
intervals in the transmission cable to restore pcm pulse form and timin g.

h. Convert er, Te le phon e Signal CV-1548/G: The C V-1548/G p ro ­

vides telephone signal conversion and hybrid facilities for 12 multiplex
channels. Each channel contains one way plug supervisor and ring down
signal ling conversion facilities, a hybrid for converting between 2-wire
•
and 4-wire circuits, 4-wire straight through patching, and switching for
selected combinat i ons of these functions.

(�
VIII - 25
 3. Technical Characteristics of PCM EquiJ!Dent*:

a. TD-202/U and 'l'D-203/U: :')

''

PCM input or output signal:

Impedance ••••••• • • • • .•••••• • • • • • • • •• • • • . 91 ohms

Timing input or output signal:

Impedance •• • • • • • . • • . . • . . • • . • . . . . • • • • • • • • 91 ohms

Radio input or out put signal:

Impedance • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • •• •• • • 51 ohnts �

Required radio bandwidth (at 3db point):

1 2 -or 24-channel opn .... ... .... .. . ..

. . . 240kHz

4S-or 96-channel opn . .. .. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . 935kHz
j
Order wire:
�
Impedance .... ...... .. . .... .. . . ... .
. . . . 600 ohms
I

(test tone} ... ..... . ... . . •

Level . . . . . . . -4 dbm
�
b. TD-352/U and 'l'D-353/U
) •
Channel characteristics

Modulating bandwidth ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . . 300 to 3, 500 Hz

Input for full modulation • •• • • • • • • • • • -4 dbm teet tone

Output for :f'ull modulation •• • • • • • • • • • -4 dbm (4-wire)_, +1dbm

(2-wire), ou�pu� is
adjustable from -6 to
+4dbm). •
Input and output impedance . . ... ..... . 600 ohms (balanced)

PCM input or output signal:

.,
Impedance •••• • • • • • • •••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • 91 ohms
•

* On� equip:uent in use in RVN will be di scussed

,).
' " '

VIII - 26
 c. CV-1548/G

( Operating mode s (selected independently in each channel):

20 Hz signalling, 2-wire.

Plug supervision signalling, 2-wire (one-way)

from originator to terminator).

No signalling, 2-w:ire (hybrid only in use) •

No signalling, 4-wire (channel patched straight through).

20 Hz signalling, 2-wire:

From subscriber • 20Hz ringing voltage at

• ••• • • • •

16 volts peak minimum.

To subscriber 20Hz ringing voltage at

• •• • • • • • • •

�
75 volts rms mininnun (acros� four lines simultaneously).
•
Plug supervision signalling, 2-wire:

Opens or closes (T) tip and (R) ring lead circuit.

, Multiplex terminal inputs, 4-l>d.re (all signalling

•
( modes:

From multiplex teminal No tone or 1 ,600 Hz

• • •• • • •

in-band tone betwee n -25 and Odbm.

To multiplex terminal No tone or 1, 600 Hz

• • • • • • • • •

in-band tone at - 15 dbm (adjustable+- db).

Channel eharacteristies ( 2-wire ):
� Insertion loss • • •• •• . • ••••• • • • 4.5 db maximum
(250 to 3,500 Hz)

Input and output impedance .... . 600 ohms (balanced to !!:round)

(
VIII - 2 7
 (X)
C\1'-00 0 '-0 C\1 0
ovro.-..-C\1 '-0 t- en ....
,,
I I I I Jo
';1
I1
1

GENERA TOR OF
UPPER SIDEBAND AND 4-CHANNEL SUB-GROUP
CARRIER REMOVED BY 4 TO 20 kHz ( INVERTED
FILTERING CHANNELS }

SYMBOL FOR COMPOSITE SUB-GROUP WITH

j
NDIYIDUAL CHANNELS INVERTED
�
0
( SIMILAR SUB-GROUPS ARE PRODUCED ..IW
Wl­
BY CHANe MODEMS 1 AND 2) za::
88 zw
c(>
::t:Z �
u-
•-
C\IN
) 4
.-=
u...ll!
OCX>
0
(1).­
Z I
oo­
-t.Oco
.... _,
c( ..
a::a_:z
w

W:::>:Z
ZOe(
60 108 w� ::t:
O<!lU �
ORDER
WIRE

QENERATO� OF OUTPUT SIGNAL

12 CHANNEL GROUP I 12-60KHZ
'C\1 0
t- ... � ( INDIVIDUAL CHANNELS ERECT,
•
ORDER OF CHANNELS INVERTED )
...
( CHNL 12) ( CHNL 1)

F18URE VIll-I. MODULATION PLAN, AN/TCC-7

)
V Ill - 2S
 -- --- - ---

""" ,-,_ ·"'"""

, -

c: SIGNA
/ RECEP TACLE PANELS \ \ LEFT SIDE
\
[J I I I I I if
I I II I I
BAY I I B A Y 12 BAY 13 S T ORAGE
II�
SELECTABLE RING DOWN
CHANNEL CONVERTER TERMINATION CABII'ET
r MONITORING
BAY
BAY IHYBRID
BAY
i11I11111111l111t ir AN/FCC-19
LJ� ______________ IQ ___ __ _:j ___ �O_IE_j ____ _[j BAY
CD F 15 VERTI CALS AN/FGC-
0 o 0 0 0 AIR CONDITIONERS
EMERG ENCY :i� "'iji-
EXIT
- ------- P
DOORS

<
� ) T I E DOWNS
�LOcK-
�� �
SPARE PARTS
STORAGE
0 o CABINET o o 0
0
TECHNICAL MAIN POWER
-------- ---------.----------. .--
BAY I BAY 2 BAY 3
\ BAY 5 BAY 6
I POWER SWITCH
(\) BAY 4 PANEL
E M ERGENCY BAY 16 BAY 15 BAY 14
"' LIGHTING UNIT
CABLE CABLE CABLE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT VF
,- ,-
1600 CPS 1600 CPS 2600 C P S DESK
PATCH BAY PATCH BAY PATCH BAY PATCH BAY PATCH BAY TEST BAY SIGNAL!% SIGNALING
.,._) BAY 26 Ps
8�Et: BAY
SIGNALING BAY

REAR ENTRANCE DOOR

RIGHT SIDE.
N O T ESo
I. P RO TECTOR BLOCKS INSTALLED O N VERTICALS I THRU 4
AND PART OF 5.

FIGURE VII 1-2. AN/MSQ-73, TECHNICAL CoNTROL VAN, FLOOR PLAN

 CDF P RO TECTOR BLOCK
,,
p. "

I
DC

JACKFIELD

t
PATCH CONNECTIONS

DC VF
METER MISC
TRUNK
JACKFIELD
LINES

DC
�
DAS -10
- MISC
JACKFIELD
AN/FGC-69

�
) �
t-130VBATT
AN/FCC-19

J
TRUNK
LINES

DC

VF VFTG

------ �

Figure VIII- 3. DC operation. block diagram.

})
VIII - 30
 - ------/-�-- -B
��
-
�;R�;L T�ROUG� (T�;I CA� l--
-
( DETAIL A

--H '� -
N ORMAL THROUGH (OPTION) - �'
8
DETAIL B

LINE

--H IS OLATION
REL AY
B
'----- 20 TO 60 MA OR 60 TO 20 MA ------"
DETAIL C

I C OMP OSITE
MUX TONES I AF I A N /FCC-19
DC
FROM AF
PATCH

MONITOR TTY
PRINTER OR

�
'
-
DIGITAL DIST.
A N A LYZER PATCH

I �-----MULTIPLEX CH ANNEL TEST-------"

,_
DET A IL D

' -B - -- - --- -
-
- -- ----- ------ - - ---- --- �
PATCH
r ; -l L E
� ___lVL ®
j -�
i 1--- -fS(I
� ( �
___ IS OLATI ON
RELAY
L---
I I
I
MONITOR TTY
KEYBO A RD
I
DC TRANSMITTING TEST _/
I
DETAIL E

(
I

�
DiGITAL-DlST.
ATCH A N A LYZER OR

I
-8�-------------------------------��--
MONITOR TTY
PRINTER

"-TEST OR MONITOR OF N ORMAL THRO UGH TTY CH ANNEL-------"

DETAIL F
LEGEND:
� C ONNECTI ON ON CDF
-----X C ONNECTION
8 PROTECTED C ABLE C ONNECTI ON ON CDF

( Figure VIII-4.Dc patching and cross-connect arrangements.

VIII - 31
 �

1
I r,'
I I
2-SPARES TEl SWBD s
I AND 2
I
THREE BAY PATCH PANEl

""'-.. /
SIGNAl IN I· 22 l\ J SIGNAl OUT 1- 22

lfu
I I \ / ---o
- I TH-5
I
6PR 6PR
TEST TEl SIGNAl
SIGNAl
CABLE I I 2PR I\2PR L--
CABlE
ENTRANCE
BOX
I TT-4 I SB-22 J L---
ENTRANCE
BOX

_11
BINDING POST
PANEl

Figure VIII-5 Functional Dia�ram SB-611/MRC

�

I I
) �
THREE BAY PATCH PANEL

m m m
T CKTS 11-12

�
L--1 ME-22 I
SIGNAl

- J �
l
-
SIGNAl
4 SG-15
CAllE
CABlE
ENTRANCE
EXT WIRE 0 E NTRANCE
TEST Hl
BOX A
liNES 1-12 l SB-22 J BOX C

CKTS 1-12
•
-- --
BINDING POST SIGNAl CABlE
PANEl ENTRANCE BOX B

Fig'!Fe VII I-6 Functional Diagram �B-675/MSC

<:.)
VIII - 32
 - - - --

..

.� ..-.... -""

,...,

�
�
"'
0
�
>
t;d
�
en
LEGEND: tx:l
t-'!
en
I. POW E R DISTRIBUTION PANEL
2. S I G NAL ENTRANCE PANEL
3. DC PATCH PANEL
4. LOOP PAD PA-NEL
5. T TY MONITOR PANEL
6. 32 FOOT WHIP ANTENNA
7. ANTENNA COUPLER IBOV-1
B. AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
9. VFCT TERMINAL T YPE 235

10. VOICE MULTIPLEX CARRIER

MX -106
II. VOICE MULTIPLEX CARRIER
MX-106
12.. STORAGE AREA SPACE KLYSTRON
0oO 0 AND HF ANTENNA BASE
13 . AUDIO PATCH PANEL
• •8
�· .
· - 14. STORAGE D R AWERS IF ASSEMBLY,
fi .•
• 12/2.4
��--- CHANNEL M ODULES

t:

€1

>
z
......
,..., FIGURE Vt 11-7 •

�I
\0
AN/TRC-90 SHELTER, LEFT WALL INSTALLATION
0
 LEGEND:

I TELEGRAPH TERMINAL TH-5/TG

2 VOICE MONITOR ASSEMBLY I59C-I
3 POWER SUPPLY (TRANSCEIVER 32RS-IF)
4 TRANSCEIVER 32 RS- IF
5 ACCESSORY PANEL (32RS -IF l
6 IF AMPLIFIER Q50-2A1
7 FREQUENCY S YNTHESIZER 708E - 2A
8 70-MC PATCH PANEL
9 SHF AMPLIFIER -CONVERTER Q50-8
10 IF AMPLIFIER Q50-2A I
II FREQUENCY S Y NTHESIZER 708E-2A
12 SHF AMPLIFIER-CONVERTER Q50 -8
13 DEVIATION AND LEVEL MONITOR 900B - I
14 SHF AMPLIFIER CONVERTER T310-6
15 FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER 708E-2A
16 MODULATOR - MULTIPLIER T310- I A
17 POWER AMPLIFIER 240F-4B
18 SERVICE CHANNEL AMPLIFIER 39 7 B -2A
19 BLOWER ASSEMBLY 199G-7
20 BLOWER ASSEMBLY 199G-7
21 POWER SUPPLY Q50 -4A
22 POWER SUPPLY Q50- 4A
23 BLOWER ASSEMBLY 199G-7
24 POWER SUPPLY Q50-4A
25 POWER SUPPLY Q50-3A
26 TELEPRINTER SET AN/FGC-25X
<

FIGURE Vltl-8.
AN/TRC-90 SHELTER, RIGHT WALL INSTALLATION

"

- - - - -
 68KC 72KC 76KC SOKC 84KC 88KC 92KC 96KC IOOKC 104KC IOBKC

�!l �l!�I!�I!�li�:!�:!bJl:�!i�:i�ibJI:
CHANNEL CARR/ERS---64KC
I I I I I I I I I I I I
BASIC 12 CHANNEL GROUP

(
, ...
1

1 1 1 1 1
l I I I I I I I �T""
, , ,
.. , . , . . . .

VFM;:���;L:-� � �� LJ LJ �� � � � �
CHANNEL 12 10 1 2 CHAN. O F GROU� �
CHANNEL 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 CHAN. OF GROUP 3

VF CHANNEL MODULATION
AND DEMODULATION PLAN

BASE GROUP 3, 516 KC BASE GROUP 4, 564 KC

---------- i CHI3 SEE BASIC 12-CHANNEL

-- -
- --··1
- -

CH 24 - - ---- - - --------1• CH12

60
I 108 GRCXJP
60
... -• .. • - - CHI
108

GROUP CARRIER
I_ 516 KCS 564 K C I
lr----.:. ::; ::,.::;:....J ..,__. GROUP CARRIERS
r----
CHI3:
- -- r --
- .......
.. -
CH24 CHil
;-
-
----- .. - r --
--
- -... CHI2
408 I 456 456 I 504
- -

� 516 KCS
H I
516 Kcs,
GRCXJP CARRIERS

!64-KC PILOT CARRIER

- -�
CHI! ::H_2�-- - -------
-- --
l'

- --
- --
--
CH I2 :CH\3
-
-- -
--
l2KC 60 1\.1... 108 KC

•
(
MULTIPLEX MODULATION PLAN

FROM RECEIVER-COMBINER
CHI
--
1I CH24 - - -- - - 1\CHI3
-- -
-- --

--- -
-- -
CH 12 -
--
-

12 m
60

t
BASE GROUP 3, 516 KC �ASE GROUP4, 564KC

I
____ ..,

- I
_____ ,
I
CH:� - --
----
--·

I
-
CH 13 TO 24
--
CHI TO 12
CH 1: CH2�--- !CHI3
- -
�
-
-
108
60 60

516 KC r- 516KC
r- -- - -- --
cH t I
456�
--
-�
�------- CHI2 OH 121
I ---
- - -
CH24

504 KC 408KC 456

564 KC 516 KC
-- -
- 1 ___
I
r
-- -- ...,

- -�
--
--
CH t� --- - - - CH24 I CH 13
��;�
_ -
- SE'E BASIC-12 CHANNEL GROUP _-
60 ,.
=-
6 1t08KC

MODULATION PLAN DEMULTIPLEX

AN/TRC-90
MODUL_ATJON PLAN
FUURE Vlll-9.
(; AN/TRC-90
Vt II - :lS
 "l

P CM TRANSMITTER
I
I TRANSMI SSION. MEDIA P CM RE CEIVER �
PAM -63 I
VOICE PAM RECONSTRUCTED
SAMPLES .:. I SAMPLES VOICE WAVE FORM
WNEFORM
:56 110110 I I
1 -48 UOOIOI
,; 40 101110 1 �

)
�
�24 ,1
� 010010 4
, 000101
;8
I
=o
--- I I
I
I TM5805-367-!2-53

Pi�re VIII-10 The PCM Proee��

)
VIII - 36
 IX. INTERFACE. PROBLEMS

( If the most cormnon l?roblem in comrnunication in Vie tnam had t o be

chosen, there is little doubt thut is would be "interface... There are
in Vietnam a wide assortment of various types of equipment s that were
not designed to work together. The problem is to integrate them into a

unified system that will provide efficient and quality service. Primar ily,
these problems have occurred when we attempted to combine "tactical" and
"fixed-plant.. equipment into a common system. There are se veral points
of basic incompatability be tween these two. There are also so me incombat­
abilities between varJ�us pieces of tactical equipment; however, these
do not concern the ICS directly. A final gro up of interface problems
that do concern the ICS are those occurring when fixed-_plant equipments
of two different manufactures are interconnected.

The examples discusseo on the following pages are so me of the interface

problems that have been identified and solved. They should not cause an y
trouble in the future; however, the solution t o these examples may su::.;gest
ideas and techniques for overcoming fut,J.re problems. Of course , there are
always "those that don't ge t the word the first time" and maybe these
discussions will save them some needless work. Unfortunate ly, dissemination
� of this information heretofore has been quite limited.

•
(

(
IX - 1
 A. lEVElS INTERFACE tviTH TRANSPORTABlE E?JIPMENT:

The problem of properly interfacing levels with the transportable ,,

equipment is a relatively easy one to solve on paper, but in practice
several co mplications arise.

1. Transportable systems have been terminated in three dif ferent

configuration s in the JCS technical c ontrols. If the system is very
important and is a major llnk in the SEAHBS, all channels of the system
are terminated on primary jacks, VF jacks and circuit jacks with ampli­
fiers bet��en primary and VF jacks to provide standard t 7, - 16 leve ls
at the VF patch appearance. Figure IX-A-1 illustrates this type of
terminati on.

Some TCG's do not have enough amplifiers an d or primary jacks to

terminate per Figure IX-A-1. In this case transporta ble systems will
terminate on the VF patch bay at non standard levels and may have J'!O
primary patch appearance.

-
[>
+ 1"0" OR 4

�
+7
�
----------------���- . � -
CABLE PAIRS TO
-- --

PRI VF CONDITION­ CKT

TRANSPORTABLE ING E�UIP. JK
�
SYSTElr JK JK IF .�l\"Y
REQUIRED

--------����<(] �6
.1\ . \{

)
NO Cl\'T JK IN 4
Fipure IX-A-1 Tran,sporta ble termination PHASE 3 SITEs

If the transportable system is not considered of sufficient sig­

nificance to warrant treatment discussed above, individual channels are
terminated in the ICS TCG on primary jacks as required.

2. System terminat�d per Figure IX-A-1 provi_

de c;ornpatable patching.
levels to fCS or othe r transportable systems so term1n ated, but some
caution is necessary when patching channels at the primary patch or •
the VF patch, if amps are not pr o vided, because transpor table system
ch annel levels are non-standard and not always the same. The leve ls
for the two most common transportable multiplexers and for t he PCM
(pulse code modulation) equipment being introduced in P.VN are given
c-
below:

AN/TCC-7 AN/TCC-13 PCH

4-W Receive + 1 0 - 4

4-W Send - 4 .. 4 .. 4

...'<'!),-·
'

IX - 2
 3. The other problem that appears with transportable equipment i s
that the levels often vary widely. When this happens and a signal c omes
f in considerably "hotter" than it sh ould be, it can cause distortion and
noise in the entire GROUP. When this does occur, the technical control
is instructed to ask the subscriber to correct his levels; but, if he
fails to do this, then a limiter will be placed across his circuit at
the - 2 dbm point (CKT PATCH PANEL). Limiters can cause some distortion,
so prior to placing them on a circuit the controller will attempt to
correct the problem by notifying the subscriber. However, in any event,
one subscriber must not be allowed to degrade the service provided to
others.

•
(

l
IX - 3
B. INCOHPATIBIE SIGNALLING l'"'REQUE NCIES AND LEVELS:

1. Frequencies: l
One interface problem commonly encountered is a difference in
signalling frequencies. T he ICS uses the DCA stenriard of 2n00-lJz, the
TA-182 si�nalling unit uses 1600Hz. It was for this reason that 1600
Hz SF units were installed in the I CS technic a 1 controls. However,
there are still some situations in which both signalling f requencies
must be used on different parts of tr.e same cir cuit. In this case it
is necessary to interface the two signalling frequencies at some in­
termediate station having both types of SF units. T his conversion
i nterface is presently accomplished by usint_; only the ICS SF units but,
after Phase �a pulse link repeater will be utilized (refer Fig. VI-C-3 and
VI-D-9).

2. Levels:

The normal output power levels of the Collins 1600 Hz SF unit are
- 22 dbm or 6 db below the level of the standard 1000 Hz test tone which
is - 16 dbm at the output of the 3F unit (Figure IX-B-l)o

The standard TA-182 Signal Converter generates a 1600 Hz tone at

�
0 dbm. Since the reference tone level is 0 dbm at this point, the 1600
Hz level is 0 db with respect to the reference.

a. Pr oblem: ''!hen the TA-182 converters were first used with

the Collins 1600Hz u nits, it was noted that the SF unit would not
function properly. It was found that the 1600 Hz tone generated by the
) 4
TA-182 was received at such a high power level at the SF unit that the
SF unit would not operate the rin gdown converter. This is bet ter ex­
plained by Figure IX-B-1.

b. Solution: Two actions were taken to correct this problem:

(1) A pro gram was initiaterl to modify all TA-182's in

Vietnam to have an output level of - 10 dbm.
4
(2) The circuits using 1600Hz signalling are engineered
so as to have the three possible 1�00Hz tone power levels centered with­
in the sensitivity range of the SF unit (Figure IV-B-2).

A comparison of the standard circuit layout and the

modified one, illustrates how this was accomplished (Fig ure IX-B-3).
Experience has shown that there are still some unmodified TA-182 's, and it
is absolutely necessary to take them into �ideration when engineering
the circuit. T herefore, the configuration shown in Figure IX-B-3b is now
the standard for all circuits specifying � Hz signalling.

,.j
IX - 4
 (
1000 Hz
NORMAL TEST TONE
LEVEL AT INPUT TO SF UNIT /
NORMAL INPUT SENSITIVITY RANGE
FOR CoLLINS 1600HZ SF UNIT +7

I I I I I I
t I
-20 -15 -10 -5 0 t +5 t +10

1600 Hz TONE LEVEL AT +I +7

INPUT TO SF UNIT WHEN__A 1600HZ TONE LEVEL
TONE IS PRODUCE D 8�
AT INPUT TO SF UNIT
1600HZ SF UNITe
WHEN TONE 18 PRODUCED
BY UNMODIFIED TA-182.

FIQURE IX�1 PowER LE VE L AT INPUT To SF UNIT;

STANDARD RECEIVE LE VEL 0F+7 OBM
�

•
(
( 1000 Hz TEST TONE LEVE L
AT INPU T OF SF UNIT.
NORMAL INPUT SENSITIVITY RANGE , 0
FOR COLLINS 1600HZ SF UNIT.
t

-20 -15 -10 -5 0 +5 +1 0

tC. t t
LEVEL 0' 1600 HZ__.;IO -G
� LEVEL OF 1600 HZ
TONE PR O D UCE D IY TONE PRODUCED BY
MODIFtED TA-182 LEVE L OF 1600 HZ UNMODIFIED TA-182
TONE PRODUCED BY
SF UN IT

FIGURE IX�2 POWER LEVELS AT INPUT To SF UNtT;

MODIFIE D RECEIVE lE V EL 0' 0 DBM.

(
IX - 5
 +7
2600 0_5

VF Hl CKT
SF -6
FCC 20
UNIT Hl
17 0
JK CONV
JK PRI
JK

- 16 -2
ES:M
-�----- * --����- -�--

A. 2600 Hz Signalling C.onfiguration With Standard Test Tone Levels

*PAD INCLUDES 608

VARISTOR NET LOSS

1600 0.5
VF H� CKT
FCC SF 20
-6
UNIT
Hi!
17 CONV 0
JK JK
PRI
JK

-16 -2
EaM
----.... ---'tf----- ---------

B., 16o0 Hz Signalling Configuration With Standard Test Tone Levels

Figure IX-B-3 Canparison of 2600 and 1600 Hz Signalling Circuits

... _ _ ....... - - - -
 c. The Problem Of Too Many Grounds.

( Mr.
A memorandum prepared by MR. Frank Shuftord is reproduced be low.
Shufford, a Philco-Ford tech-rep, was formerly a ,,1ember of t he ICS
Cutover Commitee.

SCCVRG-PO 7 April 196 7

l-1E:MORANDUM FOR RECORD (Mr. Shuff ord)

SUBJECT: Investigation of Tiger DCO-Long Binh Dial Trunk i'1alfunction b y

F. M. Shufford and Jack Bowdoin

1. References:

a. Collins Instruction Book-subject: .. ICS Signal and Ringdown

Converter Equipment", dated �1arch 1966.

b. Collins DHg 7fi2-97f'8-Schern;:;tic diagram SF Sig. un it 20D3-l�IX.

� Also Block Diagram Fig 2. (Part of l':.ef a).

2. Background: On or about 20 February 19fi7, 6 dial-to-di8l trunks

were established between T iger DCO U1I.CV-I) and Lon::; Binh TTC-28 dial van.
Upo n establishment, an irre6ularity in <?2erc:tion was noted as follo\lS: �Vhen
calls were placed from Long Binh to Saigon no .. ringback" or " b usy.. tones
were heard by the callin6 party. These tones originate in the Tiger DCO
( equipment and are transmitted bCJ.ck to the callines telephone over the normal
trunk v oice path. The condition came and went at various times but appeared
to follow no set pattern. The trunk funcliont:d normally in the reverse
direction.

3. l.lroblem:

a. Investigation quickly deter£ained th<:>t the immediate cause of

the malfunction lay in the Collins 20D3-lHX 2600 Hz SF unit in the r,vcs
Technical Control Facility. The circuit with in the SF unit which normally
controls the termination across the 4w/TX voice path was not removing the
termination during the "busy" or "off-hook" trunk condition. During normal
operation in the "off hook" or "dialin0" condition this control circuit releases
the cut-off relay, removing the termination across the transmit voice path.
This was not being done, but the snecific cause was not immediately a?parent.

b. During the course of the investigation attention was called

to an undesirc:.hle situation existing between the station grounding systems
of IWCS and T iger OCO. �•easurernents made betHeen the [;rounds showed
negligib l e D. C. resistance and volt<.ge but an A. C. volta ;e component in
the order of 14-1.,:; volts maximum. This volta;�e armeared at the M lead

(
IX - 7
terminal on each S. F. unit associated t-lith a Tiger dial trunk equipment.
By analyzing the effect of this A. c. voltage at t he H lead terminal on
the S. F. u nit oper2tion, it was demonstrated that the n ormal operation
of the cut-off relay could b e directly affected through the "cut-ofE relay
'l
pulsing circuit". This circuit apeears to be sensitive to un"'anted A. c.
voltages as its operation is based on the charge and discharge of capacitors.
Tests indicated that the presence of 14-lh volts A. c. on the H lec:d v7ould
block the release of the relay. As this voltage was decreased, normal
operation was restored. It was found, however, that this voltage must be
reduced to approximately a maximum of 2 volts before completely reliable
operation could be expected. This unwanted A. C. ground potential appeared
to be the specific cause of the S.F. unit malfunction.

3. Action taken: The first experimental action taken to reduce this

ground potential was to tie the I es ground bus to the DCO ground bus wi th . .
#6 wire. This reduced the M lead potential to about 8 volts which was still
excessive for reliable relay operation. The #6 wire was next replaced with
a #3/0 wire. This reduced t he M lead potential to approximately 0.2 volts
and, also, reduced greatly the transient currents visible on the scope .
This action appeared to clear the trouble, an d all trunks now functioned
normally.

A. c.
4. Source of A. c. ;;round Potential: The basic source of this high
ground potential was obviously a condition peculiar to the HACV I
�
Compound. There are 3 entirely separate grounding systems within a radius
of 100 feet; (eS g round, DCO ground, and power generator ground. None of
these were physically tied together. The A.c. power system, located imme­
diately adjacent to both I es and the oco, consists of 4-100 K\v generators

)
using a 3-phase, Y connected, 208-120 volt, distributio n system. This
furnishes power to both reS and t he DCO. Although no ground resistance
tests have been made, with the extreme seasonal soil dryness, it may be
assumed that one or more of these ground arrays may have appreciable .resis­
tance, and that any phase load unbalance could cause a current flow through
the power neu�ral ground system. r,Jith the battery rectifiers of both leS
and the DCO operating from the same po�r sour ce, a�)preciable ground potential
could exist between the 3 ground arrays. This appears to have been the
basic rroh lem.

5. Conclusions: The sensitivity of the cut-off relay pulsing circuit

in the Collins S.F. unit to A.C. voltage on the M lead may very well be a
problem at other ICS sites. This could be encountered wherever dial trunks.
are used. This circuit characteristic of the Collins S.F. unit has apparently
heretofore gone unnoticed. The tolerance of this circuit to A.C. voltage

h a s not been experimentally established except from the MACV I tests

where it appeared to be less than 2 volts for reliable operation. At
locations where the 2 ground systems are adjacent and can be physically
tied together, this should present no great problem; but at widely
8epaN>ted site8, other measures "-'Ottld be required. It is impossilrle
at this point to predict the extent to which this problem may be encountered
as the dial trunk p rogram is activated. At sites where DX signalling unit�

.)
IX - 8
 will be required to extend the F.&t1 leads beyond tt>e 25 o hm limi t no problem
should aris<?. as the DX units effectively isolate the c;ro11nd system.

( 6. Recommendations: The follo�'in� ;;;e nerc::.l and s:;>ecific reco:11mendations

are made:

a. l,lhere physically possiule, tie <.:.11 ICS, nco, Cind power �round
systems to6ether.

b. Use DX sit;nal lead extension where required.

c. Place channe 1 terminating e quiprnen t (S .F. units, hyor ids etc )

in DCOs if necessary.

do Use isolation relays in the M lead.

e. Give careful attention to t he design and installation of ;round­

ing systems for both ICS and OCOs. Ground system design in �V!v should take
into account the peculiar condition existing during the lengthy dry reason
when soil ooisture may decrease to suc h an exten t that speci:1l ground con­
struction may be required to maintain the ground resistance \vithin acc2ptable
limits. A desireable by-!Jroduct of increased quality of grounding syste1ns

• cou l d be a reduction in circuit noise of various kinds.

s/F . M. Shuford, Eng

t/F . M. Shuford, Eng

(
Networks Branc h

ED. Note:

It should be n oted that this problem again appeared during the activat ion
of dial trunks terminatin.:?, at Bien Hoa DCO in November 1967o In t his instance
;JF unit malfunctions occured with an AC ground potential of 0.2 Volt. This
situation was alleviated by the use of the Collins i'1 lead applique unit
discussed in Long Lines Technical Control Standards and i:>ractices.

(
IX - 9
D. FIXED-PL!'.NT -- TACTICl'>L VFCT INTELa<'AG'E:

The 1lroblern that immediately comes to mind when fix:cd-pl&nt

teletype terminals are mentioned is the difference in the loop currents,
Dnd tactical
'l
60 rna and 20 rna respectively. This problem is easily solved by de isolation
rel ays. The point of interest here is the interface on the composite audio
tone side. The use of fixed-plant equipment on one end of a tone-pack trunk
and tactica 1 equipment on th e other has been necessary on several occasions
due to the limited availability of fixed-plant terminals.

An examination of the appropriate references discloses tha t both the

fixed-plant a n d t h e tactical teletype carrier systems make u s e o f t h e same
32 basic tones, 2 for each channel, to trans:nit marks and s'?aces. The loHest
frequency pair has a mean value of 425 Hz and subsequent pairs are separated
by 170 Hz . The two tones actually transmitted are 42.5 Hz above and beloH
the mean values (see T able IX-1).

Fixed-plant terminals are basically four "1ire systems, and each chann el
transmits and receives using the same t�vo tones. The 16 channels in a
s tandard system such as the AN/FCC-19 or the AN/FC'£-",0 are n umb ered sequenti­
ally from t he 425 Hz c hannel to the 2975Hz channel.

The tactical terminals, AliJ/TCC-4,

of either four-wire or two-wire operation.
-20, were designed to b e capable
In t�-io-wire operation, it would
�
be i mpractical to use the same frequencies for both transmitting and receiving;
therefore, each channel .'-10DEi'1 of th e AN/fCC-4, -20, uses one set of tones
for transmittin g and one set for receiving. The exact ones used by each
channel are selected· by t he settir1;g of several switches.

The i ncomptitibility is: a teletype machine connected to channel 5 of )

the fixed-plant terminal might be transmitting to channel 7 of the AN/TCC
-4 but receiving from channel 11. Needless to say, CHAOS could easily occur.
In fact, many of the more pessimistic said it would never work. The solution
decribed below has permitted highly efficient operation with no problems
attributable to the frequency interface.

SOLUTION:

The channel �lODEMS of t he AN/TCC-4 are integral units, and it is not

possible to physically separate the TRANS�1IT and RECEIVE positions of
th e c hanne1. However, the 'ffiANSMIT and RECEIVE circuitry in the AN/FCC
-19 and AN/FGC-FO are completely separate; and further, each individual
TRANSMIT tone keyer and RECEIVER tone converter is a plug-in module that
may be inserted in any channel position in the transmit and receive sections
respectively. By rearranging the fixed-plant modules, it is possible to
establish a tone-pack that operates in all respects as if the two terminals
were identical. Table IX-2 shows the rearrangement of modules necessary if
the AN/TCC-4 is set up as prescribed on the table. For l ess than 16 channels,
only a portion of the table is used.

,)
,

IX - 10
 Actual Tones Actual Tones
r;ean Value, Hz Transmitted1 Hz Nean Value, Hz Transmitted, Hz

(
382.5 1742.5
1785
- 4 67 .s �827.5
-552 .s 1912.5
595
-637.. 5 -1997.5

722.5 ____ 2082.5

765
807.5 -2167.5

892.5 2252.5
935----
-977 .s

1062�5 2422.5

------
----

� 1105 ------- 2465------

------
-1147 .s 2507.5

------ 1232.5 � 592.5

1275 2635
---
-2677.5
( 1317.5

------- 1402.5 2762.5

1445 2805 ------

----
-2847 .s
1487.5

1572. 5 2932.5
---- -
_
_

1615 2975 .
- H i S ? .s 3017.5

TABLE IX-1 VOICE FREQUENCY CMJUER TELETYPE TONES

(
IX - 11
 Tactic al terminEl Fixed-Plant Tac tical Terminal Fixed-Pl ant
AN/TCC-4 Terminal AN/TCC-4 Termin&.l

Mean 1'-:le an C onv Keyer Mean Mean Conv 1Zeyer 'l

Chnl Transmit Receive Chnl Chnl Chnl Transmi t lleceive Chnl Chnl
Nr. Tone, Hz Tone, Hz Nr. Nr. Nr. Tone, Hz Tone, Hz Nr. Nr.

2975 16 425 1
9 !
1 595 2 2805 15

2635 14 10 765 3
2 935 4 2465 13

2295 12 11 1105 5

3 1275 6 2125 11

1955 10 12 1445 7
4 1615 8 1785 9

2805 15 13 594 2

5 425 1 2975 16

6
2465
765
13
3
llt 935
2635
4
14
�
2125 11 15 1275 6

7 1105 5 2295 12

1785 9 Hi HilS 8
8 1445 7
-�
1955
---- -·
10
)
No te: The AN/TCC-4 is arranged as in Fig 15 of 11'1 11-5805-250-10.
The four stacks are lettered A, B, c, D, left to righto The
c hannels are numbered left to ri::;ht, top to bo ttom, in each
Stack. Switch Set tinc;s are given in the table below.

Panel Swi tch Designation Stack A Stack B Stack C Stack D

TII-14 Line Send Freq HI None Used LO None Used

AM-683 Send Frequen<'y LO HI LO HI

Channels 16 10 16 16

Line 4W 4W 4W 4W

m-17 Send Frequency LO Hl LO HI

TH-16 Send Frequency LO Ht LO HI

TABLE IX -2
SOLUTION FOR FIXED-PLANT AND TACTJl.AL
VOICE FREQUENCY CARRIER TEIETYT)E INTERFACE

'
�:rl
IX- 12
 E. IDlE LIN.i.:: TERMINATION:

( 1. Problem:

Proper termination of idle lines has not previously been a matter

of c oncern to the "tactical communicator" for two reaso ns:

a. It is not too c r itic al on systems limited to 12 channe Is ..

b. Tactical equipment pr ovi de s no capability for doin�;, so.

In Vietna m, the switching or interconnecting of telephone conuJon

user trunk circuits (normally 4-wire ) to su bscribers and/or to other trunks
is accomplished via 2-wire s�,,itchboards (with the exception of Sait?;on Overc;eas
Board). This 2-\vire s�>.·i tching introduces a transmission loss of several db at
each switching location due to the 2l'A /4w terminatin� set (hybrid), dr op cable,
and SHitchboerd losses. To m2intain a relati vely stable circuit and prevent
the introduction of spurious oscillation (singing) and unwanted and excessive
noise in the 4-wire sectio� it is necessary to maintain a high degree o f elec­
trical isolation or loss bett.,een the transmit ano receive paths at the point
w here they co me to,:;ether, the hybricJ co il in the 2\·l/4"' terminatin,� set. Oue
to the construction of the hybrid coil the degree of 4-vJire path sepan>tion is
• also c irectly a measure of tl'e de;>;ree of balance or irn;')eclance matching bet.veen
the 2-Hire line (subscriber) and the 2-uire balancing neto·Jork of He hybrid
coil. Since the network is fixed at a st<Jndard impedance of l'iOO ohms the
variable factor is the impedance of the 2-wire line and around this the entire
circuit ba1<.nce problem revolves.

( The essence of the problem lies in the fact that the various tactical
s�vitchboards generally in use now in Vietnam were not basically designed to
mainto.in a hic;h degree of balance or impedance match ing with a fixed plant
system such as I cs •

The problem has two basic parts:

a. To provide, in the circuit drop, an o ptimum impedance tJhose

function will be mainly to match th e 600 ohm fixed impedance of the 2-wire
balancing net,vork in the hybrid coil, thus assuring a maximum hybrid balance
and separation of the send and receive paths of the 4-w section (Figure IX-E-1)

b. To provide at the same time an optimum condition •.lith no sub­

scriber connected (Figure IX-E-2).

2. Equipment Used:

T he basic equi�ment most generally used in Vietnam are the SB-86/P

stvitchbonrd, the TA-223/TTC and TA-22F/fTC trunk relays lAhich in various
configurations, are used in the MTC-1, MTC-9 and TTC-7 manual switchboards.

(
IX - 13
The design of the SB 86 /P - (TA-207 Jackfield) and the TA-223 trunk relay
equipment is such that when the cir cuit is "idle" with no con nection es tablished, i�'
·.
the switchboard presents an open circuit tovwrd the carrier hybrid causing
·,,
a maximum unbalance conditio n. The TA-226/TTC Circuit presents a repeating
coil termination of nOO ohm impedance to the carrier channel and wi 11 not be
discussed f u rt h er (Figure IX-E-3)

3. So lution:

To alleviate the above condition, it is standard industry )ractice

t o provide a termination at the switchboard wrich will, durin;; the idle
cir cuit condition, apj)roximate the nOO ohm hybrid n et t h u s r:�aintainin:,r maximum
return loss and 4-w sectio n st<Jbility . This termination should drop out auto­
matically when a con:1ection is !Clade at the s�<,itcl-)board. These terminations
are not standard equiDment on tactical s>,·itchhoards.

4. Action Taken:

This problem, for SEA at l east , wns recognized as far back as

September 19fi5, "'hen EC0�1 was tasked by the Army to develop field modification
kits for placing Idle Line Termination on all tactical switchboards in SEA.
This resulted :ln the d evelopmen t and p rovision of 2 types of ILT kits, one for

�
the TA-223 relay circuit and the other for the SB-86 switchboard. A laq_�e
number of kits were built and received in Vietnilm during April 1966.

The design of these kits is shown in Figure IX-B-li. Note that i n

the SB-86 the termination remains bridged across the line even when in use;
t he ref ore, a compromise terminating impedance had to be used.

5. Comt-:lents:
)
On DCA Circuit Layout Ltecords the note;tion is found "Swi tchboard
p rovides idle line termination". \Jhen the technical control discovers that
o ther channels on a system are being distorted because of high noise levels
or "singin;r on a common user t ru nk, it might be advisable to che ck that the
idle line termination has been i nst alled properly .

�}
IX- 14
 ( 4W REC Odbm Z= 600Sl. / TRANS MISSI ON LEVEL (IWCS)
SEND I NT O CHAN 0 dbm
REC FROM CHAN -6 dbm

-� cl.5d , -;
- vF
IWCS

CHANNE L
RETURN

L OSS
BALt·�it_j - :
NET T I I
... Z=600JUIOEAL) ! I :, I ;��
T
I
I . Lr--t-i_j
D
�--"1:___
l!w s � .
t-1

.
-M�dbm Z= 600Jt � _j
4W
SEND
tmlnl -------.J

FIGURE IX�1 CIRCUIT �ONDITION: WITH TERMINAL CALL ESTABLISHED

� Z=600 .n --4-l LE Ll NE TER MINATION

C --
I � l
� I
lfl, II
BAL

II II I I
NET
.l!�!i!
-

( I SWB D I
I L:_ :.J
z::soo.n. �-J

IN THE IOLE CONDITION1 IMPEDANCE AT THIS POINT 18 600�.

IN P RACTIC � ZDI8 8ELDOM 600A, BuT 18 DET ER MI NED 8V
NOTE:

CHARACTERISTIC Z OF TRUNK CABLE AND TH E tERMINATION.

THIS 8HOULD APPROXIMATE 600�FOR OPTIMUM DROP BALANCE.
TH£ IALANCINQ N ETWORK IS SLIGHTLY AD�USTABLE.

FtaUR£ IX�2 CIR C U IT CoNDITION: IDLE(No CORD UP AT Swao)

{
IX - 15
 Z:6005l-+-
1
c: ��
IMPEDANCE MATCHING AND
� OL E LINE
ERMINATION

- ---, "l
I O TION TRANSFORMER -

;± iL-_jlr.
b•ow-±:.=-•oo_.
r--, I
j �I .;:[1 ;:::::: I
D I �
TA-226/T
C BLOCKING
CONDENSER I-T- -
RNK EQPT

Z= 600.Sl ...c.,. _j

FIGURE IX�3 TRUNK E�UIPPEO WITH TA226/TTC RELAY EQUIPMENT.

CIRCUIT CONOITION:IDLE

T -------�--�
4
IDLE

A. TA 223 TRUNK RELAY EQUIPMENT.(TERMINATION WILL 0ROP

OUT WHEN OPERATOR INSERTS PLuG)

-
, -------,
I 0.47 I I I
I
MF
1 v

T
VF CHANNEL
4>ff-6
-- 00.sl HYBRID 1500-"- ,.,

I
_

I 1
L __ �s��_j
a. SB-86 SwtTCHBOARO.(TERMINATION WILL NoT
DROP OuT WHEN 0PERATeA INSERTS PLUG.)

FIGURE IX-� IDLE LINE TERMINATION KIT DETAIL&

�,)
IX - 16
 F. ICS INTETlFACE TO AN/fCC-13:

( The AN/TCC-13 multiplex set, used �dth the AN/TRC-29 microwave terminal,
has a built-in 20 Hz signalling capability which does not make use of a VF
signalling tone. If aniCS circuit is to be extended over th e AN/TCC-13
and the AN/TCC-13 is to provide the 20 Hz at the distant end, then the
signalling interface between the ICS and the AN/TCG-13 must be at 20 Hz.
Also, good engineering di ctates that the interface be a 4-wire connection.
This requires the use of 2 ringdown converters as shown in Fi gure IX-F-1.

When this was done �vith several circu its at Nha Tr ang, it was dis­
covered that the signalling would not func tion properly on several of t he
circuits.

1. Pro blem:

When the AN/TCC-13 generated a 20 Hz signal, the transmit RD

Converter reacted in an unusual manner. This was observed by listening to
the SF unit tone on the line� The 2600 Hz tone was interrupted 20 times a
second and these short bursts of tone were not long enough to actuate the SF
unit at the distant endo
�
2. cause:

It has not yet been possible to determine the exact cause of this
be havior.

( 3. Quick-Fix (Not the solution):

An imme diate solution was found to be reversing the 4W RCV leads

from the AN/TC C-13. Both arrangements resulted in the tone being int errupted
ao times a second, but one arrangement produced a longer burst at the end of
the signal and this long burst was enough to operate the SF unit at the
distant end.

4. Comment:

Typical of many "little" interface problems.

\
IX • 17
 ''
l
- 1 1 .,
- - RD
-
-
�
SF
� """'
CONV
I -
_j
,---- AN/TCC-13
I
RD
1
___...
UNIT - I .., __,.
. -

I CONV • •

1 L�JJA'Li 1
1
L_ -- !.=.�:!.!. L---'

fiGURE IX-�1 ICS -AN/TCC-13 SIGNALLING INTEAFA�E

�

,)
IX - 18
 G. A TYPICAL SIGNALLIM:r INTERFACE PROBI.J!M:

f A memorandum prepared by Mr. C.Wo Holley is reproduced below. Mro

Holley, of Page C&I, was assigned to work with Networks Branc h as a
member of the I CS Cutover Commitee.

SCCVRG-PO-NW 24 February 1968

M»l:ORA.NDUM FOR RECORD (Mr. Holley)

SUBJECT: Signalling toward a WECO 302A key telephone system.

1. Background:

, At Phu Cat the Air Force radar approach control station is equipped
with a WECO 302A KTS (key telephone system). This partic ular 302A instal­
lation would not ac cept 20Hz ringing from the Phu Cat I CS EE building.
Signalling the other direction gave no difficulty since the 302A sends 20HZ
toward the I CS ringdown converter. Investigation by Mr Dennako, Phu Cat
M&O supervisor, and T/Sgt Hoffsmith at the radar approach control revealed
� the fact that the 302A requires a dry loop c losure from the ring down converter
to signal incoming.

2. Solution to Problem:

The modification to the Collins 20El� AC ringdown converter to

( provide the dry loop is very simple, but is most conveniently done to
c ertain converters depending on their location in the bay.

Figure IX-G-1 illustrates the routing of the 20HZ supply bus

on the back of the ring down converter bay.

/ I MOUNTINGS PF.R SHELF

TO
20HZ
SUPPLY

Figure IX -G - I 20 HZ Bus On Back Of Ring Down Converter Mountings.

\
IX- 19
 The aoclitication consists of replacing the 20HZ wi. th a 600 ohm
resistor. Litt the 20HZ bus frOIIl punchings 12-13 or 21-22 and solder a
600 oblll. resistor across the punchings (12-13 or 21-22). ,
Look again at Figure IX-9 and it is obvious that the neatest job
can be done on the bottan two converters on the far right. These will
be converters 2 and 3, 26 and 27, 50 and 51 etc. Add 24 to get the number
of the next two. There are 24 converters per shelf.

It is possible that the next 3021 installation that crops up will

be equip pedto both send and receive,':20HZ signals. WECO provides ring
down trunk eircui ts for other types of KTS' s (they call them key telephone
unit, K'l'U) and future 302A.'s may be so equipped. Each installation will
have to be thoroughly examined before modifyin g the i CS converter.
If at all possible, avoid the modification; of course, modification may
be n ecessary in order to provide service.
1

J
IX-20
 X. DC CIRCUITS AND PATCH PANELS
.
( '
DC circuits (teletype) always seem to cause much more trouble than
voice circuits do. Conceptually, de circuits are no more difficult to
understand, but they are certainly "merciless" compared to audio circuits.
Many mistakes can be made in either the engineering or the installation
of an audio circuit, and yet it will still operate, although the perfor�
mance will be degraded. For de circuits, almost ---
any error is enough to
cause complete f ailure.

The purpose of this chapter is to give only a brief introduction to

the subject. Some of the common types of circuits will be described,
common terms will be defined, and a few interface situations will be
illustrated. A detailed discussion of the activation and restoration of de
circuits can be found in RCG LL TCG S&P.

A. I G$ VOICE FRE,QUENCY CARr�IEP. TELETYPE (VFCT) TFRNINALS:

The fixed-plant SCS teletype carrier terminals provide both SEND

and RECEIVE battery internally. This means that a subscriber's teletype
equipment may be connected directly to the channel terminals (Figure X-1) •

• The exact value of the "loop current" is adjusted on the loop current power
supply bay or the terminal itself. Some of the terminals have the capa­
bility to operate with either 60 rna or 20 rna loop c urrent by merely changing
one switch., However, to completely remove th,e internal line battery from
the circuit usually requires internal wiring changes(this is the case for
the ICS AN/FCC-25 and AN/FCC-19 telegraph ·terminals).

( There are often several built-in options available fur loop c urrent;
however, efficient technical control operation dictates that there be one
standard option used for all systems appearing on the de patch panels. If
this is not done, the patching capability is greatly reduced and testing
of circuits becomes quite slow since each type requires different test con­
f,igurations.

The standard for ICS VFCT terminals is:

1. DC 60 rna neutral negative signal (positive battery is ground).

2. Battery provided internally on both SEND and RECEIVE loops.

B. TYPES OF CIRCUITS:

1. Full-duplex:

A full-duplex circuit provides simultaneous two-way service

between the two subscribers (Figure X-2)

2. Half-duplex:

The half-duplex circuit provides transmission in only one

direction at a time. It is common practice to connect the SEND and REC
equipment in series to provide "reversible" service (Figure X-3).
'
X - 1
 3. HuJtinoint:

'T'he mn ltin0:int circujt i�

subscriber system is shown in
"1 l:v nnnular in iTietn"'""'·
extrele
X-4. Note that tlle �Ti'l\TT) �mn R�r. e'ouin­
"' i gure
.A 4'nur­
)
'

me nt at eac . h sn b scriber station haP b<>8n co .., n !'!ct e n in R�>,..i !'!!" to on<>rl"!te
ha l f-dun le x. \IJould it be possible to hA. ve a ful1-rhm1 ex rmJ1ti ""<"int? 0b­
viously n0t sine<> t her "" Are not sen"1.rate trAnRmit Anrl recei ve r-a.ths. A n ot h er
ooint to nnte in F igure X-4 is the fact that there ie; only o ne cln�erl nath.
for the de Sif!nal thro11gh all the eouinment. 'T'he nr!'!R;m;e of mnre than nne
closed nath, unle s s they are nro!'er1y "isolA.ted'' (;.e., e]!'!ctri call;r e;ena.­
rated), usn a 1 J y resu 1ts in an in"nerat i.ve ci rcni t.

C. ICS DC PATCH PANET�:

The comnlete circuitry .,or the I CS a.nd

nr :o.<�.tch i"' rmite cnmnncat�"rl
a co m n lete exnlanation v-nuld be of lit+J.e value hE"re. iTll­ HnlArever, the
portant feat1JI·es of the de .iacks and cut keys shn•Jld he 1Plrlere;t.0,Vl, 'T'h01"e
are t wo types of j acks - "loaning 0r m oni t or ;ackR" a,.,ri "Ret iac](s". t
1. Monitor or toopi n g ,Ta ck s :

In order to m::mitor a teletV!'e ci rcui t the nc sipml rrn1st n.a.ss

t hrou gh the mo nitor eauipment.
are placed in series in the line .
Note j n FimJreR X-S !'lnrl 6 that t he M('"-T ;"" cks
A 1 sn, note t hat tl-Je natch cnrrl sh,..,11ld ho
4
c o nnected to the monitor eou:i_n'Tlent befnrf> the nlm:r i c: i n "' erteri i.nt0 the �01\T
ja cks or an o n en line conrlition will re svl t . ThF>re are lr!!!lJI'll]v two M01\T ia cvs
so that the circui t on eit her side of' tl-Je c:et -la.cvs ca.n pe checkeri sP.naratel"lr.

2. Se t Jacks :
)
,
'3et Jacks are provided to diAcn�nect tl-Je T,nrn: Pn-1 "RI"TTT'P sines o.r
t he circuit while still nrovidinr-; cl0::H�rl loons a-rd "'rn ne r batt!'!rv cnnd:i.t.inns
on each si_de ( Figures X-5 arrl 6). �'hen the LHJH: iack. is lJSeri, the na.tch
c ord is connected to the VFCT ter mi nal anrl batterv i1'l
11mArkinP-:" or "hold"
sunplied to tre subscri b er ,
rAThen the �QT�I'P�W.J\'I'J' _iack is uc:ed the natch cord
is connect ed to the subscriber 1 s eoui'!"rr�mt, and the 'TPr,'l' termi.na.l ha.s a cnm­
nlete loop t hroug h the closed .�ack contac ts to .!"ro und ,

Note in "'igure X-5, showing the ltBC�IVE .1 a. cks , that t h e "rj n,s:s"
on both loop jacks are gro unded. The same is true for the �,.,_m .ia ck s
(Figure X-6 ) . Since the battery :i.s on the R ( ring ) ·le�.d of the C1,.,_JD ter­
minal , �
this lead � - o t be prounded. 'T'he normAJ ful1-d un1 ex connection
is s hown in Figure X- Note that the R lead of' the �'fiND ci.rcui t by!"aMes
•

the I·CS de ,jacks A close and deta.Hed anaJ_ysis wi 11 s hnw t ha.t this i.s
•
•

necessary for proper oneration of the l:"lB.tc h boa.rd,

3. Cut keys:

Operating the CUT KEYS on the DC Patc h Panel cause� the eou:i_pment

..·"
\�;1
X-2
 and terminal loops to be separated, and each loop is closed indivi dually
with the proper battery condition. T he effect obta ined is the same as if
( shorted plugs were inserted in both the LIN£ and EQUIP jacks. There are
separate CUT KEYS on the SJ:.:ND and RKCE.IVE sides of tile c ircuit. A light
on the jack field indicates a CUT lffiY has been turned.

D. I CS T HR O U GH - STATION CnN\lECTION:

The through-station connection is quite s imple (Fig ure X-7). It i s

used to extend an incoming VFCT channel out over another sy stem. Because
of the arrangemen t of the battery supplies in the I CS VF CT terminals, it
is not possible to make the connection dir ectly as shown in Figure X-7.
In fact the only connections made are shown in Figure X-8.

E • ISOLATION l\EVWS:

' The isolation relay �·as described earlier in Section VI-C-8. In the
disc ussion b elow on some of the uses of isolation relays, only the basi c
input and output �..rindings �·lill be considered (Figure X-9). It is
assumed that the bias winding has been adjusted for proper operati on •

• 1. Fixed-plant and Tactical VFCT DC Interface:

A very common use of isolation relays here in Vietn am is inter­

facing 60 rna fixed-plant terminal wit h the 20 ma tactical equipment, AN/TCC-
4,-20. The tactical equipment has only one loop current value possible,
20 rna, and battery is J?rovided internally just as with the fixed plan t equip­

( ment. Since both ICS fixed-plant terminals and 2J rna tacti cal equipment
supply battery it is necessary to isolate these two current supplies. The
resulti ng interface is obtained by creating separate loops for the 20 £Ua
and 60 rna c urrents (Figure X-10).

2. Subscriber Provides Battery:

Often the subscriber wishes to provide his own loop battery .

Thi s is often done in large corncenters to facilitate in-station testing
and trouble-shooting. This creates a problem s imiliar to t h at discussed
in paragraph 1 above, since there should be only one b attery in each loop.
The obvious answer is to create two loops as on the RECEIVE side in Figure
X-11. However, because of the arrangement of t he battery supply and t h e
ground i n the SEND side o f t he terminal equipmen t, a n isola tion relay is
� not necessary i f one side of the SEND circuit is connected to the ground
of the VFCT terminal.

3. Half-duplex Cir cuit:

When the subscriber's send and receive equipment is placed i n

series a s i n Figure X-3, a problem arises since the SEND and RECEIVE
portions of th e terminal can not be placed in the same loop. Again the
solution is an isolation relay inserted as shown i n Figure X-12. The

(,
X- 3
subscriber's loop current is provided by the SEND side of the VFCT ter.minal.
The isolation relay is installed so as to permit:

a. The RECEIVE tone converter to control the current in the

,�,
subscriber loop.

b. The subscriber's transmitting equipmen t to control the

current in the loop to the SEND tone keyer.

Note that the VFCT channel still operates in the full-duplex

mode.

4. The Problem of Low Subscriber Current:

Occasionally here in Vietnam the situation depicted in Figure

X-13 is encountered. The shunt losses in wet cable and bad splices are so
great that the subscriber does not receive enough loop current for his
machines to operate properly. The obvious answer is to put in more current
at the terminal; however, there is a limit as to how much current can go
through the VFCT equipment without causing damage. Again, isolation relays
provide the answer (Figure X-14). Additional battery supplies which can
provide the higher current required are available in the loop power supply
bays.
•
F. I C�: MULTIPOINT C IRCUITS:

Multipoint teletype circuits are very common in Vietnam, and because

of the many links involved and the number of isolation relays used to con­
n ect these links, they are the cause of a great deal of trouble. Two types
of multipoint circuits possible in the ICS are discussed below. )
'

1. Hub Multipoint:

The hub arrangement shown in Figure I-15 is the desired configura­

tion for multipoints in the I CS The equipment connections at the hub
station are shown in Figure X-16. Figure X-16 is for a four-spoke hub
system with a subscriber at the hub. It can easily be expanded to more
spokes by adding two isolation relays for each new VFCT channel. Note
however, there may be � 2E! center or "hub" station.

2. Half-duplex Multipoint:

The network configuration for the half-duplex multipoint is shown

in Figure X-17. This configuration allows more than one "multipoint" station;
however, it is not recommended for the ICS since it requires a large amount
...
of equipment and is more difficult to adjust properly. The equipment connec­
tions for a multipointing station are shown in Figure X-lS. This configura­
tion is also expanded by adding two isolation relays for each additional
VFCT termina l, and it may have as many "multipoint" stations as desired.

)
X-4
 G. HtTLTIPIE DROPS:

( .
Often it is desired to ha. \e more them l):ne de S11bscri_ber on a c :i rcui t
at a terminal. . -
This is only nossible with ha lf du r. l ex circuits. r-r the
sum of the loop resistance to alJ subscri hers is not too P:rea.t, this serv:i_ce
can be prov i d ed by connect inp Pdditi.nnal � tat io ns in the haJf-dup1_ex lnnp
(Figure X-19). If the total loop resistance of ell lnons js too hip:h, then
separate loops must be estabUshed using j_so latl on relays (T<'i1711re �-20).

{
X- 5
 FULL-DUPLEX
CONVERTER SUBSCRIBER

-
( )
I-.. BATT
:
: REC

":J
i
RECEIVE

VFCT

X SEND
I
-
(l)

4�t
:b 60 MA SEND
�
-
c: - �
( ) ----+-�--- - - - --------------------���
BA

ICS BATTERY
SEND 8 RECEIVE

FIGURE X-1 ICS VFCT CHANNEL CONNECTED

(FULL-DUPLEX)

-- ....
 ( lsi ..
LRl
[RI ..
lsi
FIGURE X-2 FULL-DUPLEX CIRCUIT
•

• •

t s
'

R
FIGURE X-3 HALF-DUPLEX CIRCUIT

( R s
l I

s
n r R�
I I
Rw L s

r I
s R
( FIGURE X-4 �ULTIPOINT CIRCUIT

X-7
 t-10N MOt\
LINE EQUIP
�'l
CONVERTER SUB
T Tt

T T, ..
LII\E 1 : 1.. II
IT
I : ·- AEQ u I p
(SET)
{SET)
•

R R, 1
t
RECEIVE
VFCT
FIGURE X-5 St�PLIFIED ICS DC R EC E I V E JACKS,
(FULL-DUPLEX CONNECTION)

t-10N
LINE
�10N
EQUIF
)
SEND
T

I • I �,
EQUIF
(SET

BATT(-) 1 R0 R'
o 1 J
KEYER

FiGURE X-6 St�PLIFIED ICS DC SEND JACKS,

(FuLL-DuPLEX CoNNECTION)

,j
X-8
(
I REC

CONVERTER
�

t f SEND

K EYER

VFCT VFCT

I �;:�:� I I CON �:; TER I

FIGURE X-7 THROUGH-STATION CONNECTION

CONV ERTE:R KEYER

r
( --
I r I �

BATT ( -

RECEIVE SEND

VFCT VFCT
SEND RECEIVE

BATT ( - -•

KEYER CONVERTER

FIGURE X-8 ICS THROUGH-STATION CoNNECTION

X-9
 )
"

t
•
,....
-

-
���
-
-------

FtGURE X-9 BASIC ISOL�TION RELAY

�
'

TACTICAL INTERFACE

CONVERTER KEVER )
-,ATT
BATT
(-) l60 MA
( +)

RECEIVE SEND
-,_

VFTC VFCT

SEND RECEIVE

( 60 f1A 20 MA

BATT ( -l•'

KEVER CONVERTER

FtGURE X-10 FIXED-PLANT AND TACTICAL VFCT INTERFACE

X- 10
 SUB

(' I 0 I I•
BATT
60 H")
( - )

VFCT

1111 .....
60 t-1A 60 tv�
� (-) SEND
BATT I •

FtGURE X-I I SusSCRIBER PROVIDING BATTERY

(FuLL DuPLEX)

(
CONVERTER SUB SCR I B E R
HALF-DUPLEX

60 MA

RECEIVE

VFCT
SEND

D I w SEN

KEYER
ICS - BATTERY

FIGURE X-12 HALF-DUPLEX CO NNE C T I O N TO ICS VFCT TERMINAL

\
X-11
 BAD CABLE PA I RS

SUBSCR I BER
'
CO NV E RT ER

c 60
-
L_-BATT
(- )
MA �, � 30 MA ) ;
g
REC

.. ' ? -
't
R EC E I V E

VFCT
SEND

,r--
SEND
�r--� � __ttm
�=�
BATT
c �
>
i ) I
(- )
BAD SPLICE'"'
KEYER �vET CABLE

F1GURE X-13 Lo w SuBSCRIBER CuRRENT

)
CC,�JVERTER S U B S CR I BER

�(�60
a I rl.
tv1A R EC

-�
(

S END

(60 tv1A
1, t � I w SEND

BATT

KEYER
FtGURE X-14 SoLUTION To Low SuescRIBER CuRRENT

�
·"'
X-12
(

(OPTIONAL)

,-[>

LEGEND:

Q HUB STATION NOTES: SusscRtBER EQUIPMENT

AT LOCATION OT�ER
THAN THE H UB STATION
( • TERMINAL STATION IS WIRED FOX BUT
OPERATES HDX.

C> �; U B S CR I BER

FtGURE X-15 HUB t··'uLTIPOJNT, NETWORK CoNFIGURATION

(
X- 13
 (EXPANSION UNIT)
r-�-----------------
VFCT VFCT
VFCT
REC SEND REC SEND REC SEND

- B,.:,TT
ftl-1--- � 1- rr� ��
I I II
• :v
BAT"F
•
AT1" '"' BATT.
* I =r . =;. I

! l 1 l 1 1
--

"" .. .. " ...

L..-}4- I 1"1-' fth I I I I I

...... ..
�
"V i[rt� r\. -v �-- i[r!� i\ ...
X
I
_.

';.. 8-AT1 111-� BATT -:..�

BATT
I

I
I
I
---_r--- r---,--- �- -
�
I
...
BATT 4A
JlJ I I
""
� BATT ,..i..,..

SUB�CR I BER REC SEND

( 0 PTI 0 NAL ) NOTE: ALL RELAYS ARE SHOWN IN
NORMAL IDLE POSITION;
V F CT

"MARK" OR "HOLD11

FIGURE X-16 HUB STATION CONNECTIONS

--
 (

{ O FTI ONA L )

(OPTIONAL)

(
LEGEND: Q �1ULTIPOINTING STATION NOTES: SuBSCRIBER EQUIP­
MENT WIRED HDX.

• TE.RfviiNAL STATION

SUESCRIE.;ER
t>

FIGURE X-17 HALF-DuPLEX t1uLTIPOINT,NETWORK CoNFIGURATION.

(
X-1 5
 VFCT VFCT VFCT
r-- - -- -- - ---- - -- ---- -- ,
REC SEND REC SEND REC 0END

,.
...... BATT
.....
t- 8ATT __,.,. �,...BATT ,..

• I I I
BATT
[ 1 l
EATT BATT
... ..
l I rt
... • .f. I
·yv-
+ I
T..,...

1 L 4 ! J, . 1 1
�
•!o •I ... ·1- I
0 4 �
•>

_, .. - ... A
I lctl tr� � ... � I I 1 I --I rot-\-.
I --\• �- �· r 1"' 1 �'- I�• 1l I... I
I
I
� 4 � � ,
I
-::
. . � • � '. �� • �
I •
':.
I BATT BATT . f BATT BATT :: BATT BATT
X I
I
_. 1 --- --- - --------- � - --- ------- --
,
r--- �--
f
(EXPANSION UNIT) •

- ·-
I
NOTE: ALL RELAYS SHOWN IN �\.· -
I I �' .. r ..T 1 •
t
IDLE FOSITION: 11MARK11 OR "HOLD" t
•
I
• • 4 • 0 I
�' BA.TT ,

FIGURE X-18
HALF-DUPLEX MULTIP OINT ST ATION,
EouiPMENT CoNNECTION.

(OPTIONAL)
 """""
,.,.., """"'"

SUBS C R I 8 ER
CONVERTER ;t 1

t ....

T .....
BATT ( - )
I ·�
t
,

-
[)
......
- - ft1tf
-
I
-
=r •
...
R E CE I VE '

X V F CT
I
.....
""'I SEND SUBSCRIBER# 2

1""-
-
.� l -
-"!: •

BATT ( - ) - ' ftttt

-

KEVER

FIGURE X-19 HALF-DuPLEX CIRCUIT, MuLTIPLE DRoP, CoMMON LooP

 r- __ .. _ - - ---- - ... - - - ,
I
I VFCT
I
I
S UB �; C R I 8 ER �f 2 SUE:; S C R I B t:R tf 1 RECEIVE SE�W
I
I
I

., BATT BATT
-
I

I
X
I -
�

� Ill II \ II
-.. �' �

I
• •
I , . !
BATT .___ BATT
_, 8.�-'\ TT I
I _
___.l
B A T ll._I
�------�
I
I
I
I
I
I
L----� ... ._ .. --- - ---�-- -.J
(EXPANSION UNIT)

FtGURE X-20 HALF-DuPLEX CtRCUtT,MuLTIPLE DRoPs,SEPARATE LooPs

 XI. CIHCUlT ACTlONS

(
Complete details on circu�t activations and realig;u;1cnt are given
in the RCG Long Lines Technical Control ;itaadards and J'ractlccs:

lTEH NH. -
TlTLE

0201 Circuit Activat�on Docur.:tents

0211 Standard 11.Ctivat.1.on Procedure

0212 AUTOSGVL\.J}l Ci rc Lu t Cond.1.tioning

0221 Engineering Chang-2S to res LirCLU ts

0231 Expedited Circu.1.t Activation

0241 Standard Circuit Configuration

(
X 1-1
 XII. SYSTJ<.;H CO�TROL P.H.OC.ElJUtU;;s, l<EPORTS, AND 1\1�0HDS

(
In order to 01�rate smoothly and efficiently in a system of the
size and complexity of the ICS, established control procedures must
be s trictly follmved, d,nd the reports and records required to SU1)port
these procedures must be completed in a timely <md accurate manne r.
A brief summary of control nrocedures, reports, and re cords utilized
is presen ted in this chapter to pr ovide you with a few key points
about this aspect of the lCS.

The first step for every individual concerne d with the contro l of
the ICS is to read am� u nderstc1nd these basic refe rences:

nu,c 310-70-l DCS Technical L.ontrol

DCAC 310-55-l Operationul Directional Hanu<d of the LCS
HCG LL T CG S&P

Hithin these references you can find tre information you nee d or
you will be referre d to another applicable doc�nt. As al-w·ays, there
is still roo m for imp rovement, especiall y in a system as new as the
ICS; thus you, t he operators of t he system, are encouraged to c ome
forward \lit h your suggestions as t o improve:ments that can be made.

A. CONTROL l'lWCl':DUl\,.G;S:

( You wi ll find t'1at the control procedures governing the ICS differ
only slightly from those utilized for the S:&\'.v'Wi, and the DCS in general.
These modifica t�ons ger1erally involve the area of circuit a ctions ( see
Chapter XI for further detailed r eferences ) and are the results of adapt­
ing a f ixed statlon system to the ever-changing combat environncnt \\'e
operate in.

1. DCA Procedures:

The control procedures utt.ilized by DCJ.\.-SAH are clearly described

in DCA directives and circulars, in particular the t\•lO aotcd above.
The m\lnagement role of DCA is executed in part by the allo cation of
resources ( routing of circuits by assigrunent of channels ) and s chedul­
ing of circuit act1ons. The scheduling of actions is closely coordina t­
ed with Engineering llranch, H.egional Communications Group so that the
\iOrkload on any one technical control can be regulated. Circuit rout-
ing ( channel assigrurent ) is s olely a OCA function. DCS-sAN also exercises
a cert ain degree of "technical control'• over the ICS, as well as th e
entire SEAi.JBS, by preparing and issuing TS01s. The final, and perhaps
the most important, aspect of DCA nanagerrent cont ro l is tre monitoring
of the operational status of the sys tern as well as individual circuits.

(
X I l-1
 One of tle most ef fective control procedures used is the appoint­
rent of a C oor d ina ting Tech11ical Control for each circuit. The Coor­
din ating Control is specificed by f;CA in pa ragrap h 2a of the T SO. It ·�
is the respons ibility of that te c hn ic al control t o coordina tc and report
on th a t circu it from the tine of is sua nce of the activation TSO to the
c omple.t1.on of the deactivatl.on TSO. Tlri.s pinpoin ting of circUl. t respon­
sibility goes a long \-ray tow ards in.creasing the efficiency of t he ICS.

2. Reg io na l Conmunications Group l'rocedures:

The HCG U. TCG Sc1P provides a singJ.e source for locating l\CG direc­
tives setting forth p olicy and guidance th at is not 1.nc1.uded .1.n other
apl,licablc docUirents or r egulat.::...o ns. Individu<1l st"'l' items art! used as
the med ia to standardize operat1onal proced ur es within l\CG.

The assignrent of individual items of lCS con ditioning equip11ent is

c ontro lle d entirely by Regional Co:r:nmmications Gro up e The Circult
Engineering Section of Engineering Branch, HCG, makes the exac t equip­
ment assign:rrent for each ICS circait as engineered by DCA. These equip­
ment assignments are transmitted to the sites by TTY message. It is
essential that these assigrune n t s b� exac t ly followed an d an y changes
necessary d ue to faulty equipnent, double assignn:ents, etc, be closely
coordinated with Engineering Branch before activating the circuit.

B. REPOHTS:

An essential component of any cont rol procedure is an effective

ltfeedback" nllchanism that provides accu ra te and tirely information
concerning system performance. The primary form that fee back takes
)
in the ICS is the n 55-ln report. These reports on activations, de­
acti vati ons, outages, restora tions , alt-routes im ol e �re nted an d exceptions,
arc vital to both DCA and Hegional Communications Group. 'iou should
set a goal of perfection in n55-l11 re p orting pr ocedures a nd settle for
aothing less.

l. DCA Reports:

The principle g uide to DCA re por ti ng requirements and fonm. ts is

DCA C irc ul ar 310-55-l, n opera ti ona l Dir.:-.ct.1.on of the Defense Conmuni­
cations System {DCS)". ln fact, nearly all OCA reports fall into the
cate gory of "55-ln reports. DCAC 310-55-l is of such importance that
every DCS station s hould have at least two copies, one of wlri.ch should
be readily accessible t o the personr1el pr epanng and su bnu tt ing the r e­
ports. Each DCS station should alSo have a copy of the DCA-sAJ.f , DCAC
310-55-1 Training G u ide, published in tlctober 1967, by that agency to
facilitate Wlderstand ing of DCAC 310-55-l. DTD September 1969 DLAC
310-55-1 supps Dtd 22 De cembe r 1969.

It would be im practical t o have every DCS station report directly

t o t he D� operations center. The procedure followed is to designate

)
,,

X 11-2
 sore large, centrDlly located stations as reporting stations. i;.ll
otl-er stations, (thos e being reported_£!!) submit their reports t o the

( reporting stat.1.o ns fo r further transrniss.Lon to the DCA. o;)erations

c enter. The method of transmitting these reports to DCA is by use of
ded icated teletype circuits directl y to the operat.Lons center.

At the present ti�re all but one of the report.Lng s t<4t..LOUS ar�
oper ated by the hegional Cor:llliunicat.Lons Group. The re;Jortin� stations
as of 16 April 1970 are:

1' an Son <�hut Nha Trang

Im Nang Can Tho

Phu Hai Pleiku

Long Binh Vung Chua Hountain (opel. -a ted by 21st

Signal Group )

The following types of DCA "55-111 reports arc of primc-,ry interest

to the operators of the res.

a. Activation, real ignment, and deactivation of circuit

trunk groups, and systems.

b. Activation and deactivat.1on of 11on-call11 circu.1ts and

patches.

( c. r:Xception reports on non-completion of TSO a ction.

d. Reroute and pre-emption action.

e. Outage reports of circU.l ts, trtmk gro ups and systems.

2. Hegional Communications Group Heports:

B.CG utilizes the n55-1n reports submitted by t he technical

c ontrol to DCA in basically the sane m:'lnner a s t hat agency does. The
rt;!quiremeats for all reports subn:itted to HCG are based on the need
for operational inform a tion and f or the supervisio11 of c ircu it activa­
tions and realigrunents. In addition to the 1155-111 reports , there are
othe r reports, whose fonw.ts and submission requirements are contained
in HCG LL TLG S&l' •

a. Hequircd reports on TSO status: It has been found much more

eff ic ient, and requiring less eff o rt to all concerned, if all inquiries
regarding ICS circuit a cti.ons are nade to the Circuit Contro l Section,
b:nr;ineering Branch, RCG. HOI.vever, in order to an swer these inquir.1es,
the Circ'.lit Control Section requires accurate and ti�rely reports on the
status of DCA TS01 s.

(,
X I 1-3
C. Ht;COHDS:

1. VC.A. He cords:
.,
The reference for DCA r e co r ds in DLJl Lircular 310-70-l n]J�.;S
Technical C on t rol , Vol li Procedure 11. The DCA records th.ol t must
be main tained in the ICS technical control are:

a. St<l.tion Log

b. Circuit Layout H.ccord (CLH)

c. Trunk Layout .t� cor d s (TLlt)

d. (1441 cards ) TSO

2. Heg ional Coununica tl.ons Group Hecords:

a. CircuitllistoryFile (Hef: S&P ItemNr. 082U-Ol): This

S&P pr es c ri bes the manner in \vhich the CLlt's, Tl.:i�'s,and TSO will
be filed.

b. l�quipm�nt Utilization 1\.ecords {l�cf: St1· Item Jr. 0820-01):

Ead1 Technical Cont r ol must :maiat<l.i n re cor d s on th e utilization of all
conditioning equipnr.n t. Periodically, these rc:•cords wJ..ll be compared
to the records maintained by J1:ngineeri'lg Branch, Ji.CG and the discrc�l<mcies
adjusted.

c. (S&r Ite.r.1 to be issued ) : I:ach ICJ

I'er fonnance l �e c ords )
Tech n ie<ll C on tr o l
will keep s ta ti stica l data on circuits, c ha;uels,
groups or s upergroups as to e ff iciency, outa g e s , reasons for outage s ,
and cor rec tive ac t i ons .
These records will be kept a minimum of 6
month s for pos si ble ana ly s J..s .

,)
X 11-4
 Xlll. ShCURE VOICE SYSTEHS

( A. HISTORY:

There has always peen a need in the military for private or secure
c ommun ications. Special couriers, intricate codes, cyphers, and false
messages were but a few o f the means used by the armies of the past to
o btain secure communications. This need for secure communicc.;t ions still
exists.

Both teletype and telephone services can be made secure. Security is

usually achievec by making the transmitted inf ormation indecipherable to
the enemy. This is normally done by encrypting the information, trans­
mitting it, and then deciphering the information at the receiving end.

B. THEORY OF SECURE VOICE TRANSHISSION:

Human speech is transmitted through the air as a series of compressions

and rarefactions of air pressure. These can be represented as a continuous
waveform composed of frequencies from 20 to 20,000 11z. Only frequencies
between 300 to 3,000 Hz are required, however, to reproduce good intelligi­
ble speech. A normal telephone converts sreech "Taves into electrical audio
frequency ¥raveforms, transmits th em, and then reconverts them to speech­
waves at the distant end. If carrier systems are utilized, the audio waves
are modulated to a new frequency for transmission, but the waves are still
continuous.

A means to scramble or encrypt the voice information must be utilized

( if secure voice is to be achieved. It is difficult to encrypt a continuous
waveform and then accurately decipher it at the distant end. I t is less
difficult to encrypt and then decipher a series ot discrete pulses. This
is what secure voice equipmen t actually does� The original continuous
audio wave forn is first converted to a series of discrete pulses and then
t he discrete pulses are scrambled according to a prearranged code. At the
distant end, the pulses are de-scrambled and reco nverted to audio frequen­
cies.

To represent audio wave forms as a series o f discrete pulses the audio

wave amplitude is first sam�led at frequent intervals. Each sample is
represented by a discrete pulse code representing the amplitude of the
sampled wave • The quality of the reproduction i s closely related to t h e

.. sampling rate. \vithin certain limits, a high sampling rate wil l produce
a more accurate representation of the audio wave since the sample intervals
are much closer together. High sample rates imply narrow discrete pulses.
Unfortunately, the bandwidth required to pass narrow pulses is greater than
that required to pass wide pulses. Thus, the quality of a secure voice
circuit is directlv related to its transmission path bandwidth.

'
mr -1
 Both narro�..rband (3 kHz) and wideband (SO kHz) secure v oice equipment§
are used in Vietnam. The narrowband equipment is designed to pass over
standard 3 kHz telephone circuits. The 3 kHz bandwidth
rate, however, so that speech quality is poorer t han normal telephone
limits th e pulse
,�,
quality. Wideband secure voice equipment is designed for use on short,
specially dedicated wideband citcuit paths. Excellent speech quality is
achieved with widebnnd equi�ment.

Both wideband and narro't\'band equipment must be synchronized with each

ot her. Without synchronization, the receiving equipment \vill be unable to
correctly decipher the pulses and severe distortion or garble will result.
Great care must be exercised to insure that accidental di sconnects, mis­
patches, and path noise and level shifts are minimized. Each c an cause the
secure voice equipment to lose synchronization. Loss of synchronization
requires that the circuit must be re-established and re-synchronized before
secure voice communications can be continued . Since all secure voice cir­
cuits in Vietnam pass extremely hi6h priority traffic, every effort must
be made to avoid e ven momentary dis�uptions.

C. SECURE VOICZ SYSTEM IN VIETNAM

AUTOSEVOCOM (Automatic Secure Voice Communications) is an automatically

switched secure voice communications system currently being installed on
a world-wide basis. AUTOSEVOCOM, Phase I, is now being installed in
Vietnam. A non-automatic secure voice system, TALK QUI CK, is currently
in operation in Vietnam providing an interim AUTOSEVOCOi'·1 ca?abilit y.
Future expansions o f the secure voice system in Vietnam will be referred
to as AUTOSGVOCOM rather than TALK QUICK.
)
The secure voice system presently consists of the follo�ving: (Figure
XIII-1)

a. A secure voice aQcess cons,ole {SB'AC)

b. An automatic dial exchange, AN/PTC - 31

c. Narrowband (3kc) and wideband (SOkc) subscriber terminals

with trunk connections to a switchboard

(SEVAC) provides tte interface between the wideband

and narrowband subscribers. AN/FTC-31 subscribers (AUTOSEVOCOM) have a
dial capability to other AN/FTC-31 subscribers, but must use the operator
at a manual switch fo r access to non-AN/FTC-31 subscribers.

Narrowband trunks are terminated at the Phu Lam overseas switchboard

(JOSS) to provide acc�ss into the Pacific area secu re voice network.
Access to this network allows connection to secure voice subscribers
worldwide.

�.)
XIII • 2
 These narrowband trunks are high priority (lD), specially condition ed
circuits to support secure voice traffic. A ny changes to the circuit
( routing requires extensive tests aod reconditioning of the circuits.
�pecific instructions have been given technical co ntrols on the proper
test of secure voice circuits. 'l'lh.en the circuit is idle, a 2600 Hz ton e
at the proper level is normally sufficient to indicate that the ci rcuit is
operating properly. The 2600Hz supervision tone should b e 20 db below
standard test ton e levels listed on the CIR Card. Circuits should not be
tested with operational traffic being passed. Any interruption of the
sisnal or significant change in levels will cause the. subscriber terminal
to go into an alarm con diton. Temporarily bridging the circuit will
indicate if traffic is being passed. A rushing sound is heard in the
headset.

Signal Company (AUTOSEVOCOM) organic to the Regional Communication s

Group has responsibility for operati on and maintenanc e of the Army porti on
of the secure voice system in Vie tnam and operDt ion of tre Network Coordina­
tion Station (NECOS). T h e NECOS was organized to provide a si ngle point
of contact for trouble reportim; in Southeast Asia.

,\�

(
XIII - 3
 IN CO UN TRY
3Kc 31< c
,
PHU l1\M JOSS NARROWBAND
SUBSCRIBERS

3KC
OuT OP' C OUNTRY
NARROW BAND
Ace [88

50 KC
WtOEIUND
---�-
SEVAC AN/ FTC-31 �����SUBSCRIBERS
X
-
-
-

50KC

WIDEBANO
SUBSCRIBERS

(MANUAL)

FtQURE Xlll-1 SECURE VOICE SYSTEM

 XIV. DATA S YST e..1S IN VIETNAM

(
A. AUTOMATIC DIGITAL NETIIDRK (AUTODIN):

During the summer of 1962 the Secretary of Defense directed that

the DCS be a single intergrated automatic switched communications
system comprised of an Automatic Digital Network (AUTODIN) and an
Automatic Voice Network (AUTOVON). This system upgrade improves
the overall effectiveness of the DCS by increasing the responsive­
ness, flexibility, survivability and economy of communications
through the use of automatic switching techniques.

The AUTO DI N in CONUS consist of nine interconnected Automatic

Switching Centers (ASC's), their associated subscriber terminals,
and appropriate DCS transmission facilities. Overseas, the net­
work consits of ten Automatic Digital Message Switching Centers
(ADMSC's), their associated subscriber terminals, relay s, and appro­
priate DCS transmission facilities. Each AI)1SC is interconnected
with adjacent A!li�SC's and conne¢ts with CONUS AUTODIN through designated
g ateway stations.

High tr2ffic volume/high priority subscribers such as manual

data, DCS teletypewriter relays and AUTODIN subscribers are dir­
ectly connected over full-time circuits into the AI1TODIN Svntching
Ceneters.

( Two overseas switches are located in Vietnam; one Alll:iSC at Phu

Lam and one A�iSC at Nha Trang. USA Regional Communications Group
operates both of these switches. The Phu Lam switch was activated
on 25 March 1968. Tne Nha Trang switch was activated 25 April 1968.
The AUTOD I N configuration for the Pacific area is shown in Figure
XIV-1.

(
-
XIV 1
 �1C
�---C----, LELLAN

c:
I
•!'0

SW
ITCH
1 16
FtGURE XIV� AUTODIN OVERSEAS-PACIFIC NETW��•

- - -
 IY� �39L CABLE SYSTEM

(
Since the 4391 undersea cable system is such an important link in the
long linea systems he re in Vietnam, it is helpful and int eresting to know
a few o f its features and capabilities.

A. CABI,E LENGrHS (NAUTICAL MILES):

Da Nan€
f
207

Qui Nhon � �

f
- - ·r
+ +
�
Nha Trang

Cam Ranh Bay

5
�

Vung Tau 1f f
( 612

Sattahip +
B. CABLE SIZE:

The basic cable is a dielectric tilled /8" coaxial cable. The sea
5
port.ion of the cable uses single armored cable with a total diameter of
2•. On the port.ion from the sea splice up to the beach, double armored
cable is used, and fran the beach to the cabl e terminal, i t is aga in single­
arsored.

c. CHANNEL CAPACITY:

60 each 4 kHz voice channels are previded . Approximately 25% ot these

can be used tor VFCT tQne packs (loading limi.tation ) . The cable terminals
break down the 60-channel SUPERGROUP into five 12-channel GROUPS; howe ve r ,
the terminals do not have channel MOruM equipme nt . There is one 12-chann el
MODEM at each terminal o f each link which is primarily tor test purposes
only. The channel MODD!s used tor general purposes are in the I CS build­
ings. There is a voice order wire tor terminal-to-terminal cODmunicationa.

(
XV- 1
D. TRANSMISSION PLAN:

S ince this is physically only a two-wire system., the transmission in

oposite directi on must be separated in frequency. This is accomplished
)
by having the "8" terminal transmit in the standard SUP.ffiGROUP 2 frequency
band (312-522 kHz) and the "A" terminal t:r-ansmits in the band from 24-264 kHz.
The 96 kHz pilot tone is transmitted from the "A" terminal to the "B" ter­
minal.

E. REPEATERS:

There are active repeaters placed in the cable every 16.8 na utical miles.
These are tube-type units powered by direct current supplied by the terminals.
The repeaters are bidirectional, separating the two directions of transmission
with appropriate filters.

F. CABLE P<W.ER FEED:

The submarine cable derives all of its power from the shore station. De­
pending on the length of the section, either one or both terminals will supply
DC current to the cable. The cable center conductor is used to convey all of
the DC power. The salt water and earth itself being the return path to the
feeding station. The repeaters draw their power between the center conductor
and the return path. The important feature of the power :reed is a constant
current of 426 milliamperes. This may require a very high voltage, for example,
the terminal voltage is 1850 volts on the Vung Tau - Sattahip link which is
fed from both terminals.

G. COMPANIES INVOLVED:

Engineered by: Page Communications Engineers

)
Installed by: Under Sea Cable Corporation

Cable ma.nufactured by: Simplex

Terminals and repeaters manufactured by: Felten aDd Gaille auae of German;r

H. f CS lNTER.CONNECTION:

Under Moditication Number 6 to the Area 1 lCS contract., LOS m:icrwave

links were installed between each cable terminal in Yietmaa and the nearb;r
I CS terminal. 'l'hese are AN/FRC-109 systeJlS, operated and aaint.&ined b;r iec­
ional COIIIcIIlUlli atiena Group.

.J
XY-2
 XVI. Satellite Canmunications

f
In the field of Military COI'lli!lunications, reliability and high
quality are of ma,jor importance. One of the latest techninues used,
that of communication by satellite relay, promises b oth of these
features plus a long distance canability vdth r�lative ease of es­
tablishment.

Until December 1967 there 1r-rere two satellite nror:rams being

imPlemented in RVN. The first program w as the S;mchronous Comm1mications
,
(SYNCON) Satellite orogram using two satellite relays i n synchronous
orbit. Five transportable ground terminals were in operation carrying
c ommuni cati ons across the Pac ific to the U.S. One of th e s e terminals
was in RVN and utilized an AN/MSC-44 located at Ba Queo. It was taken
out of traffic in Decf:5'llber 1967.

The second program, the Initial Defense Communications Satellite

Program (IDCSP), remains in use and provides an operR.tional sy s t em (JDCSS)
capable of global communications via a belt of satellite relays circling
the earth above the equator. The satellites were carried as a Package
into f inal orbit by a TITAN III-C rocket. A trans-stage was then used
to accelerate the package while the sate1lites were sequentially e,iected.
In this way, a different velocity and orbital neriod was imnarted to
each of the nineteen satellites enabling a slow, random dispersion. The
satellites are in near synchronous orbit at an altitude of fS,200 miles,
r andomly dispersed around the globe. A given ground terminal "sees''
( the satellites continually drifting into, through, and. out of his field
of visibility; thus any two or more satellite ground terminals having
mutual satellite visibility can c001.municate. The maximum oower outnut
of the IDCSP satellites i s two noint five (2.5) watts with a bandwidth
of 20 mHz. ,
An experimental satellite was launched on 2 Tu ly 1067 that
has an increased power output of aPproximately 16 watts. Because of the
omnidirectional antennas on the satellites, the ground t ermi nal s must have
extremely sensitive receivers. This sensitivity is achieved through the
use of supercooled parametric amplifiers. The parametric amplifiers are
cooled with liquid helium to a temperature of -2.45 der:rees centigrade.
Three (3) ground terminals were initially deployed to sites located in
West Germany, Hawaii, and the PhilliDpines. The initial terminals have
been supplemented by eight (S) addi�ional AN/MSC-46 terminals, two of which
are located in RVN, one ( 1) at Ba Queo (see figures 1 and 2) and one ( 1)
at Nha Trang. The Ba Queo circu;ts terminate at Phu l.am and Kunia, Hawa:H;
the Nha Trang circuits terminate at GuAM.

The AN/MSC-46 terminals have a capacity of twelve (12) four (4) kRz
VF Channels. The transmit frequency is preset within the range of 7.9 to
8.4 gHz with an output power of up to tO Kw. 'J'he receive range is from
7.25 to 7.75 gHz.

(
XVI - 1
 The operational control of the IDCSS is the Satellite Communi-
cations C ontrol Facility ( SCCF ) c olocated. with the Defense Ccmmuni-
·��')·
· ·

cations Agency Operations Center in Arlington, Virginia. The SCCl<' is

responsible for overall system control and assigns schedules and
satellites to link terminals for subscriber use. The satellite circuits
are tied into the Integrated Vlideband Camnunications System ( t CS ) , here
in Vietnam, and are used to provide service throughout the world. Present­
ly the satellite circuits are used for out-of-country communications through
the Hawaii and GUAM ground terminals, where they can be routed over an
undersea cable to destinations in CO:NUS and PQints be:vond. The alternate
route is a direct path from Vietnam to Camp Roberts, California; however,
due to the transmit-receive angles involved the circuits on this path are
of lesser quality.

Figure XVI - 1 Ba Queo Satellite Terminal

.)
XVI- 2
 XVII. ICS QUALITY ASSUHANCE AND OPERATIONAL EVALUATIONS

(
A. GJ•�ERAL:

The ICS quality assurance program is conducted in accordance with

the references listed in paragraph n. The purpose of this program is
to insure that the ICS perfo�nce is of the highest quality possible.

Regional Communications Group and the Defense Communications Agency­

Southeast Asia Main land provide independent teams whic h perform periodic
quality assurance and operational evaluation inspectlOns on technical
c ontrol, tropospheric scatter rad.1o and microwave radio facilities. ALOC,

, . 1st Signal Brigade, alsl has a team which performs periodic quality
assurance inspections and technical control evaluations.

ll • 1\EFEl{ENCE..'i :

DCAN 210-0-l DCA Nmnbered l'ub lications

DCAC 310-55-l Operational Direct.1on Hanw.l
DCAC 310-70-1 Technical Control l'rocedures (4 Volumes)
DCAC 300-175-9 DCS Circuit Operating Stand ards
DCAN 330-10-1 Communications-Electronics Terms
DCAN 330-175-1 Engineering-lnstalla tion Standards
ACP 131 (B) Conummications Instructions Operatin g
Signals

( Regional Comnunications Group Long Lines Technieti.l control Standards

and Practices
1st Signal Brigade Standing Signal Instructions

C. PROCEDURES:

1. The prime ele100nt of any quality assur<tnce program is the suppor t

o f the operating station. \vithout this support, such a program can hard­
ly be successful. For this reason it is imperative that site conm'i.lnders
vigorously implement the detailed quality assurance directives contained
in RCG LL TCG S&P and DCA publications. Questions concerning specific
quality assurance procedures not covered in these should be referred to
Quality Assurance Branch, Hqs, RUG.

.. 2. ACOC and Hegiona.l ColliDlunications Group quality assurance teams

will periodically visit all ICS tecluucal controls. The iJul'pose of these
vis:i.�s is to provide CG, 1st ::;ignal Brigade aild co, .KCG with information
as to the effectiveness of the on-site intplementation of the quality as­
surance program.

(,
XVII•l
 3. The DCA-Si\}1 team per iodically visits t he DCS technical controls
and tl� najor relay stations. This team performs operatJ.onal evaluation
� � :
ins1-�ctions.
to }f.ACV J-6.
Reports o the e insp�ctJ.ons are forwa ded by Chief, DLA-sAH
.
A check-l�st ol Techn�cal Control iual�ty Assurance and
'l
Operational evaluation is r eproduced on the followi ng p ages.

� 1

.)
XVII-2
 TECH CONr ROL QUALITY AS:>UHA NCE/OP!:;IW.T ICNAL ZVALUi\T lUN

( CilF.CKLIST

1. Publications, lt'orms2 Reporting.

a. Are current editions { with posted changes ) of the f ollowing

publications held by the Tech Control Facility?

IDENtiFICATION TITLE YES NO

DCAN 21C-O-l llCA Numbered l'ublic atJ.ons

,. DCAC 330-10-1 Communications-l�ectronic

Terms

DCAC 330-175-9 DCS Circuit Operatin g

Standards

DC.i.C 310-55-1 Operational Direction

Hanual

DCAC 310-70-1 Tech Control f'rocedures

ACI' 131 Comr,1unications Instructions­

Operating Signals

( DCAC 330-175-1 Engineering-lnstallatJ.on

Standards

b. Are all doc�nts relative to classified operational

na tters ( restoral plans, etc ) available to personnel whose duties
require them?

c. Is a separate reporting section authorized for DCAC 310-

55-1 actions?

d. Does in-stat1on SOF ensure accuracy and timeliness of

DCAC 310-55-1 repor ts?

e. Are procedures fo r reporting tru:1k and circuit status

and backlog conditions adequate?

f. Are the following DD forms listed in DCAC 310-70-1 (-

or
suitable substitutes ) being used by the facility:

(
XVII-3
 Yr:s .NO

}laster Station Lo� (para ll-2):

)
'

Analysis of Chan:1el Ope ration Form, DD 1440 (para ll-40:

C ircllit i\ecord Form, nJ.J 1441 (rara ll-9):

C'tP.l ity Control Log (para ll-10):

Circuit La{out l�ecord (para ll-12) (prepared by DCA-SAH):

Tech Control Communications \vork Order Form, DD 1445:

Quality Control Circuit Test Schedule (para 4-3B):

. '
quality Control Equipme nt Test Schedule (para 4-3C):

2. Procedu.r.:es.

a. i\eview stAtion SUI' for completeness in rreeting DCS

standards wit h particular attention to the follo.Ting:

(1) Are schedules for periodic testing posted and

followed to insnte circuits racet l)CS standards?

(2) Arc procedures prescribed for each emergency

action involvir1g:

(a ) System failtn"e:
)
(b) I' mver failure :

(c) Air conditioning failure:

(d) Cable failtU'e:

{e) J armni n g:

(f) Interference:

(g) Hatural disaster:

(h) Enemy attack:

b. Do circuit records list coordination p o ints or

contacts to correct circuit/system problems?

c. Are circuit out<Lge records naintained'?

d. Are controllers familiar with plans for rerouting
circuits and trunks for \vhich the facility is responsible?

\J
XVII-4
 YES �0

( e. Are pre-planned reroutes available for circu.1.ts

with a restoration priority of one and tHo?

f. Are listings naintained indicating restoration

priorit;ies for each circuits?

g. Are circuits 1•reempted in accordance with

restoration priorities?

h • • Are "down circuitsn returned to service in

accordance w ith established restoration priority?

, �
3. r--acilities ( refer to general infonnation sheet
prepared by l*'acility OIC ) .

a. Is equipmant adequate to meet exising and known

future requirements?

b. Are operational coordination and inter-cornmwli­

cati on facilities between tech control and associated
locations adequate?

c. Is adequate test equipment available to perform

telegraph distortion measurements?

d. Has test equipment been calibrated as required

( by .tHLDEHS?

e. Is test equipn:ent properly naintained and

serviced?

f. Has appropriate action been taken by the

facility to obtain needed items of test equipment?

g. Are circuit patching facilities adequate?

4. Operations. Observe tl:e followi n g ( DCAC 310-70-1):

a. Are controllers familiar with DCA directives and

their availability?

b. Are controllers familiar with restorati on

procedures?

c. Are DCS circuits assigned to the proper channels

as specified. by CEO?

d. Are non-DCS circuits assigned to DCS systems?

(
XVII-5
 YES iW
e. Does the controller cooperate and coordinate with
distant statl.ons and w it h other components w1.thin the 'l
station?

f. Is the subscriber notified of circuit restoratl.on?

g. Are DCS users b eing informed of the 1.r responsi­

bilities as prescribed in para 3800, DCAC 310-55-1?

h. Is there an effective on-the-job training program? __

i. Is there a Daily Notice program in effect?

j. Has any attempt been made to implement a technical � ,

controller exchange program with connecting stations?
(DCAC 300 -210-l)

5. General Comments:

a. Do tech controllers exhibit a sense of urgency in

lnl:tul ta.wl.Li� .1. .::lial>le cou.�ounicat.;. o�Z

b. \v'hat is the att itude toward DCA reporting 1n

accordance with r£Ac 310-55-1?

c. Is there a shortage (below authon.zed manning

levels) of trained tech control persom�l wh1.ch degrades
the quality of DCS control acti ons?

,)
XVII-6
 XVIII. MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS

( A. TELEPHONE SIGNALLING - By C. W. Holley, Page Engineer.

1. General:

The first telephone transmitted and received voice intelligence

only, and that not very well. As its ability to transmit voice was
improved, it was soon apparent that a means of attracting the attention
of the called party was necessary. The snall battery \vhich supplied cur­
rent to the telephone set's transmitter did not transmit current to the
line connecting the two telephone sets, so it could not be used to signal
the other end. A sepa.rate source of signalling energy was necessary and
the hand powered 16-20 Hz, 85-90 volt AC generator has proven to be a
,- good solution. The same system is used in the TA-312 field telephone,
and Western Electric still nanufactures such nagneto tel sets.

Let's stop for a minute and translate some of the words used so
far into telephone language. The battery which supplies current to the
telephone transmitter is call_ ed TALK Bt\'l"l'ERY. The hand-cranked ringing
generator is called a MAG (*nort for magneto). A telephone is frequently
called a TEL SET. A tel set with a nag is called a MAG SET.

We have already mentioned voice transmission and signalling. A

telephone system is designed to transmit and receive only those two types
of intelligence. We will not co nsider signa.lling in it's broadest sense;
ie, data, telegraph, etc., but we will consider only: attention getting,

( selecting, and supervisory signals.

2. Attention getting signals:

The 20 Hz, 85 volt energy genera ted by the calling party with a
nag tel set is transmitted over the line to the distant tel set and causes
a bell to ring. The bell is called a RINGEl:\. Figure l depicts a highly
simplified mg tel set telephone ci rcuit.

TELEPHOOE
·-••
• n n IIA.IIMM...I
LINE
• I I

TALK BATTERY TALK Bl\ TTERY

Figure XVIII - 1 Simplified Telephone Circuit

•
'

XVIII - 1
Such tel sets are also called LOCAL BA'ITEH.Y tel sets because the talk
battery is located "locally", in the case of the tel set. A COMMON
BATT&{Y tel set gets its talk battery from a centrally located, large
·''··.,,
,.':>
capacity battery which may supply talk battery to thousands of tel sets.
Thus we can say the battery is "comnon" to nany tel sets.

Figures 2 and 3 depic t respectively local and common battery

telephone ci rcuits.

II
.,
Local Talk
Battery

Figure A.'VIII - 2 Local Ea. ttery Circuit

)
II

Figure XVIII - 3 Simplified Common Battery Circuit

Ringers and generators are not shown - we want to emphasize the difference
in talk battery source. Both local and common battery tel sets are equipped
with a switch called a HOOKSWITCH which operates to close the ta lk battery
circuit through the transmitter when the telephone is lifted off its hook
or cradle.

Let's now discuss conmon battery signalling in detail. The common

battery sup plies cUITent for the tel set transmitter. This current can be

.)
XVIII - 2
 passed through a relay winding and provide a signal function. Figure 4
is a more detailed schematic of a common battery circuit's relay
( con figuration.

To To
TEL Line Line TEL
SET Relay Relay SET
A A B B
.,--

, �
--n I I I � n

Figure XVIII - 4 Use of R�lays in Common Battery Circuit

When tel set A calls tel set B, current flows from the conmon batter y
through winding of line relay A, over the line th rough the transmitter of
tel set A and back over the line to the common battery. Thus tel set A
has talk battery (current) and line relay A operates. The contac t s of
line relay A cause a relay to operate which imposes 20Hz signalling toward
tel set B. When tel set B answers, his transmitter receiver talk battery

( through a cut-off relay winding which operates and cuts of f the 20Hz.
two can then talk. The operation of the line relay can also be used to
The

signal a swit chboard by lighting a lamp.

Here's some more telephone language. When a tel set is picked up

preparatory to making a call, it is said to GO OFF HOOK or to be OFF HOOK.
When a tel set user hangs up the tel set, it is said to GO ON HOOK or to
be ON HOOK. The line from the common battery consists of two wires cal led
a PAIR . If in a cable, a CABLE PAlll. The two wires are referred to as
a LOOP . When the tel set is ON HOOK, it is an OPEN LOOP. vlhen the tel
set is OFF HOOK, it is a CLOSED LOOP. The two wires of a pair are cal led
the TIP (T) and the lUNG (n}. This terminology is a carry-over from
manual s witchboards. A s witchboard plug has th ree conducting elemen t s as
shown in Figure s.

,
,-­ DKAD COLlAR

II�
l L
t
SlBEVE

RING

( Figura XVIII-5 Conducting Elements of a Switehboad Pl.q..

XVIll - 3
The T of the plug is connected to the pair tip conductor and the H. to the
pair ring conductor. The sleeve (S) lead is used for local ci rcuit con­
trol fu nctions. Gormnon battery is installed vdth its positive terminal 'l
grounded and is represented schematically as shown in Figure 6 •

-
.1
- ..l
48 21...

I
-:-vGLTS VOLTS
::c
� .":"'

Figure XVIII -6 Battery Installation -,

Normally the R conductor of the telephone pair or loop is connected to
negative battery and T to ground.

So far we have discussed two types of signalling: Local battery and

comnon battery. In our discussion we have considered telephone circuits
using only two tel sets. Local battery signalling is usually referred to
as 20 Hz SIGNALLING, though Hz is a wo rd used t o replace the old word CJcle/sec
and you'll also hear it called 20 CYCLE SIGNALLING. Its use is not
restricted to local battery systems, though that is its origin. Corranon
battery signalling is also called LOOP SIGNALLING or WET-DEY SIGNALLING.
A loop is wet when one of its conductors is normally connected to battery
and the other to ground. A DRY LOOP has neither battery nor �round stand- :>
ing on it.

We can now refine our terminology further by saying that there have
been two types of signalling discussed so far: 20 Hertz and LOOP. Here
are some simple block diagrams illustrating 'ia ttention getting" signalling
(combinations of LOOP and 20 Hertz).

I= 1 I I
20Hz-

SET 4 20 Hz �
SET

C:l
I I
ZOHz -

- 20Rs
?:-
Figure XVIII - 7l Attention Getting Signalling

, i)
XVIII-4
 I I
( TEL LOOP --+ COMMON
BATTEHY
20 Hz ----.
TEL
SET
.,.__ 20 Hz 11<"11"1
CENT.HAL
:J<; .,__LOOP
SEl'

LOOP �
TEL
HANUAL
SET
SWITCHBOARD
41-- 20 Hz
,-
I
COMMON
RA. TTEHY

Figure XVIII - 7B Attention Getting Signalling

3. Selecting signals:

( signalling.
Now let's consider selecting signals, son�times called address
Twenty Hz is still used to provide semi-selectivity on
subscriber lines with three or more parties. Twenty Hz is passed to
either the T or h of the line in "code groups" of 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 (that's
about the limit) spurts of ringing current. The tel set ringers are con­
nected to either T or H to gr01md, five ringers to T and five to 1\ as
shown in l<�ig ure 8.

From
Central
T

R
}�}}}
----} -� �
Office

-=-
. -=-
. -=-
. -=-
. -=-
.

Figure XVIII - 8 Semi- Selectivity

(
xvnr- 5
Of course everyone hears 4 rings besides their
ie; they don 1 t hear .!Q rings.
own,
-
thus semi-selectivity

Full-selectivity can te provided with only two parties on the line:

,,,

-.

R
�
_g;
.'

Figure XVIII - 9 Full-Selectivit,y

Neither party hears the others r�ng, thus full-selectivity. One party is
called the TH' P1diT f, r inger wired T to grd, and the other of course , the
rUNG I'id(l'i. If the ringer is wired one side to ground, it is called
G1WUNDED iUNGING. If the ringer is wired across the line (ie, across T & R),
it is called HETt�.LLIC ;.UNGING.
)

TEL
SET

Figure XVIII - 10 �tallic Ringing

Another method of providing fully selective ringing involves the

generation of different ring current frequencies and frequency selective
ringers in the tel sets. Such a system is not widely used and semi-selective
ringing is gradually disappearing. More people can now afford a private line
and the commercial systems would much rather sell a single party line (it is
called a One Spot) than a four party, or Four Spot.

Twenty Hz selective signalling is sometimes applied to private

lines. 'rhe term PRIVATE LINE as used here means a line to which no one
but the buyer of the private line service has access. They are sometimes
called LEASES or LEASBD LINES. Twenty Hz selective signalling applied to

,)
:XVIII-6
 this type of service requires a trunk circuit at the customer location
that responds to 20Hz and differentiates between 1, 2, 3 or more rings,

( then in turn rings or buzzes the proper tel set.

to any great extent.
This system is not used
It requires a degree of skill of the ca.lling party
that most users will not take the effort to learn and they blame the con­
sequent failure on the telephone company.

Selective loop signalling usually consists of DIAL PULSES made

by the dial on the tel set. When a telephone is picked up ( goes off hook ) ,
the hook switch closes the loop to the common battery central office, places
the dial contacts in the loop, and operates t h e line relay in the central
office. A clearer picture of the circuitry is given in Figure II.

,.
Hook Switch to-
Line
Trans-­ Cable
Relay
mitter Pair

� Dial Central Office

Figure XVIII - 11 Dial Circuit

The closed contacts of the line relay cause I!Bny t hings to happen
in the central office and eventually your line is located by the switching
( equipment and it sends dial tone to your tel set. Now you can dial.
you dial say a 6, you will cause the dial contacts to open and close 6
If

times , causing the current in the loop to cease and flow 6 times. Or you've
created 6 DIAL PULSES like this:

Loop
Current About
in Ml\ .6 Sec.
� On Hook

Figure XVIII - 12 Dial Pulse Train

The common battery central office switching equipment absorbs

the dial pulses and if you send it a legitimate number of proper pulses,
it will ring the party you want - if that line is not busy or out of order.

4. Supervisory Signals:

Supervisory signals, or just supervision, are control or call

monitoring signals. Some supervision functions are:

a. Cord lamp supervision: After you have placed a call t hrough

a manual switchboard and want to talk to the operator you can "recall" the
operator by "jiggling" the hookswitch. This of course opens and closes
the loop and causes the switchboard cord lamp in use on your call to flash

(
XVIII ... 7
on and off advising the operator you want assistance. After you have
completed your call and hang up , the loop goes open, or on hook, and the
cord lamp is lighted steadily indicating to the operator you have completed "'·
the call. Switchboard operators can recall each other by 11ringing back11 on
,,,7
an established trunk connection. The process is rather complicated. but
the ring signal causes the distant cord lamp to flash until the operator
opens his talk key on that cor d cTrcui t •

b. Coin collect supervision: \'ihen the called party answers a

call placed f�om a dial coin telephone, or COIN BOX, the loop closure causes
the battery and ground in the central office to be reversed which indicates
to the coin telephone trunk circuit than <�dn collect rather than coin
return battery must be sent to the coin box after the caller hangs up. The
same battery reversal takes place on all answered calls and is used also to
operate registers or counters associated with a nuessagen service (A service
that permits so many calls a month for a flat fee then so much more money
.'
for each additional call ) . The same reversal is also used to provide cord
lamp supervision to an operator who has dialed a number, perhaps from a
distant city.

Dial speed is adjusted to satisfy the type of switching equip­

me n t in the central office, 10 to 12 pulses per second. Note that the
11longertt the loop , the greater its resistance and the lower the loop cur­
rent. Beyond a certain distance, measured in ohms not miles, special ttlong
line" equipment is necessary.

5. Development of Long Distance Signalling:

So far we've considered signalling over short distances. when )

20 Hz or loop signals are required to be transmitted, say 100 miles, special
equipment is necessary. 20 Hz can be transmitted over a cable pair for
about 30-35 miles >dthout sp e ci al equipment, but beyond that distance, the
signal must be REPEATED. (At the end of a 30 mile trip the 20 Hz signal
operates an INTERJ>iEDIATE lUNGER which sends fresh 20 Hz from a local gener­
ator on to the next ringer, etc. ) , Loop signals can be transmitted for
somewhat less than 1000 ohms and still be intelligable to a central office.
One thousand ohms loop resistance equals about six miles of 22GA CABLE and
about 11 miles of 19GA CABLE. Loop resistance is the resistance out on
one wire and back on the other wire of the pair. Beyond approxi.nately
1000 ohms, sensitive LONG LINE EQUIPMENT or PULSE REPEATERS are necessary.
Long line equipnent { sometimes called long haul ) can handle loops as long
as 5000 ohms. Pulse repeaters will not necessarily handle loops of over
1000 ohms, but do absorb the weak pulses, reshape them, make fresh pulses
and send them on. If is not economical to transmit 20 Hz or loop signals
from city to city because of the extra equipment required. Both ringing
and dial signals can be efficiently transmitted over long distances by
changing the 20 Hz or loop signal to a form more suitable to transmission
over modern telephone circuits.

Let's examine briefly the historical development of long distance

signal transmission. Some of the older systems are still in use. 20 Hz
signalling was not well suited for use on "long distancen or "tolP' cai'les

.c)
mn -s
 because the cables carried many telegraph (TGH) circuits riding along on
the same cable pair with a voice circuit. This was accomplished by a
( SIHPLEX (SX) or COMPOSITE (CX) circuit. It was common practice to trans­
ll'it 60 word per minute (60 speed) teletypewriter signals on the SX or CX
facility.

To
Switch­ ,sx Cable
)0
Board Pair

,.
0
TGH
Ckt

Figure XVIII - 13 Simplex Circuit

To
Cable
Switch­
Pair
( Board

To To
TGH TGH
Ckt Ckt

Figure XVIII - 14 Comnosite Signalling

60 word per minute teletypewriter signals are very close to 20 Hz, and thus
if Hz ringing signals were used on such a circuit, it would interfere
20
with the teletypewriter signal. For this reason 135 Hz ringing was developed
and widely used until about 10-15 years ago. The trouble with 135 Hz ringing
was the necessity to bypass it around a voice frequency repeater (amplifier).
135 Hz is too low a frequency for voice frequency amplifiers (normally used
on telephone circuits) to pass. So the next development was 1000/20 ringing

(
XVIII -9
(1000 Hz modulated at 20 Hz). 1000 Hz passes through a VF ( voice frequency )
repeater, but must be modulated because the ringer receiver circuit at the
far end could otherwise be 11talked off11 ( operated ) by 1000 Hz voice energy. {)
135 Hz signalling is practically a thing of the past and the Bell System
is now phasing out 1000/20 signalling.

The technique of transmitting signals over relatively long distances

leaned heavily on telegraph practices initially. Ringing, dial and super­
visory signals are changed by a Tl\UNh. l;IHCUIT to dirEct 01rrent sigmls
which can be transmitted over a cable telegraph facilit.: \ TF). Some early
trunk circuits used positive and negative 130 volt telegraph battery as a
source of signal current, but modern trunk and signal circuits use negat:i.ve
48 volts.

6. Present Day Long Distance Signalling:

.1
Present practice utilizes a dial or ringdown trunk circuit \Hth
E and H leads. The � and H leads are the signal leads that connect the
trunk circuit to a signal circuit. The H lead transmits and the � lead
receives. The M lead usually transmits battery (-48V) and grolli�d toward
tl1e signal circuit. The E lead usually receives ground and open from the
signal circuito

M Lead

"' I
I ·l•I·I·H .,

'::'

Loo

Loop Signals 0____!

E Lead

Figure XVIII - 15 E-H Lead

Part of a trunk circuit is shown in Figure lS. The upper relay is

called a pole changer and converts the loop signal current in its winding
to ground-battery signals toward the signal circuit. The lower relay takes
open-ground signals from the signal circuit and changes them to loop

j
XVIII - 10
 signals. No trunk circuit is quite this simple, and thus the schematic
drawing in l�igure 15 is very elementary. E and H lead signals can be any
( of our three basic types:

a. Ringing (attention getting )

b. Dialing

c. Supervision

Trunk circuit E-M leads are wired to signal circuit E-N leads. The signal
circuit can be one of several types:

a. Composite
, �

b. Single frequency

c. E-H lead extension

d. Hulti - frequency

Let's discuss each of these in detail:

(1) Composite signal circuit: Basically this circuit is a full

Tip
L------ Si de 1
( (Sl)

Ring

Dial Dial
Leg Leg
S2 Sl

�
:__3 E To Three

I
ex
Signal Ci rcui
� M Dial Trunks

I I
M
Dial
EPC Leg
Ph Tip
Side 2

J
(S2)

��=----Ring

( Figure XVIII - 16 Composite Signal Circuit

XVIII - 11
duplex tele graph circuit. The usual arrangement consists of CX signal cir­
cuits in groups of thre e - side 1, side 2, and phantom to work on a quadded
cable group, two pair, thre e circuits, side 1, side 2, phantom. The four "'l
wires of the cable group provide 3 signal legs and an EIJC, earth potential
coropensation leg. This type of signalling is now used to serve towns so
small that carri er facilit ies are not econorr�cally feasible in view of
existing cable plant capabilities.

(2) Single frequency signal1ing: �fost American cities of an;.y

_size have cable carrier or microwave facilities serving them. The single
frequency signal system was designed to operate on a carrier channel. The
$i.e:nal set is wired into the circuit like this - onE:: on each enri of the
circuit (IWCS confieuration is shown ) :

.�
- 16

MUX
SF
FCC
SET
17

... 7
I
I
--------- - _J
E-M Lead
)
F igure XVIII - 17 Single-Frequency Signalling

'I't.e SF set chang es the DC signal on the M lead to tone signals on the
carrier line. The tone received by an SF set is chang�d to a DC signal on
the E lead. Some 1600 Hz SF sets are still in use, but 2600 Hz is much
more common. You will frequently hear the expressions ON HOOK, OFF HOOK,
TONE ON, TONE OFF, etco, used in co nnection with SF signals. The table
below g i ves conditions of equality for ON and OFF HOOK:

CONDITION M TONE E

ON HOOK ON OPEN
:
G:r10UND

Qi'F HOOK BA'IT OFF GROUND

F igure XVIII - 18 Standard Conditions

)
..•.

XVIII - 12
 These conditions are not always the case in t he l CS system. In I CS the
following is true for ring down circuits only:
(

CONDITION H TONE E

ON HOOK GlWUND ON GROUND

OF!<' HOOK OPEN OFF OPJ<:Ji

,. Figure XVIII - 19 I CS Conditions

ICS ring down converter and SF set options were selected to pe�t this
E lead condition, which in turn permits wiring SF sets back to back with­
out pulse link repeaters (refer to Paragraph 4, Section D, Chapter VI).
Back to back wiring is shown below:

+ 7 - 16
. F ------- - F
1600 2600
c c
Hz Hz
c c
SF SF
Set Set
17
17
(
-------
E + 7
----------

Figure XVIII - 20 SF Units Back-to-Back

3. E-H extension (also called DX signalling ) : E and M leads

cannot normally be extended from the signal circuit to the trunk circuit
for any appreciable distance. DCA and the Bell System require that �
resistance of E or M lead be 25 ohms. Sometimes the signal circuit is located
a long distance from the trunk circuit. To extend signalling in such a case
requires an EMX (Bell terminology ) or DX circuit to extend the E-M leadso
The extended signal leads are connected to the cable pair, which also carries
the voice energy, through A-B leads on a repeat coil (Figure 21).

(
XVIII - 13
 'l
Repeat
Coil ��-----
A --------------A �
�

J
M...---

L9
€ 1 B I I
B

E
l
I
To Trunk Ckt. DX Circuit' DX Circuit To Trunk Ckt.

M M

.,
Figure XVIII � 21 E-N Extension Using Repeat Coil

or through A-B leads on a hybrid (4 wire term set) as shown below.

)
To Cable

� o(fO '---f I 0 o 0'01 0 f'

E
DX C ircuit To Trunk Circuit
M

Figure XVIII - 22 E-M Extension Using Hybrid

c ;)
XVIII • 14
 (4) Multi-frequency signalling: A multi-frequency (MF)
trunk circuit changes DC dial signals to tone signals. Two tones are
( transmitted for each digit and the trunk circuit at the other end changes
the tone combinations to DC signals which can be used by the dial switching
system.

- 16

MF 2600 M

TRK HZ u
,.
CKT S.F' X

SET

I I + 7
I 1
E-M
"-�-----..J

Figure 23: Hulti-l''requency Signaling

(
Note that MF trunk requires a SF signal set, but only to transmit and
receive ringing and supervisory signals.

(
XVIII - 15

B. SIGNALLING OVER TELEPHONE
""\.""X Ttthout signaling, a tele­
\' \' phone system c a n n o t
operate. Even the simplest system, such
as two local battery telephones con­
nected by field wire, requires some
means for the users to attract one an­
other's attention when they want to talk.
In early telephone systems, users simply
cranked a hand magneto which caused a
bell to ring at the subscriber station or
a flag to drop at a switchboard. Over the
years, signaling systems have had to
keep pace with the advances made in
telephone switching and transmission
systems. The increasing complexity of
the worldwide telephone plant has had
a tremendous influence on the evolution
of signaling techniques, from the simple
hand cranked magneto to the many
techniques employed today.
TRUNKS.
Many different signaling methods
have evolved during the transition from
one type of switching office or transmis­
sion system to another. Today's tele­
phone plant includes various types of
local exchange and toll switching of­
fices, such as manual, step-by-step,
panel, crossbar, and the modem elec­
tronic switching offices. In addition,
there are many types of open-wire, cable
and microwave radio transmission sys­
tems interconnecting the various switch­
ing offices.
Signaling Functions
There are a multitude of signaling
functions that must be transmitted be­
tween the various manual and dial
switching offices. These include func­
tions whereby people must communi-
ca1e with machines, machines must com­
municate with other machines, and
machines must communicate with
people.
The major functions can be some­
what arbitrarily classified as ringing,
supervisory, and address (or dialing).
Ringing signals are used to operate a
visible or audible alarm to alert some­
one of an incoming call. Supervisory
signals are used to convey information
regarding switchhook conditions (on­
hook or off-hook) at either end of a
telephone circuit. Address signals con­
vey dialing or digital information which
is necessary to establish the desired con­
nection.
In subscriber loops, supervisory and
address signals are accomplished by
means of direct current, while alter­
nating current is used for ringing. Di­
rect current signaling is also used on
short-haul trunks between switching of­
fices. However, such methods are not
adequate for signaling on longer trunks,
such as inter-toll, or on trunks derived
from carrier or multiplex systems. As a
result, various alternating current sig­
naling systems have been developed for
use over long-haul v-f and carrier-de­
rived trunks.
Ringdown Trunks
In certain trunks, especially those in­
terconnecting manual offices, it is neces­
sary to transmit a ringing current to
signal the switchboard operators. This
type of signaling is known as ringdown.
The ringing alternating current used in
subscriber loops is at a frequency of 20
Hz. This same frequency is also used in
certain short-haul trunks. On trunks
equipped with composite telegraph, 20-
Hz ringing cannot be used because of
interference. In these circuits, a signal­
ing frequency of 135 Hz is used.
Neither of these frequencies, however,
-
is suitable for long trunks because voice­
£requency repeaters cannot pass them.
Consequently, a 1000-Hz signaling
tone, well within the v-f amplifier
passband, has been adopted for use on
longer circuits. To prevent voice signals
from falsely operating the signaling
equipment, the 1000-Hz tone is inter­
rupted (modulated) at a 20-Hz rate.
Address Signals
Probably the most important and the
most complicated signaling function is
address or dialing. This function directs
the operation of the switching equip­
ment in the automatic offices. Conse­
quently, the evolution of the various
switching systems has brought about
changes in address signaling techniques.
Address signals originate at the tele­
phone dial and consist of a train of de
pulses corresponding to the number
dialed. Modern "touch calling" systems,
which use keys or pushbuttons instead
of a dial, employ tones at different fre­
quencies rather than de pulses.
In the step-by-step systems, the
switching equipment responds directly
to the de pulses. However, in panel and
crossbar systems, the switches cannot be
controlled directly by the dial pulses.
Consequently, these systems require a
device known as a sender which stores
the dial pulses and then controls the
movement of the switches.
There are four basic methods com­
monly used to transmit address or dial­
ing signals for use by the various switch­
ing offices. These are known as dial
pulsing, revertive pulsing, panel call in­
dicator (PC!) pulsing, and multifre­
quency (MF) pulsing.
Dial pulsing is the earliest and most
commonly used method of transmitting
address information - the numerical
value of each digit is represented by the
number of pulses in a train (ten pulses
 -

,... -�· ·""""

represents 0). Dial pulsing is used in dress information have evolved from

CALLING OFFICE all types of switching offices. simple de systems operating over 2-wire
TRUNK CALLED OFFICE
Revertive pulsing was originally de­ short-haul interoffice trunks, to compli­
FROM
veloped for use in panel switching of­ cated ac systems operating over multi­
S ELECT OR J,
BANKS
�} fices. In this type of pulsing, the address channel carrier and microwave trans­
�t= . . T I
pulses are not transmitted by the origi­ mission systems. Today, there are es­
R
o--- -:-! __!!_-t-: __;l;�tt � nating office. When a call is made, a sentially two fundamental techniques
loop to the distant office is closed. This used to derive signaling paths on trunk
fi:\
V I � ; cAI�ED starts the movement of a panel selector circuits. The first of these is known as
LINE
switch at the distant office. As the select­ loop signaling. This technique requires
ing wipers pass each terminal, a com­ a de loop, and is the method used in all
CALLING OFFICE T RUNK CALLED OFFICE mutator transmits pulses back to the subscriber loops and in most short-haul
sender at the originating office. When 2-wire trunks. The second signaling
--o-- PULSING
the proper number of these rez,ertit'e technique, known as E & M. is used with
&-.---CONTACTS
pulses, corresponding to the called num­ both ac and de signaling systems on 2-
ber, are received by the sender, a signal wire or 4-wire physical trunk circuits,
�
is sent back to the distant end to stop and on carrier-derived trunk circuits.
the mo,·ement of the selector. Revertive This type of signaling is standard for
pulsing is used in certain crossbar offices use in all intertoll trunks.
r-aq
as well as panel offices.
CA ED Panel call indicator (PCI) pulsing is Loop Signaling
. LINE
: t� a method of transmitting address signals Loop signaling is the simplest of the
� TO -----.
F1 between a dial office and a manual office. two, and is used in certain exchange
H BATTERY ----..
H REVERSING • .- This technique converts pulses received trunks, short-haul toll-connecting
H
RELAY from a dial office to lamp indications trunks, and one-way dialing toll trunks,
which appear on a switchboard. The where 2-wire voice-frequency circuits
0
.... ;witchboard operator then connects the are employed. The de signaling current
"
CALLING OFFICE TRUNK CALLED OFFICE incoming call to the called number and flows O\·er the same conductors used for
rings the subscriber. voice transmission.
Multifrequency (MF) pulsing is the This type of signaling is accom­
newest method of transmitting address plished by simply interrupting the con­
pulses between switching offices. Digital dition of a de voltage applied to the
FROM
information is transmitted in the form line to transmit both supervisory signal'
CALLING -
h: CALLED
LINE E
of short tone bursts. Six signaling fre­ and dialing information. The range of
quencies are used, each digit being rep· loop signaling is usually limited to
� resented by a combination of two of the about 25 miles because of the de resis­
six frequencies. The signaling frequen­ tance of the conductors.
cies fall within the speech band and are There are three methods currently
i1 simply processed through the trunk in used to apply loop signaling to a 2-wire
the same manner as speech signals. (A voice-frequency trunk: wet-dry, revene
different form of multifrequency puls­ battery, and high-tow. (See Figure 1.)
A
ing has recently been introduced to In the wet-dry method, signaling in­
subscriber loop circuits through the use formation is indicated by the presence
0
of telephones with pushbuttons instead (wet) or absence (dry) of a battery and
Figure 1. Loop signaling is accomplished by altering the flow of current in the of the conventional dial.) ground condition on the line at the
trunk conductors. Three methods used to accomplish loop signaling are: (A) Historically, signaling systems de­ called end of the tmnk Normally in the
wet-dry, (B) reverse battery, and (C) high-low. signed to transmit supervisory and ad- wet condition, the battery is placed on
 the ring conductor and ground on the
tip conductor.
As its name implies, reverse-battery
loop signaling is accomplished by re­
versing the polarity of the battery on the
line to indicate supervisory conditions.
For one condition, battery is on the
ring conductor and ground on the tip
conductor.The opposite supervisory con­
dition is indicated by reversing the
polarity of the battery, thus causing a
polar relay to operate or release at the
distant end of the trunk. This is the
most prominent type of loop signaling
used between exchange offices. To in­
crease the operating range of reverse­
battery loop signaling, batteries are
sometimes placed at both ends of the
circuit, in series. This variation of re­
verse-battery operation is called battery
and ground signaling.
The third method, high-low, is used
� principally for supervisory signaling
H
H within a central office or from an auto­
H E
matic to a manual office. This type of
signaling employs a marginal relay.
.....
00
During on-hook condition, a high re­
sistance is placed in the loop. For off­
hook, the resistance in the loop is re­
duced to a low value allowing more
current to flow, and thereby causing the
marginal relay to operate.
E & M Signaling
As mentioned previously, loop sig­
naling is limited to trunks of about 25
miles in length. Also, such systems do
not provide simultaneous signaling in
both directions. In order to overcome
these limitations, and especially to ex­
tend the dialing range of telephones, an­
other type of signaling was developed.
This method of signaling employs
two leads to connect the signaling
equipment to the trunk circuit. These
two leads are designated E and M, re­
spectively. The name for the two leads
was probably acquired from designa­
tions appearing in early drawmgs for
OFFICE A OFFICE 8
this type of signaling circuit. The M
lead transmits battery or ground signals
to the distant end of the circuits, while
incoming signals are received on the E
lead as either a ground or open condi­
tion. Thus, the M lead reflects condi­
tions at the near end of the circuit E
c:
I
while the E lead reflects conditions at M I
the far end. I
There are several methods of deriv­
T0 ANOTHER
101
ing an E and M circuit to permit sig­ 5 X LEG
naling between offices on a de basis.
These arrangements are known as sim­
plex (SX), composite (CX), and du­ OFFICE A
plex (DX). A simplex signaling cir­
cuit is obtained by means of a center-tap
coil placed at both ends of the voice­
frequency trunk circuit, as shown in
Figure 2A. Signaling currents flow in
both directions through the coils and,
therefore, do not induce any interfering
voltages into the voice channel. Con­
---..J�'t-1
versely, voice currents do not flow
through the simplex conductors (or M-----1
legs) extending from the center tap of
the coils. Since the two trunk conductors
provide a parallel path for the signaling
current, the de resistance is approxi­
mately one-fourth of that presented to
a loop-signaling arrangement over the OFFICE A OFFICE 8
same trunk. Thus, the de signaling
range is extended considerably. How­
I
ever, simplexing has certain disadvan­ I TRUNK I
tages and has been largely superseded I I
by the duplex arrangement.
In the composite method, a filter is
used at each end of the trunk to sepa­
E r-""ni-;*-1--- E
rate the signaling current from the
speech signals. The filter is called a M ..----M
composite set. Two composite signaling
paths can be obtained from the two con­
ductors of a v-f trunk and four can be
obtained from a phantom circuit ar­ Figure 2. There are a number of different circuit arrangements designed for
rangement. This type of signaling, E & M signaling over telephone trunks. The three most prominent d-e arrange­
shown in Figure 2B, is used typically ments are: (A) simplex, (B) composite, and (C) duplex.
-

��
on trunks derived from quadded cable
where the conductors are arranged in
phantom groups.
The 'duplex signaling arrangement,
like the composite method, uses one
conductor of the v-f circuit for signal­
ing on a ground return basis, and the
other conductor for ground potential
compensation. Ground potential com­
pensation is required because of the in­
herent instability of ground-return cir­
cuits. The composite set or filter, how­
ever, is not used with the duplex circuit.
Instead, the signaling circuit is con­
nected to the trunk pairs by means of a
center-tap transformer and a capacitor,
as shown in Figure 2C. This signaling
arrangement is used primarily in paired
cable trunks.
AC Signaling
The de signaling systems described
� thus far are limited to relatively short
H
H v-f trunks containing a de path. These
H
systems are not suitable for use on long
t called single-frequency (SF) signaling
v-f trunks employing repeaters, or for
.... carrier or multiplex trunk circuits be­
_\Q
cause a de path is not available. As a re­
sult, ae signaling systems had to be
developed for use over the more mod­
ern exchange trunks and on the longer
toll-conne�ing and intertoll trunks, es­
pecially where carrie;- is used.
The ac signaling systems use fre­
quencies within the voice-frequency
range so that the signals can be trans­
mitted directly over the same path used
for voice transmission. These ac systems
usually employ E and M leads to connect
the signaling circuit to the trunk. If the
signaling frequency falls within the
band used for speech transmission
(typically 300 to 3400 Hz) the system
is referred to as an in-band system. If
the signaling frequency falls outside the
speech band, the system is called an
out-of-band system.
-
�- """""
The ac systems must process the de
"Wr
supervisory and address signals received � I
from the switching office and convert 2600 osc
them into ac signals for transmission
over the trunk circuit. At the other end
of the trunk, the ac signals must be con­
verted back to de signals before being
applied to the switching equipment. M -------l
Only one signaling frequency is re­
quired on 4-wire trunks. However, on
2-wire trunks two frequencies are re­
quired, one for each direction of trans­
mission.
Early ac signaling systems used a TO
frequency of 1600 hertz. On 2-wire TRANSMIT CARRIER
....
trunks, 1600 hertz was used for one CHANNEL
TRANSMIT
direction and 2000 hertz for the oppo­ LINE U N IT
site direction. Later in-band systems CUTOFF
used a frequency of 2600 hertz, with a RELAY
second frequency of 2400 hertz for use
V-F
with 2-wire trunks. The ac signaling
RECEIVE
frequencies easily pass through the same
path used for voice transmission, and
are amplified in repeaters in the same
manner as speech signals. These so­
systems are used to transmit both super­
visory signals and address or dial pulses.
FROM CARRIER
Multifrequency (MF) address pulsing, CHANNE L RECEIVE
described previously, uses tones that are UNIT
already in the voice band, so they do not
require additional processing before be­ Figure 3. Simplified block diagram of a 2600-hz in-band signaling circuit applied
ing transmitted over a long-haul or to transmit channel and receive channel of a carrier system.
carrier-derived trunk.
Signaling Over Carrier
Channels
All trunk circuits equipped with car­ have an advantage over out-of-band sys­ the particular carrier system, thus mak­
rier or multiplex equipment require tems in that they do not require extra ing it easier to patch trunk circuits to
some type of ac system for signaling. bandwidth - the signals are passed di­ different carrier transmission systems.
There are many different carrier signal­ rectly through the voice channel. An­ The main disadvantage to in-band
ing systems in use today employing other advantage is that signaling equip­ systems is that the signaling tones lie
either an in-band or out-of-band signal­ ment is required only at the terminal within the speech band. This leads to
ing frequency. stations of a trunk made up of several the possibility of speech energy at the
The most prevalent type of carrier tandem links. Also, the in-band signal­ signaling frequency "talking down" the
signaling is accomplished with in-band ing system can be made a part of the signaling; that is, falsely operating the
frequencies. In-band signaling systems office switching equipment rather than signaling equipment with speech en-
 ergy. Protection against "talkdown" can
be accomplished by using a time delay
or guard circuit in the signaling system.
By introducing a delay, the signaling
circuit can be made insensitive to most
voice energy or transient noise at the
signaling frequency.
Additional protection is obtained by
properly selecting the in-band signaling
frequencies. Generally, it is desirable to
use the highest possible frequency that
will -pass through the voice channel.
Speech energy declines rapidly at the
higher frequencies, thereby reducing the
chances of "talkdown".
Most of the older voice-frequency
telephone circuits use filters with an
upper frequency cutoff of about 2800
hertz. For this reason, the most com­
monly used frequency for SF in-band
supervisory and address signaling is
2600 hertz. In-band carrier signaling
�
H
systems can be adapted for use with
H either loop signaling orE & M signaling
H
arrangements.
Following the development of eco­
IV
0 nomical short-haul carrier systems, the
need arose for inexpensive methods of
signaling. This need resulted in the
development of various out-of-band
signaling systems. Out-of-band signal­
ing equipment is generally less expen­
sive than in-band equipment and also
permits signaling during speech trans­
mission, thus permitting extra functions
such as regulation to be performed.
Since the signaling frequency is outside
of the speech band, there is no need for
Figure 4. Photograph of typical in­
band signaling units used with carrier
systems. One signaling unit is required
for each carrier channel. Many types
of signaling units are required to ac­
commodate the many different methods
of signaling.
complicated guard circuits to prevent
talkdown.
With out-of-band signaling, voice
channel filters are designed with an up­
per cutoff frequency well below the top
edge of the channel. This leaves the top
portion of the channel passband avail­
able for transmitting out-of-band sig­
naling tones. The most prevalent fre­
quencies used for out-of-band signaling
are 3 700 hertz, which is standard
throughout the Bell System, and 3825
hertz, which is recommended by the
International Telegraph and Telephone
Consultative Committee (CCITT) for
use in international circuits.
Unfortunately, out-of-band signaling
has certain disadvantages which tend to
limit its use. Out-of-band signaling
equipment has to be built-in to the car­
rier channel equipment and cannot be
separated as in the case of in-band sig­
naling equipment. This condition pre­
vents randomly patching the circuit to
other trunks.
Also, out-of-band signaling requires
some sort of de repeater at the end of
each link of a multi-link trunk. As the
signal passes from one link to another,
the signal pulses must be detected and
then made to operate a relay. The relay,
Reprinted with permission of Lenkurt Electric
Co.1 Inc, San Carlo; California.
-
in turn, keys the signaling equipment
in the succeeding link. Thus, signaling
equipment is required at both ends of
each link in the trunk.
Another economical type of signal­
ing, using time division multiplexing
techniques, is used in Lenkurt's 81A
exchange trunk carrier system. This
unique method provides signaling for
all 24 voice channels of the system using
one common signaling channel. Each
voice channel is assigned a specific time
slot for signaling, and all 24 slots are
scanned 500 times per second. The re­
sulting signaling frequency modulates
a pilot in the carrier system that is also
used for slope regulation.
Although out-of-band and time di­
vision multiplex signaling techniques
may be more economical for certain
short-haul trunks, they lack the flexi­
bility and other advantages offered by
in-band signaling systems, especially
when applied to long-haul trunks. As a
result, single-frequency (SF) in-band
signaling for supervisory functions and
multifrequency (MF) pulsing for ad­
dress functions have become the stand­
ard methods of signaling in modern
interoffice, toll-connecting, and intertoll
trunks.

� ,-,
C. DB AND OTHmc LOGATUTm1JC UNITS.
ealing with very large
D and very small numbers
is often necessary in the telecommuni­
cations industry. For example, the fre­
quency of a typical microwave radio is
12,000,000,000 cycles per second. Or,
the power represented in conversational
speech is measured at about 1/100,-
000,000,000 watts/cm2• These are ob­
viously unwieldy terms.
Powers of Ten
However, there are various methods
of handling them conveniently. Ex­
pressing numbers as· powers of ten is a
first step to simplicity. We know that
10 X 10 = 100, and can be written
�
H 102• Likewise, 10 X 10 X 10 = 1000,
H or 103• By definition, the exponent
H
3 7
means that the number 10 is used as a
multiplier
3 times. 12,000,000,000 cy­
N 1
..... cles per second then becomes 12 X 10 9
cycles per second (or 12 GHz).
Note that 10' = 10; 10° = 1. Num­
bers smaller than 1 also can be treated
using powers of ten. By definition, 10·1
is the same as 1/10', or simply 1/10.
In this way, the power rating for con­
versational speech mentioned previously
can be written 10·11 watts/cm2•
When discussing two relative values,
it is sometimes convenient to use the
term orders of magnitude. This is only
another way of expressing powers of
ten. That is, one order of magnitude
(101) is 10 times as much; two orders
of magnitude (102) is 100 times as
much. Simple division indicates that a
plane flying 1000 miles per hour is 100
times faster than a horse traveling at 10
miles per hour. It could be said that the
* Reproduced from 11The Lenkurt Demodulator" April 1966, Vol. 15, No. 4,
the permission of Tenlrurt � ect...-4 e !"!o, Tne. �an Car1 os, Califorrrla.
*
plane is two orders of magnitude faster
than the horse. Notice that orders of
magnitude are really concerned with the
exponent of the number. If a number
is 1000 times greater than another,
1000 = 103, or three orders of magni­
tude greater.
Logarithms
All of the figures in these examples
have had the same "base" number of 10.
If we treat the exponent of the base
number separately, another useful short­
hand is achieved, called logarithms. In
100 = 102, the logarithm of 100 is 2.
That is, the common logarithm (abbre­
viated Log 0) of a number is the power
1 5
to which the base 10 must be raised to
produce the number. The written form
is log,0 100 = 2. In practice the sub­
script 0 is usually eliminated when re­
ferring to common logs. Another log
system used in mathematics has a base
number of 2.718, and is written log.
or ln.
The use of logarithms is advanta­
geous in many forms of complicated
calculations. Remember that to multiply
like numbers, it is only necessary to add
their exponents (102 .X 103 = 105);
to divide, subtract exponents (105 -o-
103 = 102). Logarithms are used in the
same way. MultipliFations and divisions
involving large numbers may be carried
out by adding or subtracting the corres­
ponding logs and then converting back.
In fact, any series of events involving
multiplication or division, if expressed
logarithmically, may be handled by
simple addition and subtraction. This is
particularly valuable in the telecommu-
nications industry, where a variety of
measurements are necessary to describe
the properties of a signal as it passes
through the system. Voltages, currents,
and powers are measured, noise identi­
fied, and losses assessed. These are all
made much easier by the use of the
logarithmic system.
Decibels
The basic unit of measure in com­
munications is the decibel, derived from
the Jess practical unit, the bel, named in
honor of Alexander Graham Bell. A
decibel is a tenth of a bel.
DECIBELS POWER RATIO
I 1.259
2 1.585
3 1.995
4 2-512
3.162
6 3.981
5.012
8 6.310
9 7.943
10 10.0
20 roo.o
30 1000.0
40 10,000.0
Figure 1. The Relationship Between
Decibels and Power Ratios.
Early experimentation proved that a
listener cannot give a reliable estimate
of the absolute loudness of a sound.
But he can distinguish between the
loudness of two different sounds. How­
ever, the ear's sensitivity to a change in
sound power follows a logarithmic
rather than a linear scale, and the deci­
bel has become the unit of measure of
this change. A difference of 1 decibel,
-
�-
abbreviated dB, in the power supplied
to a listening device produces approxi­
mately the smallest change in volume of
sound which the normal ear can detect.
The relationship between any two pow­
er values can be calculated in decibels
as:
p
,
dB= 10/og
p,
where
P, is the larger power
It should be emphasized that a given
number of decibels is always the rela·
tionship between two powers, and not
an absolute power value by itself (Fig­
ure 1). For example, the gain in an
amplifier, or the attenuation of a pad,
can be expressed in decibels without
knowledge of the input or output pow­
er of the device.
dBm
Frequently, it is convenient to rep­
resent absolute power with a logarithmic
unit. One milliwatt is generally ac­
cepted as the standard reference for
such purposes in the telephone indus·
try, and signal powers can be written
as being so many dB above or below
this reference power. When this is done,
the unit becomes dBm, in the expres­
sion:
P,
dBm= 10 log p,
where
P,= 1 milliwatt
By adding a definite reference point,
dBm becomes a measurement of abso­
lute power, rather than just a ratio, and
can readily be converted to watts. 10
dBm indicates a signal 10 times greater
than 1 milliwatt, or 10 milliwatts; 20
dBm is 100 times greater than 1 milli·
watt, or 100 milliwatts. A 30 dBm sig·
with
nal applied to an amplifier with 10 dB For example, a + 6 dB reading across
gain will result in a 40 dBm output. Or, a 500-ohm line is calculated:
a standard test tone (0 dBm) will be
measured as - 15 dBm after passing dB = 6 + 10 log
600 l
500
through an attenuator of 15 dB.
6 + 10 log 1.2
It is important to note at this point
=

= 6 + 0.792
that most meters used in the telephone
= 6.792dB
industry are calibrated for measurements
of voltage appearing across a 600-ohm
Level Point
termination (standard transmission line
In most telephone systems the toll
impedance). If the circuit to be meas­
switchboard is defined as the zero trans­
ured is of a different impedance than
mission level point (0 TIP), and the
that for which the meter is calibrated,
levels of both signal and noise at other
the indicated power level will be
parts of the system are usually referred
wrong, and a correction factor must be
taken into account. The relationship is:
to that point. A point in the transmis­
sion system where a signal has experi­ .'
enced 16 dB attenuation relative to the
dB (corrected) = dB (indicated) toll switchboard is known as the -16
600 ohms dB level point. Note that level used this
+ 10 log . . .
czrcuzt zmpedance way is purely relative and has nothing to

do with actual power - a signal of any

power will be down 16 dB at the -16
dB level point. When a standard test
tone is transmitted over the circuit, its
power in dBm at any point is numeric­
ally equal to the level in dB at that
point.

dBmO
Another term, dBmO, is used to refer )
measured power back to the zero trans­
mission level point, and has useful sig­
nificance in system planning. Measure­
ments adjusted to dBmO indicate what
the power would have been had it been
measured at the zero transmission level
point. For example, a tone measured at
the -16 dB level point with a meter
reading of + 8 dBm, is equal to + 24
dBmO.

.J)
XVIII - 22

� ..,.,..,.
D. TElEGRAPH TRANSMISSION OVER VF MULTIPlEX SY:3TENS:
elegraph systems provide a means
T of transmitting information using
electrical pulses which conform to a and frequency modulation.
preestablished code. In earlier days, tel-
egraph messages were transmitted by
hand-operated keys using the familiar
Morse code. Modern telegraph systems,
however, use electromechanical rna-
chines, called teleprinters, page print-
ers, or tape printers, that employ some
type of machine code.
Conventional telegraph machines use
the standard S-Ieve! Baudot code and
normally operate at transmission speeds
of 60, 75, and 100 words per minute,
at pulse rates of 45, 57, and 75 bits per
second, respectively. A new 7-bit code
called ASCII (American Standard Code
for Information Interchange) was re­
cently developed and is expected to find
wide application in data processing sys­
8
H tems as well as for message processing.
H
Telegraph systems currently using the
H space conditions and, for this reason, is
new ASCII code have added an eighth
bit to provide a parity check, thus mak­
IN
w ing it an 8-level code. The new 4-row
keyboard teleprinters designed to han­
dle the new code operate at a transmis­
sion speed of 100 words per minute
with a pulse rate of 110 bits per second.
These various telegraph machines pro­
vide a printed copy of the message or
a punched tape which is then used to
operate a printer.
Telegraph machine signals consist of
a sequence of current and no-current
pul-ses of equal length, known as mark
and space, respectively. Using the 5-
level Baudot code, for example, the
letter A is indicated by a signal of mark­
mark-space-space-space. Before these de
telegraph signals can be transmitted
over standard voice frequency commu­
nication channels, they must be con­
verted to ac tones. There are two basic
methods used to convert the de loop
pulses to tones suitable for transmission
-
·""""
over a voice-frequency multiplex chan-
nel. These are amplitude modulation,
In both AM and FM telegraph multi- LETTER
plex systems, a tone oscillator, in each
transmitting channel, is used to provide A
the necessary voice-frequency carrier.
Frequency division is the type of multi-
plexing ordinarily used and so the car- H
rier frequency in each channel is differ-
ent. R
Amplitude Modulation
Amplitude modulation methods are y
historically related to direct-current POSITION OF CODE PUl.S£S
telegraphy. In de telegraph, a battery
or other source of direct current is keyed
on and off. At the receiving end, the ao·s��=:o 22 22 22 22 22 22 31
signals are detected by some sort of
'!II SPEEr! IR 18 18 18 18 18 25
magnetic device. In AM, the process is
similar except that a tone oscillator is 104> SPEED 13.S 13.5 13.S 13·5 13.5 13.5 19
keyed on or off to indicate mark and
PULSE DURATION IN MILLISECONDS
sometimes referred to as on-off modula-
tion.
This method has several disadvan­ Figure 1. Examples of the 5-level Baudot code for the letters A, H. R, andY,
tages. It does not use bandwidth effi­ including pulse lengths for the three standard telegraph speeds. Mark pulses are
ciently, since two sidebands of the shown in color while space pulses are shown in white.
carrier are produced and, unlike single­
sideband voice communications meth­
ods, the carrier and one sideband cannot
be completely eliminated and still do a
"off" to "on." These modulation prod­ transients, and similar disturbances, may
satisfactory job.
ucts are transients whose bandwidth is equal or exceed the information pulses
Sidebands are produced when the
a function of the keying or switching in amplitude and duration. Under se­
modulating wave causes the carrier to
rate. Except when a pulse is started vere conditions, impulse noise may
change from one value or state to an­
or ended, no modulation products can completely obliterate an AM informa­
other. In voice communications, the
appear in the transmission path. Thus, tion pulse.
modulating waveform is continuous,
it would be impossible to continuously
thus causing modulation products (side­
transmit a steady mark or space. Frequency Modulation
bands) to be formed continuously. If
The information-carrying character­ In FM systems, the carrier frequency
the carrier and one sideband are elim­
istic of an AM signal is its amplitude. is shifted in one direction for a mark
inated, the other sideband remains to
For this reason, AM is particularly vul­ condition and the opposite direction for
convey the modulating intelligence.
nerable to impulse noise and changes a space condition. A diode keyer in the
In telegraphy, where on-off pulses
in transmission level. Impulse noise is tuned circuit of the tone oscillator
are the modulating signal, modulation
particularly disturbing. Noise pulses changes the circuit resonance so as to
products are formed only during the
caused by electrical storms, switching shift the tone back and forth between
transition from "on" to "off," and from
the two frequencies. Such frequency
shifting does not occur instantaneously,
however. The inherent resonance of the
tuned circuit causes the resulting wave­
form to change smoothly from one fre­
quency to the other. The amount of
shift is the same for both directions and
varies from about ±30 to 42.5 Hz de­
pending upon the operating speed of
the telegraph equipment. This type of
modulation is also referred to as fre­
quency-shift keying (FSK).
Since the mark and space signals are
represented by different frequencies of
equal strength, amplitude variations
have no effect on the signal unless the
signal has the same or less amplitude
than the noise. This contrasts strongly
with amplitude modulation where a
mark is represented by the presence of
the carrier and a space is represented by
the absence of the carrier. Level changes
due to fading, noise, and other interfer­
ence have a strong effect on AM signals.
FM systems can tolerate level changes
of about 40 to 50 dB, and are about 12
dB less sensitive to impulse noise than
AM systems.
Bandwidth
The bandwidth required for a voice
frequency multiplex telegraph channel
depends on such things as the code
pulse rate, noise, filter attenuation to
adjacent channels, and whether or not
both sidebands are transmitted (AM
systems). A bandwidth of 120 Hz is
usually satisfactory for 5-level code tele­
graph signals at speeds up to 100 words
per minute for both FM and double­
sideband AM systems. The usual band­
width for 8-level coded telegraph sig­
nals is 170 Hz.
Since the required bandwidth is
much smaller than that required for
speech signals, a normal 3-kHz voice
band can be divided by frequency clivi-
sion multiplexing into sub-bands or
channels each capable of transmitting
a telegraph signal. Approximately 18
channels can be obtaintd with 170 Hz
spacing, while up to 26 channels can
be obtained with 120 Hz spacing. This VF
means that up to 18 or 26 voice-fre­ TELEPHONE
CIRCUITS
quency multiplexed telegraph signals
can be transmitted simultaneously over
a single voice channel. ----T -� ELEPHONE 1-· ---1 MICROWAVE
MJLTIPLEX RADIO
------1
Telegraph Loops
The circuit between the telegraph
machine and the multiplex terminal is
called a loop circuit. Each telegraph
loop is made up of two legs which are
the conductors (full metallic or ground
return) between the terminal points of
the loop. In half-duplex operation, the
same loop is used for sending and re­
ceiving. However, full-duplex opera­ DC
tion, which permits simultaneous trans­ TELE GRAPH
LOOPS
mission in both directions, requires
both a sending and a receiving loop. Figure 2. As many
Because of differences in applications as 26 telegraph chan­
nels can be applied
and because of the variations in lengths, TELEGRAPH
to a single telephone
any one of a number of circuit arrange­ MULTIPLEX channel in a typical
ments may be employed in telegraph
v-f multiplex system.
loops.
Neutral Loops
One of the simplest and most direct
circuit arrangements is the neutral or
open-and-close loop, illustrated in Fig­
ure 4(A). The neutral loop requires a
are used to transmit the marking and to the shorter loops in which either
battery only at the central office, and the
spacing conditions are separated and leakage or the distributed capacity of
difference between mark and space is
are rectified to obtain de for operation the path does not severe! y affect the
determined by whether or not current
of the polar receiving relay. The con­ signal. To reduce these problems a bal­
is flowing in the loop.
tacts of this relay open or close the re­ anced loop (also called effective polar
When the printer is sending, closing
ceiving neutral loop to reproduce the loop) may be used. An example is
of the printer contacts closes the loop
transmitted character at the receiving shown in Figure 4(B).
circuit and the current flowing in the
printer. A balanced loop is similar to a neu­
loop applies a potential to the multi­
tral loop in that the difference between
plex-channel keying circuit. In the re­
Balanced Loop mark and space is determined by wheth­
ceiving direction, the carrier frequencies
While neutral loops offer the advan­ er or not current flows in the loop.
are applied to a discriminator. In the
tage of simplicity, they are restricted However, the balanced loop differs
discriminator, the two frequencies that
-
 -

,..., ,-,, �

FROM OTH ER
TRANSMIT
T RANSNIT CHANEL CHANNELS

TO TO
TELE­ MULTIPLEX
GRAPH SENDING
LOOP CIRCUIT
z
2
1-
0 ':'
Ill
z
z RELAV FROM
0 POLAR 1- MULTIPLEX
0 DRIVE RECEIVING
RELAY
f
w I CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
z
.J
(A) NEUT RAL LOOP
REC
AMP FL T g
TO
M ULTIPLEX
:X: SENDING
<: CIRCUIT
H
H TO OTHER
H R ECEIVE
R E C E IVE CHANNEL I CHANNELS

tv Fir;ure 3. Simplified schematic diagram of telegraph multiplex terminal oper­

Vl
ating into a half-duplex neutral loop.

(8) SA LANCED LOOP

from the neutral loop in that a battery the pulse shape. Adjustments can be
TO
potential is applied at the printer loca­ made in battery potentials to eliminate t-"·1� MULTIPLEX
tion as well as at the central office. The bias in the loop as required for chang­ �·1-<>< SENDING
printer battery, in conjunction with the ing conditions in the loop. �"' CtRCUIT
. <
�
battery potential applied to the marking ffiY :OA RD
--��
contact, applies a higher potential to Polar Loop t
the loop. The increased potential im­ The most effective transmission
proves the rise time of the marking method commonly employed is called M
REC�
�r--o- �
pulse which tends to increase the length polar operation. In this case equal cur­ --
rents of opposite polarity are used for � --11 ·
of the pulse. In addition, the increase
��-It·
�
in potential permits operation over the marking and spacing conditions. In
longer loops. addition to the two voltages, this meth­
When a spacing signal is received, od requires the use of a polar relay [
application of equal potentials to both in which the direction of current flow
( C ) TWO PATH POLAR LOOP
ends of the loop discharges the line in a winding causes the relay to oper­
more rapidly than simply opening the ate to either the marking or spacing Figure 4. Three types of basic telegraph loop circuits. (A) neutral, (B) balanced,
loop, resulting in an improvement of position. Since printers normally oper- and (C) two-path polar.

ate only from on and off signals, a relay
is usually required at the printer loca­
tion. An example of a polar loop is
shown in Figure 4(C). Where battery
potentials are the same, the loop char­
acteristics do not change between the
sending of a mark or space signal, and
if the relay is properly adjusted, the
mark and space signals are equal and
no bias is obtained.
However, because of the requirement
for two batteries, the method is nor­
mally only used in transmission from
the office to the subscriber, and either
neutral or effective polar transmission
is used in transmitting from the sub­
scriber to the office.
Break Feature
In a half-duplex loop it is sometimes
cuits. A method of doing this is through
a hub board. In this arrangement the
de sides of the multiplex channels are
connected together on a high impe­
dance basis. Thus, only a small amount
of current is required.
Battery potentials of ± 130 volts are
required in the hub equipment unit.
The hub is supplied with a + 130 volt
potential through the hub potentiom­
eter. The hub circuitry is such that in
the normal marking condition the hub
voltage is + 60 volts.
The changes in current that result
from one circuit sending a space signal
into the hub changes the hub potential
from + 60 volts for marking to -30
volts for spacing. When applied to the
sending portion of the remaining chan­
nels, these potentials effect simultane­
a multiplex system, great care must be
exercised in establishing the levels at
which the signals are applied. Multi­
plex telegraph signals have greater av­
erage power than voice signals. If the
power handling capability of the multi­
plex system amplifiers is exceeded, in­
termodulation products from the tele­
graph tones have far greater interfering
effect on other channels than do voice
signals.
hub units
M
FROM MUX
RECEIVING
CIRCUIT
For this reason, a standard signal
level is usually specified for voice fre­
quency telegraph signals transmitted
over multiplex voice channels. This
level is conservative, and is based on
the loading effect produced by the max­
imum number of telegraph channels
that can be handled by the voice chan­
nel. A common standard per-channel
level is - 21 dBm at the zero transmis­
sion level point. For most applications,
I hub :
I hub unit
I I
I I
I RH SH I

necessary for the operator at the receiv­ ous transmission of the desired signal
ing printer to interrupt the sending condition. Three telegraph circuits are
� TO MUX
H SL
H printer. This requirement led to the use interconnected in the simplified dia­ SENDING
H CIRCUIT
of an additional relay in the telegraph gram of a hub shown in Figure 5. Each
RL s M
loop, called the break relay, arranged circuit is connected to a multiplex chan­
FROM MUX
to accomplish this purpose. The receiv­ nel through a hub-equipment unit. RECEIVING
+ 130V -130V CIRCUIT
ing operator may interrupt by opening Hubs may be operated either half or
his loop. full duplex as with normal telegraph
When the receiving loop is opened loops. Like the normal telegraph loop, M S RL
FROM MUX r---->1
(effective spacing condition) signals it is sometimes necessary on half-duplex RECEIVING
CIRCUIT
received from the distant terminal are hubs for a receiving operator to break
SL TO MUX
applied to the local-terminal keying In.
SENDING
TO MUX
circuit, but are inverted. The combina­ Interruption is accomplished as in CIRCUIT
SENDING SL
tion of the retransmitted signals with the normal loop by a receiving operator CiRCUIT

the original signal causes a continuous sending a spacing signal into the hub.
The circuit is arranged so that the hub � 130V + 130V 7
spacing signal· condition at the sending
terminal. When this occurs, the sending potential drops to -60 volts when two +130v �nov

operator knows that the receiving op­ or more machines are sending spacing
HUB POTENTIO METER
erator wishes to interrupt. signals into the hub. This low potential + 130v ----'V
L.t VV-r-----+
causes all machines to go to spacing,
l
Hub Operation including the original sending machine,
In some t•legraph applications, it is and the sending operator then knows HUB LINK
FOR
HALF DUPLEX
occasionally desirable to connect a that someone wants to interrupt.
number of telegraph circuits together
in such a way that telegraph signals Channel Loading
originating in one circuit are trans­ When transmitting several telegraph Figure 5. Hub operation, showing three multiplex telegraph channels intercon­
mitted to all other interconnecting cir- tones over a voice frequency channel of nected on the d-e loop side.

-
 -
•

·"" .� -�

_J
� rithm of the number of channels ( 10 forms and have different types of trans­
I +4
_J w � log 10 = 10 dB). Adding a 12-dB mission media, they do have one very
o I I I I peak factor to this 10-dB level gives a important thing in common - the
��
-' :1' '\ ...... I•
I o: , \ t-..... Ir peak value 22 dB above a single chan­ standard voice frequency channel,
Figure 6. Theoretical ll. w ---:4•
<>:z i ..._ l# nel peak. The per-channel transmitting which has a useful bandwidth of about
maximum transmis­ r-t-- I I I I I
35 � -aj power is then obtained by subtracting 3kHz.
sion levels for various
'
numbers of telegraph w<ll
��- ' the 22-dB peak level from the maxi­ While this vast network of multi­
� � -12
\ 1"-- �
tones tran smitted mum permissible level ( -13 dBm plexed telephone channels was designed
w,_ l .... s_ ... ·�
minus 22 dB = -35 dBm). Similar primarily to handle speech signals, the
o v e r a m ulti p l e x ��-16
voice channel. ....�
... calculations may be made for different circuits can be used to transmit other
I- I .......
u� -20 - numbers of telegraph channels. Figure forms of information such as telegraph.
O:..J �"--t-t--
-
� � -24 6 shows how the telegraph tone levels The techniques of modulation and mul­
"' 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 must be reduced as the number of chan­ tiplexing provide a practical means of
0
NUMBER OF TELEGRAPH CHANNELS
nels increases. It is important to note converting the de telegraph signals to
that these calculations yield theoretical ac tones suitable for transmission over
maximum levels for telegraph tones telephone circuits.
this level is high enough to provide of the normal test tone, since both sig­ and pertain to the loading of a single Through the use of frequency divi­
good service over a voice frequency nals are sine waves. voice channel in a multiplex system. sion multiplexing, as many as 26 nar­
multiplex channel. As the number of telegraph channels row-band voice frequency telegraph
However, in applications where the increases, the peak power that the com­ Conclusion channels can be derived within a single
maximum telegraph channel capacity posite waveform may reach also in­ The transmission facilities provided 3 kHz telephone channel.
X
is not used, it may be desirable to in­ creases. Since there is a possibility that by telephone communications systems Such efficient use of a single tele­
�
H crease the level of each telegraph tone this value can become quite high for a constitute a vast network which is ca­ phone channel is a tremendous asset in
H
in order to improve the signal-to-noise large number of tones, a peak factor is pable of interconnecting locations al­ view of the present growth of machine
ratio. The increased level is a function used. This peak factor is based on the most anywhere in the world. Although communication to process business in­
!'.,) statistical probability that the peak pow­ these facilities are made up in many formation.
....,
of the number of telegraph tones to be
transmitted. er of a complex wave will almost never
In calculating the loading effect, peak add up in such a way as to exceed the
power must be used, since distortion sum of the rms value of the wave and
will occur if the peak power exceeds the peak factor. For a single tone, the
the load handling capacity of the multi­ peak factor is 3 dB. Peak factor in­ Reprinted w-ith permission of Lenkurt Electric
plex equipment. When telegraph sig­ creases as the number of channels is Co., Inc, San Carlos, California.
nals are applied to a single voice fre­ increased, reaching a maximum of 13
quency channel of a multiplex system, dB for approximately 20 channels.
the permissible peak power is normally As an example, assume that ten tele­
+ 3 dBm at the zero transmission level graph channels are to be applied to
point. This value is assumed in the fol­ voice frequency multiplex channel nor­
lowing discussion. mally adjusted to a -16 dBm test tone
For a single telegraph channel, the level.In this example, peak power
calculation of peak power is straight­ should not exceed -13 dBm. Each tel­
forward. A sine wave is normally as­ egraph channel transmitting level must
sumed. Peak voltage of a sine wave is be lower than -13 dBm by the sum
1.4 times the rms value of the wave, or of the combined power of the ten tones
3 dB greater in power than the rms ( rms power addition) and the peak
power value. When only one telegraph factor.
channel is involved, the level of the First, the combined tone level is cal­
telegraph tone may be equal to the level culated by taking ten times the loga-
E • LOADING*:

1. Limiting: )
'''

An important engineering consideration in the design of a multi-

plex system, particularly one to be used over great distances, is that of
limiting. Where a large number of channels are multinlexed, total average
signal power may be considerable. If the channels are used to t�ansmit speech
conversations, the ran� of power may be extremely large - - as much as 70 db.

In order to obtain the best signal-to-noise performance from both th�

multiplex system and the transmission medium, it is desirable to operate the
system at the highest signal level that can be handled by the enuipment without
excessive distortion. If the range of signal power is too great, because too
many loud talkers are using the system� simultane ously, for instance, the system
will overload during periods of oeak use, with the result that intermodulation
.�
distortion and noise will be excessive. If modulation levels are reduced to
prevent this, there will be many neriods when the signal lelrel will be far too
low, and background noise becomes predominant.

One way of overcoming this difficulty is to restrict the range of

signal levels apnlied to the system. This may be accomplished by some sort
of peak limiting or by automatic gain control at the transmitter. This permits
the transmitted signal level to be relatively constant regardless of the range
of input signal levels. Refer +,o ParagraPh 14, Section C, Chauter VI ( H.miters ) ,

2. Intermodulation Di stortion:

Intermodulation distortion occurs when traffic is so great as to

overload the amplifiers or exceed the design rating of the modulators and
associated circuit elements. Present day multiplex systems carry many voice­
)
frequency channels that are handled by common amplifiers, modulators, and
demodulators wh ich are not perfectly linear.

In the case of a single channel, modulation nroducts resulting from

nonlinearities are directly related to the nower and freauency of the siP,nal
applied to the channel and anpear as distortion of the si�mal. In multiplex
systems, however, the case is entirely different. lfost modulation products
appearing in an..v given channel are unrelated to the signal armlied to that
channel. At higher multiplex freo uencies, modulation Products from a� one
channel may be distributed over many other channel allocations. �us, instead
of distorting only the impressed signal, the entire multiplex system overload�,
resulting in background n oise and crosstalk that increase� as the system load
becomes greater. In some cases, crosstalk may even be intelUgible. In larger
systems, however, most distortion annears onJv a� random noise which reduces
the signal-to-noise ratio .

Distortion increases significantly wh en large signal voltage oeaks

drive sane element in the system beyond its region of Jinear operation.

* From ''Multiplexing" by �·1aurice E. Cookson and Ewell M. Thompson. Reproduced

by permission of Lenkurt Electric Co., Inc . , San Carlos, Californla.

>.)
XVIII-28
 In t he case of amplifie�s employinp ne�ative feedback, there is only a
slight increase in distortion and intermodulation nroducts as s5 (;l'nAl level

(
'
increases, until the amplifier "break" noint is reached.
this point is reached when grid current begins to
Jn vacuum tubes
flow or plate current
cut-off o ccurs, while in transistors this o ccurs When the saturation or
cut-off point is exceeded. Accordingly, distortton increases very raPidly
"V-rith sign al voltap:e after the break point is reached.

3. Speech Load ing :

Sp eech signals are more complicated than telegraPh tones arrl data
signals. Each sigm.l consists of a variety of frequencies and a great r an ge
of amplitudes.

, � In telephone multiplex systems, many factors influence the load

on the system. Some of the more import ant include speech habits of the
telephone user, hourly variations j_n system use, the psychological effect
on the speaker of the circuit qu�J.lity, ani the technical characteristics
of the subscriber's equipment and local telephone plant.

By using statistical methods of computin g load, it is Possible

to provide a multiplex systen that will not overload except during the
very busiest periods. Telephone company practice has been to design
communication systems �or a "break" point of 1 !)ercen t of the busiest
p eriod . Thus, for the busiest hour, overload may occur during 36 seconds
( 1 pe rc ent of 3,600 seconds . )
Since this total time is distributed through­
out the entire period as a number of brief moments of nossible audible
disturbance, the net effect on a indbridual conversation is neg1_i�i ble.
(
4. Telegraph and Data Loading:

The channel capacity and transmission levels fo r multiplex systems

a re stated in terms of voice circuits, referenced to the rms value of a
test tone (
usuAlly 1000 Hz).
Because of their narrow bandwidth, ho"rever,
up to about 26 ordinary telegraph or data signals can be anplied to a sj_ n �le
voice channel of a multinlex system. Since these multinle-tone signAls have
a greater average power than a voice signal, a loading factor must be con­
sidered.

In calculating the loadinp.; effe ct of a multi nl e-ton e s i.P:n.al , neak

power is used. As the number of tel egraph or data signals is increa�ed,
the potential peak power level that the com posite si�al may reach also
in creases , even though the rms level is held cons tant by loweri� the level
of the individual tones. To avoid the possibility of peak overloading, the
peak factor is used when calculating the maximum permissible level of ­ mul
titone signals anplied to a singl vai.ee channel. b
The absolute peak factor
is e xpres sed math a:natica l :cy- as: ·

Absolute Peak Facto r ( in db) = 3 + 10 log N

N - number of single tones

(
.xviii - 29
Thus, for a single tone, the �bsolute n eak factor is � db. Since the
absolute neak factor can become ouit.e hip.:h, it is not -nractical to build
hig h density mul iplex systems that
�
of �eak overload1ng. .
In pract1ce, .
1t
completely free from the possibility
a:r�
1s more common to exnress the neak
l·

factor as the statistical nrob abilit:v that the -nea.k nower of a. comnosite
signal will exceed the sum of the ms value of the siP,l"al and the peak
facto r a given percen tA.p.:e of the time, usu."lllv 1 ne rce nt of the busiest
ho ur .

. �

..)
XVIII - .30
 XIX. REFERENCE MATERIAL

( IlliM PAGE

A. Symbols used on SEAvffiS Trunk Diagrams XIX-2

B. DCA Designation Codes XIX-3

c. DCA 3 - Le t ter Geographical Designation Codes XIX-10

D. DCA User Terminal and Enroute Facility Codes XIX-13

E. ICS Numerical Site Designations XIX-19

, .. F. Comparison o f VFCT Channel F requencies XIX-20

G. Glossary of Communications Terms XIX-21

..

(
XIX ... 1
A. SYMBOLS USED ON SEAU'BS TRUNK DIAGRAl-�S:

'l
{\..-25 M� RADIO PATH:

PLM STATION THREE LETTER DESIGNATION \12 0 CH) TYPE, DISTANCE, CHANNEL CAPACITY
I PHU LAM I N;"::ME OF STATION
L-- LINE OF SIGHT
CHANNEL HARDW IRED THROUGH T-- TROPO SCATTER
VOICE CHANNEL TERMINATION R -- PASSIVE REFLECTIVE
THRU GROUP W/ GROUP FILTER 0-- DIFFRACTION
· THRU GROUP W/EQUIP FOR CHAN T ERM
GROUP MODEMS
..___. I UNUSED- PLANNED EXPANSION
SYSTEM TYPE CHANNELS

BASEBAND REPE ATER

o- I
�
I
NEC RS-1( 12 .

I JCG I FACIL ITY CODE

®-- AN/FCC-17 FAMILY 12

� SUPERGROUP FILTER
ffi-- AN/FCC-18, GE TCS 600 12

0- COLLINS MX -106 12

�� PILOT STOP FILTER

� FARINON 4

--- UNSPECIFIED TYPE

)
--------------- ----- -------- TRUNK PENDING ACTIVATION o- ANITCC-7 (ANTRC-24 )
(AN/GRC- 50)
12

-----------NON DCS TRUNK

¢-- AN/TCC-3 (ANGRC-10) 4

ANITCC-13, AN/FCC-15
CJ- (AN/TRC-29, AN/TRC-37) 45

26 MULTI PAIR CABLE TRUNK, 26 PR

a=J- AN/TCC-13, UQ (AN/TRC-29) 23

0 I
DROP OUT, 2 CHANNEL D- PHILCO PPM CMT-4(CLR-61 24 •

·--- GROUP MODEMS llTHRU 5)

� G E PPM AN/FRC-35 24
•

--TRUNK DESIGNATORS (GROUPS) [>- LENKURT 45 BX ( I 12

SUPER GROUP COMBINER IS8 2)

------TRUNK DESIGNATOR I SUPER GROUP)

)
..

XIX - 2
 B. DCA DESIGNATION LOD�:

( DCA Designation Codes are alpha-numeric codes assigned by DCA

to identify all DCS trWlks and circuits. The f ollowing information
is correct as of 1 Jan 1970 However, changes in these codes occur
quite often; consult an up-to-date copy of DCAC 310-65-1 for latest
changes.

l. TrWlk Designation Codes - a six position alpha-numeric code is

assigned to each trunk. In addition , each grou:) \vluch tra:rerses more
� than one t runk (i.e. it is through-grouped) will have a Trunk Designation
Code. VFCT's (Voice Frequency Carrier Telegraph or 11Tone Packs") will
have a Trunk Designation Code and also a CCSD, the CCSD identifying the
voice frequency circuit which the VFCT traverses.
t •

a. First PosJ.tion-identifies the DCA geographic region in which

the llfrom" end of the trunk is located, using th� following codes:

l. USA and Central aud South America

2. Canada and Greenland

3 Great Britain and Scan dina via

4 European Nainland

5 \vest Africa

( 6 Hiddle East and East Africa

7 Western Pacific

8 Eastern Pacific

9 Alaska

b. Second Position-identifies the DCA geographic r egion in

whJ.ch the tttott end of the trunk is located using tre sa.IIE code as the
first digit.

c. Third Position-this indicates the agency (s) providing the

trunk:

A - Trunks owned by NCS agencies not specifically listed

herein; e.g., Dept of State, DTS - NASA - GSA, etc.
B - Department of the Navy

C - Joint Army/Air Force

(,
XIX-3
D - L.omraercially leased Ly l'C"'A

!::; - Joint Na V.fj.l.ir Force <:l

F - Joint Arrny/�iavy

G - Joint NCS t\gencies mmed trunks e.g., between DoD/FAA,

DoD/lepartrnent of State, etc. This code used when the
trunk is being provided jointly between two :{LS opera­
ting agencies. ( DoD being an �l"CS operating agency )

H - lOJ:1lacrcially leased by :>JCS agencies, other than DoD,

not SlJecifically listed herein.

. �
I - t'l.llied Govenu�nt provided - to be ased for those
trun!:cs provided solely by allied governments, 0\med
or lec.�.sed.

J - DepartH"ent of the il.ir Force

K - Comrrercially leased by DoD agencies, other than those

specifically listed herein; e.g. DSt\., NSA Di\.S,\, !Jli•, etc.

L - FAA

H - Trtmks owned by DoD age11cies not s.�:;"ecifically listed.

N - Connnercially leas,.)d by l;epartnent of ::>ta tc

)
0 - Joint U.S. and Allied Govermnent provided- to be used
for those trunks which are provided by the u.s. and
any Allied Government

P - Commercially leased by GSA

Q - Corranercially leased by Diplona tic Teleco mmunica ti. ons

System

R - Corranercially leased by FAA

S - Commercial ly leased by NASA

T - Corranercially leased by FAA

U - Departnen t of Army

V - Commercially leased by Army

.)
XIX-4
 \v - CommerciaUy leased by Air Force

( X - Commercially leased by Air Force

Y - Commercially l eased by Army

Z - Comrrercially leased by 1�a vy

d. Fourth !'osition-identifies the type of t runk:

A - Single or multichanne1 HF radio other than single

side band including Continuous 1.va ve (mv) t ransmission

I3 - Sideband (Jll<"') single or multich.annel

I -

C - Unassigned

D - AUl'Ol'lN in - Plant Cable Node I

g - Am'Ob.N in - Plant Cable Hode V

F - i\;;r t)l:IN in llant 1�quipn�nt

G - Unassigned

H - :m.F/Vrf.F Line of Sight i\adio

I - :Jnc,ssigned
('
J - Unassigned

f\ - Landline Cable { including open uire )

1 - Landline Cable

H - Hicrowa.ve

N - Group frequency s�ctrum without channe l modems

0 - Unassigned

P - Landline Ca. ble

Q - Subnarine Cable

•
H - Landline CalUe

S - Satel lite Relay

(,
XIX-5
 T -Forward Propa,�ation Tropospheric Scatter (FPTS )

U - Supergroup frequency spectr1.un without group or 'l

channel modems

V - Voice Channel package preerapteable for Wideband

service

W - Unassigned

X - F
V CT System not provided via HF systems

Y - VFCT provi ded via HF or combination HF, wideband

Z - Composite System (nonsimiliar media)

. �

e. Fifth and Si.-.;:th Positions-alpha-numeric combination

assigned DCA to identify t he particular trunk.

Follmving is an example of a trunk designator code:

7 7 U T 47

GEOGRAPHIC Alt�\. GEOGJ:Jd'H lC Al®\. AG1�:�C.Y TYPE OF DW\ NUHhER

l'HOVIDING TRUNK
TWJNK

The numbers indicate that the trl.Ulk is. provided py the AI'!i!Y and is on a
tropospheric sca.tter system. Both ends of the trtmk are in the �\estern
Pacific Area and DCA has assigned number 47 to it.
)
'

2. Command Communications Service Designator ( C.CSD ) . - an eight

position alpha-numeric code assigned to each voice frequency circuit.

a. First Position-identifies the agency requiring the circuit:

A - Department of State

B - Department of tl�e Navy

C - National Comrnand Authority, (JCS) Command and Control

}) - Department of Defense-Defense Cormmmications Agency

E - Not Assigned

1.<' - NCS - Hinor Operating .tgencies

G - General Service .<idministration (GSA)

H - Diplomatic Telecommunic ation System

)
XIX-6
 I - Allied Governr;ent - .1/or circ:u ts required by allied
governments provided over sone llGS facilities
(
J - Departrnent of the Air Force

K - Not assigned

L - Federal Aviation Agency

H - National Aeronautics and Space Adrainistrc.ttion

N - Other DoD Agencies (not listed); e.g. DIA, H.:>A, DSa.,

J!ASA, l'DNS, etc.

0 - !lost country - for all circuits required. by any country

who is host to the United States

P - Other U.S. Departrrents, Agencies, L.ommissions or corrnercial

companies (Govt or non-Govt not listed); e.g., llepartnent
of Justice, requirments by comrmrcial coH1pa:1ies etc.

Q - Not assigned

1\ - Cmmuauder in Chief 1 s (CLiC) rnman.d

Co and Control Circuits

S - Not assigned

Treaty Organization; e.g. N.,To, or SEATO

( T

U - Departrnen t of the Army

V - Not assign� d

�; - Not assigned

X - Not assigned

Y - Not assigned

Z - Not assigned

b. Second and Third Positions-this identifies the DCS net>vork.

A partial listing follo\vS (complete listi n g is found in DCA 310-65-l).

• AG -
FP.rlera� Avia ti on AP"e.ncy_
BP - Naval S11ecial Administrative and Logistics Net\vork
BD -
Fleet Broadcast Access ��etwork
C/, - Air Force Air Defense Comnand Network
CC - I'ACAF Air lJefense •,etwork

(
XIX-7
C:F' - rACFLT Command and Control
O
DD - IJCA perations i�et>vork
DF - Navy Dire ction Finding Network ,,
Dl - Special Intell igence Communications Network
DH. - Army Security Agency
DS - Diploma tic Telecomr:mnica tlons ..:.ystern
E.A. ..- Air Force Security Service
FO - Fleet Operations Control Network
GU - US Coast Guard
JE: - SAC TeletJ1)Cl.rriter >iet
· \vork
JG - SAG Tel epho ne Nct\vork
JP - Pacific l..omnand Joint Network
KK - Army Conm:and and l...ontrol !·�etwork
KL - Keying Lines
KV - Army Aviation Ne twork
HC - US Harine C orps
}iV - US Hili tary Assistance :ietwork
NK - In.fornntion Disseminatlon
NS - Navy Security Group
00 - Order \lire
PC - AF Comr:and �{et
I'P - Army Continuity of Uperr,tions NetivOrk
PS - Cm;m�ercial Press Services
QA - }r<-\C Teletyre Communications Net\vOrk
QE: - \leather, TTY, Civil, FAA
QG - h'eather, TTY, LCS/HSAF
Ql - 1veather FAX ( Civil, US \leather Bureau )
QJ
QH
- \>leather FAX DCS/USAF
- HA.C Operational System Net\'IOrk
)
HF - FACi:..F' Comnand and Control 2{et\vork
HS - Arned Forces Hadlo and TV Service and ;)tars and
Stripes Network
SO - S pa re Channel
Sl' - Spare Patch/Interconnect
TF - Departnent of State
FE - Army, Air Force, Navy Temporary
TX - VFCT Trtu"lk
TZ - AFTAC Data Network
UA - Colllr.lon User Tele type Writer Service
UB - Common User Voice Se rvic e
UD - Secure Voice
UL - DCS Digital Data Network
UM - Special Purpose Network
UO - Air Force Air Ope rations Networ k
U\v - Inter-Departmental Dial Telephone Network "

\11: - Navy Wea ther Network

YA - Fleet Ship-Shore Access Network
ZM - Hilitary Air Traffic l-ontrol & Flight Facilities
Network

)
.,,,

XIX-8
 c. Fourth Position-indicates the type of service and speed
of th e circuit:
(
A Teletype service other than DCS switched networks

B AlJrOVON Access Line

C AUTOVON Interswithc TrWlk

D Data other than DCS switched networks

E: AUTODIN Access Line

" I<' SEVOCOM/AUTODIN lnterswitch Trunk

G SEV(X.AJH/J�UTOSEVCOH Access .L.ine

H AlJfOSEVC0}1 Interswitch Trunk

I V o ice Channel Package preemptable by \hdeband Service

J Facsimile other than DCS switched network

K C\'/

L D S SCS Access Line

( H DSSLS Interswi tch trunk both automatic and manual

switches

N AUfOSEVOCDN subscriber t o an Al.ITOVON switch

P Not assigned

Q AlJfODIN Interchange CircUl.ts between AUfODIN and other

switched networks except Al.ITOVON

R Alternate Voice l{ecord other than DCS switched networks

s Video other than DCS switched networks

�
T Telemetery other than DCS switched networks

u Telephoto other than DCS switched networks

"

v Voice other than DCS switched networks

w DC signaling other than DCS switched networks

(
XIX-9
 X VFCT

Y Audio signaling 'l

Z Not assigned

d. Fifth , Sixth, Seventh and Eight Positions:

These are assig ned b.r DCA t o identify the particular circuit. The
0 and I will not be used in the circuit numbers.

Following is an example of a CCSD:

J UA c K.t\.Z9

AGENCY W�QUiiUNG DCS TYPE OF SGH.VICE DCA lD.t�NT IF ICATlON

CIHCUIT NEI'WORK AriD CENTJ:<J\. m·�

The above CCSD indicates that this is an Air Force circuit

on the LCS Telet.J·pewriter net\vork. It is a 100 wpm circuit and is
identified by DAZ9.

The DCA identification code nonnally will t ell you nothing

about certain types of eire tu ts:

1--- CIUTICOH cirwit

)
p A- - Temporary circuit

6 - - - Audio path VFCT

�,,)
XIX-10
 c. 3-LEI'TER GEOGHAPHICAL DESIGNA'IHlN CODES:

( The geographical designation codes are formulated by DCA for the

purpose of ab breyiating the names of places where there are DCS terminals
or facilities.

ADA Ap Dangia CHI Chiang J:.iai, TH

AGU Aguinaldo, r I CHU Ca hau (Cau Hau )
AKE An Khe CPD Camp Drake, JA
ALI Aliamanu, HI CPH CP Holloway
ALX Alexandria, VA CPS CP Smith,HI
AHL Arlington, VA CPZ CP Zama, JA
A1U/ Andrews, }ill Ci\A. Cam I\anh AD
ASN Anderson, AFD, GU CKB Cam l{anh Bay
ATO An Thoi CHO Cheo 1\eo
HAD Ba Di cs�� CHDR 7th Fleet
BAQ Ba Queo C'TO Can Tho
BGK Bung Kan, TH DAN Di An
BKK Bangkok, TH DAU Dau, PI
BKN Bang Khen, TH DAV Da.'vis, CA
BLU Bac Lieu DBT Dong Ba Thin
BMI' Ban He Thuot DCH Due Hoa
BNH Bien Boa DGG Duong Dong
DNL llien Loi DGH Dong Ha
BOL Bao Loc DGH Dragon Ht
BPA Bang Pla, TH DGN Da Nang North
BPG Bang Ping, TH DGT Dong Tarn
BRA Daria DGI' Dong Phuoc
( BSA Base-A Phu Hu, TH DGW Da :iang \vest
BTY Binh Thuy DLT Dalat
CBP Cubi Point, PI DHG Don Huang, TH
CCI Cu Chi DHY Due Hy
CCK Ching Chua.n Kang, TW DNE Da Nang East
CHI Chitose, JA DNG Da Nang
CHL Chu Lai DDT Dong lJa T hin North
CliO Chachoensao, TH 1 DPO Due Pho
CLK CJ.ark, AD, PI ELT El Toro CA
CLN Cholon FUl' Finegayan, GU
CLH Cu Lao HE FHH FH Hill, l-'I
CtT Cheltenham HlJ F}iN Ft Honmount, NJ
FDl' Ft Detrick, HD HKD Hukdahan, TH
FTH Ft Deade, HD HTH Hy Tho
•
FTS Ft Shafter, HI MYH Honkey Ht
FUC Fuchu, JA NDE Nha Be
�DH Gia Dinh NHA Nha Trang
GIA Gia Nghia NP.H Ninh Ho a
GNH Green Hill, TH NIC Nichols, PI
GUA Agana, GU �N Nakhon l'hanom, TH
HAN Hoi An !\'TN Nha Trang North
NAZ Hanza, RK OAK Oakland, w�

(
X I X-11
HEL Helemano I'GN Pentagon, US
HI!\ Hickam, AFll, III PHD �'hu Bai
HNI Ho Nai PHC l'hu Ca. t )
"

H:-!1 Honolulu, HI :PHE l'hu Hiep

HN\1 Hoi An �vest HIT l'hu Tai
HQN Hon Quan 1' KN l'leiku Nort h
HTH Hon Tre Island l)KO Phu Khieo, TH
HUE Hue 1' KU l'leiku
CJH CP Jolm Hay, l'I PLH I'hu Lam
JUZ Juzon Ht, T'J l}LO r!m Loi
KAD Kadena, l\K PHU l'hu Hu, TH
KAU Kauai, HI fJNS Phanom Sarakham, TH
KCA Kanchanaburi, TH PNI' Phan Thiet
KHK Khon Kaen, l'H l' 1\G !'han Hang •

KKG 1\nanh IIugn I' HL Ir' Line

K!cr' 1\oke Ka thiem, TH PSL Phits anulok, TH
1\LT Klong Touey PSIJ Peshawar, PK
KNE Kaneohe, HI l'TH l'hu Thanh
KPT Kingsport, HI PTY l'a ttaya, Til
KRT Korat, TH P VN l' li.uoc Vinh
KSII Khe Sanh PYK l'hon Yang Kham, TH
h.'Tl-1 Kon TliDl QNC Qui Nhon Ca. pi tol
LBH Lang Dian Mt QNG quang Ngai
LBN Long Dinh QNH Qui Nhon
LKE Lai Khe Ql'R (}uang Tri
LHS Lam Son HDI' Hitidian Pt
LNN Long Thanh North QTA l�uang Tri AB
LNT
LOS
Loeng Nak Tha, TH
Los Angeles, CA
1\GA
HIT
Rach Gia
Santa : l<.i t a, I' I )
U)D Lop Buri, TH lHB Hobbins
U'G Lam rang,TH SAC Sacranento, CA
LTH Long Thanh SGE Song Be
LXN Long Xuyen SCH Schofield, Bks, HI
H.t\.N Hanila, PI SL'T Soc Trang
�IDH Harble Mt SDC Sadec
HCC McClellan A.F<B, CA SEO Seoul, KS
SGA Saigon Old AEB TJU Trai Mat .Ht
SGB Saigon New AFAl TSN Tan Son clhut
SGN Saigon TSl' Trang Sup
SGY Sangley Pt, PI TYA Tuy Hoa AD
SHP Sa ttahip, TH TYH Tuy Hoa
SKN sakon Nakhon, TH TYN Tao Yuan
SMG San .Higuel, PI UBN Ubon, TH
SOB Sobe1 UK UDN Udorn, TH
SHA Siracha, TH UPT U-Tapao, TH
STK Stockton, CA. VCM Vung Chua Mt
TAE Taegu, KS VLG Vinh Long
TAl Tainan, TW VNT Vien tiane, LA.
TAN Tuy Hoa N orth vrA Vung Tau AB

,)
XIX-12
 TBU Tobaru, RK vru V<mg Tau
TCH Tachikawa WAH t)l'ahiawa, HI
f TKL T akhl i, TH WAS Washingon DC, US
TKO Tokyo, JA WKE \.Yake Island, US
TRY Tam Ky WlUf Wctrin, TH
T�\H Tung l·lanhorek, TH \VlU' Wright l'at ltl<'D, OH
TMH Tay Ninh :X.."lL Xa Loc Ninh
TNW Tay Ninh \lest YOK Yokota AD, JA
TPI l'aipie, TW YUI\ Yokosuka, JA
ZUK Itazuki, JA

..

(
XIX-13
D. USJ<;H. U:iGHNAL AND l�H.OtiTE FACILITY GODES:

The terminal and facility codes are formula ted by DCA for the /il
purpose of abbreviating the type of DCS terminal or facility. rhese
codes are most frequently used in conjw1ction with the geographical
designation codes.

The following terminal and facility codes are a few of the more
common ones that a technical controller will encountero A more
complete l1st is given iu I;CAC 310-65-1.

CODE DESCRIPTION

hAV Army Aviation Terminal •

A CA Army C ommunications Center

ACF Fwd Air Control Post
ACG Anerican Consulate General
AGO American Consulate
ACP Air Lomponent C..ommand l'ost
AEH American Kmba ssy
AEH Aeronautical Station
AFB Air Force Base
AFC Air Force Commw1ications Center
AFD Air Force Communications Service
AFL Air Field
AFN Arned Forces Network
AGN Naval Advisory Group

)
ALO Air Liaison Center
A}.lA Air Hovement Information Section
AOD Army Overseas �witchboard
A_OC Air Force Overseas Helay Center
ASC Air Support Op Cen/Dasc or Asoc
ASF Advisor Special Forces
ATC Air Route Traffic Control Center
AVN Army of Vietnam
BBD Base Post Camp Station �'witchboard
BCA Communications Office
BCC Navy Communications Center
BCO Base Communications Center
BFC Navy Facilities Control
BOP Base Operations
BOR On-Line Relay Facility
CBC Construction Battalion Center
CCC O. d CoiiiD.un.ica tions Control Center
Collli'On
CCF CIUTICOMH Technical Control Facility
ceo CH.ITIC<l1M Operations
CCT CoJllLiwlicatJ.ons Center
CIN Combat Intell Center
CKA CommWlications Squadron

·,.,I
'

XIX-14
 LODE lJESCHil'T I ON

( coc Comwand/Combat Operations Center

COH CoiiiDtercial Switchboard
cov Conun Opns Van
CPA C onuua nd l' os t
CH.C Control Reporting Point ( Cmd & Control )
CHP Control Heporting Post
csu AlJI'Or:IN Automatic l{elay Ckt Sw Unit
CTC Commercial Cable/Hadio Carr Tech Cont l"ac
CTI1 Circuit Tie l'oint
CXR Cable Hadio Carrier Tech Cont Fac
cx.x Cable Hadio Carrier Tech Coat \10 DEHOD
CXL Cable Carrier Sys at Tech Control
HAC Defense Lonun1.mica tions Agency Ar�a
Operations Lenter
DAH Dept of Army
DCA Defense Coramunica tions Agency Operations
Center
DCO Division Lorrmmnications Uffice
DCR Defense Lonununic<.l. tions ,igency Hegional
Operations Center
DIS Dispatch
DOD Dept of .lJefense
Dl'A OCS AtJfODW Computer Terminal
DPC DCS AUTODIN General Purpose Tenniual
DPE DCS A trr ODIN �iagnetic !ape Terminal

( DHA
Dl(C
DCS AU!ODIN }lanual Helay
DCS AlJrODIN Auto:rratic l-\elay
DTC AlJrODIN Auto Helay Tech Control
nTE Dial Telephone Exchange
ENG Corps of �ngineers
ESO Electronic Supply Office
FAC Forward Air Controller
FAlX Facisimile Center
FCA Federal Lonununications Cournission
FCH Harine Facilities Control
FFH Field Forces Comnand Hq
FFO Flight Following Office
I<'OC Fighter Opns Lenter
FPA ft'orward Propagation Ionospheire Scatter Bldg
FRP Field Hepresentati ve ft'ar East
"

FSB FT.::> Switchboard

l<"'SF ITS Class 4 Terminal Switch
.. FSH r'TS C lass 3 Switching Facility
FSI r'TS Class 1 Switching Facility
FST 1•·rs Class 2 Switching Facility
F\/G Fleet Weather Control

(
XIX-15
CO])£ l'BSCH.HT ION

FWF 1r1eet \,'eather Facility ''

·.
.,
GBA Global Lomnunica tions Dldg
au Ground Controlled !tpproach
G'iJC Global :�ea ther Center
JCC Joint Conmmnica tions Center
Fl.it Joint ChlT lCO}J; helay Center
JG.S Joint General Staff
JOC Joint Operations Centers
LCC Conmmnications Long Lines Central Lontrol
}tAG hilitary il.ssistan ce Advisory Group
}iA!{ liARS (Army)
HAS Harine Corps ·�ir Sta tlon
llAW Harine I.ircraft \hng
NCB Harine Corps Uasc
HCC Army }1essage venter
HCD Air Force :t-:essage Center
HCE .'lavy .hessage Center
HC.l!, Hessage Center Facility
HCH Hovem:"!nt l�eport Control Lenter
HCO t:ain L.ontrol Center
l:Cl' USHC C}iiJ Post or Upns c�n
HCR Naster Lontrol center ::itation
HCS Nain Control Station (H.adl.o helay or ·,,'ire)
J.lDF Hain Distribution Frame
liFC }�ilitary Flight Serv
' ice l.enter (l-lFSC)
HFU lJnit
}11\A
}�issile Fire
Army liinor r\elay Station )
mm Air Force Hinor 1\elay St<'l tion
Hl\C Navy }linor Helay Station
l-llU' Hoven!E'nt Heport Center
HHS }licrowa ve l{epea ter Site
HSU AUTOI;IN Auto Helny Hsg S>v Unit
HXA ltobile H.ad1.o
NAF �aval Air facility
NAS Naval H.ir S t.a tion
NDA ?�a v-al Base
NCF Ni,l val Communication l!'acil ity
NCS �Ia val L.ormnunica tion Station
NCU Naval L.mmrruuication Unit
Nl<:J.. Naval Electronic Laboratory
NFA Na"iil Facility
NHQ Naval l..;ollmtunic<.tlons .:>ystems Hq
NIC .'iav-dl Inform1tion Center
•

NOD Naval Operating Dase

NRA Naval 1\adar
NRD Naval H.ad1.o 0ffice
NVN Vie tnar.1es � Naval l' e rminal

/,
XIX-16
 CODE DESC1tlf'T ION

(' NYA I<'leet Action Control

Opera tJ.ons Lenter
OCA
OCN Overseas GonnectJ.on
Ol'A Opera tlons Llldg
OPF upe1·atlons l.)ffice
0PV Operations Van
OSA Overseas .:>upply Agency (Arrey)
uss Overseas S\v ltc hb oa rd

.. l'OC GlNC l'acific Opera t.Lons Lenter

i'eripheral Site
PHF
PitS il.rmy Hanor P r u��.ry H.elay ..>ta ticm
rm air r'orce i'.ajor Primary l(elay .::>ta tion
nw Navy hajor Prina.ry i\elay .::>tatJ.on
PSB lress Switchbre.rd
I' YO 1' ubl ic lnforrra. tion Office
HAC :'laval l{iver Assault Center
1\t\.N Hadlo Vietnam
HAJ w��PCOH
lLS Ha dar .i ite
ht\.T 1\adar Air Traffic Lontrol Center
H.CC 1\esc ue Loordina tion L.enter
HCB Army 1{eceiver Station
hCO .t\emote Lornrnunications Outlet
i\CV A ir .force 1\eceiver Station
H.Ul l�avy H.edeiver .:>tatlon
HFA Reports Center
( m.T Rad.Lo Terminal (\;/0 Tech Control)
HHA i'Cld.Lo l{oom
HNA Operations i{adio 1�aval Air Station
RNZ ltoyal New Zealand Navy l'<essage Center
HOC Reconnaissance 0pera tions Center
lWK Korean Forces Comnund
1{l{C hemote ,. Control Ceater
IU{F 1\egional Helay Facility
RHS Hadio Helay .:>ta tion
I\SA l<.a dio S ite
HSE: ll.eceiver Site
lWN hepublic Of Vietnam
SAC Sl\.C Headquarters
SAl{ Sea - Air - Hescue Unit
SBA S..;.C Com;)osite bldg
•

SBK S;vitchbmrd, Korean

.. SBL
SBU
Signal Building
S>vitchbu:trd, Anny
SC..A AUI'OVDN Switc hin g Facilities
sec SAC Communica tJ.ons Center

(
XIX-17
C ODE DESClUPTlON
,,,
SCP SAC l.omnand Post '··,
sm· Signal De pot
SL'T SCAN Data Terminal
SIG Signal Corps
soc Squadron Upera t.tons Center
SPI Spintcom Healy /Terminal
SSA Signal Supply Agen cy
sso Special Security Vffice
STC Staff Commw1ications Office •

STE S atellite Control Center

STO Satellite Operations Center
�'TT SAC Tech Control
Siffl Switchbmrd
swc Switching Center other than AliTOVON
S\VF HATS Switchboard
SYT SYNC OM Terminal (Def Sat Connn Sys
Earth Terminal )
TAC Tactical Air Control Center
TUD Comrnand S\vitchboard
THS Tributary Stat�on
THX Air Force Tributary Station
TBZ Navy Tributary Station
TB2 Telephone S1vbd ( T act )
TB3 Telephone Swbd (Tact )
TCA Traffic Control Agency
TCC
T;CF
Transport Control Center
Air Force Technical Control :facility
;J ' .·)
TCG Army Facilities Control (STARCOM)
TCL Technical Control
TC:H Tech Control l<'ac Limited Capability
-

TCT Cornm Center/Term (' Tact)

TCU T raffic Control Unit
TC2 Corum Center /T erm ( Tact )
TGX Tech Control Fac without D�tOD Ca}ability
THA Cdr Tactical Air Cornnand (TAC)
TIC Teclmical Intelligence Cenger
TIP DeS/Tactical lnterface Point
TOC T actical Operations Cente r
THC Transport Movement Center
T�1T Transportable MW/Tropo/VHF fac · •
(\v/T ech Control)
TH.S Transmitter Site
T SH Telephone Toll Sw (Hanual) ..

TTC Transportation T raffic Coordinator

TTF Telecom Terminal ��acility
T UC Command Post /Op Cen (Tact)
TUN T ransportation Unit
TWH Control T owe r

, )
X I X-18
 CODE DESCJUPT ION

( TXL
T.XH
Army Transmitter Station
Air Force Transnitte r Station
TXO i'�avy Transmitter Station
urs Unattended Transceiver Site
VAF Vietnamese Air Force
WFC \vea ther Forecast Center
\-lOA \ving Lo:mmwu.cati ons Uff ice
woc ihng Operations Center

.. WRC
\'/SA
\leather H.elay Center
\1lea the l' Sta. tion
\V'SS Hing Comnand Post
YAA Sub scriber (NCNC) to AUfOVOI\
YAB Data (NCHC SSB) to AUl'OVON
YAC Voice (NCHC SSI3) to AUTOVON
Y.BD Combat Center Prirrary Data
YBG Combat Center PBX Access
YBJ Combat Center l.\eceiving Voice Alert (DC.)
YI3K Combat Center Conmander Conf.
ZAR Anerican H.ed Cross

(
XIX-19
E. I CS NUHI�RICt>L SITE J)£SlGNA'l'lONS

SIT8 NO.. SITE NAliE SITE NO Sl'l'E NA}IE

)
09 Ubonf\varin 51 Qui Nh on Cable Terminal
11 Vw1g Tau 6l(l6h'\J) Nha Trang (\let \lash Ar e a)
12 Pleiku 62 Quang Tri
13 Phu Bai 63 Hon Tre Island
14 Da Nang 64 Honkey hounta±n
15 Qui Nhon 65 _ Vung Ch ua Hountain
16(161:\r) Nha Trang{I3ack l'orch 66 Ne\v HALV (Gia Dinh)
Area) 67 Hong Cong Hountain
17 Phu Lam
18 Tan Son Nhut 69 Da Nang East
19 Bien Hoa
23 Pr'Line 71 Phu Cat
24 Cam H.a nh Bay 72 Ninh Hoa
25 Vung Tau Air Base 73 Do ng Ba Thin
26 Can Tho 74 Dong Tam
27 H� � Long llinh
28 Chu Lai 77 DiAn
29 Fhan Thiet 78 Cu Chi
30 HACV 1 79 ljhu Loi
33 Tuy !loa 81 Vin.h Long
34 Ne\v Americ<;.n L1nbassy 82 Sa lJec
35 Fhan 1\ang 83 Long -\uyen
36 Cam Hanh ilay Air Base
39 (luang Ngai 85 l\ach Gia
40 Soc Trang 86 Biuh Thy )
41 Da Nang C able Term. 87 Korat SllC
42 Cam Hanh L; able Term. 88 Tan Son Nhut S\.X..
44 Vung Tau Cable Teru1. 89 Bac Lieu
45 Ban l'Je Thuot 90 �a Hau
47 An Khe 92 i1ui Nhon lWK
50 Sattahip Cable Terminal

..

a
'""'.I

XIX-19-A
 4

r '� �-

Non-diversity Systems 425 595 765 935 1105 1275 1445 16)5 1785 1955 2125 2 295 2465 2635 2805 3230

A�LFCC-31-71-8 �Note ll 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

AN(FCC-192-252FGC-60 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

NRC-235 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
AN/i'CC-4T erm nAtt Sr::ND 8 4 7 3 6 2 5 1
�2W) 1
lUi:CV 5 6 2 7 3 8 4
ANTCC-4T erm "Att SE;{D -·g- 13 10 14 il 15 12 16 8 4 7 3 6 2 5 1
(4\4) HECV 5 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 12 16 11 15 lOi 14 9 13
A�(!TCC-20T erm ,1A,.srnn 1 2 3 4
HECV 1 2 3 4

Divers::['ty"! Ali _even nmnbered channels are inverted (Hark freg. belmv center fre9.)
AN/FGC-29,-61,-61A 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 1 3 5 7 9 ll 13 15

><
lNTiiJ\NAL HATTi� CAPAlliLIT IES TH-5 Genter freg 1275 Hz, shift "f 50Hz
� Note 1: The FCC-3 contains only channels 1 thru 8 plus an additional
'
1\) neut polar rec snd four (4) wideband channels which are not compatible with any
0 other system presently in use. The center frequencies of these
AN/FCC-3 60ma 30rra x additional channels are;
ZOna 9-1955 (+ 85Hz) 11-2805 (±: 85Hz)
AN/FCC-7 60ma 30rna x 10-2380 r± 85 Hz) 12-3220 (± 85 Hz)
20ma The first 8 ch<t1taels of 2 each FCC-31s wil l form a 16 channel
AN/FCC-8 60ma 30nla x system utilizing channel converters provided. The Fcc-8 contains
2QID 30nla only cho:i.;mels one thru eight. The FCC-7 contains channels one
AN/FCC-19 60ma 20ma thru eight and clannel convert 'rs which nay be used with an l',CC-8
AN/FCC-25 60ma 20ma to form a 16 chan11el system.
AN/I<�GC-29 60ma. X X
AN/FGC-60 60ma X X Note 2: All cha1mels shift :!:" 42.5 Hz unless otherwise indicated.
AN/FGC-61 60ma X X
20n�
AN/J<,GC-6lA 60ma X X
20nn
NilC-235 60rra X
AN/TCC-4 20nia X X
AN/TCC-20 20ma X X
TH-5 20ma X X
G. GLC5ARY OF CQOOJNICATIO:NS TERMS:

NOI'E: A move c an plete list given in DCAC 310-70-1 Vol IV, rnossary.
)
''

ACU (Autanatic Calling Unit): Unit canable or establishi� a circu:it con­

nection upon input o f a di�ital callin� from an attached nrocessor.

Alternate Routing: A secondary or backup circuit p:tth; used :if the normal
routing is not possible (circuit fa:i lures crt backlogs ) ..

Amplitude: The strength or magnitude or an electrical s ignal, usually

expressed as voltage or n ower. •

Amplitude Modulation: Variation of a carrier s� gnal ' s strengt� (volta�e

and/or cur re n t) , as a function of an i nformation signal.

Analo g Signal: A non-discrete or continuous signal, the variations of

which represent meaningful information.

Answerback: The response of a data set or termtnal to remote control

signals •

.ASR (Autanatic Send-Receive): A telegrap hic terminal : n c ornorattnp kev­

t

board, page printer, naner taoe reader and nunch, and a shunt box
capable of automatic control functions.

Asynchronous Transmission (Also called start/stop): Transmission in wMch )

each intelligent character or byte is in divi duA lly synchronized with
a start signal.

Attenuation: Reduction in th e strength, or power, of a transmitted simal,

th rou gh circuit losses.

Audio Frequency: A trequenC?JI: 'Within the range of human hearing ( annroxi­

mately 15 to 20,000 Hz).

Autodin (Automatic Digital Netwo:rk): The data-handlinp- portion of the

military communications sy-stem.

Automatic Switching: Directs the transfer of traffic from incoming to

outgoing circuits without manual interVention.

Backporch: Original long li n es tropospheric scatter s:vstem in Vietnam.

Back to Back: A direct connection from the vf drop of one c arr1er to

another, to enable a subscriber to check his equipment by r eceivin g
his own transmission,. Also knolm as a "Loop Backu.

)
XIX- 21
 Bandwidth: The difference in Hertz between high-and low�frequency c ut­
off points.
('
Baseband: The band of frequencies occ upied by transmitted and received
signals at the interface between the wire or radio transmission
and multi p�ex e�uipment.

�: Unit of modulation rate. One baud is one unit interval ner second;
it is the reciprocal of the duration in seconds of the uni� interval.

Baudot Code: 5-bit telegraphic signalling code, incorooratinc: two shifts

{ figures/letters) which provide 64 combinations: 52 data charac ters,
which are identical in each shift. i·lhen transmitted, 1-bi t start and
1.42 bit stop intervals are added, giving 7.42-bit effective character
length.

ill:.it Contracting of "Binary Dieft", the smallest unit of inf ormation, which
is dual-state (one or zero, on or off, mark o r soac e).

Bit Rate: Transmission speed, usually synonynous with "bits per second".

Broadband Circuit, Channel: High bandwidth channel, using microwave or

coaxial transmission facili ties.

Broadcast: Transmission to a number of receiving locations simultaneously.

�: A data character.

( Cable: One or more conductors, i nsulated within a nrotective c overing.

Calling Sequence: A unique series of digits which establishes a circuit

connecting to one station.

Carrier: A continuous frequency, capable of being modulated, or impressed

with a second (information-carrying) sip,nal.

Carrier System: A system of com bining more than nne carrier frequency for
simultaneous occupancy of a channel, and suhsequentl;v senarat�ne: the
component signals.

QQ2Q: See C ommand Communications Services Designator.

� CDF: See Combined Distribution Frame.

Central (Ex:change): Switching facilities to allow interconnFcting of dr­

c u its from various routes.

�: See Circuit Engineering Order.

(
XIX - 22
Channel: Electrical CircUit

Character: A di gi t, letter, or s pecial symbol (data); or uniaue function l

( control).
Circuit ( orChannel ) : A continuous nath for electrical transmissj on hetween
two or more term� nal points; may be a physical (w(ire ) link, a radi.o
link, or a combination.

Circuit Eng!neering Order: DCA authorization to activate, chR.nge, or

discontinue a circuit or trunk.

Circuit La:rout Record ( CLR l : The engineering record of an individual

circuit. Contains a detailed enRineering sketch of the circui.t
and narrative descriotive data.

-
CLR: ,,
See Circuit Lavout Record.

Circuit Switching: The process of establishing an elect:!'ical connection

between two channels to allow transmission.

Coaxial Cable: Two-conductor set, in which one conductor encircles and

shields the other; provides better signal-to-noise a�d bandwidth
characteristics than Parallel-wire or twisted oairs.

Code: A set of unique bit can.binations assigned to represent characters.

C_ombined Distribution Frame ( CDF ) : A distribution frame used to terminate

both lines entering and leaving a station and intre-station wiring.
)
'

See Sect G, Cha pter VII.

Command Communications Services Designator ( CCSD } : An eight digit alnha

numeric code used to identify DCS circuits.

Commo n Carrier: A company with a vested interest in providi� com­

munications services to the public.

Common Control: In switching, a system wherein signalling is accented

from the calling subscriber and the desired connection is sub­
sequently established in the switch.

Communication: The transfer of information between separate points.

Conditioning IgJuirment: Equipment necessary to match transmission levels,

im pedances, etc. of a circuit.

Conductor: A metallic signal path ( usually wire ) .

,,)
XIX- 23
 Cps: Cyc les per second ( obsolete ) . See Hert�.

( Cross-Talk: Interference between adjacent c ommunicatj_ons channel s .

Cut-Off: The point of degradation, due to attenuation and /or distortion at

which a s ignal becomes unusuable.

Cutover: Te:rm used to refer to c ircuit activations or realignments.

Cycle: O ne complete oscillation ( 360 nhase rotatton ) of a signal.

�ta: Information in the form of a code.

Db: ( D eci bel) A

logarithmic exoression of ratio. It is eoual to t,en
times the logarithm to the base ten of the ratio of two no1o�er levels.

dbm: Power level in decibels with reference to a oower of 1 milH"�toratt

dbrnO: Power in dbm ( referred to a ooint of zero relativity transmiss:i_on

level.)

DCA: Defense Communications Agency. A DOD agency which ma nages the long
distance col!lmunications of the US Amed Forces.

DCAC: Defense Conununic ations Agency Circular.

DCA-PAC: Defense Communications Agency Pacific, located in Hawaii. A

subordinate command of DCA, resoonsible for the enti_re Pacific area,
( includin g Southeast Asia.

DCA-8AM: D�fense Camnunications Agency-Southeast Asia Ma inl and. A.

su bor dinate command of DCA-PAC resnonsible for �outheast Asia __Mainland.
Located at Tan Son Nhut.

DCO: Dial Central Office

�: D efens e Communications System. Long distance communications system

operated by DCA.

DCS Reporting station: A DCS station that submits renorts to DCA in

accordance with DCAC 31 0-55-1.

"
DCS ReEOrted on station: A DCS station that submits renorts to a DCS
Reporting station to be submitted to DCA in accordance with DCAC
310-55-1.

DCS Station: A communications facility operated by a. U. s. }filitar::v De­

partment- through which or to which DCS circuits are connected.

DDD (Direct Distance Dialing): Dial-up connection, without operator

assistance, to a point outside the user's local servi ce area.

'
XIX- 24
Demodulation: The proe ess of recovering intelligence (data ) from a carrier
signal; the reverse of modulation.

Dial-up : Establishment of a line connection by diali� a sequence of digits.

)
'

Digital Signal: A discrete, or disconHnuous si�al; one whose various states

are discrete intervals apart.

Dis play: Visual representation of data.

Distortion: Non-linear variation of the different comnonents of a �i�al.

•

Diversity: Method of transmission and/or reception desi�ned to reduce

the effects of fading .
•

Duplex Circuit, Channel: Capable of simultaneous transmission in both

directions •

EE Bldg: Electrical Equi:rment Building consisting of 2 rooms, an RF roan

and a Technical Control room.

EOM (End of Message ) : A unique character, or sequence of characters,

always used to terminate � message.

Encoder: A device to alter the amount or fonnat of infonnation.

Exchange: Centralized circuit switching equi:rment.

Exchange Service: Interconnection, through switehinp:, of two or more

customer's commun ications equipment. )
EXtended Area Service: A n exchange service which covers more than the local
service area.

FAX: Facsimile, transmission of images by a process of scannin� and

- reconstruction.

FCC ( FederalCommun ications Commission } : u. S. A�ency resnonsible for

regulation of interstate communications services.

Fieldata: A standardized military data transmission code, 7-data plus 1-

p arity bits.

FIGS: "figures" shift, in a dual-case code. II

Four-Wire Circuit, Channel: Two-way circuit, with separate nairs for each
direction of transmdssion.

)
,

XIX - 25
 Foreign Exchange Service: Connection of a telephone to an exc"lanP:e not
normally serving the customer's location.

( Frequency: Rate of signal oscillation, in Hertz.

Freguenyy Modulation: Variation of a carrier sipnal's freauencv, as a

function of an information sig11al.

Frequency Domain: A way of represe nti ng electrical signals in wh i ch amnlitude

is indicated with r es pect to frequency.

"'
Full Duplex: A channel property whereby information cah be t r ansm it te d in
both directions independently and si�ultaneously.

�: A multichannel system subdivision. J\Tormally comnrised of 1 2 v oic e

channels (multiplexed) and occupyin,!! the frequency band 60-10� kHz.

Half-duplex Circuit, Channel: Capable of transmission in two directions,

but not both simultaneously.

Hard C ogr: A machine-printed document.

Header: The first part of a message, co nt aining all necessarv routing

information.

Heavy Tr�: Tropo facilities of 10kw or mo re, 30-120 ft narabolic an te nnas ,

and equipped to h andle 24 or mo re voice freauencv channels bv use o f
multiplex equipment.

( Hertz (Hz): One COlllplete positive an:i n e ga tive a.lternation of an a lt ern a ti n�

curre n t. One Hertz is one cycle ner second (cps)-the term He:rtz i.s
p referred. One kHz is 1000Hz, one mPz is 1,000,000 Hz, etc .

H ome Loop: Data path, allowing off-line use of termina.l c om:non ent s .

!CS : Integrated Colllilunications System. Rep laces the term IWCS

In-Line: Processing in order of receipt, without prior grourd.ng or sorti"'�P,

of transactions.

In-Plant System: A system whose parts, includinP" reMote-terminals, ,q_re all

situated in one building or localized ar ea.

.. Interface: The common boundary, or nhysical con n e cti on, between two nevices
or systems i n terconnecting.

.. �: Integrated Wideband Communications System. Wideband communicAtions

network serving Southeast Asia. R
e placed by the term ICS

Kilohertz: One thousand Hertz.

KSR (Keyboard Send-Receive) : Telegraphic terminal with keyboard an:i p age

print er.

(
XIX- 26
Light Tropo: Tropo facilities of less than 10kw and handlinp: 12-24 voice
channels.
'l
Link: A portion of a cormnunications circuit; a channel, or designed to
be connected in tandem with other channels or circuits ; a radio nath
between two point&.

I.ine Loop: Data path, in a terminal, connected to transmission facilitjes.

See Circuit Switching.

•

Local Distrib ution Sy_�: Portion of t,_e SF.A1''R� nrmridi_ ng subscriber

access to long lines s;rstems.

Local Loop. The circuit connectinl! a subscrj_ber to a cent.r�l exchanP.'e.

Long Line���: Portion of SEAvms that connect s desiP."nated nodal

points with fixed plant, high canacity, multichannel tronospheric
scatter, microwave or cable carrier systems.

Loo:e: A single message circuit from a switching center and/or individual

message distribution point to the termlnals of a.n end instrument.

Ma.ior Al�: A signal indicating serious trouble in a communicat:tons system.

Mark (As opposed to Space): Telegraphic term for one of two possible signals
on a circuit; normal, or closed-circuit, condition i s "marking".

Master Station: A termin al having selection control of all other terminals �)

on a m ultipoint circuit.

Medium: The physical entity through which electrical enerzy ts transmitted.

Medium Tropo: Tropo facilities of 10 kw and handlinp; 2L voice channels •

.M.�ahert.z: One million hertz.

Message: A sequence of words or �bol r which is complete in itself ;

typically consists of header, text and EOM .

Message Routing: The process of selecting the correct circuit path for a
message. •

Message Switching: The process of receiving, temporarily storing and

fo rwar ding a message, b,y a central location. ,.

Microwave: Super-high radio frequency; n�all;v, 1, 000 to 300,000 me ga­

hertz_.

Minor Ala rm: A signal indi cating a fault in a communications system which
has not degraded tra ffi c ha ndling canabil ity.

J
XIX. - Z7
 Jvio d/D an od , Hodem: Abbreviations fo r modulator/denodul.ator.

( Hodu;L9tion: A process for varying one or more ch�racteristics ( fr.e a uen c:v,
amplitude, nhase) of a carrier signal with an in form ation si P"nal.

Hultinle-Address (Hessar!! 2: A. message to be del iver ed to more than one

l o7ation .

Multiplexinp;: The process of sharing one facilit�r among seve rA l users bv

time and/or s pace division.

Hultipoint, Hultistation: A c i rcuit havinp multi nle st a t:i ons connect. Pd.

N� tworks : A system of c onnec t ed noint s � as, termin"!.ls cormPcterl 'l)v c oMmur>i­

cations channe ls "lnd !'lome form of exch"'lnP:e.

Nodal Point: A l ocation to which seyer.Al st<J.t:ions are connected l:Jv C0T'1i11ln;­
c ati on s channels.

Noise: An undesired sign al .

CDH: See On Pr ati on s D i r ectiv e Hes sl'u<:e.

Off-Line: Not cr.nnected to tre transmiss ion fPcilitv (line'.

On-ca_ll C�cuit: A cir cu i t activated onlv on reouest of the user.

( On-Line: Directly connected to a central nrocessor.

Cnerations Directive He_8_?_AJ!e (ODJ-'1): .

DCA. me ss a r"e directirw Rction or
re a ues ting additionaJ information involvinfl: one rAtional res�·on�i,re­
ness of the DCS.

Parallel T r ansl"1issi on: Simultaneous transr·iss-i on of tl;e ,_,its makinP" un

a character or byte, either over separate channels ar on different
carrier fr eq ue nci es on or:.e cr�annei.

Per f orator: .
A manually o per A.t ed or rlirected na ner t a ne pu nc h.

Ppase }1odulation : Control of the phase, or timin�S, of a carrier s:i �r>Al hv

an in f o rmati on signal.

Pre-emntion: Seizure of a ci rcui t to restore a hipher nrior:it�r c irc uit .

Priority Indicators: r.ro'-m of chA.rA.cters 'vhich indicAte the relA.tive urQ'PnC""
of a mess age.

Pulse Hodulation: T r ?..nsmis sion of inf ():rrr1 ati on by moduJ,tion of a nulsed,

or intermittent, carrier; nul se width, count, ph�se, and/or amnlH, ude
may be the v ar ied ch a r� ct eris tic .

(
XIX - 28
Relav Center: A message exchan9:e noint bet;.reen circuits.

Remote: A terminal located At som e distance from a ce nt ra l �wstem. )

Repeater: A device used to r ege n erat e signAls on a communications drcu:it.

Reper forator: A lin e- ooerat ed naner tane punch.

Reroute: To substitute a c )'l an nel or c'hannels when orirrinalchaT1:r1el or

channels fail.

Res toration: Re-establishment of conmul'"'icati�ns se�ic e.

Restor ation Prioritv: An alpha-numberical des�.�ation establis'f1:i_no- a

me:"Jns of determination of the order of drc11:it l"PRtorH.tion.

RO ( Receive Only): A tele pranhic terrrinalwith receivinP" c ircu:i ts and a

page printer .

ROTR ( Re ceive Only Tyning B.e oe r forator ): A telegranh terminalvdth a

receiving tape pun ch which also or ints characters d_irectl:
:r on the tane.

Rou t ing: A:ssignment of a messa P"e to the nroper circu.i t to reach an

addressee.

Routing Indicator: An addre s s j_n a m essap� e header, sho;..rinp: the destination

circuit or te:rmj_nal.

RT (Reperforating Transmi+,ter):
· '
Telep-ranhic terrclinal i '�"COrT'o:rat,j fiP' a naner )
read e r ( tr.<tnsJTiit).

SEATiffiS: Southeast Asia 1�Tideband S;rsteJTI.

Selection: Addressing te rmin a l and/or comnonents on a �elective C al}.:i t1p;

Ci-rC'uit .

Selective C alli ng: The abilit;r to ad d r ess one, or a se1ecterl P"roun, of

multiple terminals on a c i r cui t.

Semia.utomatic Switching: Transfer of trA_ffic from incom:tno- + o out ;•n:inp;

circ uits under operator contr ol (usu�n,, nush-hutton'.

Side Band: In a modulated carrier, t11ose fr e('m en c:v comn0nents Above And
below th e carrier frequency, which contain the i_rformat5 on being
transmitted.

Signal: Information in th e form of electr:i.cal newer.

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: Relative no,ver of sign Rl to the noj_se in a channel.

Simplex Circuit, Channel: One-way transmissio:r, not can.<tble of beiflg

reversed.

J
XIX- 29
 Single-Address(M�ssage): A message to be delivered to o nly one location.

( Single Sideband: Transmission tech nique in 't(hich the carrj_er and one
sidebam are sup:oressed; used to conserve Power, since one sideband
contains all the information which was impressed on the c arrier
originally.

Space (As opposed to Mark): Telegraphic term for one of two :oossible
signals on a circuit; transferred, or o:oen-circuit, condition i s
rtspacing11•

-
Space Division: In switching, a method whereby switching is a ccarn:olished
by the provision of separate physical paths.

Start-Sto_p: Asy nchronous transrrlssion.

Station: An installation where electrical communications are originated

and/or terminated.

Sub-Voice Circuit, Channel: A circuit with narrow bandwidth, u s ually

200 baud or less; may be a subdivision of a voice circuit.

_aupergrQl1£: A multiplex division, having normally 60 channels of a

wideband path (five, 12 channels GROUPS) and occuuyinp: the frequencv
band, 312-552 kHz.

S upervision: Information provided to control the Provision of service by

a switching systE!ll. This includes, for example the "off-hook" or
( demand-for-service signal.

Switch: A means of directing information from one channel to a nother,

as desired, under local or remote c6ntrol.

Switching Center: A location which terminates multi:ole circuits and is

capable of transferring traffic between them; may be automatic,
semi-automatic, or tom-tape.

§znchronous Transmission: Continuous bit-stream tra nsmission, with no

start-of -character identification.

Terminal: Any device capable of sending and/or receiving information over

a communication channel.
�

Terminal Facility: A communications facility where channels may be tested,

rerouted or terminated.

Text: The information Portion of a message.

Thr ough-Grouping: The intercon nection of a wideband GROTTP ( 12 cha nnels,

mux) from one radio trunk to another either bv use of filters or
switching.

(
XIX - 30
TiEI..":.�t_ne: A leased channel, us ua lly v oice - s:rad e .

Tllg_f2. Divisi<?...!l...:�':!i-t��:ll1[: �witching accomplished throu.P:h the multinlexing

of several channels onto a time-shared path wit,h time associ.;-..tion
')
of the ch::1nnels to be con11ected.

Tim_�-12�:r:1!;1_in: A way of re nre sent inp; electrical si.g;n<�ls in 1·rhich amnlitude

is ind ic ated with r esne ct t o tiJT>e .

TQ...:t:l�J2.!lck : See Voice F:renuency Carrier Te le granh.

•

Tor11-TC!2,.�..,;S1dtching: lfanual transfer of nu nch ed tane from incominp: circuit.s

to outgoinP: circ u i ts .

Tm!sh-T_�: Circuit c on n ect ion techniaue utilizinr- :-:!. se+, nf f re o ue n ci es,

insteRd of PUlses, to r epresent d irdts; rmshhuttons A."�"e used fo...
input, instead of a dial mech-1.n-i_sm.

Tr�_ffic: DP..t a or messages in a c ommunications s:rstem.

T:t:_ansceiver: A terminal capable of both t:r;msrnitting <md receiving t raffj_c.

T;ransnission: The electrical trA.nsfer of information betvreen bro noints.

TrunJs: A single or mult i-c hannel comnuri

. cations medium betvreen tv;o
tenninal facilities.

Trunk DesiR:n a t o:r: : Six nosition a lpha numeric code inde nt H yin P' a trunk.
)
TTY: Abbreviation for teletype, often used to f'Pr>n te1eP::ranhic.

Turnaround Time: The time necessarv to reverse the dir e ct. :i on of a half­
duplex circuit, data set and �r teminal.
/
1'\-vo -Vvi re C ir cuit_, C h a n nel : Single nair tra nsmis sion nath, cam.ble of
operation in one direction at a time ; may be simnlex o r half-dunlex.

TifJX (TeletyPewriter F..xc hange Service): AT&T' s sidtched net;�ro:r-k for inter­
con necting teletypewriter subscribers, in U. 8. and Canada.

UHf (Ultra-High Frequency): A radio signal in the range of 300 - 3,noo

megahertz. .)

VFCT: See Voice Freauency Carrier Telegraph

Video: An electrical signal canable of renrese ntinp: television or a.

c hannel capable of t ransmitting television (nominally about five
megahertz of bandv:idth).
Vo �c� Circuit, Channel: A circuit with sufficient bandwidth to nermit
transmission of i ntelligible sneech as an analog signal.

•.;J
XIX • 31
 Voic_e.:..]'re...!:�ll9.Y Carrier TeJ�yranh (VIFC'tl: lt numher of telet.vne si t-nAls
th<'1t are converted to one comnosite tone in the voj ce fren11encv rA.:n,:re.

( Fha Tranp- ancl Clark AFB, Philipnines •

'

(
XIX - 32
•
 XX �

( A

ADMSC PROPOSED CIRCUITS, DIAG�J XIV-5

ADMSC-AUTOMATIC DIGITAL MESSAGE SWITCHING CENTERS XIV-2
ALARM OONDITIONS VII-97
ALARM RECEIVING SITES VII-96
ALARMS, EQUIPMENT OONFI(iURATION VII-97
• ALARMS, MAJOR VII-93
ALARMS, MINOR VII-94
ALAffiAS, PATH VII-94
ALARMS, TYPE V-4
•

AMPLIFIER VI-2
AMPLIFIER, ICS VII-59
AMPLIFIERS, PARMI!ETRIC VI-7, XVI-1
AMPLITUDE �IDDULATION XVIII-23
/
AN FCC-17 I-2,VII-32,33,34,35
AN/FCC-17 DIAGRAM VII-38
AN/FCC-17 FREQUENCY ALLOCATIONS AND MODULATION PLAN VII-37
AN/FCC-17, MULTIPLEXER SET, DIAGRAM VII-36,40,41
AN/FCG-17, SPECIAL OONFIGURA TIONS, DIAGRAM VII-39
AN/FCC-18 VII-43,44
AN/FCC-18, VF MULTIPLEXER SET, DIAGRAM VII-45,46
AN/FCC-19 VII-51,X-1
AN/FCG-19 SEND & RECEIVE, DIAGRAM VII-57
AN/FCC-19 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT, DIAGRAM
( AN/FCC-19, DIAGRM1
VII-56
VII-55
AN/FOC-25 VII-51, X-1
AN/FCC-60 VII-52,53,54
AN/FRC-109 VII-21,22
AN/FRG-109, DIAGRAM VII-21,23
AN/F RC-109, DIVERSITY REPEATER, DIAGRAM VII-24
AN/FTG-31 XIII-2
AN/ GRG-24 VIII-3
AN/GRC-50 I-?,VIII-2,1-2,3,4,
V-11-25,26,27
/
AN MRC-85, DIAGRAM VII-28
AN/MRG-98 VII-29
AN/MRC-98, DIAGRAM VII-30
� AN/MSG-44 I-6, XVI-1
AN/MSG-46 XVI-1, 1- 6
AN/MSQ-73 VIII-10

(,
XX - 1
AN/TCC-3 VIII-4
AN/TCC-4 IV -41, VIII-7 !i,
AN/TOC-7 VIII-4
AN/TCC-7 ��DULATION, DIAGRAM VIII-28
AN/TCC-13 VIII-6
AN/TCG-20 VIII-7
AN/TRG-29 I-2,5,7, VIII-3
AN/TRC-66 VIII-13
AN/TRC-66A VIII-13
AN/TRG-90 VIII-13
AN/TRC-90, LEFT \'!ALL DIAGRAM VIII-33
AN/TRC-90 MODULATION, DIAGR�� VIII-35
A N/TRC-90, RIGHT WALL DIAGRAM VIII-34
AN/TRG-90A VIII-15 •

AN/TRC-90B VIII-16
AN/TRC-97 VIII-17
AN/TRC-97A VIII-17
AN/TRC-129 VIII-20
AN/TRC-132 VIII-21
ANTENNA, LINE OF SIGH IV-8
ANTENNA DIPLEXER, DIAGRAM IV-17
ANTENNA GAIN IV-4
ANTENNA, F EED IV-8
ANTENNA, PARABOLIC IV-8
ANTENNA, PARABOLIC, DIAGRAM IV-22,23,24
ANTENNA, TROPO IV-8
ANTENNA, TROPO SCATTER, DIAGRAM IV'-21
ARMY OOMMUNICATIONS OPERATION CENTER II-3
· ·.)
.,

ARTIFICIAL LINE VI-2

ATTENUATION VII-60
ATIENUA'IOR VI-2
ATTENUAIDR Sa-I9AATIC VII-64
ATTENUA10RS, DIAGRAM VI-10
AUDIO CIRCUIT TROUBLE ISOLATION V-8
AUDIO PATCH PANEL VII-70
AUTO DIN XIV-2
AUTODIN OVERSEAS PACIFIC, DIAGRAM XIV-4
AUTODIN SWITCHIOO CE!·ITER V-1
AUTODIN VIETNAM, DIAGRAM XIV-3
AUTOMATIC PERFORMANCE AND QUALITY MONI1DRING VII-94
AUTOSEVOOOM XIII-2
AU10VON XIV-2
AUTOVON SWITCHING CE!:TER V-1

'

'
al

XX - 2
 B

(' BAa< PORCH I-2,3

BALANCING NET1'JORK VI-2
BANDWIDTH, MULTIPLEX TELffiRAPH XVIII-24
BASEBAND SIGNAL IV-26
BRIDGE, SOLDER DROP VI-3
BRIDGE, SOLDER, DIAGRAM VI-13
BRIDGE, 4-WAY 4-WIRE VI-3
BRIDGE, 4-WAY 4-WIRE, DIAGRMA VI-13
.. BRIGADE OPERATIONS DIRECT ORATE II-3
BUIL'X�IN PATCHING JACKS V-1

CABLE TESTBOARD V-4

CHANNEL LAYOUT, TYPICAL D.C. IV-42
CINCPAC I-1
CIRCUIT OONTR OL FACILITIES, TACTICAL VII-1
CIRCliiT JACKS, LA'xOUT VII-2
CIRCUIT LAYOUT REOORD-CLR XII-l
CIRCUIT PATCH BAY VII-70
CIRCUIT PATCH BAY, DIAGRAM vii-79,80,81
CIRCUIT REQUEST PROCEDURES III-1
CIRCUIT, OOM?v\ON BATTERY DIAGRAM XVIII-2
CIRCUIT, OOMMON BATTERY WI1H RELAYS DIAGRAM XVIII-3

( CIRCUIT, illMPOSITE
CIRCUIT, OJMPOSITE, DIAGRAM
XVIII•9
XVIII-9
CIROJIT, OONDITIONING VI-1
CIRCUIT, DIAL DIAGRAM XVIII-7
CIRCUIT, DATA XIV-1
CIRCUIT, LOCAL BATTERY DIAGRAM XVIII-2
CIRCUIT, MULTIPOINT VOICE VI-8
CIRCUIT, OPERATIONS DIRECT DIAL VI- 8
CIRCUIT, SIMPLEX XVIII-9
CIRCUIT, SIMPLEX, DIAGRAM XVIII-9
CIRCUIT, SIMPLIFIED TELEPHONE DIAGRAM XVIII-!
CIRCUIT, 2 WIRE REINGOOWN VI-8
OOMBINED DISTRIBUTION FRAME VII-88
COMBINERS VII-10
'
OOMBINERS AND BASEBAND AMPLIFIERS, OONNECTED, DIAGRAM VII-19
COMBINERS, DIAGRAM IV-13, 14
OOMBINERS, EQUAL GAIN IV-5
� OOMBINERS, OPTIMAL SWITCHING IV-5
OOMBINERS, VARIABLE GAIN IV-4

(
XX-3
COMMON BATTERY XVIII-2
COMMUNICATION MODES, GIAGRAM IV-10
C OMMUNICATIONS SYSTa:iS ENGINEERING AND MANAG8v1ENT
A GENCY
)
''''

II-3
C OMf'I!UNICATIONS SYSFM DIAGRAM IV-37
COMSAT I-6
CONDITIONING EQUIPMEN,.., ASSIGNMENT OF XII-2
CX)NDITIONING ECUIPMENT IV-41, VII-58
CONTINUOUS BAND MODULATION, DIAGRAM IV-29
CX)NTRAC10R RELATIONS II-5,6
CX)NTRACTORS II-4
Cl)NTROL AND OPERATING AGENCIES II-1
Cl)NTROL OF THE ICS II-4
CONVERTER<; VII-61 •

CX)ORDINATING S','\TION V-3

COORDINATING TECHNICAL CONTROL XII-2
CORPS TACTICAL 2DNES, DIAGRAM II-10
CUR RENT STATUS, DIAGRPJJ! I-19
CUT KEY X-2

DBM XVIII-21
DEMO XVIII-22
DC CIRCUIT, F ULL OOPLEX X-1
DC CIRCUIT, FULL-OOPLEX, DIAGRAM X-7,ll
DC CIRCUIT, HALF-DUPLEX X-1
DC CIRC' !IT, HALF-DlJPLEX, DIAGRAM
DC CIRCUIT, HALF-OOPLEX M' LTHOINT
X-7, 11
x-4
)
DC CIRCUIT, HALF-DUPLEX MULTIPOINT DIAGRAM x-15,16
DC CIRCUIT, HUB MULTIPOINT X-4
DC CIRCUIT, HUB MULTIPOINT DIAGRAM X-13,14
DC CIRCUIT, MULTIPLE DROP X-5
DC CIRCUIT, MULTIPLE DROP DIAGRMA X-17,18
DC CIRCUIT, MULTIPOINT X-2
DC CIROJIT, MULTIPOINT DIAGRAM X-7
DC JACKS FOR ONE CIRCUIT, DIAGRAM VII-87
DC PATCH BAY VII-71
DC PATCH BAY, DIAGRAM VII-85
DC PATCH PANEL, ICS X-2
DCA V-3
DCA VIETNAM L-4
DCA-SAM II-2
DCA-SAM DETACHMENTS II-4
DCA-SAM, DIAGRAM II-12 1t

DCA-SAM, CX)NTROL FROCEDURES XII-1

DCA-SAM, RECl) RDS XII-5
DCA-SAM, REPORTS XII-3

·�
'::�,

XX- 4
 DCAC 310-55-1 V-9
IXX)-DIAL CENIRAL OFFICE VI-8
( DECI'.)ELS XVIII-21
DELAY EQUALIZERS VI-4
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TELEOJHMUNICATIONS POOGRAM
OBJECTIVE I-1
DIAL PULSE TRAIN, DIAGR�A XVIII-7
DIAL-10-DIAL TRUNK SIGNALLING, DIACRM!. VI-17
DIFFERENT CDMM1J�UCATION S YSTEMS IN OPERATION,
DIAGRAM I-18
DIRECTIVES AND CDMMtPlif:'\TIONS & ELECTOONICS
OPERATING INSTRUCfiONS-CS:)l II-2
DISCRETE TONE MOD\ILATION, DIAGRAM IV-20
• DISTRIBUTION FRAME, COMBINED IV-49
DISTRIBUTION FRAME, DIAGRAM VII-50
DISTRFlUT ION FRAME, IMMEDIATE IV-49
DISTRIBUTION FRAME, MArN VII•49
DIVERSITY IV-3, VII-9
DIVERSITY DIAGRM� IV-15
DIVERSITY, FREQUENCY IV-4
DIVERSITY, POLAR IV-4
DIVERSITY, QUAD IV-4
DIVERSITY, SPACE IV-4
DRY LOOP XVIII-4
DUAL MODULAR OPERATION IV-6
DUPLEXER-DIPLEXER IV-6

( E

E&M LEAD, DIAGRAM XVIII-10

E&M LEAD EXTENTION VI-8
E&M LEAD EXTENTION UNIT, DIAGRAM VI-8
E&M LEAD SIGN.�LS, TYPES Oi:' XVII I-ll
S&t,l LEADS, EXTSNSION OF X'liii-13
E&M LEADS, EXTENSION OF, DIAGRAM XVIII-14
E&M LEADS, ICS RI�OO'NN CIRCUIT XVIII-13
E&M LEADS, STANDARD CO�!DITION XVIII-12
E&M SIGNAL LEAD, DIAGRAM VI-14
E&M SIGNAL LEAD EXTENSION UNITS VI-3
E&M SIGNALLING VII-60
E&M SIGNALLING, DIACRAM VI-16
" E&M SIGNALLING SYSTEM VI-6
ECHO SUPRESSORS VI-5
EE BUILDING VII-1
• EE B!!ILDING, DIAGRAM VII-2
EQUIPMENT SEQUENCE, DIAGRAM IV-46
EXCITER IV-6

{
XX - 5
F

FAILURE ALAR1l
J SYSTEM, OVER-ALL BLOCK DIACRIM
FAULT INDICATIONS
VII-42
VII-98
l
FIXED-PLANT IV-45
FREQUSNCY DIVERS! fY LINE OF SFl!T SYSTEJ,� DIAGRAM IV-20
FRQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING IV-6,25
FREC:llENCY DIVISION r.r 'LTIPLEX, DIAGRAM IV-36
FREQUENCY MOD'.'LATION XVIII-23
FREQUENCY-SHIFT CARRIER, DIAGRAM IV-43
FREC1:ENCY-SHIFT KEYING IV-41
FREC;''ENCY-SHIFT MOULA TION IV-41

G
•

GRO�'\lDS, PROBLH•lS EI·�(})"�JTERED IX-7

GROUP IV-25
::-:;RO''P, BASIC DV[RAM IV-30
c;ROUP, FREQUENCY SPECTRUM, DL\GRAM IV-32
G ROUP PATCH 3AY, DIAGRAM VII-72,73
GROUP PATCH PANEL VII-70
GROUP, SPPER IV-25

H -500 OONCEPT V-5, VI-1

l-IARD-'}l! RE IV-45
HOOKSWIC'r-l XVIII-2
HTJ:j OP ER/\ TION XVIII-26
)
HYBRID, DIAGRAM VI-1 2
HYBRID, 4-''IIRE TERMINATING SET VI-2

res, AREA I I-4

ICS, BACK·?ROUi1D OF I-1
ICS, CIRCT!ITS SCHEDULING XII-2
res CONTROL PROCEDI !f-(ES XII-1
ICS PHASE I I-1,4
ICS PHASE I, 1)!/\CR:\H I-ll
ICS PHASE II I-1,5
ICS PHASE II, DIAGRi\i.l 1-12
i
ICS PHASE III I-1,5
ICS PHASE III, DIAGRAi1 I-13
ICS SYSTEM SYi,lCHRONI ZATION VII-48 '

ICS SYSTEM SYNCHRONIZATION, DIAGRAM VII-49

ICS VFCT SYST8,1, DIAGRAM L-11
ICS, 439L CABLE HlTERCXltt1ECT XV-1
ICS, 439L CABLE Ii:TE:{(X):�;·:ECT, DIAGR.\n L-10
IDCSP-INITIAL JEFEI,iSE O'JV�''!;,1ICATl:JilS SATSLLITE
P ROGRP1I'; XVI-1
IDLE LI�·ll:: TE'1i<I':ATION IX-13

CJ
XX - 6
 IDLE LIIE TERMHr·\TIC1J, S'VITCHBOARD PROVIDES IX-14
ILT KITS IX-14

(
'

'
I:HSRFACE G'HA RACT ELiiSTI CS AN/T�C-00-90A-GOB-l29-l32 1/III-22
INTERFACE P 20 BLEi'\S IX-l
IiHERFACE, FIXEu PLANT & T:\CTir::.\L V FCT IX-10
INTERFACE, FIX'::u PLANT-AtVTCC-4, DIAGFU\1'.1 IX-12
I N T ERFACE,
TO AN/TCC-13 IX-17
INTERFACE, SIGN ALL HJG FR:::QU := :cr ES IV-8, IX-9
INTERFACE, SIGNALLING FREQUENCY :)IJ\GR/\1\1 IV-19
PJTERFACE, Sir:;:JALUIJG L2'ta3 IX-2
I'TTSRFACE, S IGNA LLING P?.00LEI'1 I iC-19
ItrfERF.'�"'::::, r;:{.'VJSPORTA'�LE SC;PIP1'ciH IX-2
INTERFACING VI-1
•
I NT ERMEDI ATE RI Nr ::R · XVIII-8
INTEffiAODULATION DISTORTION XVIII-28
ISOLATION REL AY ASSa.DLY VII-62
ISOLATION RELAYS VI-3
ISOLATION RELAY DIAGR.�M VI-15, X-10
ISOL\TION RELAYS, USES X-3

JACKS, MONITOR X-2

JACKS, RECEIVE X-2
JACKS, RECEIVE DIAGRAM X-8
JACKS, SEND X-2
JACKS, SEND DIAGRAM X-8

( L

LEASED LINE XVIII-6

LEVEL PO I NT XVIII-22
LEVELS, STANJARD V-5
LIFTING JACKS VII- 6 3
LIMITERS VI-5, VII - 62
LIMITING XVIII-28
LINE-OF-SIGHT IV-1
LOADING XVIII-28
LOA DI NG , SPE'=CH XVIII-29
LOADH'�, TELEGR.'\PH A:JD DATA XVIII-29
LOCAL BATTERY XVI II-2

l
LO �=�A. It I T-i�11 S XVIII-21
LOOP, BALANCE XVIII-24
LOOP, NEUTRAL '{VI II-24
.. LOOP, PO LARS XVIII-25
LOOP, TELEGRAPH XVIII-24
LRC-3 VII-31
LRC-3 SYSTEM r-.:;,5
LP.C-3 SYSTEM 10 T HAILAND, DIAGRAM I-9

\
XX - 7
M

MACV J-6 II-2

"
)
MAG XVIII-1
MAG SET XVIII-1
MAJOR HEADQTT/\RTERS, DIAGRAM II-7
MAJOR ORGAN! ZATIO!,JS II-1,2,3
MIC RO WAVE RADIO TERMINAL, DIAGRAM LV-19
MOD1 !LA TION PLAN, 132 C'riANNEL SYST811, DIAGR,\M IV-35
MULTIPOINT VOICE CIRCUIT, DIAGRAM VI-18

NARC, NJN -AUID�AATIC RELAY CENT'::R S XIV-1

•.
NET1JORK CDO ::;-opJATION STATION-��E(X)S XIII-3

OFF HOOK XVIII-3

O N CALL PA TECHES V-2
ON HOOK XVIII-3
OPER ATING AGE NCIES I -3
ORDER WIRE, AREA EXPRESS DIAGRAM VII-92
ORDER�'JIRE, CIRC UIT RESTORATION VII-89
O R D C:R WI RE, EXPRESS DIGITAL VII-90
ORDER�NirtE, EXPRESS VOICE V-4, VII-89
O R DERWFI.E, LOCAL VII-88
ORDERWIRE, LOCA L VOICE PARTY LINE V-4 )
ORDY:RWIRE, PARTY LINE DATA V-4
OR DERWIRE , SYSTE11S VII-88
ORDE R'NIR E, T ECH OONT RO L, ECPRESS OOUTING DIAGR.AN VII-91
OS CILLATOR IV-26

PAGE CXlMM1INICATIONS ENGINEERING INC I- 1 , 3

PATCH BAY V-2
PATCH BAY, CIRCUIT V-4,5
PATCH BAY, EQI-LEVEL V-4
PA TCH BAY, GR01JP V-4
PATCH BAY, PRIMARY V-5
1
P ATCH BAY, VOICE FREQT_TENCY V-4,5
PATCH PANELS IV-45
PATCH PA�\lEL SEQUENCE, DIAGRAM IV-48 "

PA TCHING AND TESTING ARRA'.JGEMENTS V-4

POA-PULSE ())DE MODTILATION, TI!B.JRY VIII-24
POvl, DIAGRAM VII I-36
POA EQPIP!.(ENT VIII-24
PERFOR!-AANCE MONITORS VII-100

: i;)
XX- 8
 PHYSICAL AREA V-1
PILOTS, GROUP IV-26
PILOTS, SYNCHRONIZATION IV-26
( PILOTS, SYSTEM IV-26
POWER SYSTEMS VII-102
POWER SYSTEMS SPLIT-BUS OPERATION VII-102
PRIMARY JACK WI RING SCHE�;LHIC VII-84
PRIMARY PATCH BAY VII-71
PRIMARY VF PATCH BAY, DIAGRA/.1 VII-83
PliiVATE LINE XVIII-6
FROCESSING OF S::AWDB CIRCUIT REQUESTS III-3
PROPA\A TION IV-2
PULSE-LINK REPEATER VI-4
PULSE·LI�'K REPEATER, DI/\GR;\,1,1 VI-15,19
, , PULSE REPEATER XVIII-8

QUALITY ASSURANCE, CHEO<LIST XVII-3,6

QUALITY ASSliRANCE, PROCEDURES XVII-1
QUALITY ASSURANCE, REFERENCES XVII-1

RADIO MULTIPLEX ROOM , DIAGRAM VII-4

RADIO, TACTICAL VIII-1
REFRACTION IV-2
REGENERATIVE REPEATERS VI-4
REGIONAL Q)MM GP, Q)NTROL PROCEilJRES XII•2
( REGIOt�AL OOMM GP, DIAGRAM II-9
REGIONAL OOMM GP, REPORTS XII-4
REGIONAL CX)MM GP, REOORDS XII-5
REGULAT ION 10-10 II-13, 14,15,16
REL-2600 VII-5
REL-2600, EXCITER VII-6, 14, 1!&
REL-2600, EXCITER, DIAGRAM VII-13,14
REL-2600 POWER AMPLIFIER VII-6, 7,8
REL-2600, QUAD DIVERSITY, DIAGR-\M VII-20
REL-2600 RECEIVER VII-9,17
REL-2600, RECEIVER DIAGlli�l VII-16
RESTORATION PRIORITY V-3
RESTORATION RESPONSIBILITIES V-7
RF PRESELECTO R IV-7
1
RF PRESELECTOR, DIAGRAM IV-18
RINGDOWN CONVERTER VI-2
RIGNOOWN TRUNKS XVIII-16
XVIII-!
•
RINGER
RINGING, GROUND XVIII-6
RIN GING, METALLIC XVIII-6

SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS I-6

SATELLITE 0)�\f';!INICATIONS, DIAG RAM L-17

(
XX - 9
S ATELLITE TERMINAL , B A QUOO XVI-2
SATELLITE TERMINAL, NHA TRANJ XVI-3
/M SC
/'l
SR- U:lK VIII-12
SB-611/MRC VIII-12
/
SB-611 MRC, DIAGRAM VIII-32
S B-67 5/M SC, DIA GR A/'!1 VITI-3"
SEA�:JABS I-4,7,8
S EOJRE VOIC E S YST EM XI I I- 2
SEO!RE VOICE SYSTe�, DIAGRAM XIII-4
SECURE VOICE , THEORY OF XIII-1
S F U NITS , BAa< TO lACK CD N FICtTRAT IOi'·J , DIAGR.!\JI.1 XVIII-13
SF UNIT, DIAGRAf·l VI-1 0 , VII-65
SIG NAL CIRCUIT , COMPOSITE, DIAGRAM XVIII-11
SIGNAL CIRCPI T, SIGLE-FREQUENCY, DIAGRArf XVIII-12
SIGNAL CI RCUIT, TYPES OF XVIII-11
SIGNAL OONVERTERS, DIAGR.A.M VI-11
SIGNALLING CIRCUIT, MliLTI-FR�QiiE·!CY XVIII-15
SIGNALLING CIRCUIT, MULTI-FREQUENCY, DIAGRAM �'VIII-15
SIGNALLING, AC XVIII-19
SI GNALLING, E&M XVIII-18
SIGNALLING, FULL-SELECTIVITY XVIII-5
SIGNALL ING, FULL-SELE--::TIVITY, DIAGRAf;J XVIII-5
SIGNALLING, FUNCTIONS OF XVIII-16
SIGNALLING, ICS VI-6
SIGNALLH.TG, LONG DISTA:�CE XVIII-8
SI GNALLI NG, LONG DISTANCE PRESENT X\/III-10
SI GNALLING, LOOP XVIII-4, 17
SI GNA LLING, LOOP, DIAGR.I\Jvl XVIII-17
SIGNALLING, O VER CARRIER CHANNELS XVIII-19
SI GNALLING, SEMI-SELECTIVE XVIII-5 ' )
SIGNALLING, S SA I- S ELE CTI \�, DIAGRA�M XVIII-5
SIGNALLING, SINGLE F Rl:r:;nEN CY UNIT VI-2
SIGNALLHJr', STANDARD FREQUENCY V-5
SI GNA LLING, TA CTICAL VIII-1
S H ". NAL LING, T EL EPHO NE XVIII-!
SIGNALLI:'lG, WET-DRY XVIII-�4
SIGNALLING, 20HZ XVIII-4
OOUTHEAST ASIA MAINLINE COl\'1MUNICATIONS I-1
SPARE CHANNEL V-3
STATUS REP ORT CIRCUIT V-4
STRATOOM-VIETNAM I-3
SUPER GROUP, FREQUB�CY SPECTRUM, DI AGRAM I\/-34
SUPERVISION, OOI� COLLECT XVIII-8
SUP ER VISI ON, CORD LAMP XVIII-7
SUPERVISORY SIGNALS XVIII-7
SWITCH, LAMP & JACK !'·!ODULE ASS9fi.BLY VII-86
SYNOON-SYNCHROOOUS OOMMUNIC \ T IO N S SATE L LITE XVI-1 f

TACTICAL EOJIP MENT VIII-1

TACTICAL SYSTEM I-8
TA-182 VIII-9
TA-182 MO DI FIED VIII-10, IX-2

J
XX- 10
 TALK BATTERY XVIII-1
TALK QUia< XIII-2

( TECHNICAL OONTROL FTHJCTIONAL FLOW DIAGRAM

TECHNICAL OO NT RO L ROO!J, DIAC;R.\n
V-6
VII-3
TECHNICAL CONTROL, TACTICAL VIII-1
TEL SET XVIII-1
TELEOY·J V-2
TELEGRAPH TESTBOARDS V-4
TELEPHONE MANAG-:r,�ENT AGElJCY II-3
TERVIN AL, CX)MPLETE DIAGRN·1 VII-52
a
TEST EC.:UIPMENT VII-101
/
TH-5 TG VIII-9
THRESHOLD EXTENSION, DIAC=RAM VII-18
THRU GROUP IV-27
·1
THRU GRO UP EQUIPMENT, DIAGRAM IV-39
THRU GROUP FILTER IV-27, VI-4
11-{RU GROUP FILTER, DIAG RN.l IV-38
T RAN�IT GROUPS IV-6
T RA NSPO RTABLES I-7
TROPO STAT ION CX)!I!FIGURATION, DIAGRA:,1 IV-16
TOOPO SYSTe,�S, TACTICAL VIII-2
T ROPOSPHERIC SCATTER IV-2,3,ll,12
TROPOSPHERIC SCATTER CI RCl.liT FI LTE R SYSTEM, DIAGRAM IV-17
TROUBLE SHOOTII'JG V-7

US AP.MY REGIONAL OOMMUNICATION GROUP II-1

(
v

VARISTOR, INSTALLATION OF, DIAGR.·l,M VII-69

VF C IRCUIT lOCATION, DIAC;RAM VII-74
VR JA a< LAYOUT VII-78
VF JACK bftODULE ASS8'<lBLY, D IAGRAM VII-76
VF JACK VHRING SO-I8'v!ATIC VII-76
VF PATCH BAY VII-70
VF PATCH BAY JACK ARRANC�E,:lE!Tf, 4-WIRE, DIAGR·!\;'.� VII-77
VF PATCH BAY, 4 WIRE VII-75
VFCT, ICS X-1
VFCT, ICS SATTERY, DIAGRr\M X-6
1
VFCT, TACTICAL VIII-1
VFCT, TACTICAL I iHE RFAC E, DIAGRAM X-10
., VF JACK ASSEMBLY, DIAGRAM IV-47
VF MlJX, TACTICAL VIII-1
VOICE FREQUENCY CARRI ER TELEf:RAPH-VFCT I-6,IV-41

VIE()) 302A IX-19

WECX) 758A XIII-2

(
XX- 11
WETWASH I-2

1 ST SIGNAL BRIGADE II-1

)
'

1ST SIGNAL BRIGADE, DIAGRAM II-8

1ST SIGNAL BRIGADE REG 10&10 II-5
2ND SIGNAL GROUP I-7, II-7
12TH SIGNAL GROUP II-2
21ST SIGNAL GROUP I-7, n l ..
1072 TER MINAL FACILITIES BAY I-7
29TH SIGNAL CROUP II-1
'
39TH SIGNAL BATT ALION I-3
106 TH SIGNAL GROUP I-7, II-2
362 SIGNAL OJMPANY I-2
1964TH OJMMlJNICATIONS GROUP II-2
1964TH OJMMUNIGATIONS GROUP, DIAGRAM E-ll
4 WAY, 4-�'IIRE BRIDGE VII-62
4 1NIRE SPBSCRI:S'=R, E&�!i, DIAGRAM VI-20
4 WIRE TERMINATING UNIT VII-62
4 WIRE TEffi•1 SET, DIAGRAM VII-66,67
20HZ RINGOO'NN SIGNALLING, DIAGRAM VI-16
96HZ, PILOT APPEAREN \CES, DIAGRAiv1 VII-50
439L GABLE r-4,5, X'v-1
439L CABLE, DIAGRAM I-10

,4)
XX- 12 PPC-Japan
...
-